Liberty
Chrysler Group LLC
O W N E R ’ S M A N U A L
2 0 1 1
2011 Liberty
11KK74-126-AB Second Edition Printed in U.S.A.
291680.ps 11JK72-126-AA Chrysler 1" gutter 05/14/2010 06:18:00
VEHICLES SOLD IN CANADA
With respect to any Vehicles Sold in Canada, the name
Chrysler Group LLC shall be deemed to be deleted and
the name Chrysler Canada Inc. used in substitution
therefore.
DRIVING AND ALCOHOL
Drunken driving is one of the most frequent causes of
accidents.
Your driving ability can be seriously impaired with blood
alcohol levels far below the legal minimum. If you are
drinking, don’t drive. Ride with a designated non-drinking
driver, call a cab, a friend, or use public transportation.
WARNING!
Driving after drinking can lead to an accident. Your
perceptions are less sharp, your reflexes are slower,
and your judgment is impaired when you have been
drinking. Never drink and then drive.
This manual illustrates and describes the operation of
features and equipment that are either standard or op-
tional on this vehicle. This manual may also include a
description of features and equipment that are no longer
available or were not ordered on this vehicle. Please
disregard any features and equipment described in this
manual that are not on this vehicle.
Chrysler Group LLC reserves the right to make changes
in design and specifications, and/or make additions to or
improvements to its products without imposing any
obligation upon itself to install them on products previ-
ously manufactured.
Copyright © 2010 Chrysler Group LLC
VEHICLES SOLD IN CANADA
With respect to any Vehicles Sold in Canada, the name
Chrysler Group LLC shall be deemed to be deleted and
the name Chrysler Canada Inc. used in substitution
therefore.
DRIVING AND ALCOHOL
Drunken driving is one of the most frequent causes of
accidents.
Your driving ability can be seriously impaired with blood
alcohol levels far below the legal minimum. If you are
drinking, don’t drive. Ride with a designated non-drinking
driver, call a cab, a friend, or use public transportation.
WARNING!
Driving after drinking can lead to an accident. Your
perceptions are less sharp, your reflexes are slower,
and your judgment is impaired when you have been
drinking. Never drink and then drive.
This manual illustrates and describes the operation of
features and equipment that are either standard or op-
tional on this vehicle. This manual may also include a
description of features and equipment that are no longer
available or were not ordered on this vehicle. Please
disregard any features and equipment described in this
manual that are not on this vehicle.
Chrysler Group LLC reserves the right to make changes
in design and specifications, and/or make additions to or
improvements to its products without imposing any
obligation upon itself to install them on products previ-
ously manufactured.
Copyright © 2010 Chrysler Group LLC
INSTALLATION OF RADIO TRANSMITTING
EQUIPMENT
Special design considerations are incorporated into this
vehicle’s electronic system to provide immunity to radio
frequency signals. Mobile two-way radios and telephone
equipment must be installed properly by trained person-
nel. The following must be observed during installation.
The positive power connection should be made directly
to the battery and fused as close to the battery as possible.
The negative power connection should be made to body
sheet metal adjacent to the negative battery connection.
This connection should not be fused.
Antennas for two-way radios should be mounted on the
roof or the rear area of the vehicle. Care should be used
in mounting antennas with magnet bases. Magnets may
affect the accuracy or operation of the compass on
vehicles so equipped.
The antenna cable should be as short as practical and
routed away from the vehicle wiring when possible. Use
only fully shielded coaxial cable.
Carefully match the antenna and cable to the radio to
ensure a low Standing Wave Ratio (SWR).
Mobile radio equipment with output power greater than
normal may require special precautions.
All installations should be checked for possible interfer-
ence between the communications equipment and the
vehicle’s electronic systems.
INSTALLATION OF RADIO TRANSMITTING
EQUIPMENT
Special design considerations are incorporated into this
vehicle’s electronic system to provide immunity to radio
frequency signals. Mobile two-way radios and telephone
equipment must be installed properly by trained person-
nel. The following must be observed during installation.
The positive power connection should be made directly
to the battery and fused as close to the battery as possible.
The negative power connection should be made to body
sheet metal adjacent to the negative battery connection.
This connection should not be fused.
Antennas for two-way radios should be mounted on the
roof or the rear area of the vehicle. Care should be used
in mounting antennas with magnet bases. Magnets may
affect the accuracy or operation of the compass on
vehicles so equipped.
The antenna cable should be as short as practical and
routed away from the vehicle wiring when possible. Use
only fully shielded coaxial cable.
Carefully match the antenna and cable to the radio to
ensure a low Standing Wave Ratio (SWR).
Mobile radio equipment with output power greater than
normal may require special precautions.
All installations should be checked for possible interfer-
ence between the communications equipment and the
vehicle’s electronic systems.
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SECTION PAGE
1
INTRODUCTION
............................................................3
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
..............................9
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
............................. 93
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
..................................215
5
STARTING AND OPERATING
................................................309
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
............................................. 421
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
..............................................441
8
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
.................................................491
9
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
........................................ 507
10
INDEX
...................................................................517
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
INTRODUCTION
Congratulations on selecting your new Chrysler Group
LLC vehicle. Be assured that it represents precision
workmanship, distinctive styling, and high quality - all
essentials that are traditional to our vehicles.
This Owner’s Manual has been prepared with the assis-
tance of service and engineering specialists to acquaint
you with the operation and maintenance of your vehicle.
It is supplemented by Warranty Information, and various
customer-oriented documents. Please take the time to
read these publications carefully. Following the instruc-
tions and recommendations in this manual will help
assure safe and enjoyable operation of your vehicle.
NOTE: After reviewing the owner information, it
should be stored in the vehicle for convenient referenc-
ing and remain with the vehicle when sold.
When it comes to service, remember that your authorized
dealer knows your vehicle best, has factory-trained tech-
nicians and genuine MOPAR威 parts, and cares about
your satisfaction.
ROLLOVER WARNING
Utility vehicles have a significantly higher rollover rate
than other types of vehicles. This vehicle has a higher
ground clearance and a higher center of gravity than
many passenger cars. It is capable of performing better in
a wide variety of off-road applications. Driven in an
unsafe manner, all vehicles can go out of control. Because
of the higher center of gravity, if this vehicle is out of
control it may roll over when some other vehicles may
not.
Do not attempt sharp turns, abrupt maneuvers, or other
unsafe driving actions that can cause loss of vehicle
4 INTRODUCTION
control. Failure to operate this vehicle safely may result
in a collision, rollover of the vehicle, and severe or fatal
injury. Drive carefully.
Failure to use the driver and passenger seat belts pro-
vided is a major cause of severe or fatal injury. In fact, the
U.S. government notes that the universal use of existing
seat belts could cut the highway death toll by 10,000 or
more each year and could reduce disabling injuries by
two million annually. In a rollover crash, an unbelted
person is significantly more likely to die than a person
wearing a seat belt. Always buckle up.
HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL
Consult the Table of Contents to determine which section
contains the information you desire.
Since the specification of your vehicle depends on the
items of equipment ordered, certain descriptions and
illustrations may differ from your vehicle’s equipment
The detailed index at the back of this Owner’s Manual
contains a complete listing of all subjects.
Consult the following table for a description of the
symbols that may be used on your vehicle or throughout
this Owner’s Manual:
Rollover Warning Label
1
INTRODUCTION 5
6 INTRODUCTION
WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS
This Owner’s Manual contains WARNINGS against op-
erating procedures that could result in a collision or
bodily injury. It also contains CAUTIONS against proce-
dures that could result in damage to your vehicle. If you
do not read this entire manual, you may miss important
information. Observe all Warnings and Cautions.
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER
The Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) is found on the
left front corner of the instrument panel. The VIN is
visible from outside of the vehicle through the wind-
shield. This number also is stamped into the right front
door sill (under the molding) and appears on the Auto-
mobile Information Disclosure Label affixed to a window
on your vehicle, the vehicle registration, and the title.
NOTE: It is illegal to remove or alter the VIN.
Vehicle Identification Number
1
INTRODUCTION 7
VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS/ALTERATIONS
WARNING!
Any modifications or alterations to this vehicle could
seriously affect its roadworthiness and safety and
may lead to a accident resulting in serious injury or
death.
8 INTRODUCTION
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
CONTENTS
䡵 A Word About Your Keys ................. 12
▫ Ignition Key Removal .................. 12
▫ Key-In-Ignition Reminder ............... 14
䡵 Sentry Key威 .......................... 14
▫ Replacement Keys ..................... 16
▫ Customer Key Programming ............. 16
▫ General Information ................... 17
䡵 Vehicle Security Alarm — If Equipped ........ 18
▫ Rearming Of The System ................ 18
▫ To Arm The System ................... 18
▫ To Disarm The System ................. 19
䡵 Illuminated Entry ...................... 20
䡵 Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) .............. 20
▫ To Unlock The Doors And Liftgate ......... 21
▫ To Lock The Doors And Liftgate .......... 22
▫ To Unlatch The Liftgate Flipper Glass ....... 24
▫ Remote Open Window Feature —
If Equipped ......................... 24
2
▫ Using The Panic Alarm ................. 24
▫ Programming Additional Transmitters ...... 25
▫ Battery Replacement ................... 25
▫ General Information ................... 26
䡵 Remote Starting System — If Equipped ....... 27
▫ How To Use Remote Start ............... 27
䡵 Door Locks ........................... 29
▫ Manual Door Locks ................... 29
▫ Power Door Locks .................... 30
▫ Child-Protection Door Lock System —
Rear Doors .......................... 33
䡵 Windows ............................ 35
▫ Power Windows ...................... 35
▫ Wind Buffeting ....................... 39
䡵 Liftgate ............................. 39
▫ Liftgate Flipper Glass .................. 40
䡵 Occupant Restraints ..................... 41
▫ Lap/Shoulder Belts .................... 44
▫ Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting Procedure .... 50
▫ Seat Belt Pretensioner .................. 50
▫ Seat Belt Lock Out .................... 51
▫ Seat Belts In Passenger Seating Positions ..... 51
▫ Automatic Locking Retractor Mode (ALR) —
If Equipped ......................... 51
▫ Supplemental Active Head Restraints (AHR) . . 52
▫ Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder System
(BeltAlert威) ......................... 56
10 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
▫ Energy Management Feature ............. 58
▫ Seat Belts And Pregnant Women .......... 58
▫ Seat Belt Extender ..................... 58
▫ Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) —
Air Bags ............................ 59
▫ Air Bag Deployment Sensors And Controls . . . 64
▫ Event Data Recorder (EDR) .............. 76
▫ Child Restraints ...................... 77
䡵 Engine Break-In Recommendations .......... 87
䡵 Safety Tips ........................... 87
▫ Transporting Passengers ................ 87
▫ Exhaust Gas ......................... 88
▫ Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The
Vehicle ............................. 89
▫ Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make
Outside The Vehicle ................... 91
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 11
A WORD ABOUT YOUR KEYS
You can insert the double-sided keys into the locks with
either side up.
The authorized dealer that sold you your new vehicle has
the key code numbers for your vehicle locks. These
numbers can be used to order duplicate keys from your
authorized dealer. Ask your authorized dealer for these
numbers and keep them in a safe place.
Ignition Key Removal
Automatic Transmission
Place the shift lever in PARK. Turn the key to the ACC
position and then push the key and cylinder inward
slightly and rotate the key to the LOCK position. Then
remove the key.
Vehicle Key
12 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE:
•
For vehicles not equipped with the Electronic Vehicle
Information Center (EVIC), features such as the power
window switches, radio, power sunroof or Sky Slider威
(if equipped), and power outlets will remain active for
45 seconds after the ignition switch is turned to the
LOCK position. Opening either front door will cancel
this feature.
•
For vehicles equipped with the EVIC, features such as
the power window switches, radio, power sunroof or
Sky Slider威 (if equipped), and power outlets will
remain active for up to 10 minutes after the ignition
switch is turned to the LOCK position. Opening either
front door will cancel this feature. The time for this
feature is programmable. Refer to “Electronic Vehicle
Information Center (EVIC)/Personal Settings
(Customer-Programmable Features)” in “Understand-
ing Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
Ignition Switch Positions
1 — Lock 3 — On
2 — Acc 4 — Start
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 13
WARNING!
•
Never leave children alone in a vehicle. Leaving
unattended children in a vehicle is dangerous for a
number of reasons. A child or others could be
seriously or fatally injured. Don’t leave the keys in
the ignition. A child could operate power win-
dows, other controls, or move the vehicle.
•
Do not leave children or animals inside parked
vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat build-up may
cause serious injury or death.
CAUTION!
An unlocked vehicle is an invitation to thieves.
Always remove the key from the ignition, and lock
all doors when leaving the vehicle unattended.
Key-In-Ignition Reminder
If you open the driver’s door and the key is in the
ignition, a chime will sound to remind you to remove the
key.
NOTE: The Key-In-Ignition reminder only sounds
when the ignition key is placed in the LOCK or ACC
position.
SENTRY KEY姞
The Sentry Key威 Immobilizer System prevents unauthor-
ized vehicle operation by disabling the engine. The
system does not need to be armed or activated. Operation
is automatic, regardless of whether the vehicle is locked
or unlocked.
14 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
The system uses ignition keys that have an embedded
electronic chip (transponder) to prevent unauthorized
vehicle operation. Therefore, only keys that are pro-
grammed to the vehicle can be used to start and operate
the vehicle. The system will shut the engine off in two
seconds if someone uses an invalid key to try to start the
engine.
NOTE: A key that has not been programmed is also
considered an invalid key, even if it is cut to fit the
ignition switch lock cylinder for that vehicle.
During normal operation, after turning on the ignition
switch, the Vehicle Security Light will turn on for three
seconds for a bulb check. If the light remains on after the
bulb check, it indicates that there is a problem with the
electronics. In addition, if the Vehicle Security Light
begins to flash after the bulb check, it indicates that
someone used an invalid key to try to start the engine.
Either of these conditions will result in the engine being
shut off after two seconds.
If the Vehicle Security Light turns on during normal
vehicle operation (vehicle running for longer than 10 sec-
onds), it indicates that there is a fault in the electronics.
Should this occur, have the vehicle serviced as soon as
possible by an authorized dealer.
CAUTION!
The Sentry Key威 Immobilizer system is not compat-
ible with some after-market remote starting systems.
Use of these systems may result in vehicle starting
problems and loss of security protection.
All of the keys provided with your new vehicle have
been programmed to the vehicle electronics.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 15
Replacement Keys
NOTE: Only keys that are programmed to the vehicle
electronics can be used to start and operate the vehicle.
Once a Sentry Key威 is programmed to a vehicle, it cannot
be programmed to any other vehicle.
CAUTION!
Always remove the Sentry Keys威 from the vehicle
and lock all doors when leaving the vehicle unat-
tended.
At the time of purchase, the original owner is provided
with a four-digit Personal Identification Number (PIN).
Keep the PIN in a secure location. This number is
required for authorized dealer replacement of keys. Du-
plication of keys may be performed at an authorized
dealer or by following the customer key programming
procedure. This procedure consists of programming a
blank key to the vehicle electronics. A blank key is one
that has never been programmed.
NOTE: When having the Sentry Key威 Immobilizer
System serviced, bring all vehicle keys with you to an
authorized dealer.
Customer Key Programming
If you have two valid Sentry Keys威, you can program
new Sentry Keys威 to the system by performing the
following procedure:
1. Cut the additional Sentry Key威 Transponder blank(s)
to match the ignition switch lock cylinder key code.
2. Insert the first valid key into the ignition switch. Turn
the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position for at least
three seconds, but no longer than 15 seconds. Then, turn
the ignition switch to the LOCK position and remove the
first key.
16 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
3. Insert the second valid key into the ignition switch.
Turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position within
15 seconds. After 10 seconds, a chime will sound. In
addition, the Vehicle Security Light will begin to flash.
Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position and
remove the second key.
4. Insert a blank Sentry Key威 into the ignition switch.
Turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position within
60 seconds. After 10 seconds, a single chime will sound.
In addition, the Vehicle Security Light will stop flashing.
To indicate that programming is complete, the Vehicle
Security Light will turn on again for three seconds and
then turn off.
The new Sentry Key威 is programmed. The Remote
Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter will also be pro-
grammed during this procedure.
Repeat this procedure to program up to eight keys. If you
do not have a programmed Sentry Key威, contact your
authorized dealer for details.
NOTE:
If a programmed key is lost, see your authorized
dealer to have all remaining keys erased from the sys-
tem’s memory. This will prevent the lost key from starting
your vehicle. The remaining keys must then be repro-
grammed. All vehicle keys must be taken to an authorized
dealer at the time of service to be reprogrammed.
General Information
The Sentry Key威 system complies with FCC rules Part 15
and with RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is
subject to the following conditions:
•
This device may not cause harmful interference.
•
This device must accept any interference that may be
received, including interference that may cause unde-
sired operation.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 17
VEHICLE SECURITY ALARM — IF EQUIPPED
The Vehicle Security Alarm monitors the vehicle doors,
liftgate, and liftgate flipper glass for unauthorized entry
and ignition for unauthorized operation. While the Ve-
hicle Security Alarm is armed, interior switches for door
locks and flipper glass are disabled.
If something triggers the alarm, the Vehicle Security
Alarm will sound the horn intermittently, the headlights,
park lamps and/or turn signals and the Vehicle Security
Light in the instrument cluster will flash for three min-
utes. If the disturbance is still present (driver’s door,
passenger door, other doors, ignition) after three minutes,
the headlights, park lamps and/or turn signals will flash
for an additional 15 minutes.
NOTE: The Panic and Security alarms are quite differ-
ent. Please take a moment to activate the Panic and the
Security modes to hear the differences in the horn. In case
one should go off in the future, you will need to know
which mode has been activated in order to deactivate it.
Rearming Of The System
If something triggers the Vehicle Security Alarm, and no
action is taken to disarm it, the Vehicle Security Alarm
will turn off the horn after three minutes, turn off all of
the visual signals after 15 minutes, and then the Vehicle
Security Alarm will rearm itself.
To Arm The System
1. Remove the key from the ignition switch and exit the
vehicle.
2. Lock the doors and liftgate by pressing the power door
LOCK switch or the LOCK button on the Remote Keyless
Entry (RKE) transmitter.
NOTE: The Vehicle Security Alarm will not arm if you
lock the doors with the manual door lock plungers or the
driver’s door lock cylinder.
18 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
3. Close all doors. The Vehicle Security Light in the
instrument cluster will flash rapidly for about 16 seconds
to signal that the Vehicle Security Alarm is arming.
During this period, opening any door or the liftgate will
cancel the arming process. If the Vehicle Security Alarm is
set successfully, the Vehicle Security Light will flash at a
slower rate to indicate the alarm is armed.
NOTE: For added security, whenever the Security
Alarm is armed, the HomeLink威/Garage Door Opener
(if equipped) is disabled as well.
To Disarm The System
Either press the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter
or insert a valid Sentry Key威 into the ignition lock
cylinder and turn the key to the ON/RUN position.
NOTE:
•
Unlocking the doors with the manual door lock plung-
ers or the driver’s door lock cylinder will not disarm
the Vehicle Security Alarm.
•
When the Vehicle Security Alarm is armed, the interior
power door lock switches will not unlock the doors.
The Vehicle Security Alarm is designed to protect your
vehicle; however, you can create conditions where the
Vehicle Security Alarm will give you a false alarm. If the
previously described arming sequence has occurred, the
Vehicle Security Alarm will arm regardless of whether
you are inside or outside the vehicle. If you remain inside
the vehicle and open a door, the alarm will sound. If this
occurs, disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm.
Tamper Alert
If something has triggered the Vehicle Security Alarm in
your absence, the horn will sound three times and
exterior lights blink three times when you unlock the
doors. Check the vehicle for tampering.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 19
ILLUMINATED ENTRY
The courtesy lights will turn on when you use the
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter to unlock the
doors or open any door.
This feature also turns on the approach lighting in the
outside mirrors (if equipped). Refer to “Mirrors” in
“Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle” for fur-
ther information.
The lights will fade to off after approximately 30 seconds
or they will immediately fade to off once the ignition
switch is turned to ON/RUN from the OFF position.
NOTE:
•
The front courtesy overhead console and door cour-
tesy lights do not turn on if the dimmer control is in
the ⬙Dome ON⬙ position (extreme top position).
•
The Illuminated Entry system will not operate if the
dimmer control is in the “Dome defeat” position
(extreme bottom position).
REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY (RKE)
This system allows you to lock or unlock the doors and
liftgate, open the liftgate flip-up window, or activate the
PANIC alarm from distances up to approximately 66 ft
(20 m) using a hand-held Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
transmitter. The RKE transmitter does not need to be
pointed at the vehicle to activate the system. However,
the line of transmission must not be blocked with metal
objects when using the RKE transmitter.
NOTE: Inserting the key into the ignition switch dis-
ables all buttons on the RKE transmitter.
20 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
To Unlock The Doors And Liftgate
Press and release the UNLOCK button on the RKE
transmitter once to unlock the driver’s door or twice to
unlock all doors and the liftgate. The turn signal lights
will flash to acknowledge the unlock signal. The illumi-
nated entry system will also turn on.
Remote Key Unlock, Driver Door/All Doors First
This feature lets you program the system to unlock either
the driver’s door or all doors and the liftgate on the first
press of the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter. To
change the current setting, proceed as follows:
•
For vehicles equipped with the Electronic Vehicle
Information Center (EVIC), refer to “Electronic Vehicle
Information Center (EVIC)/Personal Settings
(Customer-Programmable Features)” in “Understand-
ing Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
For vehicles not equipped with the EVIC, perform the
following steps:
1. Press and hold the LOCK button on a programmed
(i.e., functional) RKE transmitter for at least 4 seconds,
but no longer than 10 seconds. Then, press and hold the
UNLOCK button while still holding the LOCK button.
2. Release both buttons at the same time.
Vehicle Key
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 21
3. Test the feature from outside the vehicle by pressing
the LOCK and UNLOCK buttons on the RKE transmitter.
4. Repeat these steps if you want to return this feature to
its previous setting.
NOTE: Pressing the LOCK button on the RKE transmit-
ter while you are inside the vehicle will activate the
Security Alarm. Opening a door with the Security Alarm
activated will cause the alarm to sound. Press the UN-
LOCK button to deactivate the Security Alarm.
Illuminated Approach — If Equipped
This feature activates the headlights for up to 90 seconds
when the doors are unlocked with the RKE transmitter.
The time for this feature is programmable on vehicles
equipped with the Electronic Vehicle Information Center
(EVIC). Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center
(EVIC)/Personal Settings (Customer-Programmable Fea-
tures)” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for
further information.
To Lock The Doors And Liftgate
Press and release the LOCK button on the RKE transmit-
ter to lock all doors and the liftgate. The turn signal lights
will flash and the horn will chirp to acknowledge the lock
signal.
Sound Horn With Lock
This feature will cause the horn to chirp when the doors
are locked with the RKE transmitter. This feature can be
turned on or turned off. To change the current setting,
proceed as follows:
•
For vehicles equipped with the Electronic Vehicle
Information Center (EVIC), refer to “Electronic Vehicle
Information Center (EVIC)/Personal Settings
(Customer-Programmable Features)” in “Understand-
ing Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
22 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
•
For vehicles not equipped with the EVIC, perform the
following steps:
1. Press the LOCK button on a programmed (i.e., func-
tional) RKE transmitter for at least 4 seconds, but no
longer than 10 seconds. Then, press the PANIC button
while still holding the LOCK button.
2. Release both buttons at the same time.
3. Test the feature from outside the vehicle by pressing
the LOCK button on the RKE transmitter.
4. Repeat these steps if you want to return this feature to
its previous setting.
NOTE: Pressing the LOCK button on the RKE transmit-
ter while you are inside the vehicle will activate the
Security Alarm. Opening a door with the Security Alarm
activated will cause the alarm to sound. Press the UN-
LOCK button to deactivate the Security Alarm.
Flash Lights With Lock
The feature will cause the turn signal lights to flash when
the doors are locked or unlocked with the RKE transmit-
ter. This feature can be turned on or turned off. To change
the current setting, proceed as follows:
•
For vehicles equipped with the Electronic Vehicle
Information Center (EVIC), refer to “Electronic Vehicle
Information Center (EVIC)/Personal Settings
(Customer-Programmable Features)” in “Understand-
ing Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
•
For vehicles not equipped with the EVIC, perform the
following steps:
1. Press and hold the UNLOCK button on a programmed
(i.e., functional) RKE transmitter for at least 4 seconds,
but no longer than 10 seconds. Then, press and hold the
LOCK button while still holding the UNLOCK button.
2. Release both buttons at the same time.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 23
3. Test the feature from outside the vehicle by pressing
the LOCK and UNLOCK buttons on the RKE transmitter.
4. Repeat these steps if you want to return this feature to
its previous setting.
NOTE: Pressing the LOCK button on the RKE transmit-
ter while you are inside the vehicle will activate the
Security Alarm. Opening a door with the Security Alarm
activated will cause the alarm to sound. Press the UN-
LOCK button to deactivate the Security Alarm.
To Unlatch The Liftgate Flipper Glass
Press the FLIPPER GLASS button twice to unlatch the
liftgate flipper glass.
WARNING!
To avoid injury stand back when opening. Glass will
automatically rise.
Remote Open Window Feature — If Equipped
This feature allows you to remotely lower both front door
windows at the same time. To use this feature, press and
release the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter and
then immediately press and hold the UNLOCK button
until the windows lower to the level desired or until they
lower completely.
Using The Panic Alarm
NOTE: The PANIC and Security Alarms are quite
different. Please take a moment to activate the PANIC
and the Security modes to hear the differences in the
horn. In case one should go off in the future, you will
need to know which mode has been activated in order to
deactivate it.
24 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
To turn the PANIC Alarm feature ON or OFF, press and
hold the PANIC button on the RKE transmitter for at
least one second and release. When the PANIC Alarm is
on, the headlights and turn signal lights will flash, the
horn will pulse on and off, and the illuminated entry
system will turn on.
The PANIC Alarm will stay on for three minutes unless
you turn it off by pressing the PANIC button a second
time or if the vehicle speed is 5 mph (8 km/h) or greater.
During the PANIC Mode, the door locks and Remote
Keyless Entry (RKE) system will function normally.
PANIC mode will not disarm the Security System on
vehicles so equipped.
NOTE: You may need to be close to the vehicle when
using the RKE transmitter to turn off the PANIC Alarm
due to the radio frequency noises emitted by the system.
Programming Additional Transmitters
Refer to Sentry Key威 “Customer Key Programming.”
If you do not have a programmed RKE transmitter,
contact your authorized dealer for details.
Battery Replacement
The recommended replacement battery is CR2032.
NOTE:
•
Perchlorate Material — special handling may apply.
See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate
•
Do not touch the battery terminals that are on the back
housing or the printed circuit board.
1. Remove the screw from the RKE transmitter case (if
equipped).
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 25
2. With the RKE transmitter buttons facing down, use a
flat blade tool to pry the two halves of the RKE transmit-
ter case apart. Make sure not to damage the seal during
removal.
3. Remove and replace the battery. Avoid touching the
new battery with your fingers. Skin oils may cause
battery deterioration. If you touch a battery, clean it with
rubbing alcohol.
4. To reassemble the RKE transmitter case, snap the two
halves together.
5. Reinstall and tighten the screw until snug (if
equipped).
General Information
This device complies with Part 15 of FCC rules and with
RS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the
following conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference.
2. This device must accept any interference that may be
received including interference that may cause undesired
operation.
Separating Case Halves
26 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly ap-
proved by the party responsible for compliance could
void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.
If your RKE transmitter fails to operate from a normal
distance, check for these two conditions:
1. Weak battery in RKE transmitter. The expected life of
the battery is from one to two years.
2. Closeness to a radio transmitter such as a radio station
tower, airport transmitter, and some mobile or CB radios.
REMOTE STARTING SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED
This system uses the Remote Keyless Entry
(RKE) transmitter to start the engine conve-
niently from outside the vehicle while still
maintaining security. The system has a range of
approximately 300 ft (91 m).
NOTE: The vehicle must be equipped with an auto-
matic transmission to be equipped with Remote Start.
How To Use Remote Start
All of the following conditions must be met before the
engine will remote start:
•
Shift lever in PARK.
•
Doors closed.
•
Hood closed.
•
Liftgate closed.
•
Hazard switch off.
•
Brake switch inactive (brake pedal not pressed).
•
Ignition key removed from ignition switch.
•
Battery at an acceptable charge level.
•
RKE PANIC button not pressed.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 27
WARNING!
•
Do not start or run an engine in a closed garage or
confined area. Exhaust gas contains Carbon Mon-
oxide (CO) which is odorless and colorless. Car-
bon Monoxide is poisonous and can cause serious
injury or death when inhaled.
•
Keep Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitters
away from children. Operation of the Remote Start
System, windows, door locks or other controls
could cause serious injury or death.
To Enter Remote Start Mode
Press and release the REMOTE START button
on the RKE transmitter twice within five sec-
onds. The parking lights will flash and the horn
will chirp twice (if programmed). Then, the
engine will start and the vehicle will remain in the
Remote Start mode for a 15-minute cycle.
NOTE:
•
For security, power window operation and sunroof or
Sky Slider威 operation (if equipped) is disabled when
the vehicle is in the Remote Start mode.
•
The engine can be started two consecutive times (two
15-minute cycles) with the RKE transmitter. However,
the ignition switch must be cycled to the ON/RUN
position before you can repeat the start sequence for a
third cycle.
To Exit Remote Start Mode Without Driving The
Vehicle
Press and release the REMOTE START button one time or
allow the engine to run for the entire 15-minute cycle.
NOTE: To avoid unintentional shut downs, the system
will disable the one-time press of the REMOTE START
button for two seconds after receiving a valid Remote
Start request.
28 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
To Exit Remote Start Mode And Drive The Vehicle
Before the end of the 15-minute cycle, press and release
the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter to unlock
the doors and disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm (if
equipped). Then, insert the key into the ignition switch
and turn the switch to the ON/RUN position.
NOTE: The ignition switch must be in the ON/RUN
position in order to drive the vehicle.
DOOR LOCKS
Manual Door Locks
To lock each door, push the door lock knob on each door
trim panel downward. To unlock each door, pull the door
lock knob on each door trim panel upward.
If the door lock knob is down when you shut the door,
the door will lock. Make sure the keys are not inside the
vehicle before closing the door.
NOTE: The manual door locks will not lock or unlock
the liftgate.
Manual Lock Knob
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 29
WARNING!
•
For personal security and safety in the event of an
accident, lock the vehicle doors as you drive as
well as when you park and leave the vehicle.
•
When leaving the vehicle, always remove the key
from the ignition lock, and lock your vehicle.
Unsupervised use of vehicle equipment may cause
severe personal injuries or death.
•
Never leave children alone in a vehicle. Leaving
unattended children in a vehicle is dangerous for a
number of reasons. A child or others could be
seriously or fatally injured. Don’t leave the key in
the ignition. A child could operate power win-
dows, other controls, or move the vehicle.
Power Door Locks
A power door lock switch is located on each of the front
door trim panels. Use this switch to lock or unlock the
doors and liftgate.
Power Door Lock Switch Location
1 - Unlock 2 - Lock
30 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
If you press the power door LOCK switch while the key
is in the ignition, and any front door is open, the power
locks will not operate. This prevents you from acciden-
tally locking your keys in the vehicle. Removing the key
or closing the door will allow the locks to operate. A
chime will sound if the key is in the ignition switch and
a door is open, as a reminder to remove the key.
Automatic Door Locks — If Equipped
The doors will lock automatically if all of the following
conditions are met:
1. The Automatic Door Locks feature is enabled
2. The transmission is in gear
3. All doors are closed
4. The throttle is pressed
5. The vehicle speed is above 15 mph (24 km/h)
6. The doors were not previously locked using the power
door lock switch or Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
transmitter
Automatic Door Locks Programming —
If Equipped
The Automatic Door Locks feature can be enabled or
disabled as follows:
•
For vehicles equipped with the Electronic Vehicle
Information Center (EVIC), refer to “Electronic Vehicle
Information Center (EVIC) — If Equipped/Personal
Settings (Customer-Programmable Features)” in “Un-
derstanding Your Instrument Panel” for further infor-
mation.
•
For vehicles not equipped with the EVIC, perform the
following procedure:
1. Close all doors and place the key in the ignition
switch.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 31
2. Within 15 seconds, cycle the ignition switch between
LOCK and ON/RUN and then back to LOCK four times
ending up in the LOCK position (do not start the engine).
3. Within 30 seconds, press the power door LOCK switch
to lock the doors.
4. A single chime will indicate the completion of the
programming.
5. Repeat these steps if you want to return this feature to
its previous setting.
NOTE:
•
If you do not hear the chime it means that the system
did not enter the programming mode and you will
need to repeat the procedure.
•
Use the Automatic Door Locks feature in accordance
with local laws.
Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit
The doors will unlock automatically on vehicles with
power door locks if:
1. The Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit feature is en-
abled.
2. The transmission is in gear and the vehicle speed
returned to 0 mph (0 km/h).
3. The transmission is in NEUTRAL or PARK.
4. The driver door is opened.
5. The doors were not previously unlocked.
6. The vehicle speed is 0 mph (0 km/h).
32 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit Programming
The Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit feature can be
enabled or disabled as follows:
•
For vehicles equipped with the Electronic Vehicle
Information Center (EVIC), refer to “Electronic Vehicle
Information Center (EVIC)/Personal Settings
(Customer-Programmable Features)” in “Understand-
ing Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
•
For vehicles not equipped with the EVIC, perform the
following procedure:
1. Close all doors and place the key in the ignition.
2. Cycle the ignition switch between LOCK and ON/
RUN and then back to LOCK four times, ending up in the
LOCK position.
3. Press the power door UNLOCK switch to unlock the
doors.
4. A single chime will indicate the completion of the
programming.
Repeat these steps if you want to return this feature to its
previous setting.
NOTE: Use the Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit feature
in accordance with local laws.
Child-Protection Door Lock System —
Rear Doors
To provide a safer environment for small children riding
in the rear seats, the rear doors are equipped with a
Child-Protection Door Lock system.
To use the system, open each rear door, use a flat blade
screwdriver (or ignition key) and rotate the dial counter-
clockwise to engage the Child-Protection lock and clock-
wise to disengage the Child-Protection locks. When the
system on a door is engaged, that door can only be
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 33
opened by using the outside door handle even if the
inside door lock is in the unlocked position.
NOTE:
•
When the child lock system is engaged, the door can be
opened only by using the outside door handle even
though the inside door lock is in the unlocked position.
•
After disengaging the Child-Protection Door Lock
system, always test the door from the inside to make
certain it is in the desired position.
•
After engaging the Child-Protection Door Lock sys-
tem, always test the door from the inside to make
certain it is in the desired position.
•
For emergency exit with the system engaged, move
the lock knob up (unlocked position), roll down the
window, and open the door with the outside door
handle.
WARNING!
Avoid trapping anyone in a vehicle in a collision.
Remember that the rear doors can only be opened
from the outside when the Child-Protection locks are
engaged.
Child-Protection Door Lock
34 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WINDOWS
Power Windows
The window controls on the driver’s door trim panel
control all the door windows.
There are single window controls on each passenger door
trim panel, which operate the passenger door windows.
The window controls will operate when the ignition
switch is in the ON/RUN or ACC position.
WARNING!
Never leave children in a vehicle, with the key in the
ignition switch. Occupants, particularly unattended
children, can become entrapped by the windows
while operating the power window switches. Such
entrapment may result in serious injury or death.
Auto-Down Feature
The driver’s and front passenger’s (if equipped for pas-
senger side) power window switches have an “Auto-
Down” feature. Press the window switch past the first
detent, release, and the window will go down automati-
cally.
Power Window Switches
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 35
To open the window part way, press the window switch
to the first detent and release it when you want the
window to stop.
To stop the window from going all the way down during
the Auto-Down operation, pull up on the switch briefly.
For vehicles not equipped with the Electronic Vehicle
Information Center (EVIC), the power window switches
will remain active for 45 seconds after the ignition switch
is turned to the LOCK position. Opening either front
door will cancel this feature.
For vehicles equipped with the EVIC, the power window
switches will remain active for up to 10 minutes after the
ignition switch is turned to the LOCK position. Opening
either front door will cancel this feature. The time is
programmable. Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information
Center (EVIC)/Personal Settings (Customer-rogram-
mable Features)” in “Understanding Your Instrument
Panel” for further information.
Auto Up Feature With Anti-Pinch Protection —
If Equipped
On some models, the driver’s and front passenger’s (if
equipped for passenger side) power window switches
have an “Auto Up” feature. Pull the window switch fully
upward to the second detent, release, and the window
will go up automatically.
To stop the window from going all the way up during the
Auto Up operation, push down on the switch briefly.
To close the window part way, pull the window switch
up to the first detent and release when you want the
window to stop.
For vehicles not equipped with the Electronic Vehicle
Information Center (EVIC), the power window switches
will remain active for 45 seconds after the ignition switch
is turned to the LOCK position. Opening either front
door will cancel this feature.
36 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
For vehicles equipped with the EVIC, the power window
switches will remain active for up to 10 minutes after the
ignition switch is turned to the LOCK position. Opening
either front door will cancel this feature. The time is
programmable. Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information
Center (EVIC)/Personal Settings (Customer-Program-
mable Features)” in “Understanding Your Instrument
Panel” for further information.
NOTE:
•
If the window runs into any obstacle during auto-
closure, it will reverse direction and then go back
down. Remove the obstacle and use the window
switch again to close the window.
•
Any impact due to rough road conditions may trigger
the auto reverse function unexpectedly during auto-
closure. If this happens, pull the switch lightly to the
first detent and hold to close window manually.
WARNING!
There is no anti-pinch protection when the window
is almost closed. Be sure to clear all objects from the
window before closing.
Reset
It may be necessary at some point in time to reactivate the
Auto Up feature. To do so, perform the following proce-
dure:
1. Pull the window switch up to close the window
completely and continue to hold the switch up for an
additional two seconds after the window is closed.
2. Push the window switch down firmly to the second
detent to open the window completely and continue to
hold the switch down for an additional two seconds after
the window is fully open.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 37
Window Lockout Button
The window lockout button on the driver’s door trim
panel allows you to disable the window control on the
other doors. To disable the window control on the other
doors, press and release the window LOCKOUT button
(setting it in the down position). To enable the window
controls, press and release the window LOCKOUT but-
ton again (setting it in the up position).
Window Lockout Button
38 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Wind Buffeting
Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of
pressure on the ears or a helicopter-type sound in the
ears. Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the
windows down, or the sunroof or Sky Slider™ (if
equipped) in certain open or partially open positions.
This is a normal occurrence and can be minimized. If the
buffeting occurs with the rear windows open, then open
the front and rear windows together to minimize the
buffeting. If the buffeting occurs with the sunroof or Sky
Slider™ open, adjust the sunroof or Sky Slider™ opening
to minimize the buffeting or open any window.
LIFTGATE
To open the liftgate, pull up (squeeze) on the handle and
lift.
NOTE: Use the power door LOCK switch on either front
door trim panel or the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
transmitter to lock and unlock the liftgate. The manual
door locks on the doors and the driver’s door lock
cylinder will not lock and unlock the liftgate.
Liftgate Release
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 39
WARNING!
Driving with the liftgate open can allow poisonous
exhaust gases into your vehicle. You and your pas-
sengers could be injured by these fumes. Keep the
liftgate closed when you are operating the vehicle.
Liftgate Flipper Glass
The liftgate flipper glass is also unlocked when the
liftgate is unlocked. To open the flipper glass, push up on
the window switch located on the liftgate.
NOTE: To prevent accidental damage the Liftgate Flip-
per Glass will not open if the liftgate is ajar. Make sure the
liftgate is fully closed when attempting to open the
Flipper Glass.
Liftgate Flipper Glass Release
40 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
To avoid injury, stand back when opening. Glass may
automatically rise.
NOTE: If a malfunction to the liftgate latch should
occur, an emergency liftgate latch release can be used to
open the liftgate. The emergency liftgate latch release can
be accessed through a snap-in cover located on the
liftgate trim panel.
WARNING!
Driving with the flipper glass open can allow poi-
sonous exhaust gases into your vehicle. You and your
passengers could be injured by these fumes. Keep
the flipper glass closed when you are operating the
vehicle.
OCCUPANT RESTRAINTS
Some of the most important safety features in your
vehicle are the restraint systems:
•
Three-point lap and shoulder belts for all seating
positions
•
Advanced Front Air Bags for driver and front passen-
ger
•
Supplemental Active Head Restraints (AHR) located
on top of the front seats (integrated into the head
restraint)
•
Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains
(SABIC) for the driver and passengers seated next to a
window
•
An energy-absorbing steering column and steering
wheel
•
Knee bolsters/blockers for front seat occupants
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 41
•
Front seat belts incorporate pretensioners that may
enhance occupant protection by managing occupant
energy during an impact event
•
All seat belt systems (except the driver’s and rear
center) include Automatic Locking Retractors (ALRs),
which lock the seat belt webbing into position by
extending the belt all the way out and then adjusting
the belt to the desired length to restrain a child seat or
secure a large item in a seat — if equipped
Please pay close attention to the information in this section.
It tells you how to use your restraint system properly, to
keep you and your passengers as safe as possible.
If you will be carrying children too small for adult-sized
seat belts, the seat belts or the Lower Anchors and Tether
for CHildren (LATCH) feature also can be used to hold
infant and child restraint systems. For more information
on LATCH, refer to Lower Anchors and Tether for
CHildren (LATCH).
NOTE: The Advanced Front Air Bags have a multistage
inflator design. This allows the air bag to have different
rates of inflation based on the severity and type of
collision.
Here are some simple steps you can take to minimize the
risk of harm from a deploying air bag:
1. Children 12 years old and under should always ride
buckled up in a rear seat.
WARNING!
Infants in rear facing child restraints should never
ride in the front seat of a vehicle with a passenger
Advanced Front Air Bag. An air bag deployment can
cause severe injury or death to infants in that posi-
tion.
Children that are not big enough to wear the vehicle seat
belt properly (see section on Child Restraints) should be
42 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
secured in the rear seat in child restraints or belt-
positioning booster seats. Older children who do not use
child restraints or belt-positioning booster seats should
ride properly buckled up in the rear seat. Never allow
children to slide the shoulder belt behind them or under
their arm.
If a child from 1 to 12 years old (not in a rear facing child
seat) must ride in the front passenger seat, move the seat
as far back as possible and use the proper child restraint.
(Refer to “Child Restraints”)
You should read the instructions provided with your
child restraint to make sure that you are using it properly.
2. All occupants should always wear their lap and
shoulder belts properly.
3. The driver and front passenger seats should be
moved back as far as practical to allow the Advanced
Front Air Bags room to inflate.
4. Do not lean against the door or window. If your
vehicle has side air bags, and deployment occurs, the
side air bags will inflate forcefully into the space
between you and the door.
5. If the air bag system in this vehicle needs to be
modified to accommodate a disabled person, contact
the Customer Center. Phone numbers are provided
under ⴖIf You Need Assistanceⴖ.
WARNING!
•
Relying on the air bags alone could lead to more
severe injuries in a collision. The air bags work
with your seat belt to restrain you properly. In
some collisions, the air bags won’t deploy at all.
Always wear your seat belts even though you have
air bags.
(Continued)
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 43
WARNING! (Continued)
•
Being too close to the steering wheel or instrument
panel during Advanced Front Air Bag deployment
could cause serious injury, including death. Air
Bags need room to inflate. Sit back, comfortably
extending your arms to reach the steering wheel or
instrument panel.
•
Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtain
(SABIC) also need room to inflate. Do not lean
against the door or window. Sit upright in the
center of the seat.
•
In an accident, you and your passengers can suffer
much greater injuries if you are not properly
buckled up. You can strike the interior of your
vehicle or other passengers, or you can be thrown
out of the vehicle. Always be sure you and others
in your vehicle are buckled up properly.
Buckle up even though you are an excellent driver, even
on short trips. Someone on the road may be a poor driver
and cause an accident that includes you. This can happen
far away from home or on your own street.
Research has shown that seat belts save lives, and they
can reduce the seriousness of injuries in an accident.
Some of the worst injuries happen when people are
thrown from the vehicle. Seat belts reduce the possibility
of ejection and the risk of injury caused by striking the
inside of the vehicle. Everyone in a motor vehicle should
be belted at all times.
Lap/Shoulder Belts
All seating positions in your vehicle are equipped with
lap/shoulder belts. The belt webbing retractor is de-
signed to lock during very sudden stops or accidents.
This feature allows the shoulder part of the belt to move
freely with you under normal conditions. However, in an
accident, the belt will lock and reduce your risk of
striking the inside of the vehicle or being thrown out.
44 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
•
It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside or
outside of a vehicle. In an accident, people riding
in these areas are more likely to be seriously
injured or killed.
•
Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat
belts.
•
Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly.
•
Wearing a seat belt incorrectly is dangerous. Seat
belts are designed to go around the large bones of
your body. These are the strongest parts of your
body and can take the forces of an accident the
best.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
•
Wearing your belt in the wrong place could make
your injuries in an accident much worse. You
might suffer internal injuries, or you could even
slide out of part of the belt. Follow these instruc-
tions to wear your seat belt safely and to keep your
passengers safe, too.
•
Two people should never be belted into a single
seat belt. People belted together can crash into one
another in an accident, hurting one another badly.
Never use a lap/shoulder belt or a lap belt for more
than one person, no matter what their size.
Lap/Shoulder Belt Operating Instructions
1. Enter the vehicle and close the door. Sit back and
adjust the seat.
2. The seat belt latch plate is located on the B-Pillar along
the outboard side and rear of the seat cushion. The rear
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 45
seat belt latch plates are located on the C-Pillar for the
outboard rear seating positions and next to your arm in
the center rear seating position. Grasp the latch plate and
pull out the belt. Slide the latch plate up the webbing as
far as necessary to make the belt go around your lap.
3. When the belt is long enough to fit, insert the latch
plate into the buckle until you hear a “click.”
Latch Plate
Latch Plate To Buckle
46 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
•
A belt that is buckled into the wrong buckle will
not protect you properly. The lap portion could
ride too high on your body, possibly causing
internal injuries. Always buckle your belt into the
buckle nearest you.
•
A belt that is too loose will not protect you
properly. In a sudden stop, you could move too far
forward, increasing the possibility of injury. Wear
your seat belt snugly.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
•
A belt that is worn under your arm is dangerous.
Your body could strike the inside surfaces of the
vehicle in an accident, increasing head and neck
injury. A belt worn under the arm can cause
internal injuries. Ribs aren’t as strong as shoulder
bones. Wear the belt over your shoulder so that
your strongest bones will take the force in a
collision.
•
A shoulder belt placed behind you will not protect
you from injury during an accident. You are more
likely to hit your head in a collision if you do not
wear your shoulder belt. The lap and shoulder belt
are meant to be used together.
4. Position the lap belt across your thighs, below your
abdomen. To remove slack in the lap belt portion, pull up
a bit on the shoulder belt. To loosen the lap belt if it is too
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 47
tight, tilt the latch plate and pull on the lap belt. A snug
belt reduces the risk of sliding under the belt in an
accident.
WARNING!
•
A lap belt worn too high can increase the risk of
injury in an accident. The belt forces won’t be at
the strong hip and pelvic bones, but across your
abdomen. Always wear the lap part of your seat
belt as low as possible and keep it snug.
•
A twisted belt will not protect you properly. In a
collision, it could even cut into you. Be sure the
belt is straight. If you can’t straighten a belt in
your vehicle, take it to your authorized dealer
immediately and have it fixed.
5. Position the shoulder belt on your chest so that it is
comfortable and not resting on your neck. The retractor
will withdraw any slack in the belt.
6. To release the belt, push the red button on the buckle.
The belt will automatically retract to its stowed position.
If necessary, slide the latch plate down the webbing to
allow the belt to retract fully.
Removing Slack From Belt
48 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
A frayed or torn belt could rip apart in an accident
and leave you with no protection. Inspect the belt
system periodically, checking for cuts, frays, or loose
parts. Damaged parts must be replaced immediately.
Do not disassemble or modify the system. Seat belt
assemblies must be replaced after an accident if they
have been damaged (bent retractor, torn webbing,
etc.).
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage
In the front seating positions, the shoulder belt can be
adjusted upward or downward to position the belt away
from your neck. Press the release button to release the
anchorage, and then move it up or down to the position
that fits you best.
NOTE: The adjustable upper shoulder belt anchorage is
equipped with an Easy Up feature. This feature allows
the shoulder belt anchorage to be adjusted in the upward
position without pressing the release button. To verify
the shoulder belt anchorage is latched, pull downward
on the shoulder belt anchorage until it is locked into
position.
Adjusting Upper Shoulder Belt
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 49
As a guide, if you are shorter than average, you will
prefer a lower position, and if you are taller than average,
you will prefer a higher position.
Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting Procedure
Use the following procedure to untwist a twisted lap/
shoulder belt.
1. Position the latch plate as close as possible to the
anchor point.
2. At about 6 to 12 in (15 to 30 cm) above the latch plate,
grasp and twist the belt webbing 180 degrees to create a
fold that begins immediately above the latch plate.
3. Slide the latch plate upward over the folded webbing.
The folded webbing must enter the slot at the top of the
latch plate.
4. Continue to slide the latch plate up until it clears the
folded webbing.
Seat Belt Pretensioner
The belt for driver seating position is equipped with a
retractor pretensioning device, the belt for passenger
seating position is equipped with both retractor and
buckle pretensioning devices. These devices are designed
to remove any slack from the seat belt systems in the
event of a collision. These devices may improve the
performance of the seat belt by assuring that the belt is
tight around the occupant early in a collision. Pretension-
ers work for all size occupants, including those in child
restraints.
NOTE: These devices are not a substitute for proper seat
belt placement by the occupant. The seat belt must still be
worn snugly and positioned properly.
The pretensioners are triggered by the Occupant Re-
straint Controller (ORC). Like the air bags, the preten-
sioners are single use items. A deployed pretensioner or
a deployed air bag must be replaced immediately.
50 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Seat Belt Lock Out
The center rear seat belt system has a lock out feature that
will not allow you to extract the center webbing unless
the rear seat upper latch is engaged.
Seat Belts In Passenger Seating Positions
The seat belts in the passenger seating positions are
equipped with Automatic Locking Retractors (ALR)
which are used to secure a child restraint system. For
additional information, refer to “Installing Child Re-
straints Using The Vehicle Seat Belt” under the “Child
Restraints” section. The chart below defines the type of
feature for each seating position.
Driver Center Passenger
First Row N/A N/A ALR
Second Row ALR Cinching
Latch Plate
ALR
Third Row N/A N/A N/A
•
N/A — Not Applicable
•
ALR — Automatic Locking Retractor
If the passenger seating position is equipped with an
ALR and is being used for normal usage:
Only pull the belt webbing out far enough to comfortably
wrap around the occupant’s mid-section so as to not
activate the ALR. If the ALR is activated, you will hear a
ratcheting sound as the belt retracts. Allow the webbing
to retract completely in this case and then carefully pull
out only the amount of webbing necessary to comfort-
ably wrap around the occupant’s mid-section. Slide the
latch plate into the buckle until you hear a ⬙click.⬙
Automatic Locking Retractor Mode (ALR) —
If Equipped
In this mode, the shoulder belt is automatically pre-
locked. The belt will still retract to remove any slack in
the shoulder belt. The Automatic Locking Mode is avail-
able on all passenger-seating positions with a combina-
tion lap/shoulder belt. Use the Automatic Locking Mode
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 51
anytime a child safety seat is installed in a seating
position that has a belt with this feature. Children
12 years old and under should always be properly
restrained in the rear seat.
How To Engage The Automatic Locking Mode
1. Buckle the combination lap and shoulder belt.
2. Grasp the shoulder portion and pull downward until
the entire belt is extracted.
3. Allow the belt to retract. As the belt retracts, you will
hear a clicking sound. This indicates the safety belt is
now in the Automatic Locking Mode.
How To Disengage The Automatic Locking Mode
Unbuckle the combination lap/shoulder belt and allow it
to retract completely to disengage the Automatic Locking
Mode and activate the vehicle sensitive (emergency)
locking mode.
WARNING!
•
The belt and retractor assembly must be replaced
if the seat belt assembly Automatic Locking Re-
tractor (ALR) feature or any other seat belt func-
tion is not working properly when checked ac-
cording to the procedures in the Service Manual.
•
Failure to replace the belt and retractor assembly
could increase the risk of injury in collisions.
Supplemental Active Head Restraints (AHR)
These head restraints are passive, deployable compo-
nents, and vehicles with this equipment cannot be readily
identified by any markings, only through visual inspec-
tion of the head restraint. The head restraint will be split
in two halves, with the front half being soft foam and
trim, the back half being decorative plastic.
52 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
How The Active Head Restraints (AHR) Work
The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) determines
whether the severity, or type of rear impact will require
the Active Head Restraints (AHR) to deploy. If a rear
impact requires deployment, both the driver and front
passenger seat AHRs will be deployed.
When AHRs deploy during a rear impact, the front half
of the head restraint extends forward to minimize the gap
between the back of the occupant’s head and the AHR.
This system is designed to help prevent or reduce the
extent of injuries to the driver and front passenger in
certain types of rear impacts.
NOTE: The Active Head Restraints (AHR) may or may
not deploy in the event of a front or side impact.
However if during a front impact, a secondary rear
impact occurs, the AHR may deploy based on the sever-
ity and type of the impact.
Active Head Restraint (AHR) Components
1 — Head Restraint Front Half
(Soft Foam and Trim)
3 — Head Restraint Back Half
(Decorative Plastic Rear
Cover)
2 — Seatback
4 — Head Restraint Guide
Tubes
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 53
CAUTION!
All occupants, including the driver, should not oper-
ate a vehicle or sit in a vehicle’s seat until the head
restraints are placed in their proper positions in order
to minimize the risk of neck injury in the event of an
accident.
NOTE: For more information on properly adjusting and
positioning the head restraint, refer to “Adjusting Active
Head Restraints” in “Understanding The Features Of
Your Vehicle”.
Resetting Active Head Restraints (AHR)
If the Active Head Restraints are triggered in an accident,
you must reset the head restraint on the driver’s and
front passenger seat. You can recognize when the Active
Head Restraint has been triggered by the fact that they
have moved forward (as shown in step three of the
resetting procedure).
1. Grasp the deployed AHR from the rear seat.
2. Position the hands on the top of the deployed AHR at
a comfortable position.
3. Pull down then rearward towards the rear of the
vehicle then down to engage the locking mechanism.
Hand Positioning Points On AHR
54 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
1 — Downward Movement
2 — Rearward Movement
3—
Final Downward Movement To Engage Locking Mechanism
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 55
4. The AHR front soft foam and trim half should lock
into the back decorative plastic half.
NOTE:
•
If you have difficulties or problems resetting the
Active Head Restraints, see an authorized dealer.
•
For safety reasons, have the Active Head Restraints
checked by a qualified specialist at an authorized
dealer.
Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder System
(BeltAlert姞)
BeltAlert威 is a feature intended to remind the driver and
front passenger (if equipped with front passenger
BeltAlert威) to fasten their seat belts. This feature is active
whenever the ignition is on. If the driver or front seat
passenger is unbelted, the Seat Belt Reminder Light will
turn on and remain on until both front seat belts are
fastened. BeltAlert威 triggers within 60 seconds of vehicle
speed over 5 mph (8 km/h). The reminder sequence lasts
for 96 seconds or until the respective seat belts are
fastened. After the sequence completes, the Seat Belt
Reminder Light remains illuminated until front belts are
fastened. The driver should instruct all other occupants
to fasten their seat belts. If a front seat belt is unbuckled
while traveling at speeds greater than 5 mph (8 km/h),
AHR In Reset Position
56 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
BeltAlert威 will chime as a single notification and illumi-
nate the Seat Belt Reminder Light, then will proceed to
the 96 second reminder sequence.
The front passenger seat BeltAlert威 is not active when the
front passenger seat is unoccupied. BeltAlert威 may be
triggered when an animal or heavy object is on the front
passenger seat or when the seat is folded flat (if
equipped). It is recommended that pets be restrained in
the rear seat in pet harnesses or pet carriers that are
secured by seat belts, and cargo is properly stowed.
BeltAlert威 can be enabled or disabled by your authorized
dealer or by following these steps:
NOTE: The following steps must occur within the first
60 seconds of the ignition switch being turned to the
ON/RUN or START position. Chrysler Group LLC does
not recommend deactivating BeltAlert威.
1. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position, and
buckle the driver’s seat belt.
2. Turn the ignition key to the ON/RUN position (do not
start the engine), and wait for the Seat Belt Reminder
Light to turn off.
3. Within 60 seconds of starting the vehicle, unbuckle
and then re-buckle the driver’s seat belt at least three
times within 10 seconds, ending with the seat belt
buckled.
4. Turn the ignition key to the OFF position. A single
chime will sound to signify that you have successfully
completed the programming.
BeltAlert威 can be reactivated by repeating this procedure.
NOTE: Although BeltAlert威 has been deactivated, the
Seat Belt Reminder Light will continue to illuminate
while the driver’s seat belt remains unfastened.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 57
Energy Management Feature
This vehicle has a safety belt system with an energy
management feature in the front seating positions to help
further reduce the risk of injury in the event of a head-on
accident.
This safety belt system has a retractor assembly that is
designed to release webbing in a controlled manner. This
feature is designed to help reduce the belt force acting on
the occupant’s chest.
WARNING!
•
The belt and retractor assembly must be replaced
if the seat belt assembly “Automatic Locking Re-
tractor (ALR)” feature or any other seat belt func-
tion is not working properly when checked ac-
cording to the procedures in the Service Manual.
•
Failure to replace the belt and retractor assembly
could increase the risk of injury in accidents.
Seat Belts And Pregnant Women
We recommend that pregnant women use the seat belts
throughout their pregnancy. Keeping the mother safe is
the best way to keep the baby safe.
Pregnant women should wear the lap part of the belt
across the thighs and as snug across the hips as possible.
Keep the belt low so that it does not come across the
abdomen. That way the strong bones of the hips will take
the force if there is an accident.
Seat Belt Extender
If a seat belt is too short, even when fully extended, and
when the adjustable upper shoulder belt anchorage (if so
equipped) is in its lowest position, your authorized
dealer can provide you with a seat belt extender. This
extender should be used only if the existing belt is not
long enough. When it is not required, remove the ex-
tender, and store it.
58 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
Using a seat belt extender when not needed can
increase the risk of injury in an accident. Only use
when the lap belt is not long enough when it is worn
low and snug, and in the recommended seating
positions. Remove and store the extender when not
needed.
Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) — Air Bags
This vehicle has Advanced Front Air Bags for both the
driver and front passenger as a supplement to the seat
belt restraint systems. The driver’s Advanced Front Air
Bag is mounted in the steering wheel. The passenger’s
Advanced Front Air Bag is mounted in the instrument
panel, above the glove compartment. The words SRS/
AIRBAG are embossed on the air bag covers.
NOTE: These air bags are certified to the new Federal
regulations for Advanced Air Bags.
The Advanced Front Air Bags have a multistage inflator
design. This allows the air bag to have different rates of
inflation that are based on the severity and type of
collision.
Advanced Front Air Bag And Knee Bolster Locations
1 — Driver And Passenger Advanced Front Air Bags
2 — Knee Bolster
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 59
This vehicle may be equipped with driver and/or front
passenger seat track position sensors that may adjust the
inflation rate of the Advanced Front Air Bags based upon
seat position.
This vehicle may be equipped with a driver and/or front
passenger seat belt buckle switch that detects whether
the driver or front passenger seat belt is fastened. The
seat belt buckle switch may adjust the inflation rate of the
Advanced Front Air Bags.
This vehicle is equipped with Supplemental Side Air Bag
Inflatable Curtains (SABIC) that run the entire length of
the headliner to protect the driver and passengers in the
first and second row sitting next to a window.
NOTE:
•
Air Bag covers may not be obvious in the interior trim,
but they will open during air bag deployment.
•
After any accident, the vehicle should be taken to an
authorized dealer immediately.
Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains
(SABIC) Label Location
60 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Air Bag System Components
Your vehicle may be equipped with the following air bag
system components:
•
Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
•
Air Bag Warning Light
•
Steering Wheel and Column
•
Instrument Panel
•
Knee Impact Bolster
•
Driver Advanced Front Air Bag
•
Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag
•
Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains
(SABIC)
•
Front and Side Impact Sensors
•
Front Seat Belt Pretensioners, Seat Belt Buckle Switch,
and Seat Track Position Sensors
•
Supplemental Active Head Restraint for Driver and
Front Passenger
•
Occupant Classification System (OCS)
•
Occupant Classification Module (OCM)
•
Passenger Air Bag Disable (PAD) Indicator Light
•
Weight Sensors
Advanced Front Air Bag Features
The Advanced Front Air Bag system has multistage driver
and front passenger air bags. This system provides output
appropriate to the severity and type of collision as deter-
mined by the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC), which
may receive information from the front impact sensors.
The first stage inflator is triggered immediately during an
impact that requires air bag deployment. This low output
is used in less severe collisions. A higher energy output is
used for more severe collisions.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 61
NOTE: The passenger Advanced Front Air Bag may not
deploy, even when the driver Advanced Front Air Bag
has, if the Occupant Classification System (refer to ⬙Oc-
cupant Classification System⬙) has determined the pas-
senger seat is empty or is occupied by someone that is
classified in the ⬙child⬙ size category. This could be a
child, teenager, or even an adult.
WARNING!
•
No objects should be placed over or near the air
bag on the instrument panel, because any such
objects could cause harm if the vehicle is in a
collision severe enough to cause the air bag to
inflate.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
•
Do not put anything on or around the air bag
covers or attempt to manually open them. You may
damage the air bags and you could be injured
because the air bags may no longer be functional.
These protective covers for the air bag cushions
are designed to open only when the air bags are
inflating.
•
Do not use accessory seat covers or place objects
between you and the side air bags; the perfor-
mance could be adversely affected and/or objects
could be pushed into you, causing serious injury.
•
Do not drill, cut or tamper with the knee bolster in
any way.
•
Do not mount any accessories to the knee bolster
such as alarm lights, stereos, citizen band radios,
etc.
(Continued)
62 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
•
Do not have any accessory items installed which
will alter the roof, including adding a sunroof to
your vehicle. Do not add roof racks that require
permanent attachments (bolts or screws) for instal-
lation on the vehicle roof. Do not drill into the roof
of the vehicle for any reason.
Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtain
(SABIC)
SABIC air bags may offer side-impact and vehicle roll-
over protection to front and rear seat outboard occupants
in addition to that provided by the body structure. Each
air bag features inflated chambers placed adjacent to the
head of each outboard occupant that reduce the potential
for side-impact head injuries. The SABIC air bags deploy
downward, covering both windows on the impact side.
NOTE:
•
Should a vehicle rollover occur, the pretensioners
and/or SABIC air bags on both sides of the vehicle
may deploy.
•
Air Bag covers may not be obvious in the interior trim,
but they will open during air bag deployment.
•
Being too close to the side air bags during deployment
could cause you to be severely injured or killed.
The system includes side impact sensors that are cali-
brated to deploy the side air bags during impacts that
require side air bag occupant protection.
•
If your vehicle is equipped with left and right Supple-
mental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtain (SABIC), do not
stack luggage or other cargo up high enough to block
the location of the SABIC. The area where the SABIC is
located should remain free from any obstructions.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 63
•
Do not use accessory seat covers or place objects
between you and the side air bags; the performance
could be adversely affected and/or objects could be
pushed into you, causing serious injury.
•
If your vehicle is equipped with SABIC air bags, do
not have any accessory items installed which will alter
the roof, including adding a sunroof to your vehicle.
Do not add roof racks that require permanent attach-
ments (bolts or screws) for installation on the vehicle
roof. Do not drill into the roof of the vehicle for any
reason.
Knee Impact Bolsters
The Knee Impact Bolsters help protect the knees of the
driver and the front passenger, and position front occu-
pants for the best interaction with the Advanced Front
Air Bag.
Along with seat belts and pretensioners, Advanced Front
Air Bags work with the knee bolsters to provide im-
proved protection for the driver and front passenger. Side
air bags also work with seat belts to improve occupant
protection.
Air Bag Deployment Sensors And Controls
Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
The ORC is part of a Federally regulated safety system
required for this vehicle.
The ORC determines if deployment of the front and/or
side air bags in a frontal or side collision is required.
Based on the impact sensor’s signals, a central electronic
ORC deploys the Advanced Front Air Bags, Supplemen-
tal Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtain (SABIC), and front seat
belt pretensioners, as required, depending on the severity
and type of impact.
64 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Advanced Front Air Bags are designed to provide addi-
tional protection by supplementing the seat belts in
certain frontal collisions depending on the severity and
type of collision. Advanced Front Air Bags are not
expected to reduce the risk of injury in rear, side, or
rollover collisions.
The Advanced Front Air Bags will not deploy in all
frontal collisions, including some that may produce sub-
stantial vehicle damage — for example, some pole colli-
sions, truck underrides, and angle offset collisions. On
the other hand, depending on the type and location of
impact, Advanced Front Air Bags may deploy in crashes
with little vehicle front-end damage but that produce a
severe initial deceleration.
The SABIC will not deploy in all side collisions. SABIC
deployment will depend on the severity and type of
collision.
Because air bag sensors measure vehicle deceleration
over time, vehicle speed and damage by themselves are
not good indicators of whether or not an air bag should
have deployed.
Seat belts are necessary for your protection in all crashes,
and also are needed to help keep you in position, away
from an inflating air bag.
The ORC also monitors the readiness of the electronic
parts of the air bag system whenever the ignition switch
is in the START or ON/RUN positions. If the key is in the
LOCK position, in the ACC position, or not in the
ignition, the air bag system is not on and the air bags will
not inflate.
The ORC contains a backup power supply system that
may deploy the air bags even if the battery loses power or
it becomes disconnected prior to deployment.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 65
Also, the ORC turns on the “Air Bag Warning
Light” for four to eight seconds for a self-check
when the ignition is first turned to ON/RUN.
After the self-check, the “Air Bag Warning
Light” will turn off. If the ORC detects a malfunction in
any part of the system, it turns on the “Air Bag Warning
Light” either momentarily or continuously. A single
chime will sound if the light comes on again after initial
startup.
It also includes diagnostics that will illuminate the instru-
ment cluster Air Bag Warning Light if a malfunction is
noted that could affect the air bag system. The diagnos-
tics also record the nature of the malfunction.
WARNING!
Ignoring the Air Bag Warning Light in your instru-
ment panel could mean you won’t have the air bags
to protect you in a collision. If the light does not come
on as a bulb check when the ignition is first turned
on, stays on after you start the vehicle, or if it comes
on as you drive, have an authorized dealer service the
air bag system immediately.
Occupant Classification System (OCS)
The OCS is part of a Federally regulated safety system
required for this vehicle. It is designed to turn off the
passenger Advanced Front Air Bag for an empty seat and
for occupants classified in a category other than an adult.
This could be a child, teenager, or even an adult.
NOTE: Children 12 years or younger should always
ride buckled up in a rear seat in an appropriate child
restraint.
66 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
•
Occupant Classification Module (OCM)
The OCM is located beneath the front passenger seat. The
OCM classifies the occupant into categories based on the
measurements made by the seat weight sensors. The
OCM communicates with the ORC. The ORC uses the
occupant category to determine whether the passenger
Advanced Front Air Bag should be turned off. It also
determines the rate of air bag inflation during a collision.
•
Weight Sensors
Your vehicle has four Weight Sensors located between the
seat and the floor pan. The weight sensors measure
applied weight and transfers that information to the
OCM.
•
Passenger Air Bag Disable (PAD) Indicator Light
The PAD Indicator Light (an amber light located in the
center of the instrument panel) tells the driver and front
passenger when the passenger Advanced Front Air Bag is
turned off. The PAD Indicator light illuminates the words
“PASS AIR BAG OFF” to show that the passenger
Advanced Front Air Bag will not inflate during a collision
requiring air bag deployment. When the right front
passenger seat is empty or when very light objects are
placed on the seat, the passenger air bag will not inflate
even though the PAD indicator light is not illuminated.
Indicator Light Location
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 67
The PAD indicator light should not be illuminated when
an adult passenger is properly seated in the front passen-
ger seat. In this case, the passenger Advanced Front Air
Bag is ready to be inflated if a collision requires an air bag
deployment.
For all other occupants, the PAD indicator light will be
illuminated indicating that the passenger Advanced
Front Air Bag is turned off and will not inflate.
NOTE:
Even though this vehicle is equipped with an
occupant classification system, children 12 years or
younger should always ride buckled up in a rear seat in an
appropriate child restraint (refer to “Child Restraints”).
WARNING!
Never place a rear facing infant seat in front of an air
bag. A deploying passenger Advanced Front Air Bag
can cause death or serious injury to a child in a
rear-facing infant seat.
Passenger Air Bag Disable (PAD) System
Front Passenger Indicator Light Air Bag Status
Adult OFF ON
Child ON OFF
Grocery Bags,
Heavy Briefcases
and Other Rela-
tively Light Ob-
jects
ON OFF
Empty or Very
Light Objects
OFF* OFF
* Since the system senses weight, some small objects
will turn the PAD Indicator Light on.
68 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Drivers and adult passengers should verify that the PAD
Indicator Light is not illuminated when an adult is riding
in the front passenger seat. If an adult occupant’s weight
is transferred to another part of the vehicle (like the door
or instrument panel), the weight sensors in the seat may
not properly classify the occupant. Objects lodged under
the seat or between the seat and the center console can
prevent the occupant’s weight from being measured
properly and may result in the occupant being improp-
erly classified. Ensure that the front passenger seatback
does not touch anything placed on the second row of
seats because this can also affect occupant classification.
Also, if you fold down the seats in the second row check
to be sure they don’t touch the front passenger seat.
If the front passenger seat is damaged in any way, it
should only be serviced by an authorized dealer. If the
seat is removed (or even if the seat attachment bolts are
loosened or tightened in any way), take the vehicle to an
authorized dealer.
If there is a fault present in the air bag system, the Air Bag
Warning Light (a red light located in the center of the
instrument cluster directly in front of the driver) will be
turned on. This indicates that you should have an autho-
rized dealer service the system immediately. The Air Bag
Warning Light is turned on whenever there is a fault that
can affect the operation of the air bag system. If there is a
fault present in the PAD Indicator Light, the Air Bag
Warning Light will be illuminated to show that the
passenger Advanced Front Air Bag may be turned off
until the fault is cleared. If the Air Bag Warning Light is
illuminated, have an authorized dealer service the air bag
system immediately. If an object is lodged under the seat
and interferes with operation of the weight sensors, a
fault will occur which turns on both the PAD Indicator
Light and the Air Bag Warning Light. Once the lodged
object is removed, the fault will be automatically cleared
after a short period of time.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 69
Driver And Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag
Inflator Units
The Driver And Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag
Inflator Units are located in the center of the steering
wheel and on the right side of the instrument panel.
When the ORC detects a collision requiring the Ad-
vanced Front Air Bags, it signals the inflator units. A large
quantity of non-toxic gas is generated to inflate the
Advanced Front Air Bags. Different air bag inflation rates
are possible based on collision severity and type. The
steering wheel hub trim cover and the upper right side of
the instrument panel separate and fold out of the way as
the air bags inflate to their full size. The air bags fully
inflate in about 50 to 70 milliseconds. This is about half of
the time it takes to blink your eyes. The air bags then
quickly deflate while helping to restrain the driver and
front passenger.
The Advanced Front Air Bag gas is vented through the
vent holes in the sides of the air bag. In this way, the air
bags do not interfere with your control of the vehicle.
Along with seat belts and pretensioners, Advanced Front
Air Bags work with the knee bolsters to provide im-
proved protection for the driver and front passenger. Side
air bags also work with seat belts to improve occupant
protection.
Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains
(SABIC)
The Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains
(SABIC) may deploy during rollovers and collisions
where the impact is confined to a particular area of the
side of the vehicle, depending on the severity and type of
collision. In these events, the ORC will deploy the SABIC
only on the impact side of the vehicle. Because air bag
sensors estimate deceleration over time, vehicle speed
70 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
and damage by themselves are not good indicators of
whether or not an air bag should have deployed.
A quantity of non-toxic gas is generated to inflate the side
curtain air bag. The inflating side curtain air bag pushes
the outside edge of the headliner out of the way and
covers the window. The air bag inflates in about 30
milliseconds (about one quarter of the time it takes to
blink your eyes) with enough force to injure you if you
are not belted and seated properly, or if items are
positioned in the area where the side curtain air bag
inflates. This especially applies to children. The side
curtain air bag is only about 3
1
⁄
2
inches (9 cm) thick when
it is inflated.
The system includes side impact sensors that are cali-
brated to deploy the side air bags during impacts that
require air bag occupant protection.
WARNING!
If your vehicle is equipped with left and right
Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains
(SABIC), do not stack luggage or other cargo up high
enough to block the location of the SABIC. The area
where the SABIC is located should remain free from
any obstructions.
The front passenger seat assembly contains critical com-
ponents that affect the front passenger air bag deploy-
ment. Correctly functioning front passenger seat compo-
nents are critical for the Occupant Classification System
(OCS) to properly classify the front passenger and calcu-
late the proper air bag deployment. Do not make any
modifications to the front passenger seat components,
assembly, or to the seat cover.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 71
The following requirements must be strictly adhered to:
•
Do not modify the front passenger seat assembly or
components in any way.
•
Do not use prior or future model year seat covers not
designated for the specific model being repaired. Al-
ways use the correct seat cover specified for the
vehicle.
•
Do not replace the seat cover with an aftermarket seat
cover.
•
Do not add a secondary seat cover other than those
approved by Chrysler Group LLC/Mopar威.
•
At no time should any Supplemental Restraint System
(SRS) component or SRS related component or fas-
tener be modified or replaced with any part except
those which are approved by Chrysler Group
LLC/Mopar威.
WARNING!
Unapproved modifications or service procedures to
the front passenger seat assembly, its related compo-
nents or seat cover may inadvertently change the air
bag deployment in case of a frontal crash. This could
result in death or serious injury to the front seat
passenger if the vehicle is involved in a collision. A
modified vehicle may not comply with required
Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards (FMVSS)
and/or Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety Standards
(CMVSS).
Front And Side Impact Sensors
In front and side impacts, impact sensors can aid the
ORC in determining appropriate response to impact
events.
72 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Enhanced Accident Response System
In the event of an impact causing air bag deployment, if
the communication network remains intact, and the
power remains intact, depending on the nature of the
event the ORC will determine whether to have the
Enhanced Accident Response System perform the follow-
ing functions:
•
Cut off fuel to the engine.
•
Flash hazard lights as long as the battery has power or
until the ignition key is turned off.
•
Turn on the interior lights, which remain on as long as
the battery has power or until the ignition key is
removed.
•
Unlock the doors automatically.
If A Deployment Occurs
The front air bags are designed to deflate immediately
after deployment.
NOTE: Front and/or side air bags will not deploy in all
collisions. This does not mean something is wrong with
the air bag system.
If you do have a collision which deploys the air bags, any
or all of the following may occur:
•
The nylon air bag material may sometimes cause
abrasions and/or skin reddening to the driver and
front passenger as the air bags deploy and unfold. The
abrasions are similar to friction rope burns or those
you might get sliding along a carpet or gymnasium
floor. They are not caused by contact with chemicals.
They are not permanent and normally heal quickly.
However, if you haven’t healed significantly within a
few days, or if you have any blistering, see your doctor
immediately.
•
As the air bags deflate you may see some smoke-like
particles. The particles are a normal by-product of the
process that generates the non-toxic gas used for air
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 73
bag inflation. These airborne particles may irritate the
skin, eyes, nose, or throat. If you have skin or eye
irritation, rinse the area with cool water. For nose or
throat irritation, move to fresh air. If the irritation
continues, see your doctor. If these particles settle on
your clothing, follow the garment manufacturer’s in-
structions for cleaning.
Do not drive your vehicle after the air bags have de-
ployed. If you are involved in another collision, the air
bags will not be in place to protect you.
WARNING!
Deployed air bags cannot protect you in another
collision. Have the air bags, and seat belt retractor
assembly replaced by an authorized dealer immedi-
ately.
Maintaining Your Air Bag System
WARNING!
•
Modifications to any part of the air bag system
could cause it to fail when you need it. You could
be injured if the air bag system is not there to
protect you. Do not modify the components or
wiring, including adding any kind of badges or
stickers to the steering wheel hub trim cover or the
upper right side of the instrument panel. Do not
modify the front bumper or vehicle body structure
or add aftermarket side steps or running boards.
(Continued)
74 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
•
Do not attempt to modify any part of your air bag
system. The air bag may inflate accidentally or
may not function properly if modifications are
made. Take your vehicle to an authorized dealer
for any air bag system service. If your seat includ-
ing your trim cover and cushion needs to be
serviced in any way (including removal or
loosening/tightening of seat attachment bolts),
take the vehicle to your authorized dealer. Only
manufacturer approved seat accessories may be
used. If it is necessary to modify the air bag system
for persons with disabilities, contact your autho-
rized dealer.
•
It is dangerous to try to repair any part of the air
bag system yourself. Be sure to tell anyone who
works on your vehicle that it has an air bag system.
Air Bag Warning Light
You will want to have the air bags ready to
inflate for your protection in a collision. The
Air Bag Warning Light monitors the internal
circuits and interconnecting wiring associated
with air bag system electrical components. While the air
bag system is designed to be maintenance free. If any of
the following occurs, have an authorized dealer service
the air bag system immediately.
•
The Air Bag Warning Light does not come on during
the four to eight seconds when the ignition switch is
first turned to the ON/RUN position.
•
The Air Bag Warning Light remains on after the four to
eight-second interval.
•
The Air Bag Warning Light comes on intermittently or
remains on while driving.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 75
NOTE: If the speedometer, tachometer, or any engine
related gauges are not working, the Occupant Restraint
Controller (ORC) may also be disabled. The air bags may
not be ready to inflate for your protection. Promptly
check the fuse block for blown fuses. Refer to the label
located on the inside of the fuse block cover for the
proper air bag fuses. See your authorized dealer if the
fuse is good.
Event Data Recorder (EDR)
This vehicle is equipped with an event data recorder
(EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is to record, in
certain crash or near crash-like situations, such as an air
bag deployment or hitting a road obstacle, data that will
assist in understanding how a vehicle’s systems per-
formed. The EDR is designed to record data related to
vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a short period of
time, typically 30 seconds or less. The EDR in this vehicle
is designed to record such data as:
•
How various systems in your vehicle were operating;
•
Whether or not the driver and passenger safety belts
were buckled/fastened;
•
How far (if at all) the driver was depressing the
accelerator and/or brake pedal; and,
•
How fast the vehicle was traveling.
These data can help provide a better understanding of
the circumstances in which crashes and injuries occur.
NOTE: EDR data are recorded by your vehicle only if a
non-trivial crash situation occurs; no data are recorded by
the EDR under normal driving conditions and no per-
sonal data (e.g., name, gender, age, and crash location)
are recorded. However, other parties, such as law en-
forcement, could combine the EDR data with the type of
personally identifying data routinely acquired during a
crash investigation.
To read data recorded by an EDR, special equipment is
required, and access to the vehicle or the EDR is needed.
76 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
In addition to the vehicle manufacturer, other parties,
such as law enforcement, that have the special equip-
ment, can read the information if they have access to the
vehicle or the EDR.
Child Restraints
Everyone in your vehicle needs to be buckled up all the
time, including babies and children. Every state in the
United States and all Canadian provinces require that
small children ride in proper restraint systems. This is the
law, and you can be prosecuted for ignoring it.
Children 12 years or younger should ride properly
buckled up in a rear seat, if available. According to crash
statistics, children are safer when properly restrained in
the rear seats rather than in the front.
WARNING!
In a collision, an unrestrained child, even a tiny baby,
can become a projectile inside the vehicle. The force
required to hold even an infant on your lap can
become so great that you could not hold the child, no
matter how strong you are. The child and others
could be badly injured. Any child riding in your
vehicle should be in a proper restraint for the child’s
size.
There are different sizes and types of restraints for
children from newborn size to the child almost large
enough for an adult safety belt. Always check the child
seat Owner’s Manual to ensure you have the right seat
for your child. Use the restraint that is correct for your
child.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 77
Infants And Child Restraints
•
Safety experts recommend that children ride
rearward-facing in the vehicle until they are at least
one year old and weigh at least 20 lbs (9 kg). Two types
of child restraints can be used rearward-facing: infant
carriers and “convertible” child seats.
•
The infant carrier is only used rearward-facing in the
vehicle. It is recommended for children who weigh up
to about 20 lbs (9 kg). “Convertible” child seats can be
used either rearward-facing or forward-facing in the
vehicle. Convertible child seats often have a higher
weight limit in the rearward-facing direction than
infant carriers do, so they can be used rearward-facing
by children who weigh more than 20 lbs (9 kg) but are
less than one year old. Both types of child restraints are
held in the vehicle by the lap/shoulder belt or the
LATCH child restraint anchorage system. Refer to
“Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren (LATCH)”.
WARNING!
Rearward-facing child seats must never be used in
the front seat of a vehicle with the front passenger air
bag unless the air bag is turned off. An air bag
deployment could cause severe injury or death to
infants in this position.
Older Children And Child Restraints
Children who weigh more than 20 lbs (9 kg) and who are
older than one year can ride forward-facing in the
vehicle. Forward-facing child seats and convertible child
seats used in the forward-facing direction are for children
who weigh 20 to 40 lbs (9 to 18 kg) and who are older
than one year. These child seats are also held in the
vehicle by the lap/shoulder belt or the LATCH child
restraint anchorage system. Refer to “Lower Anchors and
Tether for CHildren (LATCH)”.
78 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
The belt-positioning booster seat is for children weighing
more than 40 lbs (18 kg), but who are still too small to fit
the vehicle’s seat belts properly. If the child cannot sit
with knees bent over the vehicle’s seat cushion while the
child’s back is against the seatback, they should use a
belt-positioning booster seat. The child and belt-
positioning booster seat are held in the vehicle by the
lap/shoulder belt.
Children Too Large For Booster Seats
Children who are large enough to wear the shoulder belt
comfortably, and whose legs are long enough to bend
over the front of the seat when their back is against the
seat back, should use the lap/shoulder belt in a rear seat.
•
Make sure that the child is upright in the seat.
•
The lap portion of the seat belt should be low on the
hips and as snug as possible.
•
Check belt fit periodically. A child’s squirming or
slouching can move the belt out of position.
•
If the shoulder belt contacts the face or neck, move the
child closer to the center of the vehicle. Never allow a
child to put the shoulder belt under an arm or behind
their back.
NOTE: For additional information, refer to
www.seatcheck.org or call 1–866–SEATCHECK. Cana-
dian residents should refer to Transport Canada’s web-
site for additional information: http://www.tc.gc.ca/
roadsafety/safedrivers/childsafety/index.htm
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 79
WARNING!
•
Improper installation can lead to failure of an
infant or child restraint. It could come loose in a
collision. The child could be badly injured or
killed. Follow the manufacturer’s directions ex-
actly when installing an infant or child restraint.
•
A rearward- facing infant restraint should only be
used in a rear seat. A rearward-facing infant re-
straint in the front seat may be struck by a deploy-
ing passenger air bag, which may cause severe or
fatal injury to the infant.
Here are some tips on getting the most out of your child
restraint:
•
Before buying any restraint system, make sure that it
has a label certifying that it meets all applicable Safety
Standards. Chrysler Group LLC also recommends that
you try a child restraint in the vehicle seats where you
will use it before you buy it.
•
The restraint must be appropriate for your child’s
weight and height. Check the label on the restraint for
weight and height limits.
•
Carefully follow the instructions that come with the
restraint. If you install the restraint improperly, it may
not work when you need it.
•
Buckle the child into the restraint exactly as the
manufacturer’s instructions tell you.
80 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
When your child restraint is not in use, secure it in
the vehicle with the seat belt or remove it from the
vehicle. Do not leave it loose in the vehicle. In a
sudden stop or accident, it could strike the occupants
or seatbacks and cause serious personal injury.
Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren (LATCH)
Your vehicle’s rear seat is equipped with the child re-
straint anchorage system called LATCH. The LATCH
system provides for the installation of the child restraint
without using the vehicle’s seat belts, instead securing the
child restraint using lower anchorages and upper tether
straps from the child restraint to the vehicle structure.
LATCH-compatible child restraint systems are now avail-
able. However, because the lower anchorages are to be
introduced over a period of years, child restraint systems
having attachments for those anchorages will continue to
have features for installation using the vehicle’s seat
belts. Child restraints having tether straps and hooks for
connection to the top tether anchorages have been avail-
able for some time. For some older child restraints, many
child restraint manufacturers offer add-on tether strap
kits or retrofit kits. You are urged to take advantage of all
the available attachments provided with your child re-
straint in any vehicle.
All three rear seating positions have lower anchorages
that are capable of accommodating LATCH-compatible
child seats having flexible webbing mounted attach-
ments. Child seats with fixed lower attachments must be
installed in the outboard seating positions only. The
center seating position will accommodate LATCH-
compatible lower anchorages with flexible webbing
mounted attachments only. Regardless of the specific
type of lower attachment. Never install LATCH-
compatible child seats such that two seats share a com-
mon lower anchorage.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 81
If you are installing LATCH-compatible child restraints
in adjacent rear seating positions, you can use the
LATCH anchors or the vehicle’s seat belt for the outboard
position, but you must use the vehicle’s seat belt at the
center position. If your child restraints are not LATCH-
compatible, you can only install the child restraints using
the vehicle’s seat belts. Please refer to “Installing The
LATCH-Compatible Child Restraint System” and “In-
stalling Child Restraints Using The Vehicle Seat Belt” for
typical installation instructions.
Installing The LATCH-Compatible Child Restraint
System
We urge you to carefully follow the directions of the
manufacturer when installing your child restraint. Not all
child restraint systems will be installed as described here.
Again, carefully follow the installation instructions that
were provided with the child restraint system.
The rear seat lower anchorages are round bars, located at
the rear of the seat cushion where it meets the seatback,
and are just visible when you lean into the rear seat to
install the child restraint. You will easily feel them if you
run your finger along the intersection of the seatback and
seat cushion surfaces.
Latch Anchorages
82 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
In addition, there are tether strap anchorages behind each
rear seating position located on the back of the seat.
Many, but not all, restraint systems will be equipped with
separate straps on each side, with each having a hook or
connector for attachment to the lower anchorage and a
means of adjusting the tension in the strap. Forward-
facing toddler restraints and some rear-facing infant
restraints will also be equipped with a tether strap, a
hook for attachment to the tether strap anchorage and a
means of adjusting the tension of the strap.
You will first loosen the child seat adjusters on the lower
straps and on the tether strap so that you can more easily
attach the hooks or connectors to the vehicle anchorages.
Next, attach the lower hooks or connectors over the top
of the anchorage bars, pushing aside the seat cover
material. Then, locate the tether anchorage directly be-
hind the seat where you are placing the child restraint
and attach the tether strap to the anchorage, being careful
to route the tether strap to provide the most direct path
between the anchor and the child restraint. For the
outboard seating positions, route the tether underneath
the head restraint and attach the hook to the tether
anchor located on the back of the seat. Finally, tighten all
three straps as you push the child restraint rearward and
Tether Strap Mounting
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 83
downward into the seat, removing slack in the straps
according to the child restraint manufacturer’s instruc-
tions.
WARNING!
Improper installation of a child restraint to the
LATCH anchorages can lead to failure of an infant or
child restraint. The child could be badly injured or
killed. Follow the manufacturer’s directions exactly
when installing an infant or child restraint.
Installing Child Restraints Using The Vehicle Seat
Belts
The seat belts in the passenger seating positions are
equipped with an Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) or
a cinching latch plate to secure a Child Restraint System
(CRS). These types of seat belts are designed to keep the
lap portion of the seat belt tight around the child restraint
so that it is not necessary to use a locking clip. The ALR
will make a ratcheting noise if you extract the entire belt
from the retractor and then allow the belt to retract into
the retractor. For additional information on ALR, refer to
“Automatic Locking Mode” description under “Seat
Belts in Passenger Seating Positions” section. The chart
below defines the seating positions with an Automatic
Locking Retractor (ALR) or a cinching latch plate.
Driver Center Passenger
First Row N/A N/A ALR
Second Row ALR Cinching
Latch Plate
ALR
Third Row N/A N/A N/A
•
N/A — Not Applicable
•
ALR — Automatic Locking Retractor
To attach a child restraint tether strap:
1. To install a child restraint with ALR, first, pull enough
of the seat belt webbing from the retractor to route it
84 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
through the belt path of the child restraint. Slide the latch
plate into the buckle until you hear a “click.” Next,
extract all the seat belt webbing out of the retractor and
then allow the belt to retract into the retractor. As the belt
retracts, you will hear a ratcheting sound. This indicates
the safety belt is now in the Automatic Locking mode.
2. Finally, pull on any excess webbing to tighten the lap
portion around the child restraint. Any seat belt system
will loosen with time, so check the belt occasionally, and
pull it tight if necessary.
Installing a Child Restraint with a Cinching Latch Plate:
1. To install a child restraint with a cinching latch plate,
first, pull enough of the seat belt webbing from the
retractor to route it through the belt path of the child.
Slide the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a
“click.”
2. Finally, pull on any excess webbing to tighten the lap
portion around the child restraint. Any seat belt system
will loosen with time, so check the belt occasionally, and
pull it tight if necessary.
•
In the rear seat, you may have trouble tightening the
lap/shoulder belt on the child restraint because the
buckle or latch plate is too close to the belt path
opening on the restraint. Disconnect the latch plate
from the buckle and twist the short buckle-end belt
several times to shorten it. Insert the latch plate into
the buckle with the release button facing out.
•
If the belt still can’t be tightened, or if pulling and
pushing on the restraint loosens the belt, disconnect
the latch plate from the buckle, turn the buckle
around, and insert the latch plate into the buckle
again. If you still can’t make the child restraint secure,
try a different seating position.
To attach a child restraint tether strap
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 85
•
Route the tether strap to provide the most direct path
for the strap between the anchor and the child seat,
preferably between the head restraint posts under-
neath the head restraint.
WARNING!
An incorrectly anchored tether strap could lead to
increased head motion and possible injury to the
child. Use only the anchor positions directly behind
the child seat to secure a child restraint top tether
strap.
Transporting Pets
Air Bags deploying in the front seat could harm your pet.
An unrestrained pet will be thrown about and possibly
injured, or injure a passenger during panic braking or in
an accident.
Pets should be restrained in the rear seat in pet harnesses
or pet carriers that are secured by seat belts.
Tether Strap Mounting
86 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS
A long break-in period is not required for the engine and
drivetrain (transmission and axle) in your vehicle.
Drive moderately during the first 300 miles (500 km).
After the initial 60 miles (100 km), speeds up to 50 or
55 mph (80 or 90 km/h) are desirable.
While cruising, brief full-throttle acceleration within the
limits of local traffic laws contributes to a good break-in.
Wide-open throttle acceleration in low gear can be detri-
mental and should be avoided.
The engine oil installed in the engine at the factory is a
high-quality energy conserving type lubricant. Oil
changes should be consistent with anticipated climate
conditions under which vehicle operations will occur. For
the recommended viscosity and quality grades, refer to
“Maintenance Procedures” in “Maintaining Your Ve-
hicle”. NON-DETERGENT OR STRAIGHT MINERAL
OILS MUST NEVER BE USED.
A new engine may consume some oil during its first few
thousand miles (kilometers) of operation. This should be
considered a normal part of the break-in and not inter-
preted as an indication of difficulty.
SAFETY TIPS
Transporting Passengers
NEVER TRANSPORT PASSENGERS IN THE CARGO
AREA.
WARNING!
•
Do not leave children or animals inside parked
vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat build-up may
cause serious injury or death.
(Continued)
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 87
WARNING! (Continued)
•
It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area,
inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people
riding in these areas are more likely to be seri-
ously injured or killed.
•
Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat
belts.
•
Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly.
Exhaust Gas
WARNING!
Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain carbon
monoxide (CO), which is colorless and odorless.
Breathing it can make you unconscious and can
eventually poison you. To avoid breathing (CO),
follow these safety tips:
Do not run the engine in a closed garage or in confined
areas any longer than needed to move your vehicle in or
out of the area.
If it is necessary to sit in a parked vehicle with the engine
running, adjust your heating or cooling controls to force
outside air into the vehicle. Set the blower at high speed.
88 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
If you are required to drive with the trunk/liftgate open,
make sure that all windows are closed and the climate
control BLOWER switch is set at high speed. DO NOT
use the recirculation mode.
The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into
the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust
system.
Whenever a change is noticed in the sound of the exhaust
system, when exhaust fumes can be detected inside the
vehicle, or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is
damaged, have a competent mechanic inspect the com-
plete exhaust system and adjacent body areas for broken,
damaged, deteriorated, or mispositioned parts. Open
seams or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes
to seep into the passenger compartment. In addition,
inspect the exhaust system each time the vehicle is raised
for lubrication or oil change. Replace as required.
Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The
Vehicle
Seat Belts
Inspect the belt system periodically, checking for cuts,
frays, and loose parts. Damaged parts must be replaced
immediately. Do not disassemble or modify the system.
Front seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a
collision. Rear seat belt assemblies must be replaced after
a collision if they have been damaged (i.e., bent retractor,
torn webbing, etc.). If there is any question regarding belt
or retractor condition, replace the belt.
Airbag Warning Light
The light should come on and remain on for four to eight
seconds as a bulb check when the ignition switch is first
turned ON. If the light is not lit during starting, see your
authorized dealer. If the light stays on, flickers, or comes
on while driving, have the system checked by an autho-
rized dealer.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 89
Defroster
Check operation by selecting the defrost mode and place
the blower control on high speed. You should be able to
feel the air directed against the windshield. See your
authorized dealer for service if your defroster is
inoperable.
Floor Mat Safety Information
Always use floor mats designed to fit the footwell of your
vehicle. Use only floor mats that leave the pedal area
unobstructed and that are firmly secured so that they
cannot slip out of position and interfere with the pedals
or impair safe operation of your vehicle in other ways.
WARNING!
Pedals that cannot move freely can cause loss of
vehicle control and increase the risk of serious per-
sonal injury.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
•
Always make sure that floor mats are properly
attached to the floor mat fasteners.
•
Never place or install floor mats or other floor
coverings in the vehicle that cannot be properly
secured to prevent them from moving and inter-
fering with the pedals or the ability to control the
vehicle.
•
Never put floor mats or other floor coverings on
top of already installed floor mats. Additional
floor mats and other coverings will reduce the size
of the pedal area and interfere with the pedals.
•
Check mounting of mats on a regular basis. Al-
ways properly reinstall and secure floor mats that
have been removed for cleaning.
(Continued)
90 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
•
Always make sure that objects cannot fall into the
driver footwell while the vehicle is moving. Ob-
jects can become trapped under the brake pedal
and accelerator pedal causing a loss of vehicle
control.
•
If required, mounting posts must be properly
installed, if not equipped from the factory.
Failure to properly follow floor mat installation or
mounting can cause interference with the brake
pedal and accelerator pedal operation causing loss
of control of the vehicle.
Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make Outside
The Vehicle
Tires
Examine tires for excessive tread wear and uneven wear
patterns. Check for stones, nails, glass, or other objects
lodged in the tread or sidewall. Inspect the tread for cuts
and cracks. Inspect sidewalls for cuts, cracks and bulges.
Check the wheel nuts for tightness. Check the tires
(including spare) for proper cold inflation pressure.
Lights
Have someone observe the operation of exterior lights
while you work the controls. Check turn signal and high
beam indicator lights on the instrument panel.
Door Latches
Check for positive closing, latching, and locking.
Fluid Leaks
Check area under vehicle after overnight parking for fuel,
engine coolant, oil, or other fluid leaks. Also, if gasoline
fumes are detected or if fuel, power steering fluid, or
brake fluid leaks are suspected, the cause should be
located and corrected immediately.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 91
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
CONTENTS
䡵 Mirrors .............................. 99
▫ Inside Day/Night Mirror ................ 99
▫ Automatic Dimming Mirror — If Equipped . . 100
▫ Outside Mirrors ..................... 101
▫ Power Mirrors ...................... 101
▫ Heated Mirrors — If Equipped ........... 102
▫ Illuminated Vanity Mirrors — If Equipped . . 102
▫ Sun Visor “Slide-On-Rod” Feature — If
Equipped .......................... 103
䡵 Uconnect™ Phone — If Equipped .......... 103
▫ Operation ......................... 105
▫ Phone Call Features .................. 113
▫ Uconnect™ Phone Features ............. 116
▫ Advanced Phone Connectivity ........... 120
▫ Things You Should Know About Your
Uconnect™ Phone .................... 122
▫ General Information .................. 133
3
䡵 Voice Command — If Equipped ........... 133
▫ Voice Command System Operation ........ 133
▫ Commands ........................ 134
▫ Voice Training ...................... 138
䡵 Seats .............................. 138
▫ Driver’s Power Seat — If Equipped ....... 139
▫ Heated Seats — If Equipped ............ 140
▫ Manual Front Seat Adjustments .......... 142
▫ Front Seat — Manual Recline ............ 143
▫ Manual Lumbar Support — If Equipped .... 144
▫ Fold-Flat Front Passenger Seat — If
Equipped .......................... 144
▫ Head Restraints ..................... 145
▫ 60/40 Split Folding Rear Seat With Fold-Flat
Feature ........................... 149
䡵 Driver Memory Seat — If Equipped ........ 151
▫ Programming The Memory Feature ....... 152
▫ Linking And Unlinking The Remote Keyless
Entry Transmitter To Memory ........... 153
▫ Memory Position Recall ................ 154
▫ Easy Entry/Exit Seat
(Available With Memory Seat Only) ....... 154
䡵 To Open And Close The Hood ............ 156
䡵 Lights ............................. 158
▫ Multifunction Lever .................. 158
▫ Headlights And Parking Lights .......... 158
▫ Automatic Headlights — If Equipped ...... 159
94 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
▫ Headlights With Wipers (Available With
Automatic Headlights Only) ............ 160
▫ Headlight Time Delay — If Equipped ...... 160
▫ Daytime Running Lights — If Equipped .... 161
▫ Lights-On Reminder .................. 161
▫ Fog Lights — If Equipped .............. 161
▫ Turn Signals ........................ 162
▫ High/Low Beam Switch ............... 162
▫ Flash-To-Pass ....................... 162
▫ Instrument Panel Dimmer .............. 163
▫ Map/Reading Lights .................. 163
▫ Cargo Light ........................ 164
▫ Battery Saver Feature ................. 164
䡵 Windshield Wipers And Washers .......... 164
▫ Windshield Wiper Operation ............ 165
▫ Intermittent Wiper System .............. 166
▫ Windshield Washers .................. 167
▫ Mist Feature ........................ 168
▫ Rain Sensing Wipers — If Equipped ....... 168
▫ Headlights With Wipers (Available With
Automatic Headlights Only) ............ 170
䡵 Tilt Steering Column ................... 170
䡵 Electronic Speed Control — If Equipped ..... 171
▫ To Activate ......................... 172
▫ To Set A Desired Speed ................ 173
▫ To Deactivate ....................... 173
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 95
▫ To Resume Speed .................... 173
▫ To Vary The Speed Setting .............. 173
▫ To Accelerate For Passing .............. 174
䡵 Parksense威 Rear Park Assist — If Equipped . . . 175
▫ Parksense威 Sensors ................... 175
▫ Parksense威 Warning Display ............ 175
▫ Parksense威 Display ................... 176
▫ Enabling And Disabling Parksense威 ....... 180
▫ Service The Parksense威 Rear Park Assist
System ............................ 180
▫ Cleaning The Parksense威 System ......... 181
▫ Parksense威 System Usage Precautions ...... 181
䡵 Garage Door Opener — If Equipped ........ 183
▫ Programming HomeLink威 .............. 184
▫ Gate Operator/Canadian Programming .... 187
▫ Using HomeLink威 ................... 188
▫ Reprogramming A Single
HomeLink威 Button ................... 188
▫ Security ........................... 188
▫ Troubleshooting Tips .................. 188
▫ General Information .................. 189
䡵 Power Sunroof — If Equipped ............ 190
▫ Opening Sunroof — Express ............ 191
▫ Opening Sunroof — Manual Mode ........ 191
▫ Closing Sunroof — Express ............. 191
96 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
▫ Closing Sunroof — Manual Mode ........ 191
▫ Pinch Protect Feature ................. 191
▫ Pinch Protect Override ................ 192
▫ Venting Sunroof — Express ............. 192
▫ Sunshade Operation .................. 192
▫ Wind Buffeting ...................... 192
▫ Sunroof Maintenance ................. 192
▫ Ignition Off Operation ................. 193
䡵 Sky Slider™ Full Length Open Roof —
If Equipped .......................... 193
▫ Sky Slider™ Usage Precautions .......... 193
▫ Sky Slider™ Control .................. 195
▫ Opening The Sky Slider™ .............. 196
▫ Closing The Sky Slider™ ............... 196
▫ Anti-Pinch Protect Feature .............. 197
▫ Wind Buffeting ...................... 197
▫ Sky Slider™ Maintenance .............. 198
䡵 Electrical Power Outlet ................. 198
䡵 Cupholders .......................... 201
䡵 Storage ............................. 202
▫ Glove Box Storage Compartment ......... 202
▫ Front Storage Compartment ............. 202
▫ Console Storage Compartment ........... 203
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 97
䡵 Cargo Area Features ................... 204
▫ Cargo Load Floor .................... 204
䡵 Rear Window Features .................. 210
▫ Rear Window Wiper/Washer ............ 210
▫ Rear Window Defroster ................ 211
䡵 Roof Luggage Rack — If Equipped ......... 212
98 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
MIRRORS
Inside Day/Night Mirror
A two-point pivot system allows for horizontal and
vertical mirror adjustment. Adjust the mirror to center on
the view through the rear window.
Headlight glare can be reduced by moving the small
control under the mirror to the night position (toward the
rear of vehicle). The mirror should be adjusted while set
in the day position (toward the windshield).
Adjusting Rearview Mirror
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 99
Automatic Dimming Mirror — If Equipped
This mirror automatically adjusts for headlight glare
from vehicles behind you. You can turn the feature on or
off by pressing the button at the base of the mirror. A light
to the left of the button will illuminate to indicate when
the dimming feature is activated. The sensor to the right
of the button does not illuminate.
CAUTION!
To avoid damage to the mirror during cleaning, never
spray any cleaning solution directly onto the mirror.
Apply the solution onto a clean cloth and wipe the
mirror clean.
Automatic Dimming Mirror
100 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Outside Mirrors
To receive maximum benefit, adjust the outside mirror(s)
to center on the adjacent lane of traffic and a slight
overlap of the view obtained from the inside mirror.
NOTE: The passenger side convex outside mirror will
give a much wider view to the rear, and especially of the
lane next to your vehicle.
WARNING!
Vehicles and other objects seen in the passenger side
convex mirror will look smaller and farther away
than they really are. Relying too much on your
passenger side convex mirror could cause you to
collide with another vehicle or other object. Use your
inside mirror when judging the size or distance of a
vehicle seen in the passenger side convex mirror.
Power Mirrors
The power mirror switch is located on the driver’s door
trim panel.
Power Mirror Switch
1 — Mirror Direction Control
2 — Left and Right Mirror Select
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 101
Models With Express Window Feature
Press and release the mirror select button marked L (left)
or R (right) and then press one of the four arrow buttons
to move the mirror in the direction the arrow is pointing.
The selection will time out after 30 seconds of inactivity
to guard against accidentally moving a mirror position
following an adjustment.
NOTE: For vehicles equipped with Driver Memory
Seat, you can use your Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
transmitter or the memory switch on the instrument
panel to return the power mirrors to pre-programmed
positions. Refer to “Driver Memory Seat” in “Under-
standing The Features Of Your Vehicle” for further
information.
Models Without Express Window Feature
Press the mirror select button marked L (left) or R (right)
and then press one of the four arrow buttons to move the
mirror in the direction the arrow is pointing.
Heated Mirrors — If Equipped
These mirrors are heated to melt frost or ice. This
feature is activated whenever you turn on the rear
window defroster. Refer to “Rear Window Features” in
“Understanding The Features of Your Vehicle” for further
information.
Illuminated Vanity Mirrors — If Equipped
An illuminated vanity mirror is on each sun visor. To use
the mirror, rotate the sun visor down and swing the
mirror cover upward. The lights will turn on automati-
cally. Closing the mirror cover will turn off the light.
102 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Sun Visor “Slide-On-Rod” Feature — If Equipped
The sun visor “Slide-On-Rod” feature allows for addi-
tional flexibility in positioning the sun visor to block out
the sun.
1. Fold down the sun visor.
2. Unclip the visor from the center clip.
3. Pull the sun visor toward the inside rearview mirror to
extend it.
Uconnect™ Phone — IF EQUIPPED
Uconnect™ Phone is a voice-activated, hands-free, in-
vehicle communications system. Uconnect™ Phone al-
lows you to dial a phone number with your mobile
phone using simple voice commands (e.g., “Call” ѧ
“Mike” ѧ “Work” or “Dial” ѧ “248-555-1212”). Your
mobile phone’s audio is transmitted through your vehi-
cle’s audio system; the system will automatically mute
your radio when using the Uconnect™ Phone.
NOTE: The Uconnect™ Phone requires a mobile phone
equipped with the Bluetooth威 “Hands-Free Profile”, Ver-
sion 0.96 or higher. See the Uconnect™ website for
supported phones.
Illuminated Vanity Mirror
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 103
For Uconnect™ customer support, visit the following
websites:
•
www.chrysler.com/uconnect
•
www.dodge.com/uconnect
•
www.jeep.com/uconnect
•
or call 1–877–855–8400
Uconnect™ Phone allows you to transfer calls between
the system and your mobile phone as you enter or exit
your vehicle and enables you to mute the system’s
microphone for private conversation.
The Uconnect™ Phone is driven through your
Bluetooth威 “Hands-Free Profile” mobile phone.
Uconnect™ features Bluetooth威 technology - the global
standard that enables different electronic devices to con-
nect to each other without wires or a docking station, so
Uconnect™ Phone works no matter where you stow your
mobile phone (be it your purse, pocket, or briefcase), as
long as your phone is turned on and has been paired to
the vehicle’s Uconnect™ Phone. The Uconnect™ Phone
allows up to seven mobile phones to be linked to the
system. Only one linked (or paired) mobile phone can be
used with the system at a time. The system is available in
English, Spanish, or French languages.
WARNING!
Any voice commanded system should be used only
in safe driving conditions following local laws and
phone use. All attention should be kept on the
roadway ahead. Failure to do so may result in a
collision causing serious injury or death.
104 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Uconnect™ Phone Button
The radio or steering wheel controls (if
equipped) will contain the two control buttons
(Uconnect™ Phone
button and Voice
Command
button) that will enable you
to access the system. When you press the button you will
hear the word Uconnect™ followed by a BEEP. The beep
is your signal to give a command.
Voice Command Button
Actual button location may vary with the ra-
dio. The individual buttons are described in the
“Operation” section.
The Uconnect™ Phone can be used with any Hands-Free
Profile certified Bluetooth威 mobile phone. See the
Uconnect™ website for supported phones. Refer to your
mobile service provider or the phone manufacturer for
details.
The Uconnect™ Phone is fully integrated with the vehi-
cle’s audio system. The volume of the Uconnect™ Phone
can be adjusted either from the radio volume control
knob or from the steering wheel radio control (right
switch), if so equipped.
The radio display will be used for visual prompts from
the Uconnect™ Phone such as “CELL” or caller ID on
certain radios.
Operation
Voice commands can be used to operate the Uconnect™
Phone and to navigate through the Uconnect™ Phone
menu structure. Voice commands are required after most
Uconnect™ Phone prompts. You will be prompted for a
specific command and then guided through the available
options.
•
Prior to giving a voice command, one must wait for
the beep, which follows the “Ready” prompt or an-
other prompt.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 105
•
For certain operations, compound commands can be
used. For example, instead of saying “Setup” and then
“Pair a Device”, the following compound command
can be said: “Pair a Bluetooth威 Device”.
•
For each feature explanation in this section, only the
compound form of the voice command is given. You
can also break the commands into parts and say each
part of the command when you are asked for it. For
example, you can use the compound form voice
command “Phonebook New Entry”, or you can break
the compound form command into two voice com-
mands: “Phonebook” and “New Entry”. Please re-
member, the Uconnect™ Phone works best when you
talk in a normal conversational tone, as if speaking to
someone sitting a few feet/meters away from you.
Voice Command Tree
Refer to “Voice Tree” in this section.
Help Command
If you need assistance at any prompt, or if you want to
know your options at any prompt, say “Help” following
the beep. The Uconnect™ Phone will play some of the
options at any prompt if you ask for help.
To activate the Uconnect™ Phone, simply press the
button and follow the audible prompts for directions.
Uconnect™ Phone sessions begin with a press of the
button on the radio control head.
Cancel Command
At any prompt, after the beep, you can say “Cancel” and
you will be returned to the main menu. However, in a
few instances the system will take you back to the
previous menu.
Pair (Link) Uconnect™ Phone To A Mobile Phone
To begin using your Uconnect™ Phone, you must pair
your compatible Bluetooth威 enabled mobile phone.
106 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
To complete the pairing process, you will need to refer-
ence your mobile phone Owner’s Manual. The
Uconnect™ website may also provide detailed instruc-
tions for pairing.
The following are general phone to Uconnect™ Phone
pairing instructions:
•
Press the button to begin.
•
After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
“Device Pairing”.
•
When prompted, after the beep, say “Pair a Device”
and follow the audible prompts.
•
You will be asked to say a four-digit Personal Identi-
fication Number (PIN), which you will later need to
enter into your mobile phone. You can enter any
four-digit PIN. You will not need to remember this PIN
after the initial pairing process.
•
For identification purposes, you will be prompted to
give the Uconnect™ Phone a name for your mobile
phone. Each mobile phone that is paired should be
given a unique phone name.
•
You will then be asked to give your mobile phone a
priority level between one and seven, with one being
the highest priority. You can pair up to seven mobile
phones to your Uconnect™ Phone. However, at any
given time, only one mobile phone can be in use,
connected to your Uconnect™ System. The priority
allows the Uconnect™ Phone to know which mobile
phone to use if multiple mobile phones are in the
vehicle at the same time. For example, if priority three
and priority five phones are present in the vehicle, the
Uconnect™ Phone will use the priority three mobile
phone when you make a call. You can select to use a
lower priority mobile phone at any time (refer to
“Advanced Phone Connectivity” in this section).
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 107
Dial By Saying A Number
•
Press the button to begin.
•
After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
“Dial”.
•
The system will prompt you to say the number you
want to call.
•
For example, you can say “234-567-8901”.
•
The Uconnect™ Phone will confirm the phone number
and then dial. The number will appear in the display
of certain radios.
Call By Saying A Name
•
Press the button to begin.
•
After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
“Call”.
•
The system will prompt you to say the name of the
person you want to call.
•
After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
the name of the person you want to call. For example,
you can say “John Doe”, where John Doe is a previ-
ously stored name entry in the Uconnect™ phonebook
or downloaded phonebook. To learn how to store a
name in the phonebook, refer to “Add Names to Your
Uconnect™ Phonebook”, in the phonebook.
•
The Uconnect™ system will confirm the name and
then dial the corresponding phone number, which
may appear in the display of certain radios.
Add Names To Your Uconnect™ Phonebook
NOTE: Adding names to the Uconnect™ Phonebook is
recommended when the vehicle is not in motion.
•
Press the button to begin.
108 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
•
After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
“Phonebook New Entry”.
•
When prompted, say the name of the new entry. Use of
long names helps the Voice Command and it is recom-
mended. For example, say “Robert Smith” or “Robert”
instead of “Bob”.
•
When prompted, enter the number designation (e.g.,
“Home”, “Work”, “Mobile”, or “Other”). This will
allow you to store multiple numbers for each phone-
book entry, if desired.
•
When prompted, recite the phone number for the
phonebook entry that you are adding.
After you are finished adding an entry into the phone-
book, you will be given the opportunity to add more
phone numbers to the current entry or to return to the
main menu.
The Uconnect™ Phone will allow you to enter up to 32
names in the phonebook with each name having up to
four associated phone numbers and designations. Each
language has a separate 32-name phonebook accessible
only in that language. In addition, if equipped and
supported by your phone, Uconnect™ Phone automati-
cally downloads your mobile phone’s phonebook.
Phonebook Download – Automatic Phonebook
Transfer From Mobile Phone
If equipped and specifically supported by your phone,
Uconnect™ Phone automatically downloads names (text
names) and number entries from your mobile phone’s
phonebook. Specific Bluetooth威 Phones with Phone Book
Access Profile may support this feature. See Uconnect™
website for supported phones.
•
To call a name from the Uconnect™ Phonebook or
downloaded Phonebook, follow the procedure in
“Call by Saying a Name” section.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 109
•
Automatic download and update, if supported, begins
as soon as the Bluetooth威 wireless phone connection is
made to the Uconnect™ Phone, for example, after you
start the vehicle.
•
A maximum of 1000 entries per phone will be down-
loaded and updated every time a phone is connected
to the Uconnect™ Phone.
•
Depending on the maximum number of entries down-
loaded, there may be a short delay before the latest
downloaded names can be used. Until then, if avail-
able, the previously downloaded phonebook is avail-
able for use.
•
Only the phonebook of the currently connected mobile
phone is accessible.
•
Only the mobile phone’s phonebook is downloaded.
SIM card phonebook is not part of the Mobile phone-
book.
•
This downloaded phonebook cannot be edited or
deleted on the Uconnect™ Phone. These can only be
edited on the mobile phone. The changes are trans-
ferred and updated to Uconnect™ Phone on the next
phone connection.
Edit Uconnect™ Phonebook Entries
NOTE:
•
Editing names in the phonebook is recommended
when the vehicle is not in motion.
•
Automatic downloaded phonebook entries cannot be
deleted or edited.
•
Press the button to begin.
•
After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
“Phonebook Edit Entry”.
•
You will then be asked for the name of the phonebook
entry that you wish to edit.
110 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
•
Next, choose the number designation (home, work,
mobile, or other) that you wish to edit.
•
When prompted, recite the new phone number for the
phonebook entry that you are editing.
After you are finished editing an entry in the phonebook,
you will be given the opportunity to edit another entry in
the phonebook, call the number you just edited, or return
to the main menu.
“Phonebook Edit Entry” can be used to add another
phone number to a name entry that already exists in the
phonebook. For example, the entry John Doe may have a
mobile and a home number, but you can add “John
Doe’s” work number later using the “Phonebook Edit
Entry” feature.
Delete Uconnect™ Phonebook Entry
NOTE: Editing phonebook entries is recommended
when the vehicle is not in motion.
•
Press the button to begin.
•
After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
“Phonebook Delete”.
•
After you enter the Phonebook Delete menu, you will
then be asked for the name of the entry that you wish
to delete. You can either say the name of a phonebook
entry that you wish to delete or you can say “List
Names” to hear a list of the entries in the phonebook
from which you choose. To select one of the entries
from the list, press the
button while the
Uconnect™ Phone is playing the desired entry and say
“Delete”.
•
After you enter the name, the Uconnect™ Phone will
ask you which designation you wish to delete: home,
work, mobile, other, or all. Say the designation you
wish to delete.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 111
•
Note that only the phonebook entry in the current
language is deleted.
•
Automatic downloaded phonebook entries cannot be
deleted or edited.
Delete/Erase “All” Uconnect™ Phonebook Entries
•
Press the button to begin.
•
After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
“Phonebook Erase All”.
•
The Uconnect™ Phone will ask you to verify that you
wish to delete all the entries from the phonebook.
•
After confirmation, the phonebook entries will be
deleted.
•
Note that only the phonebook in the current language
is deleted.
•
Automatic downloaded phonebook entries cannot be
deleted or edited.
List All Names In The Uconnect™ Phonebook
•
Press the button to begin.
•
After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
“Phonebook List Names”.
•
The Uconnect™ Phone will play the names of all the
phonebook entries, including the downloaded phone-
book entries, if available.
•
To call one of the names in the list, press the
button during the playing of the desired name, and
say “Call”.
NOTE: The user can also exercise “Edit” or “Delete”
operations at this point.
•
The Uconnect™ Phone will then prompt you as to the
number designation you wish to call.
112 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
•
The selected number will be dialed.
Phone Call Features
The following features can be accessed through the
Uconnect™ Phone if the feature(s) are available on your
mobile service plan. For example, if your mobile service
plan provides three-way calling, this feature can be
accessed through the Uconnect™ Phone. Check with
your mobile service provider for the features that you
have.
Answer Or Reject An Incoming Call — No Call
Currently In Progress
When you receive a call on your mobile phone, the
Uconnect™ Phone will interrupt the vehicle audio sys-
tem, if on, and will ask if you would like to answer the
call. Press the
button to accept the call. To reject the
call, press and hold the
button until you hear a
single beep, indicating that the incoming call was
rejected.
Answer Or Reject An Incoming Call — Call
Currently In Progress
If a call is currently in progress and you have another
incoming call, you will hear the same network tones for
call waiting that you normally hear when using your
mobile phone. Press the
button to place the current
call on hold and answer the incoming call.
NOTE: The Uconnect™ Phone compatible phones in the
market today do not support rejecting an incoming call
when another call is in progress. Therefore, the user can
only answer an incoming call or ignore it.
Making A Second Call While Current Call Is In
Progress
To make a second call while you are currently on a call,
press the button and say “Dial” or “Call” followed
by the phone number or phonebook entry you wish to
call. The first call will be on hold while the second call is
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 113
in progress. To go back to the first call, refer to “Toggling
Between Calls” in this section. To combine two calls, refer
to “Conference Call” in this section.
Place/Retrieve A Call From Hold
To put a call on hold, press the button until you hear
a single beep. This indicates that the call is on hold. To
bring the call back from hold, press and hold the
button until you hear a single beep.
Toggling Between Calls
If two calls are in progress (one active and one on hold),
press the
button until you hear a single beep,
indicating that the active and hold status of the two calls
have switched. Only one call can be placed on hold at a
time.
Conference Call
When two calls are in progress (one active and one on
hold), press and hold the
button until you hear a
double beep indicating that the two calls have been
joined into one conference call.
Three-Way Calling
To initiate three-way calling, press the button
while a call is in progress, and make a second phone call,
as described under “Making a Second Call While Current
Call is in Progress”. After the second call has established,
press and hold the
button until you hear a double
beep, indicating that the two calls have been joined into
one conference call.
114 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Call Termination
To end a call in progress, momentarily press the
button. Only the active call(s) will be terminated and if
there is a call on hold, it will become the new active call.
If the active call is terminated by the phone far end, a call
on hold may not become active automatically. This is cell
phone-dependent. To bring the call back from hold, press
and hold the
button until you hear a single beep.
Redial
•
Press the button to begin.
•
After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
“Redial”.
•
The Uconnect™ Phone will call the last number that
was dialed from your mobile phone.
NOTE: This may not be the last number dialed from the
Uconnect™ Phone.
Call Continuation
Call continuation is the progression of a phone call on the
Uconnect™ Phone after the vehicle ignition key has been
switched to OFF. Call continuation functionality avail-
able on the vehicle can be any one of three types:
•
After the ignition key is switched to OFF, a call can
continue on the Uconnect™ Phone either until the call
ends, or until the vehicle battery condition dictates
cessation of the call on the Uconnect™ Phone and
transfer of the call to the mobile phone.
•
After the ignition key is switched to OFF, a call can
continue on the Uconnect™ Phone for a certain dura-
tion, after which the call is automatically transferred
from the Uconnect™ Phone to the mobile phone.
•
An active call is automatically transferred to the
mobile phone after the ignition key is switched to OFF.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 115
Uconnect™ Phone Features
Language Selection
To change the language that the Uconnect™ Phone is
using:
•
Press the button to begin.
•
After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
the name of the language you wish to switch to
English, Espanol, or Francais.
•
Continue to follow the system prompts to complete
the language selection.
After selecting one of the languages, all prompts and
voice commands will be in that language.
NOTE: After every Uconnect™ Phone language change
operation, only the language-specific 32-name phone-
book is usable. The paired phone name is not language-
specific and is usable across all languages.
Emergency Assistance
If you are in an emergency and the mobile phone is
reachable:
•
Pick up the phone and manually dial the emergency
number for your area.
If the phone is not reachable and the Uconnect™ Phone is
operational, you may reach the emergency number as
follows:
•
Press the button to begin.
•
After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
“Emergency” and the Uconnect™ Phone will instruct
the paired mobile phone to call the emergency num-
ber. This feature is supported in the U.S., Canada, and
Mexico.
NOTE:
•
The emergency number dialed is based on the country
where the vehicle is purchased (911 for the U.S. and
116 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Canada and 060 for Mexico). The number dialed may
not be applicable with the available mobile service and
area.
•
If supported, this number may be programmable on
some systems. To do this, press the
button and
say “Setup”, followed by “Emergency”.
•
The Uconnect™ Phone does slightly lower your
chances of successfully making a phone call as to that
for the mobile phone directly.
WARNING!
To use your Uconnect™ Phone System in an emer-
gency, your mobile phone must be:
•
turned on,
•
paired to the Uconnect™ System,
•
and have network coverage.
Towing Assistance
If you need towing assistance:
•
Press the button to begin.
•
After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
“Towing Assistance”.
NOTE:
•
The towing assistance number dialed is based on the
country where the vehicle is purchased (1-800-528-
2069 for the U.S., 1-877-213-4525 for Canada, 55-14-
3454 for Mexico City and 1-800-712-3040 for outside
Mexico City in Mexico). Please refer to the 24-Hour
“Towing Assistance” coverage details on the DVD in
the Warranty Information Booklet and the 24-Hour
Towing Assistance references.
•
If supported, this number may be programmable on
some systems. To do this, press the button and
say “Setup”, followed by “Towing Assistance”.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 117
Paging
To learn how to page, refer to “Working with Automated
Systems”. Paging works properly except for pagers of
certain companies, which time out a little too soon to
work properly with the Uconnect™ Phone.
Voice Mail Calling
To learn how to access your voice mail, refer to “Working
with Automated Systems”.
Working With Automated Systems
This method is used in instances where one generally has
to press numbers on the mobile phone keypad while
navigating through an automated telephone system.
You can use your Uconnect™ Phone to access a voice
mail system or an automated service, such as a paging
service or automated customer service line. Some ser-
vices require immediate response selection. In some
instances, that may be too quick for use of the
Uconnect™ Phone.
When calling a number with your Uconnect™ Phone that
normally requires you to enter in a touch-tone sequence
on your mobile phone keypad, you can press the
button and say the sequence you wish to enter, followed
by the word “Send”. For example, if required to enter
your PIN followed with a pound, (3746#),youcan
press the
button and say, “3746#Send”. Saying
a number, or sequence of numbers, followed by “Send”,
is also to be used for navigating through an automated
customer service center menu structure, and to leave a
number on a pager.
You can also send stored Uconnect™ phonebook entries
as tones for fast and easy access to voice mail and pager
entries. To use this feature, dial the number you wish to
call and then press the
button and say, “Send.” The
system will prompt you to enter the name or number and
say the name of the phonebook entry you wish to send.
118 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
The Uconnect™ Phone will then send the corresponding
phone number associated with the phonebook entry, as
tones over the phone.
NOTE:
•
You may not hear all of the tones due to mobile phone
network configurations. This is normal.
•
Some paging and voice mail systems have system time
out settings that are too short and may not allow the
use of this feature.
Barge In — Overriding Prompts
The “Voice Command” button can be used when you
wish to skip part of a prompt and issue your voice
command immediately. For example, if a prompt is
asking “Would you like to pair a phone, clear a...,” you
could press the
button and say, “Pair a Phone” to
select that option without having to listen to the rest of
the voice prompt.
Turning Confirmation Prompts ON/OFF
Turning confirmation prompts off will stop the system
from confirming your choices (e.g., the Uconnect™
Phone will not repeat a phone number before you dial it).
•
Press the button to begin.
•
After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
one of the following:
−
“Setup Confirmation Prompts On”
−
“Setup Confirmation Prompts Off”
Phone And Network Status Indicators
If available on the radio and/or on a premium display
such as the instrument panel cluster, and supported by
your mobile phone, the Uconnect™ Phone will provide
notification to inform you of your phone and network
status when you are attempting to make a phone call
using Uconnect™ Phone. The status is given for network
signal strength, phone battery strength, etc.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 119
Dialing Using The Mobile Phone Keypad
You can dial a phone number with your mobile phone
keypad and still use the Uconnect™ Phone (while dialing
via the mobile phone keypad, the user must exercise
caution and take precautionary safety measures). By
dialing a number with your paired Bluetooth威 mobile
phone, the audio will be played through your vehicle’s
audio system. The Uconnect™ Phone will work the same
as if you dial the number using Voice Command.
NOTE: Certain brands of mobile phones do not send the
dial ring to the Uconnect™ Phone to play it on the vehicle
audio system, so you will not hear it. Under this situa-
tion, after successfully dialing a number the user may feel
that the call did not go through even though the call is in
progress. Once your call is answered, you will hear the
audio.
Mute/Un-Mute (Mute OFF)
When you mute the Uconnect™ Phone, you will still be
able to hear the conversation coming from the other
party, but the other party will not be able to hear you. In
order to mute the Uconnect™ Phone:
•
Press the button.
•
Following the beep, say “Mute”.
In order to un-mute the Uconnect™ Phone:
•
Press the button.
•
Following the beep, say “Mute off”.
Advanced Phone Connectivity
Transfer Call To And From Mobile Phone
The Uconnect™ Phone allows ongoing calls to be trans-
ferred from your mobile phone to the Uconnect™ Phone
without terminating the call. To transfer an ongoing call
120 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
from your Uconnect™ Phone paired mobile phone to the
Uconnect™ Phone or vice versa, press the
button
and say “Transfer Call”.
Connect Or Disconnect Link Between The
Uconnect™ Phone And Mobile Phone
Your mobile phone can be paired with many different
electronic devices, but can only be actively “connected”
with one electronic device at a time.
If you would like to connect or disconnect the Bluetooth威
connection between your mobile phone and the
Uconnect™ Phone System, follow the instructions de-
scribed in your mobile phone User’s Manual.
List Paired Mobile Phone Names
•
Press the button to begin.
•
After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
“Setup Phone Pairing”.
•
When prompted, say “List Phones”.
•
The Uconnect™ Phone will play the phone names of
all paired mobile phones in order from the highest to
the lowest priority. To “Select” or “Delete” a paired
phone being announced, press the
button and
say “Select” or “Delete”. Also, see the next two sec-
tions for an alternate way to “Select” or “Delete” a
paired phone.
Select Another Mobile Phone
This feature allows you to select and start using another
phone paired with the Uconnect™ Phone.
•
Press the button to begin.
•
After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
“Setup Select Phone” and follow the prompts.
•
You can also press the button at any time while
the list is being played, and then choose the phone that
you wish to select.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 121
•
The selected phone will be used for the next phone
call. If the selected phone is not available, the
Uconnect™ Phone will return to using the highest
priority phone present in or near (approximately
within 30 ft (9 m)) the vehicle.
Delete Uconnect™ Phone Paired Mobile Phones
•
Press the button to begin.
•
After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
“Setup Phone Pairing”.
•
At the next prompt, say “Delete” and follow the
prompts.
•
You can also press the button at any time while
the list is being played, and then choose the phone you
wish to delete.
Things You Should Know About Your Uconnect™
Phone
Uconnect™ Phone Tutorial
To hear a brief tutorial of the system features, press the
button and say “Uconnect™ Tutorial.”
Voice Training
For users experiencing difficulty with the system recog-
nizing their voice commands or numbers, the Uconnect™
Phone Voice Training feature may be used. To enter this
training mode, follow one of the two following proce-
dures:
From outside the Uconnect™ Phone mode (e.g., from
radio mode):
•
Press and hold the button for five seconds until
the session begins, or,
•
Press the
button and say the “Voice Training,
System Training, or Start Voice Training” command.
122 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
You can either press the Uconnect™ Phone button to
restore the factory setting or repeat the words and
phrases when prompted by the Uconnect™ Phone. For
best results, the Voice Training session should be com-
pleted when the vehicle is parked with the engine
running, all windows closed, and the blower fan
switched off.
This procedure may be repeated with a new user. The
system will adapt to the last trained voice only.
Reset
•
press the button.
•
After the “Ready” prompt, and the following beep, say
“Setup”, then “Reset”.
This will delete all phone pairing, phone book entries,
and other settings in all language modes. The System will
prompt you before resetting to factory settings.
Voice Command
•
For best performance, adjust the rearview mirror to
provide at least
1
⁄
2
in (1 cm) gap between the overhead
console (if equipped) and the mirror.
•
Always wait for the beep before speaking.
•
Speak normally, without pausing, just as you would
speak to a person sitting a few feet/meters away from
you.
•
Make sure that no one other than you is speaking
during a Voice Command period.
•
Performance is maximized under:
•
low-to-medium blower setting,
•
low-to-medium vehicle speed,
•
low road noise,
•
smooth road surface,
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 123
•
fully closed windows,
•
dry weather condition.
•
Even though the system is designed for users speaking
in North American English, French, and Spanish ac-
cents, the system may not always work for some.
•
When navigating through an automated system such
as voice mail, or when sending a page, at the end of
speaking the digit string, make sure to say “Send”.
•
Storing names in the phonebook when the vehicle is
not in motion is recommended.
•
It is not recommended to store similar sounding
names in the Uconnect™ Phonebook.
•
Phonebook (Downloaded and Uconnect™ Phone Lo-
cal) name recognition rate is optimized when the
entries are not similar.
•
Numbers must be spoken in single digits. “800” must
be spoken “eight-zero-zero” not “eight hundred”.
•
You can say “O” (letter “O”) for “0” (zero).
•
Even though international dialing for most number
combinations is supported, some shortcut dialing
number combinations may not be supported.
•
In a convertible vehicle, system performance may be
compromised with the convertible top down.
Far End Audio Performance
•
Audio quality is maximized under:
•
low-to-medium blower setting,
•
low-to-medium vehicle speed,
•
low road noise,
•
smooth road surface,
124 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
•
fully closed windows,
•
dry weather conditions, and
•
operation from the driver’s seat.
•
Performance, such as audio clarity, echo, and loudness
to a large degree rely on the phone and network, and
not the Uconnect™ Phone.
•
Echo at the phone far end can sometimes be reduced
by lowering the in-vehicle audio volume.
•
In a convertible vehicle, system performance may be
compromised with the convertible top down.
Recent Calls
If your phone supports “Automatic Phonebook Down-
load”, Uconnect™ Phone can list your Outgoing, Incom-
ing and Missed Calls.
SMS
Uconnect™ Phone can read or send new messages on
your phone.
Read Messages:
If you receive a new text message while your phone is
connected to Uconnect™ Phone, an announcement will
be made to notify you that you have a new text message.
If you wish to hear the new message:
•
Press the button.
•
After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
“SMS Read” or “Read Messages.”
•
Uconnect™ Phone will play the new text message for
you.
After reading a message, you can “Reply” or “Forward”
the message using Uconnect™ Phone.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 125
Send Messages:
You can send messages using Uconnect™ Phone. To send
a new message:
•
Press the button.
•
After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
“SMS Send” or “Send Message.”
•
You can either say the message you wish to send or say
“List Messages.” There are 20 preset messages.
To send a message, press the
button while the
system is listing the message and say “Send.”
Uconnect™ Phone will prompt you to say the name or
number of the person you wish to send the message to.
List of Preset Messages:
1. Yes
2. No
3. Where are you?
4. I need more direction.
5. L O L
6. Why
7. I love you
8. Call me
9. Call me later
10. Thanks
11. See You in 15 minutes
12. I am on my way
13. I’ll be late
14. Are you there yet?
15. Where are we meeting?
126 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
16. Can this wait?
17. Bye for now
18. When can we meet
19. Send number to call
20. Start without me
Turn SMS Incoming Announcement ON/OFF
Turning the SMS Incoming Announcement OFF will stop
the system from announcing the new incoming mes-
sages.
•
Press the button.
•
After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
“Setup, SMS Incoming Message Announcement,” you
will then be given a choice to change it.
Bluetooth威 Communication Link
Mobile phones have been found to lose connection to the
Uconnect™ Phone. When this happens, the connection
can generally be reestablished by switching the phone
off/on. Your mobile phone is recommended to remain in
Bluetooth威 ON mode.
Power-Up
After switching the ignition key from OFF to either the
ON or ACC position, or after a language change, you
must wait at least fifteen seconds prior to using the
system.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 127
128 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 129
130 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Voice Commands
Primary Alternate(s)
zero
one
two
three
four
five
six
seven
eight
nine
star (*)
plus (+)
pound (#)
add location
all
Voice Commands
Primary Alternate(s)
call
cancel
confirmation prompts
continue
delete
dial
download
edit
emergency
English
erase all
Espanol
Francais
help
home
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 131
Voice Commands
Primary Alternate(s)
language
list names
list phones
mobile
mute
mute off
new entry
no
other
pair a phone
phone pairing pairing
phonebook phone book
previous
record again
redial
Voice Commands
Primary Alternate(s)
return to main menu return or main menu
select phone select
send
set up phone settings or phone
set up
towing assistance
transfer call
Uconnect™ Tutorial
try again
voice training
work
yes
132 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
General Information
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules and
RSS 210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the
following conditions:
•
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by
the party responsible for compliance could void the
user’s authority to operate the equipment.
•
This device may not cause harmful interference.
•
This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation.
VOICE COMMAND — IF EQUIPPED
Voice Command System Operation
This Voice Command system allows you to
control your AM, FM radio, satellite radio, disc
player, and a memo recorder.
NOTE: Take care to speak into the Voice Interface
System as calmly and normally as possible. The ability of
the Voice Interface System to recognize user voice com-
mands may be negatively affected by rapid speaking or a
raised voice level.
WARNING!
Any voice commanded system should be used only
in safe driving conditions following local laws. All
attention should be kept on the roadway ahead.
Failure to do so may result in a collision causing
serious injury or death.
When you press the Voice Command
button, you
will hear a beep. The beep is your signal to give a
command.
NOTE:
If you do not say a command within a few
seconds, the system will present you with a list of options.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 133
If you ever wish to interrupt the system while it lists
options, press the Voice Command
button, listen
for the beep, and say your command.
Pressing the Voice Command
button while the
system is speaking is known as “barging in.” The system
will be interrupted, and after the beep, you can add or
change commands. This will become helpful once you
start to learn the options.
NOTE: At any time, you can say the words “Cancel”,
“Help” or “Main Menu”.
These commands are universal and can be used from any
menu. All other commands can be used depending upon
the active application.
When using this system, you should speak clearly and at
a normal speaking volume.
The system will best recognize your speech if the win-
dows are closed, and the heater/air conditioning fan is
set to low.
At any point, if the system does not recognize one of your
commands, you will be prompted to repeat it.
To hear the first available Menu, press the Voice
Command
button and say “Help” or “Main
Menu”.
Commands
The Voice Command system understands two types of
commands. Universal commands are available at all
times. Local commands are available if the supported
radio mode is active.
Changing the Volume
1. Start a dialogue by pressing the Voice Command
button.
134 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
2. Say a command (e.g., “Help”).
3. Use the ON/OFF VOLUME rotary knob to adjust the
volume to a comfortable level while the Voice Command
system is speaking. Please note the volume setting for
Voice Command is different than the audio system.
Main Menu
Start a dialogue by pressing the Voice Command
button. You may say “Main Menu” to switch to the main
menu.
In this mode, you can say the following commands:
•
“Radio” (to switch to the radio mode)
•
“Disc” (to switch to the disc mode)
•
“Memo” (to switch to the memo recorder)
•
“Setup” (to switch to system setup)
Radio AM
To switch to the AM band, say “AM” or “Radio AM”. In
this mode, you may say the following commands:
•
“Frequency #” (to change the frequency)
•
“Next Station” (to select the next station)
•
“Previous Station” (to select the previous station)
•
“Radio Menu” (to switch to the radio menu)
•
“Main Menu” (to switch to the main menu)
Radio FM
To switch to the FM band, say “FM” or “Radio FM”. In
this mode, you may say the following commands:
•
“Frequency #” (to change the frequency)
•
“Next Station” (to select the next station)
•
“Previous Station” (to select the previous station)
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 135
•
“Menu Radio” (to switch to the radio menu)
•
“Main Menu” (to switch to the main menu)
Satellite Radio
To switch to satellite radio mode, say “Sat” or “Satellite
Radio”. In this mode, you may say the following com-
mands:
•
“Channel Number” (to change the channel by its
spoken number)
•
“Next Channel” (to select the next channel)
•
“Previous Channel” (to select the previous channel)
•
“List Channel” (to hear a list of available channels)
•
“Select Name” (to say the name of a channel)
•
“Menu Radio” (to switch to the radio menu)
•
“Main Menu” (to switch to the main menu)
Disc
To switch to the disc mode, say “Disc”. In this mode, you
may say the following commands:
•
“Track” (#) (to change the track)
•
“Next Track” (to play the next track)
•
“Previous Track” (to play the previous track)
•
“Main Menu” (to switch to the main menu)
Memo
To switch to the voice recorder mode, say “Memo”. In
this mode, you may say the following commands:
•
“New Memo” (to record a new memo) — During the
recording, you may press the Voice Command
button to stop recording. You proceed by saying one of
the following commands:
−
“Save” (to save the memo)
136 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
−
“Continue” (to continue recording)
−
“Delete” (to delete the recording)
•
“Play Memos” (to play previously recorded memos)
— During the playback you may press the Voice
Command
button to stop playing memos. You
proceed by saying one of the following commands:
−
“Repeat” (to repeat a memo)
−
“Next” (to play the next memo)
−
“Previous” (to play the previous memo)
−
“Delete” (to delete a memo)
•
“Delete All” (to delete all memos)
Setup
To switch to system setup, you may say on of the
following:
•
“Change to setup”
•
“Switch to system setup”
•
“Change to setup”
•
“Main menu setup” or
•
“Switch to setup”
In this mode, you may say the following commands:
•
“Language English”
•
“Language French”
•
“Language Spanish”
•
“Tutorial”
•
“Voice Training”
NOTE: Keep in mind that you have to press the Voice
Command
button first and wait for the beep
before speaking the “Barge In” commands.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 137
Voice Training
For users experiencing difficulty with the system recog-
nizing their voice commands or numbers the Uconnect™
Voice “Voice Training” feature may be used.
1. Press the Voice Command
button, say “System
Setup” and once you are in that menu then say “Voice
Training.” This will train your own voice to the system
and will improve recognition.
2. Repeat the words and phrases when prompted by
Uconnect™ Voice. For best results, the “Voice Training”
session should be completed when the vehicle is parked,
engine running, all windows closed, and the blower fan
switched off. This procedure may be repeated with a new
user. The system will adapt to the last trained voice only.
SEATS
Seats are a part of the Occupant Restraint System of the
vehicle.
WARNING!
•
It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside or
outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in
these areas are more likely to be seriously injured
or killed.
•
Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat
belts. In a collision, people riding in these areas
are more likely to be seriously injured or killed.
•
Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly.
138 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Driver’s Power Seat — If Equipped
The power seat switch is located on the outboard side of
the seat near the floor. Use this switch to move the seat up
or down, forward or rearward or to tilt the seat.
Adjusting The Seat Forward Or Rearward
The seat can be adjusted both forward and rearward.
Push the seat switch forward or rearward, the seat will
move in the direction of the switch. Release the switch
when you have reached the desired position.
Adjusting The Seat Up Or Down
The height of the seats can be adjusted up or down. Pull
upward or push downward on the seat switch, the seat
will move in the direction of the switch. Release the
switch when you have reached the desired position.
Tilting The Seat Up Or Down
The angle of the seat cushion can be adjusted in four
directions. Pull upward or push downward on the front
or rear of the seat switch, the front or rear of the seat
cushion will move in the direction of the switch. Release
the switch when you have reached the desired position.
Power Seat Switch
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 139
Passenger Power Seat — If Equipped
Vehicle’s equipped with passenger power seats can only
be adjusted forward and backward.
WARNING!
•
Adjusting a seat while driving may be dangerous.
Moving a seat while driving could result in loss of
control which could cause a collision and serious
injury or death.
•
Seats should be adjusted before fastening the seat
belts and while the vehicle is parked. Serious
injury or death could result from a poorly adjusted
seat belt.
•
Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the
shoulder belt is no longer resting against your
chest. In a collision you could slide under the seat
belt, which could result in serious injury or death.
CAUTION!
Do not place any article under a power seat or
impede its ability to move as it may cause damage to
the seat controls. Seat travel may become limited if
movement is stopped by an obstruction in the seat’s
path.
Heated Seats — If Equipped
On some models, the front driver and passenger seats
may be equipped with heaters in both the seat cushions
and seatbacks.
There are two heated seat switches that allow the driver
and passenger to operate the seats independently. The
controls for each seat are located on a switch bank near
the bottom center of the instrument panel.
140 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
You can choose from HIGH, LOW or OFF heat settings.
Amber indicator lights in each switch indicate the level of
heat in use. Two indicator lights will illuminate for
HIGH, one for LOW and none for OFF.
Press the switch once to select HIGH-level
heating. Press the switch a second time to select
LOW-level heating. Press the switch a third
time to shut the heating elements OFF.
When the HIGH-level setting is selected, the heater will
provide a boosted heat level during the first four minutes
of operation. Then, the heat output will drop to the
normal HIGH-level. If the HIGH-level setting is selected,
the system will automatically switch to LOW-level after
approximately 30 minutes of continuous operation. At
that time, the number of illuminated LEDs changes from
two to one, indicating the change. The LOW-level setting
will turn OFF automatically after approximately 30 min-
utes.
NOTE: When a heat setting is selected, heat will be felt
within two to five minutes.
WARNING!
•
Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin
because of advanced age, chronic illness, diabetes,
spinal cord injury, medication, alcohol use, ex-
haustion or other physical condition must exercise
care when using the seat heater. It may cause burns
even at low temperatures, especially if used for
long periods of time.
•
Do not place anything on the seat that insulates
against heat, such as a blanket or cushion. This
may cause the seat heater to overheat. Sitting in a
seat that has been overheated could cause serious
burns due to the increased surface temperature of
the seat.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 141
Manual Front Seat Adjustments
For models equipped with manual seats, the driver and
passenger seats can be adjusted forward or rearward by
using a bar by the front of the seat cushion, near the floor.
While sitting in the seat, lift up on the bar and move the
seat forward or rearward. Release the bar once you have
reached the desired position. Then, using body pressure,
move forward and rearward on the seat to be sure that
the seat adjusters have latched.
WARNING!
•
Adjusting a seat while driving may be dangerous.
Moving a seat while driving could result in loss of
control which could cause a collision and serious
injury or death.
•
Seats should be adjusted before fastening the seat
belts and while the vehicle is parked. Serious
injury or death could result from a poorly adjusted
seat belt.
Manual Seat Adjustment
142 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Front Seat — Manual Recline
To recline the seatback, lean forward slightly and lift the
lever. Then lean back to the position desired and release
the lever. To return the seatback to its normal upright
position, lean forward and lift the lever. Release the lever
once the seatback is in the upright position.
WARNING!
Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the
shoulder belt is no longer resting against your chest.
In a collision you could slide under the seat belt,
which could result in serious injury or death.
Recline Lever
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 143
Manual Lumbar Support — If Equipped
For models equipped with manual lumbar the support
lever is located on the inboard side of the seat. Turn the
lever downward to increase and upward to decrease the
desired amount of lumbar support.
Fold-Flat Front Passenger Seat — If Equipped
This feature allows the front passenger seatback to fold
flat for extended cargo space. Some fold flat seats also
have a hardback surface that you can use as a work
surface when the seat is folded flat. Pull up on the lever
to fold down the seatback.
Lumbar Support Lever
Fold-Flat Passenger Seat
144 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Head Restraints
Head restraints are designed to reduce the risk of injury
by restricting head movement in the event of a rear
impact. Head restraints should be adjusted so that the top
of the head restraint is located above the top of your ear.
WARNING!
The head restraints for all occupants must be prop-
erly adjusted prior to operating the vehicle or occu-
pying a seat. Head restraints should never be ad-
justed while the vehicle is in motion. Driving a
vehicle with the head restraints improperly adjusted
or removed could cause serious injury or death in the
event of a collision.
Active Head Restraints — Front Seats
Active Head Restraints are passive, deployable compo-
nents, and vehicles with this equipment cannot be readily
identified by any markings, only through visual inspec-
tion of the head restraint. The head restraint will be split
in two halves, with the front half being soft foam and
trim, the back half being decorative plastic.
When AHRs deploy during a rear impact, the front half
of the head restraint extends forward to minimize the gap
between the back of the occupant’s head and the AHR.
This system is designed to help prevent or reduce the
extent of injuries to the driver and front passenger in
certain types of rear impacts. Refer to “Occupant Re-
straints” in “Things To Know Before Starting Your Ve-
hicle” for further information.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 145
To raise the head restraint, pull upward on the head
restraint. To lower the head restraint, press the adjust-
ment button, located at the base of the head restraint, and
push downward on the head restraint.
For comfort the Active Head Restraints can be tilted
forward and backward. To tilt the head restraint closer to
the back of your head, pull forward on the bottom of the
head restraint. Push rearward on the bottom of the head
restraint to move the head restraint away from your
head.
Adjustment Button
Active Head Restraint (Normal Position)
146 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE:
•
The head restraints should only be removed by quali-
fied technicians, for service purposes only. If either of
the head restraints require removal, see your autho-
rized dealer.
•
In the event of deployment of an Active Head Re-
straint, refer to “Occupant Restraints/Resetting Active
Head Restraints (AHR)” in “Things To Know Before
Starting Your Vehicle” for further information.
WARNING!
•
Do not place items over the top of the Active Head
Restraint, such as coats, seat covers or portable
DVD players. These items may interfere with the
operation of the Active Head Restraint in the event
of a collision and could result in serious injury or
death.
(Continued)
Active Head Restraint (Tilted)
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 147
WARNING! (Continued)
•
Active Head Restraints may be deployed if they
are struck by an object such as a hand, foot or loose
cargo. To avoid accidental deployment of the Ac-
tive Head Restraint ensure that all cargo is se-
cured, as loose cargo could contact the Active Head
Restraint during sudden stops. Failure to follow
this warning could cause personal injury if the
Active Head Restraint is deployed.
Rear Head Restraints
The two outboard seat are equipped with adjustable head
restraints. To raise the head restraint, pull upward on the
head restraint. To lower the head restraint, press the
adjustment button, located on the base of the head
restraint, and push downward on the head restraint.
NOTE:
•
The head restraints should only be removed by quali-
fied technicians, for service purposes only. If either of
the head restraints require removal, see your autho-
rized dealer.
Adjustment Button
148 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
•
Refer to “Occupant Restraints” in “Things To Know
Before Starting Your Vehicle” for information on tether
routing.
WARNING!
Driving a vehicle with the head restraints removed or
improperly adjusted could cause serious injury or
death in the event of a collision. The head restraints
should be checked prior to operating the vehicle and
never adjusted while the vehicle is in motion.
60/40 Split Folding Rear Seat With Fold-Flat
Feature
To provide additional storage area, each rear seat can be
folded flat. This allows for extended cargo space and still
maintains some rear seating room.
NOTE: Prior to folding the rear seat, it may be necessary
to position the front seat to its mid-track position. Also,
be sure that the front seats are fully upright and posi-
tioned forward. This will allow the rear seat to fold down
easily.
WARNING!
•
It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area,
inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people
riding in these areas are more likely to be seri-
ously injured or killed.
•
Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat
belts.
•
Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly.
To Lower The Rear Seat
1. Locate the release strap on the lower outboard side of
each rear seatback.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 149
2. Pull the release strap (toward the front of the vehicle).
3. Fold the rear seat completely forward.
4. If desired, push down on the seatback to lock it in the
folded position.
To Raise The Rear Seat
NOTE: If interference from the cargo area prevents the
seatback from fully locking, you will have difficulty
returning the seat to its proper position.
1. If locked in the folded position, pull the release strap
(toward the front of the vehicle).
2. Raise the seatback and lock it into place.
WARNING!
Be certain that the seatback is securely locked into
position. If the seatback is not securely locked into
position the seat will not provide the proper stability
for child seats and/or passengers. An improperly
latched seat could cause serious injury.
Rear Seat Release Strap
150 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Recliner Adjustment
The rear seatback also reclines for additional passenger
comfort. Pull the release strap while sitting in the rear
seat to recline the seatback.
WARNING!
Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the
shoulder belt is no longer resting against your chest.
In a collision you could slide under the seat belt,
which could result in serious injury or death.
DRIVER MEMORY SEAT — IF EQUIPPED
This feature allows the driver to store up to two different
memory profiles, for easy recall through a memory
switch. Each memory profile contains desired position
settings for the driver seat and side mirrors and a set of
desired radio station presets.
The memory switch is located on the instrument panel to
the left of the steering column. The switch contains a S
(SET) button to activate the memory save function. It also
contains a rocker switch labeled with the number (1) and
the number (2). The rocker switch allows the driver to
Rear Seatback Release Strap
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 151
recall either of the two pre-programmed memory profiles
by pressing the appropriate side of the switch.
Programming The Memory Feature
To create a new memory profile, perform the following:
NOTE: Saving a new memory profile will erase an
existing profile from memory.
1. Turn the ignition ON.
2. Adjust all memory profile settings to desired prefer-
ences (i.e., seat, side mirror and radio station presets).
3. Press and release the SET button on the memory
switch, then press the side of the rocker switch labeled (1)
within five seconds. The Electronic Vehicle Information
Center (EVIC), if equipped, will display which memory
position is being set.
If desired, a second memory profile can be stored into
memory as follows:
1. Turn the ignition ON.
2. Adjust all memory profile settings to desired prefer-
ences (i.e., seat, side mirror and radio station presets).
Driver Memory Switch
152 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
3. Press and release the SET button on the memory
switch, then press the side of the rocker switch labeled (2)
within five seconds. The EVIC, if equipped, will display
which memory position is being set.
NOTE:
•
For vehicles equipped with an automatic transmission,
memory profiles can be set without the vehicle in
PARK, but the vehicle must be in PARK to recall a
memory profile.
•
For vehicles equipped with a manual transmission, the
vehicle speed must be at 0 mph (0 km/h) to recall a
memory profile.
•
The Recall Memory with Remote Key Unlock feature
can be turned on and off through the EVIC, if
equipped. Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information
Center (EVIC)/Customer-Programmable Features” in
“Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further
information.
Linking And Unlinking The Remote Keyless Entry
Transmitter To Memory
Your Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitters can be
programmed to recall one of two pre-programmed
memory profiles with a press of the UNLOCK button on
the RKE transmitter.
To program your RKE transmitters, perform the follow-
ing:
1. Remove the key from the ignition.
2. Select the desired memory profile 1 or 2.
3. Press and release the SET button on the memory
switch, then within five seconds press and release the
side of the rocker switch labeled 1 or 2 accordingly.
⬙Memory Profile Set” (1 or 2) will display in the EVIC, if
equipped.
4. Press and release the LOCK button on the RKE
transmitter within 10 seconds.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 153
NOTE: Your RKE transmitters can be unlinked to the
memory setting by pressing the SET button followed by
the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter in Step 4
above.
Memory Position Recall
NOTE:
•
For vehicles equipped with an automatic transmission,
the vehicle must be in PARK to recall memory posi-
tions. If a recall is attempted when the vehicle is not in
PARK, a message will display in the EVIC, if
equipped.
•
For vehicles equipped with a manual transmission, the
vehicle speed must be at 0 mph (0 km/h) to recall
memory positions. If a recall is attempted with the
vehicle speed above 0 mph (0 km/h), a message will
display in the EVIC, if equipped.
To recall the memory settings for driver one, press
MEMORY button number 1 or the UNLOCK button on
the RKE transmitter linked to memory position 1.
To recall the memory setting for driver two, press
MEMORY button number 2 or the UNLOCK button on
the RKE transmitter linked to memory position 2.
A recall can be cancelled by pressing any of the
MEMORY buttons (S, 1, or 2) during a recall. When a
recall is cancelled, the driver seat will stop moving. A
delay of one second will occur before another recall can
be selected.
Easy Entry/Exit Seat
(Available With Memory Seat Only)
This feature provides automatic driver seat positioning to
enhance driver mobility when entering and exiting the
vehicle.
154 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
The distance the driver seat moves depends on where
you have the driver seat positioned when you remove the
key from the ignition switch.
•
When you remove the key from the ignition switch,
the driver seat will move about 2.4 in (60 mm)
rearward if the driver’s seat position is greater than or
equal to 2.7 in (68 mm) forward of the rear stop. The
seat will return to its previously set position when you
insert the key into the ignition switch and turn it out of
the LOCK position.
•
When you remove the key from the ignition switch,
the driver seat will move to a position 0.3 in (8 mm)
forward of the rear stop if the driver’s seat position is
between 0.9 in and 2.7 in (23 mm and 68 mm) forward
of the rear stop. The seat will return to its previously
set position when you insert the key into the ignition
switch and turn it out of the LOCK position.
•
The Easy Entry/Easy Exit feature is disabled when the
driver’s seat position is less than 0.9 in (23 mm)
forward of the rear stop. At this position, there is no
benefit to the driver by moving the seat for Easy Exit
or Easy Entry.
Each stored memory setting will have an associated Easy
Entry and Easy Exit position.
NOTE: The Easy Entry/Easy Exit feature can be turned
on or off through the programmable features in the EVIC.
Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/
Customer-Programmable Features” in “Understanding
Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 155
TO OPEN AND CLOSE THE HOOD
Two latches must be released to open the hood.
1. Pull the hood release lever located under the left side
of the instrument panel.
2. Outside of the vehicle, locate the safety latch lever
between the grille and hood opening (left of center when
facing hood). Push the safety latch lever to the right and
then raise the hood.
Hood Release
Underhood Safety Latch
156 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Use the hood prop rod to secure the hood in the open
position. Place the upper end of the prop rod in the hole
on the underside of the hood.
CAUTION!
To prevent possible damage:
•
Before closing hood, make sure the hood prop rod
is fully seated into its storage retaining clips.
•
Lower the hood to approximately 6 in (15.2 cm)
above the closed position and drop the hood to
latch it.
•
Never drive your vehicle unless the hood is fully
closed, with both latches engaged.
WARNING!
Be sure the hood is fully latched before driving your
vehicle. If the hood is not fully latched, it could open
when the vehicle is in motion and block your vision.
Failure to follow this warning could result in serious
injury or death.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 157
LIGHTS
Multifunction Lever
The multifunction lever on the left side of the steering
column controls the operation of the headlights, parking
lights, turn signal lights, instrument panel lights, instru-
ment panel light dimming, interior lights and fog lights
(if equipped).
Headlights And Parking Lights
Turn the end of the multifunction lever to the first detent
for parking light operation. Turn the end of the lever to
the second detent for headlight operation.
Multifunction Lever
Headlight Switch
158 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Automatic Headlights — If Equipped
This system automatically turns the headlights on or off
according to ambient light levels. To turn the system on,
turn the end of the multifunction lever to the AUTO
position (third detent). When the system is on, the
Headlight Time Delay feature is also on. This means the
headlights will stay on for up to 90 seconds after you turn
the ignition switch to the LOCK position. To turn the
Automatic System off, turn the end of the multifunction
lever out of the AUTO position.
NOTE: The engine must be running before the head-
lights will turn on in the Automatic mode.
Headlight Switch
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 159
Headlights With Wipers
(Available With Automatic Headlights Only)
When this feature is active, the headlights will turn on
approximately 10 seconds after the wipers are turned on
if the multifunction lever is placed in the AUTO position.
In addition, the headlights will turn off when the wipers
are turned off if they were turned on by this feature.
The Headlights with Wipers feature can be turned on or
off through the Electronic Vehicle Information Center
(EVIC) — if equipped. Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Infor-
mation Center (EVIC)/Customer-Programmable Fea-
tures” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for
further information.
Headlight Time Delay — If Equipped
This feature is particularly useful when exiting your
vehicle in an unlit area. It provides the safety of headlight
illumination for about 90 seconds after turning the igni-
tion switch to the LOCK position.
To activate the delay, turn the ignition switch to the
LOCK position while the headlights are still on. Then,
turn off the headlights within 45 seconds. The delay
interval begins when you turn off the headlights. Only
the headlights will illuminate during this time.
If you turn the headlights, or parking lights, or ignition
switch ON again, the system will cancel the delay.
If you turn the headlights off before the ignition, they will
turn off in the normal manner.
The Headlight delay time is programmable on vehicles
equipped with the Electronic Vehicle Information Center
(EVIC). Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center
(EVIC)/Customer-Programmable Features” in “Under-
standing Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
160 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Daytime Running Lights — If Equipped
The headlights will turn on as Daytime Running Lights
(DRL) and operate at lower intensity whenever the
ignition is ON, the engine is running, the headlight
switch is off, the parking brake is released and the shift
lever is in any position except PARK.
Lights-On Reminder
If the headlights or parking lights are on after the ignition
is turned to the LOCK position, a chime will sound to
alert the driver when the driver’s door is opened.
Fog Lights — If Equipped
To activate the front fog lights, turn on the parking
lights or the low beam headlights and pull out on
the end of the multifunction lever.
NOTE: The front fog lights will only operate with the
headlights on low beam. Selecting high beam headlights
will turn off the front fog lights.
Front Fog Light Control
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 161
Turn Signals
Move the multifunction lever up or down and the arrows
on each side of the instrument cluster flash to show
proper operation of the front and rear turn signal lights.
NOTE: If either light remains on and does not flash, or
there is a very fast flash rate, check for a defective outside
light bulb. If an indicator fails to light when the lever is
moved, it would suggest that the indicator bulb is
defective.
Lane Change Assist
Tap the lever up or down once, without moving beyond
the detent, and the turn signal (right or left) will flash
three times then automatically turn off.
High/Low Beam Switch
Push the multifunction lever away from you to switch
the headlights to high beam. Pull the multifunction lever
toward you, to switch the headlights back to low beam.
Flash-To-Pass
You can signal another vehicle with your headlights by
lightly pulling the multifunction lever toward you. This
will turn on the high beam headlights until the lever is
released.
Turn Signal Control
162 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: If the multifunction lever is held in the flash-to-
pass position for more than 15 seconds, the high beams
will shut off. If this occurs, wait 30 seconds before
activating the flash-to-pass function again.
Instrument Panel Dimmer
Rotate the center portion of the lever to the extreme
bottom position to fully dim the instrument panel lights
and prevent the interior lights from illuminating when a
door is opened.
Rotate the center portion of the lever up to increase the
brightness of the instrument panel lights when the park-
ing lights or headlights are on.
Rotate the center portion of the lever upward to the next
detent position to brighten the odometer and radio when
the parking lights or headlights are on.
Rotate the center portion of the lever upward to the last
detent to turn on the interior lighting.
Map/Reading Lights
These lights are mounted between the sun visors on the
overhead console and above the rear doors by the grab
handles. Each light is turned on by pressing the lens.
Press the lens a second time to turn off the light. These
lights also turn on when a door is opened, or when the
Dimmer Control
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 163
UNLOCK button on the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
transmitter is pressed, or when the dimmer control is
turned completely upward to the second detent.
Cargo Light
The cargo light is mounted in the headliner above the
rear cargo area. This light will turn on when you open the
liftgate or any door, or if you press the UNLOCK button
on the RKE transmitter, or rotate the dimmer control on
the multifunction lever completely upward to the second
detent.
Battery Saver Feature
To protect the battery, the interior lights will turn off
automatically 10 minutes after the ignition switch is
moved to the LOCK position. This will occur if the
interior lights were switched on manually or are on
because a door is open.
WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS
The windshield wiper/washer control lever is located on
the right side of the steering column. The front wipers are
operated by rotating a switch, located at the end of the
lever. For information on using the rear window wiper/
washer, refer to “Rear Window Features” in “Under-
standing The Features Of Your Vehicle”.
Wiper/Washer Lever
164 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Windshield Wiper Operation
Rotate the end of the lever upward to the second detent
past the intermittent settings for low-speed wiper opera-
tion.
Rotate the end of the lever upward to the third detent
past the intermittent settings for high-speed wiper opera-
tion.
NOTE: The wipers will automatically return to the
“park” position if you turn OFF the ignition switch while
they are operating. The wipers will resume operation
when you turn the ignition switch back to the ON
position.
CAUTION!
•
Turn the windshield wipers off when driving
through an automatic car wash. Damage to the
windshield wipers may result if the wiper control
is left in any position other than off.
•
In cold weather, always turn off the wiper switch
and allow the wipers to return to the “Park”
position before turning off the engine. If the wiper
switch is left on and the wipers freeze to the
windshield, damage to the wiper motor may occur
when the vehicle is restarted.
(Continued)
Front Wiper Control
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 165
CAUTION! (Continued)
•
Always remove any buildup of snow that prevents
the windshield wiper blades from returning to the
off position. If the windshield wiper control is
turned off and the blades cannot return to the off
position, damage to the wiper motor may occur.
Intermittent Wiper System
Use the intermittent wiper system when weather condi-
tions make a single wiping cycle with a variable pause
between cycles desirable. Rotate the end of the wind-
shield wiper/washer control lever to the first detent, and
then turn the end of the lever to select the desired delay
interval.
Front Wiper Control
166 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
There are five delay settings, which allow you to regulate
the wipe interval from a minimum of one cycle every
second to a maximum of approximately 36 seconds
between cycles or from a minimum of one cycle every
second to a maximum of approximately 18 seconds
between cycles at vehicle speeds greater than 10 mph
(16 km/h).
NOTE: The wiper delay times depend on vehicle speed.
If the vehicle is moving less than 10 mph (16 km/h),
delay times will be doubled.
Windshield Washers
To use the washer, pull the windshield wiper/washer
control lever toward you and hold it for as long as
washer spray is desired (for a maximum of 10 seconds).
If you activate the washer while the wiper control is in
the delay range, the wipers will operate in low-speed for
two or three wipe cycles after releasing the lever and then
resume the intermittent interval previously selected.
If you activate the washer while the wiper control is in
the off position, the wipers will operate for two or three
wipe cycles and then turn off.
WARNING!
Sudden loss of visibility through the windshield
could lead to a collision. You might not see other
vehicles or other obstacles. To avoid sudden icing of
the windshield during freezing weather, warm the
windshield with defroster before and during wind-
shield washer use.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 167
Mist Feature
Push downward on the windshield wiper/washer con-
trol lever to activate a single wipe cycle to clear the
windshield of road mist or spray from a passing vehicle.
The wipers will continue to operate until you release the
lever.
Rain Sensing Wipers — If Equipped
This feature senses moisture on the windshield and
automatically activates the wipers for the driver. This
feature is especially useful for road splash or overspray
from the windshield washers of the vehicle ahead. Rotate
the end of the windshield wiper/washer control lever to
one of the five intermittent wiper settings to activate this
feature.
The sensitivity of the system is adjustable from the
windshield wiper/washer control lever. Wiper delay
position 1 is the least sensitive and wiper delay position
5 is the most sensitive. Choose position 3 for normal rain
conditions. Choose position 2 or 1 if you desire less wiper
sensitivity. Choose position 4 or 5 if you desire more
sensitivity. Place the lever in the off position when not
using the system.
Mist Control
168 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE:
•
The rain-sensing feature will not operate when the
wiper speed is in the low or high position.
•
The rain-sensing feature may not function properly
when ice or dried salt water is present on the wind-
shield.
•
Use of Rain-X威 or products containing wax or silicone
may reduce rain sensor performance.
•
The rain-sensing feature can be turned on and off
through the Electronic Vehicle Information Center
(EVIC) — if equipped. Refer to “Electronic Vehicle
Information Center (EVIC)/Personal Settings (Cus-
tomer-Programmable Features)” in “Understanding
Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
The rain-sensing system has protective features for the
wiper blades and arms. It will not operate under the
following conditions:
•
Low Temperature Wipe Inhibit — The rain-sensing
feature will not operate when the ignition is first
switched ON, the vehicle is stationary, and the outside
temperature is below 32° F (0° C). If the wiper control
is moved, the vehicle speed becomes greater than
0 mph (0 km/h), or the outside temperature rises
above freezing the rain-sensing feature will then op-
erate.
•
Neutral Wipe Inhibit — The rain-sensing feature will
not operate when the ignition is ON, and the shift
lever is in the NEUTRAL position, and the vehicle
speed is less than 5 mph (8 km/h), unless the wiper
control is moved or the shift lever is moved out of the
NEUTRAL position.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 169
•
Remote Start Wipe Inhibit (Vehicles Equipped with
Remote Start System) — The rain-sensing feature will
not operate when the vehicle is in remote start mode.
This feature will return to normal operation once
remote start mode is exited. Refer to “Remote Start
System” in “Things To Know Before Starting Your
Vehicle” for further information.
Headlights With Wipers
(Available With Automatic Headlights Only)
When this feature is active, the headlights will turn on
approximately 10 seconds after the wipers are turned on
if the multifunction lever (on the left side of the steering
column) is placed in the AUTO position. In addition, the
headlights will turn off when the wipers are turned off if
they were turned on by this feature.
The Headlights with Wipers feature can be turned on or
off through the Electronic Vehicle Information Center
(EVIC) — if equipped. Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Infor-
mation Center (EVIC)/Personal Settings (Customer-
Programmable Features)” in “Understanding Your In-
strument Panel” for further information.
TILT STEERING COLUMN
This feature allows you to tilt the steering column
upward or downward. The tilt control handle is located
below the steering wheel at the end of the steering
column.
170 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
To unlock the steering column, push the control handle
downward. To tilt the steering column, move the steering
wheel upward or downward as desired. To lock the
steering column in position, pull the control handle
upward until it is fully engaged.
WARNING!
Do not adjust the steering column while driving.
Adjusting the steering column while driving or driv-
ing with the steering column unlocked, could cause
the driver to lose control of the vehicle. Be sure the
steering column is locked before driving your ve-
hicle. Failure to follow this warning may result in
serious injury or death.
ELECTRONIC SPEED CONTROL — IF EQUIPPED
When engaged, the Electronic Speed Control takes over
accelerator operations at speeds greater than 25 mph
(40 km/h).
Tilt Steering Control Handle
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 171
The Electronic Speed Control buttons are located on the
right side of the steering wheel.
NOTE: In order to ensure proper operation, the Elec-
tronic Speed Control System has been designed to shut
down if multiple Speed Control functions are operated at
the same time. If this occurs, the Electronic Speed Control
System can be reactivated by pushing the Electronic
Speed Control ON/OFF button and resetting the desired
vehicle set speed.
To Activate
Push the ON/OFF button. The Cruise Indicator Light in
the instrument cluster will illuminate. To turn the system
off, push the ON/OFF button a second time. The Cruise
Indicator Light will turn off. The system should be
turned off when not in use.
WARNING!
Leaving the Electronic Speed Control system on
when not in use is dangerous. You could accidentally
set the system or cause it to go faster than you want.
You could lose control and have an accident. Always
leave the system OFF when you are not using it.
1 — ON/OFF 2 — RES +
4 — CANCEL 3 — SET -
172 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
To Set A Desired Speed
Turn the Electronic Speed Control ON. When the vehicle
has reached the desired speed, press the SET (-) button
and release. Release the accelerator and the vehicle will
operate at the selected speed.
NOTE: The vehicle should be traveling at a steady
speed and on level ground before pressing the SET
button.
To Deactivate
A soft tap on the brake pedal, pushing the CANCEL
button, or normal brake pressure while slowing the
vehicle will deactivate Electronic Speed Control without
erasing the set speed memory. Pressing the ON/OFF
button or turning the ignition switch OFF erases the set
speed memory.
To Resume Speed
To resume a previously set speed, push the RES (+)
button and release. Resume can be used at any speed
above 20 mph (32 km/h).
To Vary The Speed Setting
When the Electronic Speed Control is set, you can in-
crease speed by pushing the RES (+) button. If the button
is continually pressed, the set speed will continue to
increase until the button is released, then the new set
speed will be established.
Pressing the RES (+) button once will result ina1mph
(2 km/h) increase in set speed. Each subsequent tap of
the button results in an increase of 1 mph (2 km/h).
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 173
To decrease speed while the Electronic Speed Control is
set, push the SET (-) button. If the button is continually
held in the SET (-) position, the set speed will continue to
decrease until the button is released. Release the button
when the desired speed is reached, and the new set speed
will be established.
Pressing the SET (-) button once will result ina1mph
(2 km/h) decrease in set speed. Each subsequent tap of
the button results in a decrease of 1 mph (2 km/h).
To Accelerate For Passing
Press the accelerator as you would normally. When the
pedal is released, the vehicle will return to the set speed.
Using Electronic Speed Control On Hills
The transmission may downshift on hills to maintain the
vehicle set speed.
NOTE: The Electronic Speed Control system maintains
speed up and down hills. A slight speed change on
moderate hills is normal.
On steep hills, a greater speed loss or gain may occur so
it may be preferable to drive without Electronic Speed
Control.
WARNING!
Electronic Speed Control can be dangerous where the
system cannot maintain a constant speed. Your ve-
hicle could go too fast for the conditions, and you
could lose control and have an accident. Do not use
Electronic Speed Control in heavy traffic or on roads
that are winding, icy, snow-covered or slippery.
174 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
PARKSENSE姞 REAR PARK ASSIST —
IF EQUIPPED
The ParkSense威 Rear Park Assist system provides visual
and audible indications of the distance between the rear
fascia and a detected obstacle when backing up, e.g.
during a parking maneuver. Refer to ParkSense威 System
Usage Precautions for limitations of this system and
recommendations.
ParkSense威 will retain the last system state (enabled or
disabled) from the last ignition cycle when the ignition is
changed to the ON/RUN position.
ParkSense威 can be active only when the shift lever is in
REVERSE. If ParkSense威 is enabled at this shift lever
position, the system will remain active until the vehicle
speed is increased to approximately 11 mph (18 km/h) or
above. The system will become active again if the vehicle
speed is decreased to speeds less than approximately
10 mph (16 km/h).
ParkSense姞 Sensors
The four ParkSense威 sensors, located in the rear fascia/
bumper, monitor the area behind the vehicle that is
within the sensors’ field of view. The sensors can detect
obstacles from approximately 12 in (30 cm) up to 79 in
(200 cm) from the rear fascia/bumper in the horizontal
direction, depending on the location, type and orienta-
tion of the obstacle.
ParkSense姞 Warning Display
The ParkSense威 Warning screen will only be displayed if
Sound and Display is selected from the Customer- Pro-
grammable Features section of the Electronic Vehicle
Information Center (EVIC). Refer to “Electronic Vehicle
Information Center (EVIC)/Personal Settings (Customer-
Programmable Features)” in “Understanding Your In-
strument Panel” for further information.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 175
The ParkSense威 Warning Display is located in the Instru-
ment cluster’s EVIC display. It provides both visual and
audible warnings to indicate the distance between the
rear fascia/bumper and the detected obstacle.
ParkSense姞 Display
When the vehicle is in REVERSE, the warning display
will turn ON indicating the system status.
ParkSense威 Warning Display
Park Assist ON
176 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
The system will indicate a detected obstacle by showing
three solid arcs and will produce a one-half second tone.
As the vehicle moves closer to the object the EVIC
display will show fewer arcs and the sound tone will
change from slow, to fast, to continuous.
Park Assist Off Slow Tone
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 177
The vehicle is close to the obstacle when the EVIC display
shows one flashing arc and sounds a continuous tone.
The following chart shows the warning alert operation
when the system is detecting an obstacle:
Fast Tone Continuous Tone
178 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING ALERTS
Rear Distance
(in/cm)
Greater than
79 in (200 cm)
79-39 in
(200-100 cm)
39-25 in
(100-65 cm)
25-12 in
(65-30 cm)
Less than
12 in (30 cm)
Audible Alert
Chime
None Single 1/2
Second Tone
Slow Fast Continuous
Display Message Park Assist ON Warning Object
Detected
Warning Object
Detected
Warning Object
Detected
Warning Object
Detected
Arcs None 3 Solid
(Continuous)
3 Slow
Flashing
2 Slow
Flashing
1 Slow
Flashing
Radio Mute No Yes Yes Yes Yes
NOTE: ParkSense威 will MUTE the radio, if on, when
the system is sounding an audio tone.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 179
Enabling And Disabling ParkSense姞
ParkSense威 can be enabled and disabled with a switch
located in the switch bank of the instrument panel or
through the Customer-Programmable Features section of
the EVIC. The available choices are: OFF, Sound Only, or
Sound and Display. Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Informa-
tion Center (EVIC)/Personal Settings (Customer-
Programmable Features)” in “Understanding Your In-
strument Panel” for further information.
When the ParkSense威 switch is pressed to
disable the system, the instrument cluster will
display the “PARK ASSIST OFF” message for
approximately five seconds. Refer to “Elec-
tronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)” in “Under-
standing Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
When the shift lever is moved to REVERSE and the
system is disabled, the EVIC will display the “PARK
ASSIST OFF” message for as long as the vehicle is in
REVERSE.
The ParkSense威 switch LED will be ON when Park-
Sense威 is disabled or defective. The ParkSense威 switch
LED will be OFF when the system is enabled.
Service The ParkSense姞 Rear Park Assist System
When the ParkSense威 Rear Park Assist System is mal-
functioning, the instrument cluster will actuate a single
chime, once per ignition cycle, and it will display the
“SERVICE PARK ASSIST SYSTEM” message. Refer to
“Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)” in “Un-
derstanding Your Instrument Panel” for further informa-
tion. When the shift lever is moved to REVERSE and the
system has detected a faulted condition, the EVIC will
display the “SERVICE PARK ASSIST SYSTEM” message
for as long as the vehicle is in REVERSE. Under this
condition, ParkSense威 will not operate.
If “SERVICE PARK ASSIST SYSTEM” appears in the
EVIC, see your authorized dealer.
180 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Cleaning The ParkSense姞 System
Clean the ParkSense威 sensors with water, car wash soap
and a soft cloth. Do not use rough or hard cloths. Do not
scratch or poke the sensors. Otherwise, you could dam-
age the sensors.
ParkSense姞 System Usage Precautions
NOTE:
•
Ensure that the rear bumper is free of snow, ice, mud,
dirt and debris to keep the ParkSense威 system operat-
ing properly.
•
Jackhammers, large trucks, and other vibrations could
affect the performance of ParkSense威.
•
When you turn ParkSense威 off, the instrument cluster
will display “PARK ASSIST OFF.” Furthermore, once
you turn ParkSense威 off, it remains off until you turn
it on again, even if you cycle the ignition key.
•
When you move the shift lever to the REVERSE
position and ParkSense威 is turned off, the instrument
cluster will display “PARK ASSIST OFF” message for
as long as the vehicle is in REVERSE.
•
ParkSense威, when on, will MUTE the radio when it is
sounding a tone.
•
Clean the ParkSense威 sensors regularly, taking care
not to scratch or damage them. The sensors must not
be covered with ice, snow, slush, mud, dirt or debris.
Failure to do so can result in the system not working
properly. The ParkSense威 system might not detect an
obstacle behind the fascia/bumper, or it could provide
a false indication that an obstacle is behind the fascia/
bumper.
•
Objects such as bicycle carriers, trailer hitches, etc.,
must not be placed within 12 in (30 cm) from the rear
fascia/bumper while driving the vehicle. Failure to do
so can result in the system misinterpreting a close
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 181
object as a sensor problem, causing the “SERVICE
PARK ASSIST SYSTEM” message to be displayed in
the EVIC.
CAUTION!
•
ParkSense威 is only a parking aid and it is unable
to recognize every obstacle, including small ob-
stacles. Parking curbs might be temporarily de-
tected or not detected at all. Obstacles located
above or below the sensors will not be detected
when they are in close proximity.
•
The vehicle must be driven slowly when using
ParkSense威 in order to be able to stop in time
when an obstacle is detected. It is recommended
that the driver looks over his/her shoulder when
using ParkSense威.
WARNING!
•
Drivers must be careful when backing up even
when using the ParkSense威 Rear Park Assist Sys-
tem. Always check carefully behind your vehicle,
look behind you, and be sure to check for pedes-
trians, animals, other vehicles, obstructions, and
blind spots before backing up. You are responsible
for safety and must continue to pay attention to
your surroundings. Failure to do so can result in
serious injury or death.
(Continued)
182 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
•
Before using the ParkSense威 Rear Park Assist
System, it is strongly recommended that the ball
mount and hitch ball assembly is disconnected
from the vehicle when the vehicle is not used for
towing. Failure to do so can result in injury or
damage to vehicles or obstacles because the hitch
ball will be much closer to the obstacle than the
rear fascia when the warning display turns on the
single flashing arc and sounds the continuous
tone. Also, the sensors could detect the ball mount
and hitch ball assembly, depending on its size and
shape, giving a false indication that an obstacle is
behind the vehicle.
GARAGE DOOR OPENER — IF EQUIPPED
HomeLink威 replaces up to three remote controls (hand-
held transmitters) that operate devices such as garage
door openers, motorized gates, lighting or home security
systems. The HomeLink威 unit operates off your vehicle’s
battery.
The HomeLink威 buttons that are located in the headliner
or sun visor designate the three different HomeLink威
channels.
HomeLink威 Buttons
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 183
NOTE: HomeLink威 is disabled when the Vehicle Secu-
rity Alarm is active.
WARNING!
•
Your motorized door or gate will open and close
while you are training the Universal Transceiver.
Do not train the transceiver if people, pets or other
objects are in the path of the door or gate. Only use
this transceiver with a garage door opener that has
a “stop and reverse” feature as required by Federal
safety standards. This includes most garage door
opener models manufactured after 1982. Do not
use a garage door opener without these safety
features. Call toll-free 1–800–355–3515 or, on the
Internet at www.HomeLink.com for safety infor-
mation or assistance.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
•
Vehicle exhaust contains carbon monoxide, a dan-
gerous gas. Do not run your vehicle in the garage
while training the transceiver. Exhaust gas can
cause serious injury or death.
Programming HomeLink姞
Before You Begin
If you have not trained any of the HomeLink威 buttons,
erase all channels before you begin training.
To do this, press and hold the two outside buttons for
20 seconds until the red indicator flashes.
It is recommended that a new battery be placed in the
handheld transmitter of the device that is being copied to
HomeLink威 for more efficient training and accurate
transmission of the radio-frequency signal.
184 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Your vehicle should be parked outside of the garage
when programming.
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position.
2. Hold the battery side of the handheld transmitter
away from the HomeLink威 button you wish to program.
Place the handheld transmitter 1–3 in (3-8 cm) away from
the HomeLink威 button you wish to program while
keeping the indicator light in view.
3. Simultaneously press and hold both the chosen
HomeLink威 button and the handheld transmitter button
until the HomeLink威 indicator changes from a slow to a
rapidly blinking light, then release both the HomeLink威
and handheld transmitter buttons.
Watch for the HomeLink威 indicator to change flash rates.
When it changes, it is programmed. It may take up to
30 seconds or longer in rare cases. The garage door may
open and close while you train.
NOTE:
•
Some gate operators and garage door openers may
require you to replace Step 3 with procedures noted in
the “Gate Operator/Canadian Programming” section.
•
After training a HomeLink威 channel, if the garage
door does not operate with HomeLink威 and the ga-
rage door opener was manufactured after 1995, the
garage door opener may have a rolling code. If so,
proceed to Step 5 “Programming A Rolling Code
System.”
4. Press and hold the just-trained HomeLink威 button
and observe the indicator light.
If the indicator light stays on constantly, programming is
complete and the garage door (or device) should activate
when the HomeLink威 button is pressed.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 185
If the indicator light blinks rapidly for two seconds, and
then turns to a constant light, continue with program-
ming for a Rolling Code.
5. Programming A Rolling Code System
At the garage door opener motor (in the garage), locate
the “Learn” or “Training” button.
This can usually be found where the hanging antenna
wire is attached to the garage door opener motor (it is
NOT the button normally used to open and close the
door).
6. Firmly press and release the LEARN or TRAINING
button. The name and color of the button may vary by
manufacturer.
NOTE: You have 30 seconds in which to initiate the next
step after the LEARN button has been pressed.
1 — Garage Door Opener
2 — Training Button
186 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
7. Return to the vehicle and press the programmed
HomeLink威 button twice (holding the button for two
seconds each time). If the device is plugged in and
activates, programming is complete.
If the device does not activate, press the button a third
time (for two seconds) to complete the training.
If you have any problems, or require assistance, please
call toll-free 1–800–355–3515 or, on the Internet at
www.HomeLink.com for information or assistance.
To program the remaining two HomeLink威 buttons,
repeat each step for each remaining button. DO NOT
erase the channels.
Gate Operator/Canadian Programming
Canadian radio-frequency laws require transmitter sig-
nals to “time-out” (or quit) after several seconds of
transmission – which may not be long enough for
HomeLink威 to pick up the signal during programming.
Similar to this Canadian law, some U.S. gate operators are
designed to “time-out” in the same manner.
It may be helpful to unplug the device during the cycling
process to prevent possible overheating of the garage
door or gate motor.
If you are having difficulties programming a garage door
opener or a gate operator, replace “Programming
HomeLink威” Step 3 with the following:
3. Continue to press and hold the HomeLink威 button,
while you press and release (“cycle”), your handheld
transmitter every two seconds until HomeLink威 has
successfully accepted the frequency signal. The indica-
tor light will flash slowly and then rapidly when fully
trained.
If you unplugged the device for training, plug it back in
at this time.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 187
Then proceed with Step 4 under “Programming
HomeLink威” earlier in this section.
Using HomeLink姞
To operate, press and release the programmed
HomeLink威 button. Activation will now occur for the
trained device (i.e., garage door opener, gate operator,
Security system, entry door lock, home/office lighting,
etc.,). The handheld transmitter of the device may also be
used at any time.
Reprogramming A Single HomeLink姞 Button
To reprogram a channel that has been previously trained,
follow these steps:
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position.
2. Press and hold the desired HomeLink威 button until
the indicator light begins to flash after 20 seconds. Do not
release the button.
3. Without releasing the button, proceed with Program-
ming HomeLink威 Step 2 and follow all remaining steps.
Security
It is advised to erase all channels before you sell or turn
in your vehicle.
To do this, press and hold the two outside buttons for
20 seconds until the red indicator flashes. Note that all
channels will be erased. Individual channels cannot be
erased.
The HomeLink威 Universal Transceiver is disabled when
the Vehicle Security Alarm is active.
Troubleshooting Tips
If you are having trouble programming HomeLink威, here
are some of the most common solutions:
•
Replace the battery in the original transmitter.
188 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
•
Press the LEARN button on the Garage Door Opener
to complete the training for a Rolling Code.
•
Did you unplug the device for training, and remember
to plug it back in?
If you have any problems, or require assistance, please
call toll-free 1–800–355–3515 or, on the Internet at
www.HomeLink.com for information or assistance.
General Information
This device complies with FCC rules Part 15 and Industry
Canada RSS-210. Operation is subject to the following
two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference.
2. This device must accept any interference that may be
received including interference that may cause undesired
operation.
NOTE: The transmitter has been tested and it complies
with FCC and IC rules. Changes or modifications not
expressly approved by the party responsible for compli-
ance could void the user’s authority to operate the
device.
The term IC before the certification/registration number
only signifies that Industry Canada technical specifica-
tions were met.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 189
POWER SUNROOF — IF EQUIPPED
The power sunroof switch is located between the sun
visors on the overhead console.
WARNING!
•
Never leave unattended children in a vehicle with
the key in the ignition switch. Occupants, particu-
larly unattended children, can become entrapped
by the power sunroof while operating the power
sunroof switch. Such entrapment may result in
serious injury or death.
•
In a collision, there is a greater risk of being
thrown from a vehicle with an open sunroof. You
could also be seriously injured or killed. Always
fasten your seat belt properly and make sure all
passengers are properly secured too.
•
Do not allow small children to operate the sun-
roof. Never allow your fingers, other body parts, or
any object to project through the sunroof opening.
Injury may result.
Power Sunroof Switch
190 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Opening Sunroof — Express
Press the switch rearward and release it within one-half
second and the sunroof will open automatically from any
position. The sunroof will open fully and stop automati-
cally. This is called “Express Open”. During Express
Open operation, any movement of the sunroof switch
will stop the sunroof.
Opening Sunroof — Manual Mode
To open the sunroof, press and hold the switch rearward
to full open. Any release of the switch will stop the
movement and the sunroof will remain in a partially
opened condition until the switch is pushed and held
rearward again.
Closing Sunroof — Express
Press the switch forward and release it within one-half
second and the sunroof will close automatically from any
position. The sunroof will close fully and stop automati-
cally. This is called “Express Close”. During Express
Close operation, any movement of the switch will stop
the sunroof.
Closing Sunroof — Manual Mode
To close the sunroof, press and hold the switch in the
forward position. Any release of the switch will stop the
movement and the sunroof will remain in a partially
closed condition until the switch is pushed and held
forward again.
Pinch Protect Feature
This feature will detect an obstruction in the opening of
the sunroof during Express Close operation. If an ob-
struction in the path of the sunroof is detected, the
sunroof will automatically retract. Remove the obstruc-
tion if this occurs. Next, press the switch forward and
release to Express Close.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 191
Pinch Protect Override
If a known obstruction (ice, debris, etc.) prevents closing
and moves the sunroof in the opposite direction, press
the switch forward and hold. This allows the sunroof to
move towards the closed position.
NOTE: Pinch protection is disabled while the switch is
pressed.
Venting Sunroof — Express
Press and release the ⬙Vent⬙ button within one-half sec-
ond and the sunroof will open to the vent position. This
is called “Express Vent”, and it will occur regardless of
sunroof position. During Express Vent operation, any
movement of the switch will stop the sunroof.
Sunshade Operation
The sunshade can be opened manually. However, the
sunshade will open automatically as the sunroof opens.
NOTE: The sunshade cannot be closed if the sunroof is
open.
Wind Buffeting
Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of
pressure on the ears or a helicopter-type sound in the
ears. Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the
windows down, or the sunroof (if equipped) is in certain
open or partially open positions. This is a normal occur-
rence and can be minimized. If the buffeting occurs with
the rear windows open, then open the front and rear
windows together to minimize the buffeting. If the
buffeting occurs with the sunroof open, adjust the sun-
roof opening to minimize the buffeting or open any
window.
Sunroof Maintenance
Use only a non-abrasive cleaner and a soft cloth to clean
the glass panel.
192 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Ignition Off Operation
For vehicles not equipped with the Electronic Vehicle
Information Center (EVIC), the power sunroof switch
will remain active for 45 seconds after the ignition switch
is turned to the LOCK position. Opening either front
door will cancel this feature.
For vehicles equipped with the EVIC, the power sunroof
switch will remain active for up to approximately ten
minutes after the ignition switch is turned to the LOCK
position. Opening either front door will cancel this
feature. The time is programmable. Refer to “Electronic
Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/Personal Settings
(Customer-Programmable Features)” in “Understanding
Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
SKY SLIDER™ FULL LENGTH OPEN ROOF —
IF EQUIPPED
The Sky Slider™ is a full-length, soft-top, power roof that
opens front to rear or rear to front.
Sky Slider™ Usage Precautions
NOTE:
•
The system will not operate when ambient tempera-
ture is at –4°F (–20°C) or lower.
•
The system will not operate at vehicle speeds of
86 mph (138 km/h) or above.
•
Opening and closing the Sky Slider™ repeatedly with-
out the engine running may run the battery down.
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these cautions can cause damage to
the Sky Slider™ vehicle contents, and the vehicle
interior:
•
Never attempt to open or close the Sky Slider™
when it is frozen. Wait until the Sky Slider™ is
thawed before operating.
(Continued)
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 193
CAUTION! (Continued)
•
Opening the Sky Slider™ when damp, wet, or
dirty can cause stains, mildew, and damage to the
soft-top material and the inside of your vehicle.
Make sure the Sky Slider™ is dry before opening.
•
Always close the Sky Slider™ when leaving your
vehicle, damage to the vehicle interior can occur.
•
Do not leave the Sky Slider™ open for several
weeks at a time. Close it occasionally to prevent
discoloration in the folds of the fabric and to allow
the creases to smooth out. This is especially im-
portant if the Sky Slider™ was opened when not
completely dry.
WARNING!
Failure to follow these warnings can result in injuries
that are serious or fatal to you, your passengers, and
others around you:
•
In an accident, there is a greater risk of being
thrown from a vehicle with the Sky Slider™ open.
Always fasten your seat belt properly and make
sure all passengers are properly secured too.
•
Before operating the Sky Slider™ make sure that
no moving parts of the Sky Slider™ can injure a
person or animal.
•
Never place any extremities (hands, feet, etc.) near
the Sky Slider™ components or the roof area
while operating the Sky Slider™.
(Continued)
194 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
•
If potential danger exists while opening or closing
the Sky Slider™ in Automatic Mode, press and
release the switch immediately to interrupt the
operation.
•
If potential danger exists while opening or closing
the Sky Slider™ in Operator Mode, release the
switch immediately to interrupt the operation.
•
Do not allow small children to operate the Sky
Slider™.
•
Never leave children in a vehicle, with the key in
the ignition switch. Occupants, particularly unat-
tended children, can become entrapped by the Sky
Slider™ while operating the Sky Slider™ switch.
Such entrapment may result in serious injury or
death.
Sky Slider™ Control
The Sky Slider™ switch is located between the sun visors
on the overhead console.
NOTE: The Sky Slider™ switch will operate when the
ignition switch is turned to the ON or ACC position.
Sky Slider™ Switch
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 195
Opening The Sky Slider™
Using Automatic Mode
Press the switch rearward and release it within one-half
second and the Sky Slider™ will open from the front and
move automatically toward the rear of the vehicle.
Press the switch forward and release it within one-half
second and the Sky Slider™ will open from the rear and
move automatically toward the front of the vehicle.
NOTE:
•
During operation, any movement of the Sky Slider™
switch will stop the Sky Slider™ roof.
•
To resume the operation from a partially open posi-
tion, press and release the switch a second time.
•
The Sky Slider™ will not open from the front and the
rear at the same time. The Sky Slider™ must close fully
before opening it from the opposite end.
Using Operator Mode
Press the switch rearward and hold it, the Sky Slider™
will open from the front and move toward the rear of the
vehicle.
Press the switch forward and hold it, the Sky Slider™
will open from the rear and move toward the front of the
vehicle.
NOTE: During operation, any movement of the Sky
Slider™ switch will stop the Sky Slider™ roof.
Closing The Sky Slider™
Using Automatic Mode
Press and release the button in the center of the switch
and the Sky Slider™ will close automatically from any
position.
196 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Using Operator Mode
If the Sky Slider™ is open from the front, press the switch
forward and hold it, the Sky Slider™ will move forward.
Release the switch to stop the Sky Slider™ travel at any
point.
If the Sky Slider™ is open from the rear, press the switch
rearward and hold it and the Sky Slider™ will move
rearward. Release the switch to stop the Sky Slider™
travel at any point.
Manual Override
The Sky Slider™ drive motors are mounted to the roof
above the cargo lamp. In the event that your vehicle
losses battery power, you can close the Sky Slider™ by
turning the drive gears in the appropriate motor with a
6 mm Allen wrench. To do so, you must first remove the
cargo lamp from the headliner. Then, insert the wrench
into the “Allen” shaped hole in the appropriate motor
and turn the wrench clockwise until the top closes
completely. The left motor facing forward will close the
top when it is open from the rear of the vehicle. The right
motor will close the top when it is open from the front of
the vehicle.
Anti-Pinch Protect Feature
The Sky Slider™ will retract automatically if it detects an
obstruction while closing. If this occurs, remove the
obstruction and use the switch again to close the Sky
Slider™.
WARNING!
There is no anti-pinch protection when the Sky
Slider™ is almost closed. Be sure to clear all objects
from the Sky Slider™ before closing.
Wind Buffeting
Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of
pressure on the ears or a helicopter-type sound in the
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 197
ears. Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the
windows down, or the Sky Slider™ in certain open or
partially open positions. This is a normal occurrence and
can be minimized. If the buffeting occurs with the rear
windows open, then open the front and rear windows
together to minimize the buffeting. If the buffeting occurs
with the Sky Slider™ open, adjust the Sky Slider™
opening to minimize the buffeting or open any window.
Sky Slider™ Maintenance
Refer to “Sky Slider™ Top Care” in “Maintaining Your
Vehicle” for further information.
ELECTRICAL POWER OUTLET
Your vehicle is equipped with a fused 12 Volt (13 Amp)
power outlet. This power outlet is located on the instru-
ment panel, below the climate controls. It has power
available when the ignition switch is in the ON or ACC
position.
Insert the cigar lighter or accessory plug into the outlet
for use to ensure proper operation.
NOTE: To ensure proper operation a MOPAR威 knob
and element must be used.
Front Power Outlet
198 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION!
•
Do not exceed the maximum power of 160 Watts
(13 Amps) at 12 Volts. If the 160 Watt (13 Amp)
power rating is exceeded the fuse protecting the
system will need to be replaced.
•
Power outlets are designed for accessory plugs
only. Do not insert any other object in the power
outlets as this will damage the outlet and blow the
fuse. Improper use of the power outlet can cause
damage not covered by your warranty.
WARNING!
To avoid serious injury or death:
(Continued)
Power Outlet Fuse Location
M7 Fuse 20 A Yellow Cigar Lighter Instrument Panel
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 199
WARNING! (Continued)
•
Only devices designed for use in this type of
outlet should be inserted into any 12 Volt outlet.
•
Do not touch with wet hands.
•
Close the lid when not in use and while driving
the vehicle.
•
If this outlet is mishandled, it may cause an
electric shock and failure.
CAUTION!
•
Many accessories that can be plugged in draw
power from the vehicle’s battery, even when not in
use (i.e., cellular phones, etc.). Eventually, if
plugged in long enough, the vehicle’s battery will
discharge sufficiently to degrade battery life
and/or prevent the engine from starting.
(Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued)
•
Accessories that draw higher power (i.e., coolers,
vacuum cleaners, lights, etc.) will degrade the
battery even more quickly. Only use these inter-
mittently and with greater caution.
•
After the use of high power draw accessories, or
long periods of the vehicle not being started (with
accessories still plugged in), the vehicle must be
driven a sufficient length of time to allow the
alternator to recharge the vehicle’s battery.
•
Power outlets are designed for accessory plugs
only. Do not hang any type of accessory or acces-
sory bracket from the plug.
200 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
CUPHOLDERS
There are two cupholders for the front seat passengers,
located in the center console.
The rear passengers have cupholders at the rear of the
center console.
Front Cupholders
Rear Cupholders
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 201
STORAGE
Glove Box Storage Compartment
The glove box storage compartment is located on the
right side of the instrument panel. Pull outward on the
latch to open the storage compartment.
Front Storage Compartment
The front storage compartment (located on the left side of
the instrument panel) can hold cell phones, PDAs, and
other small items.
Glove Box Storage Compartment
Front Storage Compartment
202 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Console Storage Compartment
To open, press the latch and lift the cover.
The center console has a removable storage tray which
can hold cell phones, PDAs, and other small items.
Center Console Removable Storage Tray
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 203
WARNING!
Do not operate this vehicle with a console compart-
ment lid in the open position. Cellular phones, music
players, and other handheld electronic devices
should be stowed while driving. Use of these devices
while driving can cause an accident due to distrac-
tion, resulting in death or injury.
CARGO AREA FEATURES
Cargo Load Floor
The cargo load floor system has a load capacity of 400 lbs
(181 kg). The load floor has a built-in storage bin that can
hold a variety of items. The underside of the storage bin
cover also contains a plastic lined tray. The cover can be
installed with either side facing up for added utility.
To provide additional storage area, each rear seat can be
folded flat. This allows for extended cargo space and still
maintains some rear seating room. Refer to “Seats” in
“Understanding the Features of Your Vehicle” for further
information.
Accessing The Storage Bin
NOTE: The spring-loaded latches that retain the
storage bin cover to the cargo load floor should not be
used as cargo tie-downs.
1. Flip the spring-loaded latch pull-loops up.
204 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
2. Pull the loops upward and twist them one-quarter
turn so that they are parallel to the slots in the storage bin
cover.
3. Lift the cover upward over the loops.
4. Turn over the cover and reinstall it.
NOTE: You can install the cover with either side facing
upward.
5. With the cover seated in the floor, pull upward on
loops and twist them one-quarter turn so that they are no
longer parallel to the slots in the cover.
6. Flip the loops down.
WARNING!
A loose storage bin cover thrown forward in a acci-
dent or hard stop could endanger the occupants of
the vehicle. Always latch the storage bin cover to the
cargo load floor with the spring-loaded latches when
not accessing the storage bin.
Cargo Load Floor Loops
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 205
Cargo Tie-Down Hooks And Loops
The tie-downs located on cargo area floor should be used
to secure loads safely when the vehicle is moving.
Cargo tie-down loops are located on the trim panels.
Cargo Tie-Down Hooks
Cargo Tie-Down Loops
206 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
•
Cargo tie-downs are not safe anchors for a child
seat tether strap. In a sudden stop or accident, a
tie-down could pull loose and allow the child seat
to come loose. A child could be badly injured. Use
only the anchors provided for child seat tethers.
•
To help protect against personal injury, passengers
should not be seated in the rear cargo area. The
rear cargo space is intended for load carrying
purposes only, not for passengers, who should sit
in seats and use seat belts.
WARNING!
The weight and position of cargo and passengers can
change the vehicle center of gravity and vehicle
handling. To avoid loss of control resulting in per-
sonal injury, follow these guidelines for loading your
vehicle:
•
Do not carry loads that exceed the load limits
described on the label attached to the left door or
left door center pillar.
•
Always place cargo evenly on the cargo floor. Put
heavier objects as low and as far forward as
possible.
•
Place as much cargo as possible in front of the rear
axle. Too much weight or improperly placed
weight over or behind the rear axle can cause the
vehicle to sway.
(Continued)
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 207
WARNING! (Continued)
•
Do not pile luggage or cargo higher than the top of
the seatback. This could impair visibility or be-
come a dangerous projectile in a sudden stop or
accident.
Retractable Cargo Area Cover — If Equipped
NOTE: The purpose of this cover is for privacy, not to
secure loads. It will not prevent cargo from shifting or
protect passengers from loose cargo.
The removable retractable cargo area cover mounts in the
cargo area behind the top of the rear seats.
The cover, when extended, covers the cargo area to keep
items out of sight. Notches in the trim panels near the
liftgate opening secure the extended cover in place.
The cover rolls away neatly inside its housing when not
in use. You can also remove the cover from the vehicle to
make more room in the cargo area.
To install the cover, position it in the vehicle so that the
flat side of the housing faces upward. Then, insert either
the left or the right spring-loaded post (located on the
ends of the cover housing) into either of the left or the
right attachment points shown.
208 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Then, insert the spring-loaded post on the opposite end
of the cover housing into the attachment point on the
opposite side of the vehicle.
Next, grab the cover handle and pull the cover toward
you. As the cover nears the liftgate opening, guide the
rear attachment posts (on both ends of the cover) into the
notches in the trim panels. Then, lower the cover to
position the posts into the bottom of the notches and
release the handle.
Installing Retractable Cargo Area Cover
Positioning Retractable Cargo Area Cover
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 209
WARNING!
In a collision, a cargo cover loose in the vehicle could
cause injury. It could fly around in a sudden stop and
strike someone in the vehicle. Do not store the cargo
cover on the cargo floor or in the passenger compart-
ment. Remove the cover from the vehicle when taken
from its mounting. Do not store in the vehicle.
REAR WINDOW FEATURES
Rear Window Wiper/Washer
The rear wiper/washer is controlled by a rotary switch
located on the control lever. The control lever is located
on the right side of the steering column.
Rotate the switch upward to the first detent posi-
tion for rear wiper operation.
NOTE: The rear wiper operates in an intermittent mode
only.
Rear Wiper/Washer Control
210 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Rotate the switch upward past the first detent to
activate the rear washer. The washer pump will
continue to operate as long as the switch is held
(for a maximum of 10 seconds). Upon release, the wiper
will cycle two times before returning to the set position.
If the rear wiper is operating when the ignition is turned
OFF, the wiper will automatically return to the “park”
position. When the vehicle is restarted, the wiper will
resume function at whichever position the switch is set.
NOTE: The rear wiper and the rear washer will not
operate If the liftgate flipper glass is open.
Rear Window Defroster
The rear window defroster button is located on the
climate control (Mode) knob. Press this button to
turn on the rear window defroster and the heated outside
mirrors. An indicator in the button will illuminate when
the rear window defroster is on. The rear window
defroster automatically turns off after approximately
10 minutes. For an additional five minutes of operation,
press the button a second time.
NOTE: To prevent excessive battery drain, use the rear
window defroster only when the engine is operating.
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these cautions can cause damage to
the heating elements:
•
Use care when washing the inside of the rear
window. Do not use abrasive window cleaners on
the interior surface of the window. Use a soft cloth
and a mild washing solution, wiping parallel to
the heating elements. Labels can be peeled off
after soaking with warm water.
(Continued)
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 211
CAUTION! (Continued)
•
Do not use scrapers, sharp instruments, or abra-
sive window cleaners on the interior surface of the
window.
•
Keep all objects a safe distance from the window.
ROOF LUGGAGE RACK — IF EQUIPPED
NOTE: Roof rack and crossbars cannot be used on
vehicles equipped with Skyslider威.
The load carried on the roof, when equipped with a
luggage rack, must not exceed 150 lbs (68 kg), and it
should be uniformly distributed over the cargo area.
Crossbars should always be used whenever cargo is
placed on the roof rack. Check the straps frequently to be
sure that the load remains securely attached.
NOTE: Crossbars are offered by MOPAR威 accessories.
External racks do not increase the total load carrying
capacity of the vehicle. Be sure that the total occupant
and luggage load inside the vehicle, plus the load on the
luggage rack, do not exceed the maximum vehicle load
capacity.
212 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION!
•
To avoid damage to the roof rack and vehicle, do
not exceed the maximum roof rack load capacity.
Always distribute heavy loads as evenly as pos-
sible and secure the load appropriately.
•
Long loads, which extend over the windshield,
such as wood panels or surfboards, should be
secured to both the front and rear of the vehicle.
•
Place a blanket or other protection between the
surface of the roof and the load.
•
Travel at reduced speeds and turn corners care-
fully when carrying large or heavy loads on the
roof rack. Wind forces, due to natural causes or
nearby truck traffic, can add sudden upward loads.
This is especially true on large flat loads and may
result in damage to the cargo or your vehicle.
WARNING!
Cargo must be securely tied down before driving
your vehicle. Improperly secured loads can fly off the
vehicle, particularly at high speeds, resulting in per-
sonal injury or property damage. Follow the roof rack
cautions when carrying cargo on your roof rack.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 213
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
CONTENTS
䡵 Instrument Panel Features ............... 218
䡵 Instrument Cluster .................... 219
䡵 Instrument Cluster Descriptions ........... 220
䡵 Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) —
If Equipped .......................... 235
▫ Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)
Displays ........................... 237
▫ Oil Change Required .................. 239
▫ Trip Functions ...................... 240
▫ Compass Display / ECO
(Fuel Saver Mode) — If Equipped ........ 241
▫ Personal Settings
(Customer-Programmable Features) ....... 244
䡵 Media Center 230 (REQ) — AM/FM Stereo
Radio And 6–Disc CD/DVD Changer
(MP3/WMA AUX Jack) .................. 248
▫ Operating Instructions - Radio Mode ...... 249
▫ Operation Instructions - (Disc Mode For CD
And MP3/WMA Audio Play, DVD-Video) . . . 257
▫ Notes On Playing MP3/WMA Files ....... 259
4
▫ List Button
(Disc Mode For MP3/WMA Play) ......... 261
▫ Info Button
(Disc Mode For MP3/WMA Play) ......... 261
▫ Uconnect™ Multimedia (Satellite Radio) — If
Equipped .......................... 264
䡵 Media Center 730N/430/430N (RHR/RER/
RBZ/RHB) CD/DVD/HDD/NAV —
If Equipped .......................... 268
▫ Operating Instructions (Voice Command
System) — If Equipped ................ 268
▫ Operating Instructions
(Uconnect™ Phone) — If Equipped ....... 268
䡵 Media Center 130 (Sales Code RES) ......... 268
▫ Operating Instructions — Radio Mode ..... 269
▫ Operation Instructions —
CD Mode For CD And MP3 Audio Play .... 272
▫ Notes On Playing MP3 Files ............ 274
▫ Operation Instructions - Auxiliary Mode .... 276
䡵 Media Center 130 With Satellite Radio
(Sales Code RES+RSC)................... 277
▫ Operating Instructions — Radio Mode ..... 277
▫ Operation Instructions — CD Mode For CD
And MP3 Audio Play ................. 283
▫ Notes On Playing MP3 Files ............ 285
▫ List Button (CD Mode For MP3 Play) ...... 288
▫ Info Button (CD Mode For MP3 Play) ...... 288
▫ Uconnect™ Multimedia (Satellite Radio) —
If Equipped ........................ 289
216 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
䡵 Steering Wheel Audio Controls ............ 293
▫ Radio Operation ..................... 294
▫ CD Player ......................... 294
䡵 CD/DVD Disc Maintenance .............. 295
䡵 Radio Operation And Mobile Phones ....... 295
䡵 Climate Controls ...................... 295
▫ Manual Heating And Air Conditioning ..... 296
▫ Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) — If
Equipped .......................... 300
▫ Operating Tips ...................... 305
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 217
INSTRUMENT PANEL FEATURES
1 — Air Outlet 4 — Radio 7 — Power Outlet
2 — Instrument Cluster 5 — Glove Compartment 8 — Lower Switch Bank
3 — Storage Tray 6 — Climate Control 9 — Storage Bin (if equipped)
218 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 219
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DESCRIPTIONS
1. Fuel Gauge
The fuel gauge shows level of fuel in tank when ignition
switch is in the ON/RUN position.
2. Fuel Door Reminder
This symbol indicates the side of the vehicle
where the fuel cap is located.
3. Low Fuel Light
This indicator lights when the fuel level drops to
approximately one-eighth tank.
4. Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light
Each tire, including the spare (if provided),
should be checked monthly when cold and
inflated to the inflation pressure recommended
by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle placard or tire
inflation pressure label. (If your vehicle has tires of a
different size than the size indicated on the vehicle
placard or tire inflation pressure label, you should deter-
mine the proper tire inflation pressure for those tires.)
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been
equipped with a Tire Pressure Monitoring System
(TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when
one or more of your tires is significantly under-inflated.
Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale illumi-
nates, you should stop and check your tires as soon as
possible, and inflate them to the proper pressure. Driving
on a significantly under-inflated tire causes the tire to
overheat and can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also
reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect
the vehicle’s handling and stopping ability.
220 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper
tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to
maintain correct tire pressure, even if under-inflation has
not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS
low tire pressure telltale.
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS
malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not
operating properly. The TPMS malfunction indicator is
combined with the low tire pressure telltale. When the
system detects a malfunction, the telltale will flash for
approximately one minute and then remain continuously
illuminated. This sequence will continue upon subse-
quent vehicle start-ups as long as the malfunction exists.
When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the sys-
tem may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure
as intended. TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety
of reasons, including the installation of replacement or
alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the
TPMS from functioning properly. Always check the
TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one or more
tires or wheels on your vehicle, to ensure that the
replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS
to continue to function properly.
CAUTION!
The TPMS has been optimized for the original
equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures and
warning have been established for the tire size
equipped on your vehicle. Undesirable system opera-
tion or sensor damage may result when using re-
placement equipment that is not of the same size,
type, and/or style. Aftermarket wheels can cause
sensor damage. Do not use tire sealant from a can or
balance beads if your vehicle is equipped with a
TPMS, as damage to the sensors may result.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 221
5. Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) Light
This light informs you of a problem with the
Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) system. If a
problem is detected, the light will come on
while the engine is running. Cycle the ignition
key when the vehicle has completely stopped and the
shift lever is placed in the PARK position. The light
should turn off. If the light remains lit with the engine
running, your vehicle will usually be drivable; however,
see an authorized dealer for service as soon as possible. If
the light is flashing when the engine is running, imme-
diate service is required and you may experience reduced
performance, an elevated/rough idle or engine stall and
your vehicle may require towing. The light will come on
when the ignition is first turned to ON/RUN and remain
on briefly as a bulb check. If the light does not come on
during starting, have the system checked by an autho-
rized dealer.
6. Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)
The Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) is part of
an onboard diagnostic system, called OBD, that
monitors engine and automatic transmission con-
trol systems. The light will illuminate when the key is in
the ON/RUN position, before engine start. If the bulb
does not come on when turning the key from OFF to
ON/RUN, have the condition checked promptly.
Certain conditions, such as a loose or missing gas cap,
poor fuel quality, etc., may illuminate the MIL after
engine start. The vehicle should be serviced if the light
stays on through several of your typical driving cycles. In
most situations, the vehicle will drive normally and will
not require towing.
222 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
CAUTION!
Prolonged driving with the MIL on could cause
damage to the engine control system. It also could
affect fuel economy and drivability. If the MIL is
flashing, severe catalytic converter damage and
power loss will soon occur. Immediate service is
required.
WARNING!
A malfunctioning catalytic converter, as referenced
above, can reach higher temperatures than in normal
operating conditions. This can cause a fire if you
drive slowly or park over flammable substances such
as dry plants, wood, cardboard, etc. This could result
in death or serious injury to the driver, occupants or
others.
7. High Beam Indicator
This indicator shows that the high beam head-
lights are on. Pull the multifunction control lever
on the left side of the steering column toward you to
switch to low beam.
8. Front Fog Light Indicator — If Equipped
This indicator will illuminate when the front fog
lights are on.
9. Speedometer
Shows the vehicle speed in Miles Per Hour (MPH) or
kilometers per hour (km/h).
10. Turn Signal Indicators
The arrow will flash with the exterior turn signal
when the turn signal lever is operated.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 223
If the vehicle electronics sense that the vehicle is driven
more than 1 mile (1.6 km) with either turn signal on, a
continuous chime will sound to alert you to turn the
signals off. If either indicator flashes at a rapid rate, check
for a defective outside light bulb.
11. Electronic Stability Control (ESC) Activation/
Malfunction Indicator Light — If Equipped
The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator
Light” in the instrument cluster will come on
when the ignition switch is turned to the
ON/RUN position. It should go out with the
engine running. If the “ESC Activation/Malfunction In-
dicator Light” comes on continuously with the engine
running, a malfunction has been detected in the ESC
system. If this light remains on after several ignition
cycles, and the vehicle has been driven several miles
(kilometers) at speeds greater than 30 mph (48 km/h), see
your authorized dealer as soon as possible to have the
problem diagnosed and corrected.
NOTE:
•
The “ESC Off Indicator Light” and the “ESC
Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” come on mo-
mentarily each time the ignition switch is turned to
ON/RUN.
•
Each time the ignition is turned to ON/RUN, the ESC
system will be ON, even if it was turned off previously.
•
The ESC system will make buzzing or clicking sounds
when it is active. This is normal; the sounds will stop
when ESC becomes inactive following the maneuver
that caused the ESC activation.
12. Charging System Light
This light shows the status of the electrical charg-
ing system. The light should come on when the
ignition switch is first turned to ON/RUN and remain on
briefly as a bulb check. If the light stays on or comes on
while driving, turn off some of the vehicle’s non-essential
electrical devices or increase engine speed (if at idle). If
224 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
the charging system light remains on, it means that the
vehicle is experiencing a problem with the charging
system. Obtain SERVICE IMMEDIATELY. See an autho-
rized dealer.
If jump starting is required, refer to “Jump Starting
Procedures” in “What To Do In Emergencies”.
13. Oil Pressure Warning Light
This light indicates low engine oil pressure. The
light should turn on momentarily when the engine
is started. If the light turns on while driving, stop the
vehicle and shut off the engine as soon as possible. A
chime will sound for four minutes when this light turns
on.
Do not operate the vehicle until the cause is corrected.
This light does not indicate how much oil is in the engine.
The engine oil level must be checked under the hood.
14. Anti-Lock Brake (ABS) Light
This light monitors the Anti-Lock Brake System
(ABS). The light will turn on when the ignition
switch is turned to the ON/RUN position and
may stay on for as long as four seconds.
If the ABS light remains on or turns on while driving, it
indicates that the Anti-Lock portion of the brake system
is not functioning and that service is required. However,
the conventional brake system will continue to operate
normally if the BRAKE warning light is not on.
If the ABS light is on, the brake system should be serviced
as soon as possible to restore the benefits of Anti-Lock
brakes. If the ABS light does not turn on when the
ignition switch is turned to the ON/RUN position, have
the light inspected by an authorized dealer.
15. Tachometer
This gauge measures engine revolutions-per-minute
(RPM x 1000). When the engine RPM are kept within the
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 225
green area, you are driving the vehicle in a fuel efficient
manner. Before the pointer reaches the red area, ease up
on the accelerator to prevent engine damage.
16. 4WD LOW Indicator — If Equipped
This light alerts the driver that the vehicle is in
the 4WD LOW mode. In this mode, the front
driveshaft and rear driveshaft are mechanically
locked together forcing the front and rear
wheels to rotate at the same speed.
17. Hill Descent Control Indicator — If Equipped
The symbol indicates the status of the Hill
Descent Control (HDC) feature. The lamp will
be on solid when HDC is armed. HDC can only
be armed when the transfer case is in the “4WD
LOW” position and the vehicle speed is less then 30 mph
(48 km/h). If these conditions are not met while attempt-
ing to use the HDC feature, the HDC indicator light will
flash on/off.
18. TOW/HAUL Indicator — If Equipped
This light will illuminate when selecting
TOW/HAUL. The TOW/HAUL button is lo-
cated on the gearshift bezel.
19. 4WD Indicator — Vehicles Equipped with
Command-Trac威
This light alerts the driver that the vehicle is in
the four-wheel drive mode. In this mode, the
front driveshaft and rear driveshaft are me-
chanically locked together forcing the front and
rear wheels to rotate at the same speed.
20. Electronic Stability Control (ESC) OFF Indicator
Light — If Equipped
This light indicates the Electronic Stability Con-
trol (ESC) is off.
226 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
21. SERV (Service) 4WD Indicator Light — If Equipped
The “SERV 4WD Indicator Light” will turn on
when the ignition key is turned to the ON/
RUN position and it will stay on for two
seconds. If the light stays on or turns on during
driving, it means that the 4WD system is not functioning
properly and that service is required.
22. Engine Temperature Warning Light
This light warns of an overheated engine condi-
tion. As temperatures rise and the gauge ap-
proaches H, this indicator will illuminate and a
single chime will sound after reaching a set threshold.
Further overheating will cause the temperature gauge to
pass H, the indicator will continuously flash and a
continuous chime will occur until the engine is allowed
to cool.
If the light turns on while driving, safely pull over and
stop the vehicle. If the A/C system is on, turn it off. Also,
shift the transmission into NEUTRAL and idle the ve-
hicle. If the temperature reading does not return to
normal, turn the engine off immediately and call for
service. Refer to “If Your Engine Overheats” in “What To
Do In Emergencies” for further information.
23. Temperature Gauge
The temperature gauge shows engine coolant tempera-
ture. Any reading within the normal range indicates that
the engine cooling system is operating satisfactorily.
The gauge pointer will likely indicate a higher tempera-
ture when driving in hot weather, up mountain grades,
or when towing a trailer. It should not be allowed to
exceed the upper limits of the normal operating range.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 227
CAUTION!
Driving with a hot engine cooling system could
damage your vehicle. If the temperature gauge reads
“H” pull over and stop the vehicle. Idle the vehicle
with the air conditioner turned off until the pointer
drops back into the normal range. If the pointer
remains on the “H” and you hear continuous chimes,
turn the engine off immediately and call an autho-
rized dealership for service.
WARNING!
A hot engine cooling system is dangerous. You or
others could be badly burned by steam or boiling
coolant. You may want to call an authorized dealer-
ship for service if your vehicle overheats. If you
decide to look under the hood yourself, see “Main-
taining Your Vehicle”. Follow the warnings under the
Cooling System Pressure Cap paragraph.
24. Transmission Temperature Warning Light — If
Equipped
This light indicates that the transmission fluid
temperature is running hot. This may occur
with severe usage, such as trailer towing. If this
light turns on, safely pull over and stop the
vehicle. Then, shift the transmission into NEUTRAL and
run the engine at idle or faster until the light turns off.
228 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
CAUTION!
Continuous driving with the Transmission Tempera-
ture Warning Light illuminated will eventually cause
severe transmission damage or transmission failure.
WARNING!
If the Transmission Temperature Warning Light is
illuminated and you continue operating the vehicle,
in some circumstances you could cause the fluid to
boil over, come in contact with hot engine or exhaust
components and cause a fire.
25. Odometer / Trip Odometer / ECO (Fuel Saver
Indicator) Button
Changing the Display
Press this button to change the display from odometer to
either of the two trip odometer settings or the “ECO”
display. Trip A or Trip B will appear when in the trip
odometer mode. On vehicles equipped with a Base
Cluster, press and release it once again to display the
outside temperature. On vehicles equipped with a Mid
Line Cluster, press and release it once again to display the
outside temperature and compass heading in the screen
below the speedometer. Refer to “Electronic Vehicle In-
formation Center (EVIC) — If Equipped” for details.
Resetting the Trip Odometer
Display the trip mileage that you want to reset, “Trip A”
or “Trip B.” Then push and hold the button (approxi-
mately two seconds) until the display resets to 0. The
odometer must be in Trip Mode to reset the trip odometer.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 229
26. 4WD Indicator — Vehicles Equipped with
Selec-Trac威 II
This light alerts the driver that the vehicle is in
the full-time four-wheel drive auto mode. In
this mode, the system operates with a normal
torque split of 42% front axle and 58% rear axle.
It can redirect up to 100% of torque to the front or rear
axle, if necessary.
27. Odometer Display/Trip Odometer Display
The odometer display shows the total distance the ve-
hicle has been driven. The trip odometer shows indi-
vidual trip mileage. Refer to “Trip Odometer button” for
additional information.
NOTE: U.S. Federal regulations require that upon trans-
fer of vehicle ownership, the seller certify to the pur-
chaser the correct mileage that the vehicle has been
driven. If your odometer needs to be repaired or serviced,
the repair technician should leave the odometer reading
the same as it was before the repair or service. If s/he
cannot do so, then the odometer must be set at zero, and
a sticker must be placed in the door jamb stating what the
mileage was before the repair or service. It is a good idea
for you to make a record of the odometer reading before
the repair/service, so that you can be sure that it is
properly reset, or that the door jamb sticker is accurate if
the odometer must be reset at zero.
Vehicle Odometer Messages
When the appropriate conditions exist, the following
messages will display in the odometer:
ECO ................... Fuel Saver Indicator Off
ECO-ON ................ Fuel Saver Indicator On
door .............................Door Ajar
gATE ...........................Liftgate Ajar
gLASS ......................Flipper Glass Ajar
LoW tirE.....................LowTirePressure
gASCAP .......................Fuel Cap Fault
noFUSE ..........................Fuse Fault
CHAngE OIL ...............OilChange Required
230 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
On vehicles equipped with a Premium Instrument Clus-
ter, this display shows the Electronic Vehicle Information
Center (EVIC) messages when the appropriate conditions
exist. Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center
(EVIC) for further information.
ECO / ECO-ON (Fuel Saver Indicator) — If Equipped
The ECO-ON indicator will illuminate when you are
driving in a fuel efficient manner and can be used to
modify driving habits in order to increase fuel economy.
The ECO display will toggle between ECO and ECO-ON
depending on driving habits and vehicle usage. Press the
Odometer / Trip Odometer / ECO (Fuel Saver Indicator)
button to change the display from odometer to either of
the two trip odometer settings or the “ECO” display.
LoW tirE
When the appropriate condition exists, the odometer
display will toggle between LoW and tirE for three
cycles.
gASCAP Message
If the vehicle diagnostic system determines that the fuel
filler cap is loose, improperly installed, or damaged, the
words “gASCAP” will display in the odometer display
area. If this occurs, tighten the fuel filler cap properly and
press the odometer reset button to turn off the message.
If the problem continues, the message will appear the
next time the vehicle is started.
A loose, improperly installed, or damaged fuel filler cap
may also turn on the Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL).
noFUSE
If the vehicle diagnostic system determines that the
Ignition Off Draw (IOD) fuse is improperly installed, or
damaged, a “noFUSE” message will display in the odom-
eter display area. For further information on fuses and
fuse locations refer to “Fuses” in “Maintaining Your
Vehicle”.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 231
CHAngE OIL Message (Base And Mid Line Clusters
Only)
Your vehicle is equipped with an engine oil change
indicator system. The “CHANgE OIL” message will flash
in the instrument cluster odometer for approximately
12 seconds after a single chime has sounded to indicate
the next scheduled oil change interval. The engine oil
change indicator system is duty cycle based, which
means the engine oil change interval may fluctuate
dependent upon your personal driving style.
Unless reset, this message will continue to display each
time you turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN
position. To turn off the message temporarily, press and
release the Trip Odometer button on the instrument
cluster. To reset the oil change indicator system (after
performing the scheduled maintenance) perform the
following procedure:
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position.
Do not start the engine.
2. Fully depress the accelerator pedal slowly three
times within 10 seconds.
3. Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position.
NOTE: If the indicator message illuminates when you
start the vehicle, the oil change indicator system did not
reset. If necessary, repeat this procedure.
28. Cruise Indicator — If Equipped
This indicator lights when the electronic speed
control system is turned on.
29. Shift Lever Indicator
The Shift Lever Indicator is self-contained within the
instrument cluster. It displays the gear position of the
automatic transmission.
30. Seat Belt Reminder Light
When the ignition switch is first turned to ON/
RUN, this light will turn on for four to eight
seconds as a bulb check. During the bulb check, if
232 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
the driver’s seat belt is unbuckled, a chime will sound.
After the bulb check or when driving, if the driver seat
belt remains unbuckled, the Seat Belt Warning Light will
flash or remain on continuously. Refer to “Occupant
Restraints” in “Things To Know Before Starting Your
Vehicle” for further information.
31. Brake Warning Light
This light monitors various brake functions,
including brake fluid level and parking brake
application. If the brake light turns on it may
indicate that the parking brake is applied, that
the brake fluid level is low, or that there is a problem with
the anti-lock brake system reservoir.
If the light remains on when the parking brake has been
disengaged, and the fluid level is at the full mark on the
master cylinder reservoir, it indicates a possible brake
hydraulic system malfunction or that a problem with the
Brake Booster has been detected by the Anti-Lock Brake
System (ABS) / Electronic Stability Control (ESC) system.
In this case, the light will remain on until the condition
has been corrected. If the problem is related to the brake
booster, the ABS pump will run when applying the brake
and a brake pedal pulsation may be felt during each stop.
The dual brake system provides a reserve braking capac-
ity in the event of a failure to a portion of the hydraulic
system. A leak in either half of the dual brake system is
indicated by the Brake Warning Light, which will turn on
when the brake fluid level in the master cylinder has
dropped below a specified level.
The light will remain on until the cause is corrected.
NOTE: The light may flash momentarily during sharp
cornering maneuvers, which change fluid level condi-
tions. The vehicle should have service performed, and
the brake fluid level checked.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 233
If brake failure is indicated, immediate repair is neces-
sary.
WARNING!
Driving a vehicle with the red brake light on is
dangerous. Part of the brake system may have failed.
It will take longer to stop the vehicle. You could have
a collision. Have the vehicle checked immediately.
Vehicles equipped with the Anti-Lock Brake System
(ABS), are also equipped with Electronic Brake Force
Distribution (EBD). In the event of an EBD failure, the
Brake Warning Light will turn on along with the ABS
Light. Immediate repair to the ABS system is required.
Operation of the Brake Warning Light can be checked by
turning the ignition switch from the OFF position to the
ON/RUN position. The light should illuminate for ap-
proximately two seconds. The light should then turn off
unless the parking brake is applied or a brake fault is
detected. If the light does not illuminate, have the light
inspected by an authorized dealer.
The light also will turn on when the parking brake is
applied with the ignition switch in the ON/RUN posi-
tion.
NOTE: This light shows only that the parking brake is
applied. It does not show the degree of brake application.
32. Vehicle Security Light — If Equipped
This light will flash rapidly for approximately
16 seconds when the vehicle security system is
arming and then flash slowly when the system
is armed. The light will also turn on for about
three seconds when the ignition is first turned to ON/
RUN.
234 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
33. Airbag Warning Light
This light will turn on for four to eight seconds
as a bulb check when the ignition switch is first
turned to ON/RUN. If the light is either not on
during starting, stays on, or turns on while
driving, have the system inspected at an authorized
dealer as soon as possible. Refer to “Occupant Restraints”
in “Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle” for
further information.
34. Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) /
Compass Display — If Equipped
On vehicles equipped with a Premium Cluster, this
display shows the Electronic Vehicle Information Center
(EVIC) messages when the appropriate conditions exist.
Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) —
If Equipped” for further information.
On vehicles equipped with a Mid Line Cluster, this
display shows the compass heading (N, S, E, W, NE, NW,
SE, and SW) and the outside temperature.
ELECTRONIC VEHICLE INFORMATION CENTER
(EVIC) — IF EQUIPPED
The Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) fea-
tures a driver-interactive display that is located in the
instrument cluster.
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 235
This system conveniently allows the driver to select a
variety of useful information by pressing the switches
mounted on the steering wheel. The EVIC consists of the
following:
•
System Status
•
Vehicle Information Warning Message Displays
•
Tire Pressure Monitor System (if equipped)
•
Personal Settings (Customer-Programmable Features)
•
Compass Display
•
Outside Temperature Display
•
Trip Computer Functions
•
Uconnect™ gps system screens (if equipped)
•
Audio Mode Display
The system allows the driver to select information by
pressing the following buttons mounted on the steering
wheel:
EVIC Steering Wheel Buttons
236 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
MENU Button
Press and release the MENU button and the
mode displayed will change between Trip
Functions, Uconnect™ gps (if equipped), Sys-
tem Status, and Personal Settings.
DOWN Button
Press and release the DOWN button to scroll
downward through the main menus and sub-
menus.
FUNCTION SELECT Button
Press the FUNCTION SELECT button to accept
a selection. Also, the FUNCTION SELECT but-
ton changes the current CD track being played
(if equipped) when the EVIC is in the
Compass/Temp/Audio screen.
COMPASS Button
Press and release the COMPASS/
TEMPERATURE button to display one of eight
compass readings and the outside temperature.
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)
Displays
When the appropriate conditions exist, the EVIC displays
the following messages:
•
Turn Signal On (with a continuous warning chime)
•
Left Front Turn Signal Light Out (with a single chime)
•
Left Rear Turn Signal Light Out (with a single chime)
•
Right Front Turn Signal Light Out (with a single
chime)
•
Right Rear Turn Signal Light Out (with a single chime)
•
RKE Battery Low (with a single chime)
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 237
•
Memory #1/#2 Profile Set
•
Memory #1/#2 Profile Recall
•
Memory System Disabled – Vehicle Not in Park (with
a single chime) — automatic transmission
•
Memory System Disabled – Vehicle in Motion (with a
single chime) — manual transmission
•
Memory System Disabled – Seat Belt Buckled (with a
single chime)
•
Personal Settings Not Available – Vehicle Not in Park
— automatic transmission
•
Personal Settings Not Available – Vehicle in Motion —
manual transmission
•
Left/Right Front Door Ajar (one or more doors open,
with a single chime if speed is above 1 mph
(1.6 km/h))
•
Left/Right Rear Door Ajar (one or more doors open,
with a single chime if speed is above 1 mph
(1.6 km/h))
•
Door(s) Ajar (with a single chime if vehicle is in
motion)
•
Liftgate Ajar (with a single chime)
•
Left Front Low Pressure (with a single chime). Refer to
“Tire Pressure Monitoring System” in “Starting And
Operating”.
•
Left Rear Low Pressure (with a single chime). Refer to
“Tire Pressure Monitoring System” in “Starting And
Operating”.
•
Right Front Low Pressure (with a single chime). Refer
to “Tire Pressure Monitoring System” in “Starting And
Operating”.
238 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
•
Right Rear Low Pressure (with a single chime). Refer
to “Tire Pressure Monitoring System” in “Starting And
Operating”.
•
Check TPM System (with a single chime). Refer to
“Tire Pressure Monitoring System” in “Starting And
Operating”.
•
Check Gascap (refer to “Adding Fuel” in “Starting
And Operating” for more details)
•
Service Park Assist System (with a single chime)
•
Oil Change Required (with a single chime)
•
ECO (Fuel Saver Indicator) — if equipped
Oil Change Required
Your vehicle is equipped with an engine oil change
indicator system. The “Oil Change Required” message
will flash in the EVIC display for approximately 10 sec-
onds after a single chime has sounded to indicate the next
scheduled oil change interval. The engine oil change
indicator system is duty cycle based, which means the
engine oil change interval may fluctuate dependent upon
your personal driving style.
Unless reset, this message will continue to display each
time you turn the ignition switch to the ON position. To
turn off the message temporarily, press and release the
FUNCTION SELECT button. To reset the oil change
indicator system (after performing the scheduled main-
tenance), perform the following procedure:
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position. Do not
start the engine.
2. Fully depress the accelerator pedal slowly three times
within 10 seconds.
3. Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 239
NOTE: If the indicator message illuminates when you
start the vehicle, the oil change indicator system did not
reset. If necessary, repeat this procedure.
Trip Functions
Press and until one of the following Trip Functions
displays in the EVIC:
•
Average Fuel Economy
•
Distance To Empty
•
Elapsed Time
•
Display Units of Measure in
Press the SCROLL button to cycle through all the Trip
Computer functions.
The Trip Functions mode displays the following informa-
tion:
•
Average Fuel Economy
Shows the average fuel economy since the last reset.
When the fuel economy is reset, the display will read
“RESET” or show dashes for two seconds. Then, the
history information will be erased, and the averaging will
continue from the last fuel average reading before the
reset.
•
Distance To Empty (DTE)
Shows the estimated distance that can be traveled with
the fuel remaining in the tank. This estimated distance is
determined by a weighted average of the instantaneous
and average fuel economy, according to the current fuel
tank level. DTE cannot be reset through the FUNCTION
SELECT button.
240 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
NOTE: Significant changes in driving style or vehicle
loading will greatly affect the actual drivable distance of
the vehicle, regardless of the DTE displayed value.
When the DTE value is less than 30 miles (48 km)
estimated driving distance, the DTE display will change
to a text display of ⬙LOW FUEL.⬙ This display will
continue until the vehicle runs out of fuel. Adding a
significant amount of fuel to the vehicle will turn off the
⬙LOW FUEL⬙ text and a new DTE value will display.
•
Elapsed Time
Shows the total elapsed time of travel since the last reset
when the ignition switch is in the ACC position. Elapsed
time will increment when the ignition switch is in the ON
or START position.
•
Display Units of Measure in:
To make your selection, press and release the FUNC-
TION SELECT button until “ENGLISH” or “METRIC”
appears.
To Reset The Display
Reset will only occur while a resettable function is being
displayed. Press and release the FUNCTION SELECT
button once to clear the resettable function being dis-
played. To reset all resettable functions, press and release
the FUNCTION SELECT button a second time within
three seconds of resetting the currently displayed func-
tion (reset ALL will display during this three-second
window).
Compass Display / ECO (Fuel Saver Mode) —
If Equipped
The compass readings indicate the direction
the vehicle is facing. Press and release the
COMPASS button to display one of eight
compass readings and the outside tempera-
ture.
NOTE: The system will display the last known outside
temperature when starting the vehicle and may need to
COMPASS
Button
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 241
be driven several minutes before the updated tempera-
ture is displayed. Engine temperature can also affect the
displayed temperature; therefore, temperature readings
are not updated when the vehicle is not moving.
ECO (Fuel Saver Mode) — If Equipped
The ECO message will display below the outside tem-
perature in the EVIC display. This message will appear
whenever you are driving in a fuel efficient manner.
This feature allows you to monitor when you are driving
in a fuel efficient manner, and it can be used to modify
driving habits in order to increase fuel economy.
Automatic Compass Calibration
This compass is self-calibrating, which eliminates the
need to set the compass manually. When the vehicle is
new, the compass may appear erratic and the EVIC will
display “CAL” until the compass is calibrated. You may
also calibrate the compass by completing one or more
360–degree turns (in an area free from large metal or
metallic objects) until the “CAL” message displayed in
the EVIC turns off. The compass will now function
normally.
NOTE: A good calibration requires a level surface and
an environment free from large metallic objects such as
buildings, bridges, underground cables, railroad tracks,
etc.
Manual Compass Calibration
If the compass appears erratic and the “CAL” indicator
does not appear in the EVIC display, you must put the
compass into the Calibration Mode manually as follows:
1. Start the engine. Leave the shift lever in PARK in order
to enter the EVIC Programming Menus.
2. Press the MENU button until the Personal Settings
(Customer-Programmable Features) menu displays in the
EVIC.
242 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
3. Press the SCROLL button until “Calibrate Compass”
displays in the EVIC.
4. Press and release the FUNCTION SELECT button to
start the calibration. The “CAL” indicator will display in
the EVIC.
5. Complete one or more 360–degree turns (in an area
free from large metal or metallic objects) until the “CAL”
indicator turns off. The compass will now function
normally.
Compass Variance
Compass Variance is the difference between Magnetic
North and Geographic North. To compensate for the
differences, the variance should be set for the zone where
the vehicle is driven, per the zone map. Once properly
set, the compass will automatically compensate for the
differences and provide the most accurate compass head-
ing.
NOTE: Magnetic materials should be kept away from
the top of the right rear quarter window. This is where
the compass sensor is located.
1. Turn the ignition switch ON.
Compass Variance Map
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 243
2. Press the MENU button until the Personal Settings
(Customer-Programmable Features) menu displays in the
EVIC.
3. Press the SCROLL button until “Compass Variance”
displays in the EVIC.
4.
Press and release the FUNCTION SELECT button until
the proper variance zone is selected according to the map.
5. Press and release the COMPASS button to exit.
Personal Settings
(Customer-Programmable Features)
Personal Settings allows the driver to set and recall
features when the vehicle speed is at 0 mph (0 km/h)
(manual transmission) or when the shift lever is in PARK
(auto transmission).
Press and release the MENU button until Personal Set-
tings displays in the EVIC then press the FUNCTION
SELECT button.
Use the SCROLL button to display one of the following
choices:
Language
When in this display you may select one of five lan-
guages for all display nomenclature, including the trip
functions and the navigation system (if equipped). Press
the FUNCTION SELECT button while in this display to
select English, Espanol, Deutsch, Italiano, or Francais.
Then, as you continue, the information will display in the
selected language.
Lock Doors Automatically at 15 mph (24 km/h)
When on is selected, all doors will lock automatically
when the vehicle reaches a speed of 15 mph (24 km/h).
To make your selection, press and release the FUNC-
TION SELECT button until “ON” or “OFF” appears.
Unlock Doors Automatically on Exit
When ON is selected, all doors will unlock when the
vehicle is stopped and the transmission is in the PARK or
244 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
NEUTRAL position and the driver’s door is opened. To
make your selection, press and release the FUNCTION
SELECT button until “ON” or “OFF” appears.
Remote Key Unlock
When Driver Door 1st Press is selected, only the driver’s
door will unlock on the first press of the Remote Keyless
Entry (RKE) transmitter UNLOCK button. When Driver
Door 1st Press is selected, you must press the RKE
transmitter UNLOCK button twice to unlock the passen-
ger’s doors. When All Doors 1st Press is selected, all of
the doors will unlock on the first press of the RKE
transmitter UNLOCK button. To make your selection,
press and release the FUNCTION SELECT button until
“Driver Door 1st Press” or “All Doors 1st Press” appears.
Recall Memory with Remote Key Unlock — If
Equipped
When on is selected, you can use your RKE transmitter to
recall one of two pre-programmed memory profiles. Each
memory profile contains desired position settings for the
driver seat, side mirror, adjustable pedals (if equipped),
power tilt and telescopic steering column (if equipped),
and a set of desired radio station presets. When OFF is
selected, only the memory switch on the driver’s door
panel will recall memory profiles. To make your selec-
tion, press and release the FUNCTION SELECT button
until “ON” or “OFF” appears. Refer to “Driver Memory
Seat” in “Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle”
for more information.
Sound Horn with Remote Key Lock
When on is selected, a short horn sound will occur when
the RKE transmitter LOCK button is pressed. This feature
may be selected with or without the Flash Lights with
Remote Key Lock feature. To make your selection, press
and release the FUNCTION SELECT button until “On”
or “Off” appears.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 245
Automatically Move Seat Back on Exit — If
Equipped
This feature provides automatic driver seat positioning to
enhance driver mobility when entering and exiting the
vehicle. To make your selection, press and release the
FUNCTION SELECT button until “On” or “Off” appears.
NOTE: The seat will return to the memorized seat
location (if Recall Memory with Remote Key Unlock is set
to ON) when the RKE transmitter is used to unlock the
door. Refer to “Driver Memory Seat” in “Understanding
The Features Of Your Vehicle” for further information.
Flash Lights with Remote Key Lock
When on is selected, the front and rear turn signals will
flash when the doors are locked or unlocked with the
RKE transmitter. This feature may be selected with or
without the sound horn on lock feature selected. To make
your selection, press and release the FUNCTION SE-
LECT button until “ON” or “OFF” appears.
Headlights On with Wipers
(Available with Auto Headlights Only)
When on is selected, and the headlight switch is in the
AUTO position, the headlights will turn on approxi-
mately 10 seconds after the wipers are turned on. If the
headlights were turned on by this feature they will also
turn off when the wipers are turned off. To make your
selection, press and release the FUNCTION SELECT
button until “ON” or “OFF” appears.
NOTE: Turning the headlights on during the daytime
causes the instrument panel lights to dim. To increase the
brightness, refer to “Lights” in “Understanding The
Features Of Your Vehicle.”
Delay Turning Headlights Off
When this feature is selected, the driver can choose to
have the headlights remain on for 0, 30, 60, or 90 seconds
when exiting the vehicle. To make your selection, press
and release the FUNCTION SELECT button until “0,”
“30,” “60,” or “90” appears.
246 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Turn Headlights On with Remote Key Unlock
When this feature is selected, the headlights will activate
and remain on for up to 90 seconds when the doors are
unlocked with the RKE transmitter. To make your selec-
tion, press and release the FUNCTION SELECT button
until “OFF,” “30 sec.,” “60 sec.,” or “90 sec.” appears.
Delay Power Off to Accessories Until Exit
When this feature is selected, the power window
switches, radio, hands–free system (if equipped), DVD
video system (if equipped), power sunroof (if equipped),
and power outlets will remain active for up to 10 minutes
after the ignition switch is turned to the LOCK position.
Opening either front vehicle door will cancel this feature.
To make your selection, press and release the FUNC-
TION SELECT button until “OFF,” “45 sec.,” “5 min.,” or
“10 min.” appears.
Illumination Approach
When this feature is selected, the headlights will activate
and remain on for up to 90 seconds when the doors are
unlocked with the RKE transmitter. To make your selec-
tion, press and hold the FUNCTION SELECT button
until “OFF,” “30 sec,” “60 sec,” or “90 sec” appears.
Enable/Disable the Rear Park Assist System
The Rear Park Assist system will scan for objects behind
the vehicle when the transmission is in the REVERSE
position and the vehicle speed is less than 11 mph
(18 km/h). The system can be enabled with Sound Only,
Sound and Display, or turned OFF through the EVIC, to
make your selection, press and release the FUNCTION
SELECT button. Refer to “Rear Park Assist System” in
“Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle” for sys-
tem function and operating information.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 247
Hill Start Assist (HSA) — If Equipped
When on is selected, the HSA system is active. Refer to
“Electronic Brake Control System” in “Starting And
Operating” for system function and operating informa-
tion. To make your selection, press and release the
FUNCTION SELECT button until “ON” or “OFF”
appears.
Display Fuel Saver — If Equipped
The “ECO” message is located in the Compass/
Temperature display; this message can be turned on or
off. To make your selection, press and release the FUNC-
TION SELECT button until “ON” or “OFF” appears.
Compass Variance
Refer to “Compass Display” for more information.
Calibrate Compass
Refer to “Compass Display” for more information.
MEDIA CENTER 230 (REQ) — AM/FM STEREO
RADIO AND 6–DISC CD/DVD CHANGER
(MP3/WMA AUX JACK)
NOTE: The radio sales code is located on the lower right
side of the radio faceplate.
Media Center 230 (REQ)
248 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Operating Instructions - Radio Mode
NOTE: The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC
position to operate the radio.
Power Switch/Volume Control (Rotary)
Push the ON/VOLUME control knob to turn on the
radio. Press the ON/VOLUME control knob a second
time to turn off the radio.
Electronic Volume Control
The electronic volume control turns continuously (360
degrees) in either direction without stopping. Turning the
ON/VOLUME control knob to the right increases the
volume and to the left decreases it.
When the audio system is turned ON, the sound will be
set at the same volume level as last played.
SEEK Buttons
Press and release the SEEK buttons to search for the next
listenable station in AM/FM mode. Press the right switch
to seek up and the left switch to seek down. The radio
will remain tuned to the new station until you make
another selection. Holding either button will bypass
stations without stopping until you release it.
SCAN Button
Pressing the SCAN button causes the tuner to search for
the next listenable station in AM, FM or Satellite (if
equipped) frequencies, pausing for five seconds at each
listenable station before continuing to the next. To stop
the search, press the SCAN button a second time.
Voice Command Button Uconnect™ Phone —
If Equipped
Press this button to operate the Uconnect™ Phone feature
(if equipped). Refer to “Voice Command in the Uconnect™
User Manual located on the DVD for further details.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 249
If your vehicle is not equipped with or this feature is not
available on your vehicle, a “Not Equipped With
Uconnect Phone” message will display on the radio
screen.
Phone Button Uconnect™ Phone — If Equipped
Press this button to operate the Uconnect™ Phone feature
(if equipped). Refer to “Uconnect™ Phone” in the
Uconnect™ User Manual located on the DVD for further
details.
If your vehicle is not equipped with or this feature is not
available on your vehicle, a “Not Equipped With
Uconnect Phone” message will display on the radio
screen.
TIME Button
Press the TIME button to alternate locations of the time
and frequency display.
Clock Setting Procedure
1. Press and hold the TIME button until the hours blink.
2. Adjust the hours by turning the right side TUNE/
SCROLL control knob.
3. After adjusting the hours, press the right side TUNE/
SCROLL control knob to set the minutes. The minutes
will begin to blink.
4. Adjust the minutes using the right side TUNE/
SCROLL control knob. Press the TUNE/SCROLL control
knob to save the time change.
5. To exit, press any button/knob or wait five seconds.
The clock can also be set by pressing the SETUP button
and selecting the “SET HOME CLOCK” entry. Once in
this display follow the above procedure, starting at
step 2.
250 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
INFO Button
Press the INFO button for an RDS station (one with call
letters displayed). The radio will return a Radio Text
message broadcast from an FM station (FM mode only).
RW/FF
Pressing the RW (Rewind) or FF (Fast Forward) buttons
causes the tuner to search for the next frequency in the
direction of the arrows. This feature operates in AM, FM
or Satellite (if equipped) frequencies.
TUNE Control
Turn the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob clockwise
to increase or counterclockwise to decrease the frequency.
Setting the Tone, Balance, and Fade
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob and BASS
will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL control knob to
the right or left to increase or decrease the bass tones.
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a second
time and MID will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL
control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the
mid-range tones.
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a third
time and TREBLE will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL
control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the
treble tones.
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a fourth
time and BALANCE will display. Turn the TUNE/
SCROLL control knob to the right or left to adjust the
sound level from the right or left side speakers.
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a fifth time
and FADE will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL control
knob to the left or right to adjust the sound level between
the front and rear speakers.
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob again to
exit setting tone, balance, and fade.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 251
MUSIC TYPE Button
Pressing this button once will turn on the Music Type
mode for five seconds. Pressing the MUSIC TYPE button
or turning the TUNE/SCROLL control knob within five
seconds will allow the program format type to be se-
lected. Many radio stations do not currently broadcast
Music Type information.
Toggle the MUSIC TYPE button to select the following
format types:
Program Type 16-Digit Character Display
No program type or
undefined
None
Adult Hits Adlt Hit
Classical Classicl
Classic Rock Cls Rock
College College
Country Country
Foreign Language Language
Program Type 16-Digit Character Display
Information Inform
Jazz Jazz
News News
Nostalgia Nostalga
Oldies Oldies
Personality Persnlty
Public Public
Rhythm and Blues R & B
Religious Music Rel Musc
Religious Talk Rel Talk
Rock Rock
Soft Soft
Soft Rock Soft Rck
Soft Rhythm and Blues Soft R & B
Sports Sports
Talk Talk
252 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Program Type 16-Digit Character Display
Top 40 Top 40
Weather Weather
By pressing the SEEK button when the Music Type icon
is displayed, the radio will be tuned to the next frequency
station with the same selected Music Type name. The
Music Type function only operates when in the FM
mode.
If a preset button is activated while in the Music Type
(Program Type) mode, the Music Type mode will be
exited and the radio will tune to the preset station.
SETUP Button
Pressing the SETUP button allows you to select between
the following items:
NOTE: Turn the TUNE/SCROLL control knob to scroll
through the entries. Push the AUDIO/SELECT button to
select an entry and make changes.
•
DVD Enter - When the disc is in DVD Menu mode,
selecting DVD Enter will allow you to play the current
highlighted selection. Use the remote control to scroll
up and down the menu (if equipped).
•
DISC Play/Pause - You can toggle between
playing the DVD and pausing the DVD by
pushing the SELECT button (if equipped).
•
DVD Play Options - Selecting the DVD Play Options
will display the following:
•
Subtitle – Repeatedly pressing SELECT will switch
subtitles to different subtitle languages that are
available on the disc (if equipped).
•
Audio Stream – Repeatedly pressing SELECT will
switch to different audio languages (if supported on
the disc) (if equipped).
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 253
•
Angle – Repeatedly pressing SELECT will change
the viewing angle if supported by the DVD disc (if
equipped).
NOTE:
•
The available selections for each of the above entries
varies depending upon the disc.
•
These selections can only be made while playing a
DVD.
•
VES™ Power - Allows you to turn VES™ ON and
OFF (if equipped).
•
VES™ Lock - Locks out rear VES™ remote controls (if
equipped).
•
VES™ CH1/CH2 - Allows the user to change the
mode of either the IR1 or IR2 wireless headphones by
pressing the AUDIO/SELECT button (if equipped).
•
Set Home Clock - Pressing the SELECT button allows
you to set the clock. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL control
knob to adjust the hours and then press and turn the
TUNE/SCROLL control knob to adjust the minutes.
Press the TUNE/SCROLL control knob again to save
changes.
•
Player Defaults - Selecting this item will allow the
user to scroll through the following items and set
defaults according to customer preference.
Menu Language — If Equipped
Selecting this item will allow the user to choose the
default startup DVD menu language (effective only if
language supported by disc). If you want to select a
language not listed, then scroll down and select ⬙other.⬙
Enter the four-digit country code using the TUNE/
SCROLL control knob to scroll up and down to select the
number and then push to select.
254 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Audio Language — If Equipped
Selecting this item allows you to choose a default audio
language (effective only if the language is supported by
the disc). You can select a language not listed by scrolling
down and selecting ⬙other.⬙ Enter the country code using
the TUNE/SCROLL control knob to scroll up and down
to select the number and then push to select.
Subtitle Language — If Equipped
Selecting this item allows you to choose a default subtitle
language (effective only if the language is supported by
the disc). You can select a language not listed by scrolling
down and selecting ⬙other.⬙ Enter the country code using
the TUNE/SCROLL control knob to scroll up and down
to select the number and then push to select.
Subtitles — If Equipped
Selecting this item allows you to choose between subtitle
Off or On.
Audio DRC — If Equipped
Selecting this item allows you to limit maximum audio
dynamic range. The default is set to ⬙High,⬙ and under
this setting, dialogues will play at 11 db higher than if the
setting is ⬙Normal.⬙
Aspect Ratio — If Equipped
Selecting this item allows you to choose between wide
screen, pan scan, and letter box.
AutoPlay — If Equipped
When this is set to On and a DVD video is inserted, it will
bypass the DVD menu screen and automatically play the
movie. In some rare cases, the DVD player may not
auto-play the main title. In such cases, use the MENU
button on the remote control to select desired title to play.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 255
NOTE: The user will have to set these defaults before
loading a disc. If changes are made to these settings after
a disc is loaded, changes will not be effective. Also, the
defaults are effective only if the disc supports the
customer-preferred settings.
AM and FM Buttons
Press the buttons to select AM or FM mode.
SET Button — To Set the Pushbutton Memory
When you are receiving a station that you wish to
commit to pushbutton memory, press the SET button.
The symbol SET 1 will now show in the display window.
Select the button (1-6) you wish to lock onto this station
and press and release that button. If a button is not
selected within five seconds after pressing the SET but-
ton, the station will continue to play but will not be
stored into pushbutton memory.
You may add a second station to each pushbutton by
repeating the above procedure with this exception: Press
the SET button twice and SET 2 will show in the display
window. Each button can be set for SET 1 and SET 2 in
both AM and FM. This allows a total of 12 AM, 12 FM,
and 12 Satellite (if equipped) stations to be stored into
pushbutton memory. The stations stored in SET 2
memory can be selected by pressing the pushbutton
twice.
Every time a preset button is used, a corresponding
button number will display.
Buttons1-6
These buttons tune the radio to the stations that you
commit to pushbutton memory {12 AM, 12 FM, and 12
Satellite (if equipped) stations}.
DISC Button
Pressing the DISC button will allow you to switch from
AM/FM modes to Disc modes.
256 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Operation Instructions - (DISC MODE for CD and
MP3/WMA Audio Play, DVD-VIDEO)
The radio DVD player and many DVD discs are coded by
geographic region. These region codes must match in
order for the disc to play. If the region code for the DVD
disc does not match the region code for the radio DVD
player, it will not play the disc. Customers may take their
vehicle to an authorized dealer to change the region code
of the player a maximum of five times.
CAUTION!
The radio may shut down during extremely hot
conditions. When this occurs, the radio will indicate
“Disc Hot” and shut off until a safe temperature is
reached. This shutdown is necessary to protect the
optics of the DVD player and other radio internal
components.
NOTE: The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC
position to operate the radio.
LOAD Button — Loading Compact Disc(s)
Press the LOAD button and the pushbutton with the
corresponding number (1-6) where the CD is being
loaded. The radio will display PLEASE WAIT and
prompt when to INSERT DISC. After the radio displays
⬙INSERT DISC,⬙ insert the CD into the player.
Radio display will show ⬙LOADING DISC⬙ when the disc
is loading and “READING DISC” when the radio is
reading the disc.
CAUTION!
This CD player will accept 4–3/4 in (12 cm) discs only.
The use of other sized discs may damage the CD
player mechanism.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 257
Eject Button — Ejecting Compact Disc(s)
Press the EJECT button and the pushbutton
with the corresponding number (1-6) where the
CD was loaded and the disc will unload and
move to the entrance for easy removal. Radio
display will show ⬙EJECTING DISC⬙ when the disc is
being ejected and prompt the user to remove the disc.
Press and hold the EJECT button for five seconds and all
CDs will be ejected from the radio.
The disc can be ejected with the radio and ignition OFF.
SEEK Button (CD MODE)
Press the right SEEK button for the next selection on the
CD. Press the left SEEK button to return to the beginning
of the current selection, or return to the beginning of the
previous selection if the CD is within the first second of
the current selection. Pressing and holding the SEEK
button will allow you to scroll through the tracks faster in
CD and MP3/MWA modes.
SCAN Button (CD MODE)
Press the SCAN button to scan through each track on the
CD currently playing.
TIME Button (CD MODE)
Press this button to change the display from a large CD
playing time display to a small CD playing time display.
RW/FF (CD MODE)
Press and hold FF (Fast Forward) and the CD player will
begin to fast forward until FF is released, or RW or
another CD button is pressed. The RW (Rewind) button
works in a similar manner.
AM or FM Button (CD MODE)
Switches the radio into the AM or FM radio mode.
258 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Notes On Playing MP3/WMA Files
The radio can play MP3/WMA files; however, acceptable
MP3/WMA file recording media and formats are limited.
When writing MP3/WMA files, pay attention to the
following restrictions.
Supported Media (Disc Types)
The MP3/WMA file recording media supported by the
radio are CDDA, CD-R, CD-RW, MP3,WMA, DVD Video,
DVD-R, DVD-RW, DVD+R, DVD+RW, and CDDA+MP3.
Supported Medium Formats (File Systems)
The medium formats supported by the radio are ISO 9660
Level 1 and Level 2 and includes the Joliet extension.
When reading discs recorded using formats other than
ISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2, the radio may fail to read
files properly and may be unable to play the file nor-
mally. UDF and Apple HFS formats are not supported.
The radio uses the following limits for file systems:
•
Maximum number of directory levels: 8
•
Maximum number of files: 255
•
Maximum number of folders: 100
•
Maximum number of characters in file/folder names:
•
Level 1: 12 (including a separator ⬙.⬙ and a three-
character extension)
•
Level 2: 31 (including a separator ⬙.⬙ and a three-
character extension)
Multisession disc formats are supported by the radio.
Multisession discs may contain combinations of normal
CD audio tracks and computer files (including MP3/
WMA files). Discs created with an option such as ⬙keep
disc open after writing⬙ are most likely multisession
discs. The use of multisession for CD audio or MP3/
WMA playback may result in longer disc loading times.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 259
If a disc contains multi-formats, such as CD audio and
MP3/WMA tracks, the radio will only play the MP3/
WMA tracks on that disc.
Supported MP3/WMA File Formats
The radio will recognize only files with the *.MP3/WMA
extension as MP3/WMA files. Non-MP3/WMA files
named with the *.MP3/WMA extension may cause play-
back problems. The radio is designed to recognize the file
as an invalid MP3/WMA and will not play the file.
When using the MP3/WMA encoder to compress audio
data to an MP3/WMA file, the bit rate and sampling
frequencies in the following table are supported. In
addition, variable bit rates (VBR) are also supported. The
majority of MP3/WMA files use a 44.1 kHz sampling rate
and a 192, 160, 128, 96 or VBR bit rates.
MPEG
Specification
Sampling Fre-
quency (kHz)
Bit Rate (kbps)
MPEG-1 Audio
Layer 3
48, 44.1, 32
320, 256, 224,
192, 160, 128,
112, 96, 80, 64,
56, 48
MPEG-2 Audio
Layer 3
24, 22.05, 16
160, 128, 144,
112, 96, 80, 64,
56, 48
WMA
Specification
Sampling Fre-
quency (kHz)
Bit Rate (kbps)
WMA 44.1 and 48
48, 64, 96, 128,
160, 192 VBR
ID3 Tag information for artist, song title, and album title
are supported for ID3 version 1 tags. ID3 version 2 is not
supported by the radios.
Playlist files are not supported. MP3 Pro files are not
supported.
260 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Playback of MP3/WMA Files
When a medium containing MP3/WMA data is loaded,
the radio checks all files on the medium. If the medium
contains a lot of folders or files, the radio will take more
time to start playing the MP3/WMA files.
Loading times for playback of MP3/WMA files may be
affected by the following:
•
Media - CD-RW media may take longer to load than
CD-R media
•
Medium formats - Multisession discs may take longer
to load than non-multisession discs
•
Number of files and folders - Loading times will
increase with more files and folders
To increase the speed of disc loading, it is recommended
to use CD-R media and single-session discs. To create a
single-session disc, enable the “Disc at Once” option
before writing to the disc.
LIST Button (DISC Mode for MP3/WMA Play)
Pressing the LIST button will bring up a list of all folders
on the disc. Scrolling up or down the list is done by
turning the TUNE/SCROLL control knob. Selecting a
folder by pressing the TUNE/SCROLL control knob will
begin playing the files contained in that folder (or the
next folder in sequence if the selection does not contain
playable files).
The folder list will time out after five seconds.
INFO Button (DISC Mode for MP3/WMA Play)
Pressing the INFO button repeatedly will scroll through
the following TAG information: Song Title, Artist, File
Name, and Folder Name (if available).
Press the INFO button once more to return to ⬙elapsed
time⬙ priority mode.
Press and hold the INFO button for three seconds or
more and radio will display song titles for each file.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 261
Press and hold the INFO button again for three seconds
to return to ⬙elapsed time⬙ display.
Operation Instructions - Auxiliary Mode
The auxiliary (AUX) jack is an audio input jack which
allows the user to plug in a portable device such as an
MP3/WMA player, cassette player, or microphone and
utilize the vehicle’s audio system to amplify the source
and play through the vehicle speakers.
Pressing the AUX button will change the mode to auxil-
iary device if the AUX jack is connected.
NOTE: The AUX device must be turned on and the
device’s volume set to the proper level. If the AUX audio
is not loud enough, turn the device’s volume up. If the
AUX audio sounds distorted, turn the device’s volume
down.
SEEK Button (Auxiliary Mode)
No function.
SCAN Button (Auxiliary Mode)
No function.
EJECT Button (Auxiliary Mode)
No function.
TIME Button (Auxiliary Mode)
Press the TIME button to change the display from
elapsed playing time to time of day. The time of day will
display for five seconds.
RW/FF (Auxiliary Mode)
No function.
SET Button (Auxiliary Mode)
No function.
262 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Operating Instructions — Voice Command System
(If Equipped)
For the radio, Refer to “Voice Command” in the
Uconnect™ User Manual located on the DVD for further
details.
Operating Instructions - Uconnect™ Phone (If
Equipped)
Refer to “Uconnect™ Phone” in the Uconnect™ User
Manual located on the DVD for further details.
Operating Instructions - Video Entertainment
System (VES)™ (If Equipped)
Refer to “Video Entertainment System (VES)™” in the
Uconnect™ User Manual located on the DVD for further
details.
Dolby威
Manufactured under license from Dolby威 Laboratories.
⬙Dolby威⬙ and the double-D symbol are trademarks of
Dolby威 Laboratories.
Macrovision
This product incorporates copyright protection technol-
ogy that is protected by U.S. patents and other intellec-
tual property rights. Use of this copyright protection
technology must be authorized by Macrovision, and is
intended for home and other limited viewing uses only,
unless otherwise authorized by Macrovision. Reverse
engineering or disassembly is prohibited.
DTS™
⬙DTS™⬙ and ⬙DTS™ 2.0⬙ are trademarks of Digital The-
ater Systems, Inc.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 263
Uconnect™ Multimedia (Satellite Radio) — If
Equipped
Satellite radio uses direct satellite-to-receiver broadcast-
ing technology to provide clear digital sound, coast to
coast. The subscription service provider is Sirius Satellite
Radio. This service offers over 130 channels of music,
sports, news, entertainment, and programming for chil-
dren, directly from its satellites and broadcasting studios.
NOTE: Sirius service is not available in Hawaii and has
limited coverage in Alaska.
System Activation
Sirius Satellite Radio service is pre-activated, and you
may begin listening immediately to the one year of audio
service that is included with the factory-installed satellite
radio system in your vehicle. Sirius will supply a wel-
come kit that contains general information, including
how to setup your on-line listening account. For further
information, call the toll-free number 888-539-7474, or
visit the Sirius web site at www.sirius.com, or at
www.siriuscanada.ca for Canadian residents.
Electronic Serial Number/Sirius Identification
Number (ESN/SID)
Please have the following information available when
calling:
1. The Electronic Serial Number/Sirius Identification
Number (ESN/SID).
2. Your Vehicle Identification Number.
To access the ESN/SID, refer to the following steps:
ESN/SID Access
With the ignition switch in the ON/RUN or ACC posi-
tion and the radio on, press the SETUP button and scroll
using the TUNE/SCROLL control knob until Sirius ID is
selected. Press the TUNE/SCROLL control knob and the
264 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Sirius ID number will display. The Sirius ID number
display will time out in two minutes. Press any button on
the radio to exit this screen.
Selecting Uconnect™ Multimedia (Satellite) Mode
Press the SAT button until ⬙SAT⬙ appears in the display. A
CD may remain in the radio while in the Satellite radio
mode.
Satellite Antenna
To ensure optimum reception, do not place items on the
roof around the rooftop antenna location. Metal objects
placed within the line of sight of the antenna will cause
decreased performance. Larger luggage items such as
bikes should be placed as far rearward as possible, within
the loading design of the rack. Do not place items directly
on or above the antenna.
Reception Quality
Satellite reception may be interrupted due to one of the
following reasons:
•
The vehicle is parked in an underground parking
structure or under a physical obstacle.
•
Dense tree coverage may interrupt reception in the
form of short audio mutes.
•
Driving under wide bridges or along tall buildings can
cause intermittent reception.
•
Placing objects over or too close to the antenna can
cause signal blockage.
Operating Instructions - Uconnect™ Multimedia
(Satellite) Mode
NOTE: The ignition switch must be in the ON/RUN or
ACC position to operate the radio.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 265
SEEK Buttons
Press and release the SEEK buttons to search for the next
channel in Satellite mode. Press the right switch to seek
up and the left switch to seek down. The radio will
remain tuned to the new channel until you make another
selection. Holding either button will bypass channels
without stopping until you release it.
SCAN Button
Pressing the SCAN button causes the tuner to search for
the next channel, pausing for eight seconds before con-
tinuing to the next. To stop the search, press the SCAN
button a second time.
INFO Button
Pressing the INFO button will cycle the display informa-
tion between Artist, Song Title, and Composer (if avail-
able). Also, pressing and holding the INFO button for an
additional three seconds will make the radio display the
Song Title all of the time (press and hold again to return
to normal display).
RW/FF
Pressing the RW (Rewind) or FF (Fast Forward) buttons
causes the tuner to search for the next channel in the
direction of the arrows.
TUNE Control (Rotary)
Turn the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob clockwise
to increase or counterclockwise to decrease the channel.
MUSIC TYPE Button
Pressing this button once will turn on the Music Type
mode for five seconds. Pressing the MUSIC TYPE button
or turning the TUNE/SCROLL control knob within five
seconds will allow the program format type to be se-
lected.
Toggle the MUSIC TYPE button again to select the music
type.
266 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
By pressing the SEEK button when the Music Type
function is active, the radio will be tuned to the next
channel with the same selected Music Type name.
If a preset button is activated while in the Music Type
(Program Type) mode, the Music Type mode will be
exited and the radio will tune to the preset channel.
SETUP Button
Pressing the SETUP button allows you to select the
following items:
•
Display Sirius ID number — Press the AUDIO/
SELECT button to display the Sirius ID number. This
number is used to activate, deactivate, or change the
Sirius subscription.
SET Button – To Set the Pushbutton Memory
When you are receiving a channel that you wish to
commit to pushbutton memory, press the SET button.
The symbol SET 1 will now show in the display window.
Select the button (1-6) you wish to lock onto this channel
and press and release that button. If a button is not
selected within five seconds after pressing the SET but-
ton, the channel will continue to play but will not be
stored into pushbutton memory.
You may add a second channel to each pushbutton by
repeating the above procedure with this exception: Press
the SET button twice and SET 2 will show in the display
window. Each button can be set for SET 1 and SET 2. This
allows a total of 12 Satellite channels to be stored into
pushbutton memory. The channels stored in SET 2
memory can be selected by pressing the pushbutton
twice.
Every time a preset button is used, a corresponding
button number will display.
Buttons1-6
These buttons tune the radio to the channels that you
commit to pushbutton memory (12 Satellite stations).
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 267
MEDIA CENTER 730N/430/430N (RHR/RER/RBZ/
RHB) CD/DVD/HDD/NAV — IF EQUIPPED
NOTE: The sales code is located on the lower right side
of the unit’s faceplate.
Refer to your Uconnect™ Multimedia RHR, RER, RBZ or
RHB user’s manual for detailed operating instructions.
Operating Instructions (Voice Command System)
— If Equipped
Refer to “Voice Command” in the Uconnect™ User
Manual located on the DVD for further details.
Operating Instructions (Uconnect™ Phone) —
If Equipped
Refer to “Uconnect™ Phone” in the Uconnect™ User
Manual located on the DVD for further details.
MEDIA CENTER 130 (SALES CODE RES)
NOTE: The radio sales code is located on the lower right
side of the radio faceplate.
Media Center 130 (RES)
268 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Operating Instructions — Radio Mode
NOTE: The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC
position to operate the radio.
Power Switch/Volume Control (Rotary)
Push the ON/VOLUME control knob to turn on the
radio. Push the ON/VOLUME control knob a second
time to turn off the radio.
Electronic Volume Control
The electronic volume control turns continuously (360
degrees) in either direction, without stopping. Turning
the ON/VOLUME control knob to the right increases the
volume, and to the left decreases it.
When the audio system is turned on, the sound will be
set at the same volume level as last played.
SEEK Buttons
Press and release the SEEK buttons to search for the next
listenable station in AM/FM mode. Press the right switch
to seek up and the left switch to seek down. The radio
will remain tuned to the new station until you make
another selection. Holding either button will bypass
stations without stopping, until you release it.
TIME Button
Press the TIME button to alternate display of the time
and radio frequency.
Clock Setting Procedure
1. Press and hold the TIME button until the hours blink.
2. Adjust the hours by turning the right side TUNE/
SCROLL control knob.
3. After adjusting the hours, press the right side TUNE/
SCROLL control knob to set the minutes. The minutes
will begin to blink.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 269
4. Adjust the minutes using the right side TUNE/
SCROLL control knob. Press the TUNE/SCROLL control
knob to save time change.
5. To exit, press any button/knob, or wait five seconds.
RW/FF
Pressing the RW (Rewind) or FF (Fast Forward) buttons
causes the tuner to search for the next frequency in the
direction of the arrows. This feature operates in either
AM or FM frequencies.
TUNE Control
Turn the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob clockwise
to increase or counterclockwise to decrease the frequency.
Setting the Tone, Balance, and Fade
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob and BASS
will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL control knob to
the right or left to increase or decrease the bass tones.
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a second
time and MID will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL
control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the
mid-range tones.
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a third
time and TREBLE will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL
control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the
treble tones.
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a fourth
time and BALANCE will display. Turn the TUNE/
SCROLL control knob to the right or left to adjust the
sound level from the right or left side speakers.
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a fifth time
and FADE will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL control
knob to the left or right to adjust the sound level between
the front and rear speakers.
270 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob again to
exit setting tone, balance, and fade.
AM/FM Button
Press the buttons to select either AM or FM mode.
SET/RND Button — To Set the Pushbutton
Memory
When you are receiving a station that you wish to
commit to pushbutton memory, press the SET/RND
button. The symbol SET 1 will now show in the display
window. Select the button (1 to 6) you wish to lock onto
this station and press and release that button. If a button
is not selected within five seconds after pressing the
SET/RND button, the station will continue to play but
will not be stored into pushbutton memory.
You may add a second station to each pushbutton by
repeating the above procedure with this exception: Press
the SET/RND button twice and SET 2 will show in the
display window. Each button can be set for SET 1 and
SET 2 in both AM and FM. This allows a total of 12 AM
and 12 FM stations to be stored into pushbutton memory.
The stations stored in SET 2 memory can be selected by
pressing the pushbutton twice.
Every time a preset button is used, a corresponding
button number will display.
Buttons1-6
These buttons tune the radio to the stations that you
commit to pushbutton memory (12 AM and 12 FM
stations).
DISC Button
Pressing the DISC button will allow you to switch from
AM/FM modes to Disc modes.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 271
Operation Instructions — CD MODE For CD And
MP3 Audio Play
NOTE:
•
The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC
position to operate the radio.
•
This radio is capable of playing compact discs (CD),
recordable compact discs (CD-R), rewritable compact
discs (CD-RW), compact discs with MP3 tracks and
multisession compact discs with CD and MP3 tracks.
Inserting Compact Disc(s)
Gently insert one CD into the CD player with the CD
label facing up. The CD will automatically be pulled into
the CD player and the CD icon will illuminate on the
radio display. If a CD does not go into the slot more than
1.0 in (2.5 cm), a disc may already be loaded and must be
ejected before a new disc can be loaded.
If you insert a disc with the ignition ON and the radio
ON, the unit will switch from radio to CD mode and
begin to play when you insert the disc. The display will
show the track number, and index time in minutes and
seconds. Play will begin at the start of track 1.
CAUTION!
•
This CD player will accept 4-3/4 in (12 cm) discs
only. The use of other sized discs may damage the
CD player mechanism.
•
Do not use adhesive labels. These labels can peel
away and jam the player mechanism.
•
RES is a single CD player. Do not attempt to insert
a second CD if one is already loaded.
•
Dual-media disc types (one side is a DVD, the
other side is a CD) should not be used, and they
can cause damage to the player.
272 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
EJECT Button - Ejecting a CD
Press the EJECT button to eject the CD.
If you have ejected a disc and have not removed it within
10 seconds, it will be reloaded. If the CD is not removed,
the radio will reinsert the CD but will not play it.
A disc can be ejected with the radio and ignition OFF.
NOTE: Ejecting with the ignition OFF is not allowed on
convertible or soft-top models (if equipped).
SEEK Button
Press the right SEEK button for the next selection on the
CD. Press the left SEEK button to return to the beginning
of the current selection, or return to the beginning of the
previous selection if the CD is within the first second of
the current selection. Pressing and holding the SEEK
button will allow faster scrolling through the tracks in
CD and MP3 modes.
TIME Button
Press this button to change the display from a large CD
playing time display to a small CD playing time display.
RW/FF
Press and hold the FF (Fast Forward) button and the CD
player will begin to fast forward until FF is released, or
RW or another CD button is pressed. The RW (Reverse)
button works in a similar manner.
AM/FM Button
Press the button to select either AM or FM mode.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 273
SET/RND Button (Random Play Button)
Press this button while the CD is playing to activate
Random Play. This feature plays the selections on the
compact disc in random order to provide an interesting
change of pace.
Press the right SEEK button to move to the next ran-
domly selected track.
Press the RND button a second time to stop Random
Play.
Notes on Playing MP3 Files
The radio can play MP3 files; however, acceptable MP3
file recording media and formats are limited. When
writing MP3 files, pay attention to the following restric-
tions.
Supported Media (Disc Types)
The MP3 file recording media supported by the radio are
CDDA, CD-R, CD-RW, MP3, and CDDA+MP3.
Supported Medium Formats (File Systems)
The medium formats supported by the radio are ISO 9660
Level 1 and Level 2 and includes the Joliet extension.
When reading discs recorded using formats other than
ISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2, the radio may fail to read
files properly and may be unable to play the file nor-
mally. UDF and Apple HFS formats are not supported.
The radio uses the following limits for file systems:
•
Maximum number of folder levels: 8
•
Maximum number of files: 255
•
Maximum number of folders. (The radio display of file
names and folder names is limited. For large numbers
of files and/or folders, the radio may be unable to
display the file name and folder name, and will assign
a number instead. With a maximum number of files,
exceeding 20 folders will result in this display. With 200
files, exceeding 50 folders will result in this display.)
274 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
•
Maximum number of characters in file/folder names:
•
Level 1: 12 (including a separator ⬙.⬙ and a three-
character extension)
•
Level 2: 31 (including a separator ⬙.⬙ and a three-
character extension)
Multisession disc formats are supported by the radio.
Multisession discs may contain combinations of normal
CD audio tracks and computer files (including MP3 files).
Discs created with an option such as ⬙keep disc open after
writing⬙ are most likely multisession discs. The use of
multisession for CD audio or MP3 playback may result in
longer disc loading times.
Supported MP3 File Formats
The radio will recognize only files with the *.MP3 exten-
sion as MP3 files. Non-MP3 files named with the *.MP3
extension may cause playback problems. The radio is
designed to recognize the file as an invalid MP3 and will
not play the file.
When using the MP3 encoder to compress audio data to
an MP3 file, the bit rate and sampling frequencies in the
following table are supported. In addition, variable bit
rates (VBR) are also supported. The majority of MP3 files
use a 44.1 kHz sampling rate and a 192, 160, 128, 96 or
VBR bit rate.
MPEG
Specification
Sampling Fre-
quency (kHz)
Bit Rate (kbps)
MPEG-1 Audio
Layer 3
48, 44.1, 32
320, 256, 224,
192, 160, 128,
112, 96, 80, 64,
56, 48, 40, 32
MPEG-2 Audio
Layer 3
24, 22.05, 16
160, 128, 144,
112, 96, 80, 64,
56, 48, 40, 32, 24,
16, 8
ID3 Tag information for artist, song title, and album title
are supported for version 1 ID3 tags. ID3 version 2 is not
supported by the radios.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 275
Playlist files are not supported. MP3 Pro files are not
supported.
Playback of MP3 Files
When a medium containing MP3 data is loaded, the
radio checks all files on the medium. If the medium
contains a lot of folders or files, the radio will take more
time to start playing the MP3 files.
Loading times for playback of MP3 files may be affected
by the following:
•
Media - CD-RW media may take longer to load than
CD-R media
•
Medium formats - Multisession discs may take longer
to load than non-multisession discs
•
Number of files and folders - Loading times will
increase with more files and folders
To increase the speed of disc loading, it is recommended
to use CD-R media and single-session discs. To create a
single-session disc, enable the “Disc at Once” option
before writing to the disc.
Operation Instructions - Auxiliary Mode
The auxiliary (AUX) jack is an audio input jack, which
allows the user to plug in a portable device, such as an
MP3 player, or cassette player, and utilize the vehicle’s
audio system to amplify the source and play through the
vehicle speakers.
Pressing the DISC/AUX button will change the mode to
auxiliary device if the AUX jack is connected.
NOTE: The AUX device must be turned on and the
device’s volume set to proper level. If the AUX audio is
not loud enough, turn the device’s volume up. If the AUX
audio sounds distorted, turn the device’s volume down.
276 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
TIME Button (Auxiliary Mode)
Press this button to change the display to time of day. The
time of day will display for five seconds (when ignition is
OFF).
MEDIA CENTER 130 WITH SATELLITE RADIO
(SALES CODE RES+RSC)
NOTE: The radio sales code is located on the lower right
side of the radio faceplate.
Operating Instructions — Radio Mode
NOTE: The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC
position to operate the radio.
Media Center 130 (RES/RSC)
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 277
Power Switch/Volume Control (Rotary)
Push the ON/VOLUME control knob to turn on the
radio. Push the ON/VOLUME control knob a second
time to turn off the radio.
Electronic Volume Control
The electronic volume control turns continuously (360
degrees) in either direction without stopping. Turning the
ON/VOLUME control knob to the right increases the
volume and to the left decreases it.
When the audio system is turned on, the sound will be
set at the same volume level as last played.
SEEK Buttons
Press and release the SEEK buttons to search for the next
listenable station in AM/FM mode. Press the right switch
to seek up and the left switch to seek down. The radio
will remain tuned to the new station until you make
another selection. Holding either button will bypass
stations without stopping until you release it.
Voice Command System (Radio) — If Equipped
Refer to “Voice Command” in “Understanding The Fea-
tures If Your Vehicle”.
Voice Command Button Uconnect™ Phone —
If Equipped
Press this button to operate the Uconnect™ Phone feature
(if equipped). Refer to “Uconnect™ Phone” in “Under-
standing The Features If Your Vehicle”.
If your vehicle is not equipped with or this feature is not
available on your vehicle, a “Not Equipped With
Uconnect Phone” message will display on the radio
screen.
Phone Button Uconnect™ Phone — If Equipped
Press this button to operate the Uconnect™ Phone feature
(if equipped). Refer to “Uconnect™ Phone” in “Under-
standing The Features If Your Vehicle”.
278 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
If your vehicle is not equipped with or this feature is not
available on your vehicle, a “Not Equipped With Uconnect
Phone” message will display on the radio screen.
TIME Button
Press the TIME button to alternate display of the time
and radio frequency.
Clock Setting Procedure
1. Press and hold the TIME button until the hours blink.
2. Adjust the hours by turning the right side TUNE/
SCROLL control knob.
3. After adjusting the hours, press the right side TUNE/
SCROLL control knob to set the minutes. The minutes
will begin to blink.
4. Adjust the minutes using the right side TUNE/
SCROLL control knob. Press the TUNE/SCROLL control
knob to save time change.
5. To exit, press any button/knob or wait five seconds.
The clock can also be set by pressing the SETUP button.
For vehicles equipped with satellite radio, press the
SETUP button, use the TUNE/SCROLL control to select
SET CLOCK, and then follow the above procedure,
starting at Step 2. For vehicles not equipped with satellite
radio, press the SETUP button and then follow the above
procedure, starting at Step 2.
INFO Button
Press the INFO button for an RDS station (one with call
letters displayed). The radio will return a Radio Text
message broadcast from an FM station (FM mode only).
RW/FF
Pressing the RW (Rewind) or FF (Fast Forward) buttons
causes the tuner to search for the next frequency in the
direction of the arrows. This feature operates in either
AM or FM frequencies.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 279
TUNE Control
Turn the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob clockwise
to increase or counterclockwise to decrease the frequency.
Setting the Tone, Balance, and Fade
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob and BASS
will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL control knob to
the right or left to increase or decrease the bass tones.
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a second
time and MID will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL
control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the
mid-range tones.
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a third
time and TREBLE will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL
control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the
treble tones.
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a fourth
time and BALANCE will display. Turn the TUNE/
SCROLL control knob to the right or left to adjust the
sound level from the right or left side speakers.
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a fifth time
and FADE will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL control
knob to the left or right to adjust the sound level between
the front and rear speakers.
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob again to
exit setting tone, balance, and fade.
MUSIC TYPE Button
Pressing this button once will turn on the Music Type
mode for five seconds. Pressing the MUSIC TYPE button
or turning the TUNE/SCROLL control knob within five
seconds will allow the program format type to be se-
lected. Many radio stations do not currently broadcast
Music Type information.
280 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Toggle the MUSIC TYPE button to select the following
format types:
Program Type 16-Digit Character Display
No program type or
undefined
None
Adult Hits Adlt Hit
Classical Classicl
Classic Rock Cls Rock
College College
Country Country
Foreign Language Language
Information Inform
Jazz Jazz
News News
Nostalgia Nostalga
Oldies Oldies
Personality Persnlty
Program Type 16-Digit Character Display
Public Public
Rhythm and Blues R & B
Religious Music Rel Musc
Religious Talk Rel Talk
Rock Rock
Soft Soft
Soft Rock Soft Rck
Soft Rhythm and Blues Soft R&B
Sports Sports
Talk Talk
Top 40 Top 40
Weather Weather
By pressing the SEEK button when the Music Type icon is
displayed, the radio will be tuned to the next frequency
station with the same selected Music Type name. The
Music Type function only operates when in the FM mode.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 281
If a preset button is activated while in the Music Type
(Program Type) mode, the Music Type mode will be
exited and the radio will tune to the preset station.
SETUP Button
Pressing the SETUP button allows you to select between
the following items:
•
Set Clock — Pressing the SELECT button will allow
you to set the clock. Adjust the hours by turning the
TUNE/SCROLL control knob. After adjusting the
hours, press the TUNE/SCROLL control knob to set
the minutes. The minutes will begin to blink. Adjust
the minutes using the right side TUNE/SCROLL
control knob. Press the TUNE/SCROLL control knob
to save time change.
AM/FM Button
Press the button to select either AM or FM mode.
SET/RND Button — To Set the Pushbutton
Memory
When you are receiving a station that you wish to
commit to pushbutton memory, press the SET/RND
button. The symbol SET 1 will now show in the display
window. Select the button (1–6) you wish to lock onto this
station and press and release that button. If a button is
not selected within five seconds after pressing the SET/
RND button, the station will continue to play but will not
be stored into pushbutton memory.
You may add a second station to each pushbutton by
repeating the above procedure with this exception: Press
the SET/RND button twice and SET 2 will show in the
display window. Each button can be set for SET 1 and
SET 2 in both AM and FM. This allows a total of 12 AM
and 12 FM stations to be stored into pushbutton memory.
The stations stored in SET 2 memory can be selected by
pressing the pushbutton twice.
282 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Every time a preset button is used, a corresponding
button number will display.
Buttons1-6
These buttons tune the radio to the stations that you
commit to pushbutton memory (12 AM and 12 FM
stations).
DISC/AUX Button
Pressing the DISC/AUX button will allow you to switch
from AM/FM modes to DISC/AUX mode.
Operation Instructions — CD MODE for CD and
MP3 Audio Play
NOTE:
•
The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC
position to operate the radio.
•
This radio is capable of playing compact discs (CD),
recordable compact discs (CD-R), rewritable compact
discs (CD-RW), compact discs with MP3 tracks and
multisession compact discs with CD and MP3 tracks.
Inserting Compact Disc(s)
Gently insert one CD into the CD player with the CD
label facing up. The CD will automatically be pulled into
the CD player and the CD icon will illuminate on the
radio display. If a CD does not go into the slot more than
1.0 in (2.5 cm), a disc may already be loaded and must be
ejected before a new disc can be loaded.
If you insert a disc with the ignition ON and the radio
ON, the unit will switch from radio to CD mode and
begin to play when you insert the disc. The display will
show the track number, and index time in minutes and
seconds. Play will begin at the start of track 1.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 283
CAUTION!
•
This CD player will accept 4–3/4 in (12 cm) discs
only. The use of other sized discs may damage the
CD player mechanism.
•
Do not use adhesive labels. These labels can peel
away and jam the player mechanism.
•
RES is a single CD player. Do not attempt to insert
a second CD if one is already loaded.
•
Dual-media disc types (one side is a DVD, the
other side is a CD) should not be used, and they
can cause damage to the player.
EJECT Button - Ejecting a CD
Press the EJECT button to eject the CD.
If you have ejected a disc and have not removed it within
10 seconds, it will be reloaded. If the CD is not removed,
the radio will reinsert the CD but will not play it.
A disc can be ejected with the radio and ignition OFF.
NOTE: Ejecting with the ignition OFF is not allowed on
convertible or soft-top models (if equipped).
SEEK Button
Press the right SEEK button for the next selection on the
CD. Press the left SEEK button to return to the beginning
of the current selection, or return to the beginning of the
previous selection if the CD is within the first second of
the current selection. Pressing and holding the SEEK
button will allow faster scrolling through the tracks in
CD and MP3 modes.
TIME Button
Press this button to change the display from a large CD
playing time display to a small CD playing time display.
284 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
RW/FF
Press and hold FF (Fast Forward) and the CD player will
begin to fast forward until FF is released or RW or
another CD button is pressed. The RW (Reverse) button
works in a similar manner.
AM/FM Button
Press the button to select either AM or FM mode.
SET/RND Button (Random Play Button)
Press this button while the CD is playing to activate
Random Play. This feature plays the selections on the
compact disc in random order to provide an interesting
change of pace.
Press the right SEEK button to move to the next ran-
domly selected track.
Press the SET/RND button a second time to stop Ran-
dom Play.
Notes On Playing MP3 Files
The radio can play MP3 files; however, acceptable MP3
file recording media and formats are limited. When
writing MP3 files, pay attention to the following restric-
tions.
Supported Media (Disc Types)
The MP3 file recording media supported by the radio are
CDDA, CD-R, CD-RW, MP3, and CDDA+MP3.
Supported Medium Formats (File Systems)
The medium formats supported by the radio are ISO 9660
Level 1 and Level 2 and includes the Joliet extension.
When reading discs recorded using formats other than
ISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2, the radio may fail to read
files properly and may be unable to play the file nor-
mally. UDF and Apple HFS formats are not supported.
The radio uses the following limits for file systems:
•
Maximum number of folder levels: 8
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 285
•
Maximum number of files: 255
•
Maximum number of folders. (The radio display of file
names and folder names is limited. For large numbers
of files and/or folders, the radio may be unable to
display the file name and folder name and will assign
a number instead. With a maximum number of files,
exceeding 20 folders will result in this display. With
200 files, exceeding 50 folders will result in this
display.)
•
Maximum number of characters in file/folder names:
•
Level 1: 12 (including a separator ⬙.⬙ and a three-
character extension)
•
Level 2: 31 (including a separator ⬙.⬙ and a three-
character extension)
Multisession disc formats are supported by the radio.
Multisession discs may contain combinations of normal
CD audio tracks and computer files (including MP3 files).
Discs created with an option such as ⬙keep disc open after
writing⬙ are most likely multisession discs. The use of
multisession for CD audio or MP3 playback may result in
longer disc loading times.
Supported MP3 File Formats
The radio will recognize only files with the *.MP3 exten-
sion as MP3 files. Non-MP3 files named with the *.MP3
extension may cause playback problems. The radio is
designed to recognize the file as an invalid MP3 and will
not play the file.
When using the MP3 encoder to compress audio data to
an MP3 file, the bit rate and sampling frequencies in the
following table are supported. In addition, variable bit
286 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
rates (VBR) are also supported. The majority of MP3 files
use a 44.1 kHz sampling rate and a 192, 160, 128, 96 or
VBR bit rates.
MPEG
Specification
Sampling Fre-
quency (kHz)
Bit Rate (kbps)
MPEG-1 Audio
Layer 3
48, 44.1, 32
320, 256, 224,
192, 160, 128,
112, 96, 80, 64,
56, 48, 40, 32
MPEG-2 Audio
Layer 3
24, 22.05, 16
160, 128, 144,
112, 96, 80, 64,
56, 48, 40, 32, 24,
16, 8
ID3 Tag information for artist, song title, and album title
are supported for version 1 ID3 tags. ID3 version 2 is not
supported by the radios.
Playlist files are not supported. MP3 Pro files are not
supported.
Playback of MP3 Files
When a medium containing MP3 data is loaded, the
radio checks all files on the medium. If the medium
contains a lot of folders or files, the radio will take more
time to start playing the MP3 files.
Loading times for playback of MP3 files may be affected
by the following:
•
Media - CD-RW media may take longer to load than
CD-R media
•
Medium formats - Multisession discs may take longer
to load than non-multisession discs
•
Number of files and folders - Loading times will
increase with more files and folders
To increase the speed of disc loading, it is recommended
to use CD-R media and single-session discs. To create a
single-session disc, enable the “Disc at Once” option
before writing to the disc.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 287
LIST Button (CD Mode for MP3 Play)
Pressing the LIST button will bring up a list of all folders
on the disc. Scrolling up or down the list is done by
turning the TUNE/SCROLL control knob. Selecting a
folder by pressing the TUNE/SCROLL control knob will
begin playing the files contained in that folder (or the
next folder in sequence if the selection does not contain
playable files).
The folder list will time out after five seconds.
INFO Button (CD Mode for MP3 Play)
Pressing the INFO button repeatedly will scroll through
the following TAG information: Song Title, Artist, File
Name, and Folder Name (if available).
Press the INFO button once more to return to ⬙elapsed
time⬙ priority mode.
Press and hold the INFO button for three seconds or
more and the radio will display song titles for each file.
Press and hold the INFO button again for three seconds
to return to ⬙elapsed time⬙ display.
Operation Instructions - Auxiliary Mode
The auxiliary (AUX) jack is an audio input jack which
allows the user to plug in a portable device such as an
MP3 player or cassette player and utilize the vehicle’s
audio system to amplify the source and play through the
vehicle speakers.
Pressing the AUX button will change the mode to auxil-
iary device if the AUX jack is connected.
NOTE: The AUX device must be turned on and the
device’s volume set to the proper level. If the AUX audio
is not loud enough, turn the device’s volume up. If the
AUX audio sounds distorted, turn the device’s volume
down.
288 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
TIME Button (Auxiliary Mode)
Press this button to change the display to time of day. The
time of day will display for five seconds (when the
ignition is OFF).
Uconnect™ Multimedia (Satellite Radio) — If
Equipped
Satellite radio uses direct satellite-to-receiver broadcast-
ing technology to provide clear digital sound, coast to
coast. The subscription service provider is Sirius Satellite
Radio. This service offers over 130 channels of music,
sports, news, entertainment, and programming for chil-
dren, directly from its satellites and broadcasting studios.
NOTE: Sirius service is not available in Hawaii and has
limited coverage in Alaska.
System Activation
Sirius Satellite Radio service is pre-activated, and you
may begin listening immediately to the one year of audio
service that is included with the factory-installed satellite
radio system in your vehicle. Sirius will supply a wel-
come kit that contains general information, including
how to setup your on-line listening account. For further
information, call the toll-free number 888-539-7474, or
visit the Sirius web site at www.sirius.com, or at
www.siriuscanada.ca for Canadian residents.
Electronic Serial Number/Sirius Identification
Number (ESN/SID)
Please have the following information available when
calling:
1. The Electronic Serial Number/Sirius Identification
Number (ESN/SID).
2. Your Vehicle Identification Number.
To access the ESN/SID, refer to the following steps:
ESN/SID Access
With the ignition switch in the ON/RUN or ACC posi-
tion and the radio on, press the SETUP button and scroll
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 289
using the TUNE/SCROLL control knob until Sirius ID is
selected. Press the TUNE/SCROLL control knob and the
Sirius ID number will display. The Sirius ID number
display will time out in two minutes. Press any button on
the radio to exit this screen.
Selecting Uconnect™ Multimedia (Satellite) Mode
Press the SAT button until ⬙SAT⬙ appears in the display. A
CD may remain in the radio while in the Satellite radio
mode.
Satellite Antenna
To ensure optimum reception, do not place items on the
roof around the rooftop antenna location. Metal objects
placed within the line of sight of the antenna will cause
decreased performance. Larger luggage items such as
bikes should be placed as far rearward as possible, within
the loading design of the rack. Do not place items directly
on or above the antenna.
Reception Quality
Satellite reception may be interrupted due to one of the
following reasons:
•
The vehicle is parked in an underground parking
structure or under a physical obstacle.
•
Dense tree coverage may interrupt reception in the
form of short audio mutes.
•
Driving under wide bridges or along tall buildings can
cause intermittent reception.
•
Placing objects over or too close to the antenna can
cause signal blockage.
Operating Instructions - Uconnect™ Multimedia
(Satellite) Mode
NOTE: The ignition switch must be in the ON/RUN or
ACC position to operate the radio.
290 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
SEEK Buttons
Press and release the SEEK buttons to search for the next
channel in Satellite mode. Press the right switch to seek
up and the left switch to seek down. The radio will
remain tuned to the new channel until you make another
selection. Holding either button will bypass channels
without stopping until you release it.
SCAN Button
Pressing the SCAN button causes the tuner to search for
the next channel, pausing for eight seconds before con-
tinuing to the next. To stop the search, press the SCAN
button a second time.
INFO Button
Pressing the INFO button will cycle the display informa-
tion between Artist, Song Title, and Composer (if avail-
able). Also, pressing and holding the INFO button for an
additional three seconds will make the radio display the
Song Title all of the time (press and hold again to return
to normal display).
RW/FF
Pressing the RW (Rewind) or FF (Fast Forward) buttons
causes the tuner to search for the next channel in the
direction of the arrows.
TUNE Control (Rotary)
Turn the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob clockwise
to increase or counterclockwise to decrease the channel.
MUSIC TYPE Button
Pressing this button once will turn on the Music Type
mode for five seconds. Pressing the MUSIC TYPE button
or turning the TUNE/SCROLL control knob within five
seconds will allow the program format type to be se-
lected.
Toggle the MUSIC TYPE button again to select the music
type.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 291
By pressing the SEEK button when the Music Type
function is active, the radio will be tuned to the next
channel with the same selected Music Type name.
If a preset button is activated while in the Music Type
(Program Type) mode, the Music Type mode will be
exited and the radio will tune to the preset channel.
SETUP Button
Pressing the SETUP button allows you to select the
following items:
•
Display Sirius ID number — Press the AUDIO/
SELECT button to display the Sirius ID number. This
number is used to activate, deactivate, or change the
Sirius subscription.
SET Button – To Set the Pushbutton Memory
When you are receiving a channel that you wish to
commit to pushbutton memory, press the SET button.
The symbol SET 1 will now show in the display window.
Select the button (1-6) you wish to lock onto this channel
and press and release that button. If a button is not
selected within five seconds after pressing the SET but-
ton, the channel will continue to play but will not be
stored into pushbutton memory.
You may add a second channel to each pushbutton by
repeating the above procedure with this exception: Press
the SET button twice and SET 2 will show in the display
window. Each button can be set for SET 1 and SET 2. This
allows a total of 12 Satellite channels to be stored into
pushbutton memory. The channels stored in SET 2
memory can be selected by pressing the pushbutton
twice.
Every time a preset button is used, a corresponding
button number will display.
Buttons1-6
These buttons tune the radio to the channels that you
commit to pushbutton memory (12 Satellite stations).
292 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Operating Instructions - Uconnect™ Phone
(If Equipped)
Refer to “Uconnect™ Phone” in “Understanding The
Features If Your Vehicle”.
STEERING WHEEL AUDIO CONTROLS
The remote sound system controls are located on the rear
surface of the steering wheel. Reach behind the wheel to
access the switches.
The right-hand control is a rocker-type switch with a
pushbutton in the center and controls the volume and
mode of the sound system. Pressing the top of the rocker
switch will increase the volume, and pressing the bottom
of the rocker switch will decrease the volume.
Remote Sound System Controls
(Back View Of Steering Wheel)
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 293
Pressing the center button will make the radio switch
between the various modes available (AM/FM/SAT/
CD/HDD/AUX/VES, etc.).
The left-hand control is a rocker-type switch with a
pushbutton in the center. The function of the left-hand
control is different depending on which mode you are in.
The following describes the left-hand control operation in
each mode.
Radio Operation
Pressing the top of the switch will “Seek” up for the next
listenable station and pressing the bottom of the switch
will “Seek” down for the next listenable station.
The button located in the center of the left-hand control
will tune to the next preset station that you have pro-
grammed in the radio preset pushbutton.
CD Player
Pressing the top of the switch once will go to the next
track on the CD. Pressing the bottom of the switch once
will go to the beginning of the current track, or to the
beginning of the previous track if it is within one second
after the current track begins to play.
If you press the switch up or down twice, it plays the
second track; three times, it will play the third, etc.
The center button on the left side rocker switch has no
function for a single-disc CD player. However, when a
multiple-disc CD player is equipped on the vehicle, the
center button will select the next available CD in the
player.
294 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
CD/DVD DISC MAINTENANCE
To keep a CD/DVD in good condition, take the following
precautions:
1. Handle the disc by its edge; avoid touching the
surface.
2. If the disc is stained, clean the surface with a soft cloth,
wiping from center to edge.
3. Do not apply paper or tape to the disc; avoid scratch-
ing the disc.
4. Do not use solvents such as benzene, thinner, cleaners,
or anti-static sprays.
5. Store the disc in its case after playing.
6. Do not expose the disc to direct sunlight.
7. Do not store the disc where temperatures may become
too high.
NOTE: If you experience difficulty in playing a particu-
lar disc, it may be damaged (i.e., scratched, reflective
coating removed, a hair, moisture or dew on the disc)
oversized, or have protection encoding. Try a known
good disc before considering disc player service.
RADIO OPERATION AND MOBILE PHONES
Under certain conditions, the mobile phone being on in
your vehicle can cause erratic or noisy performance from
your radio. This condition may be lessened or eliminated
by relocating the mobile phone antenna. This condition is
not harmful to the radio. If your radio performance does
not satisfactorily “clear” by the repositioning of the
antenna, it is recommended that the radio volume be
turned down or off during mobile phone operation when
not using Uconnect™ (if equipped).
CLIMATE CONTROLS
The air conditioning and heating system is designed to
make you comfortable in all types of weather.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 295
Manual Heating And Air Conditioning
The Manual Temperature Controls consist of a series of
outer rotary dials and inner push knobs.
Blower Control
Rotate this control to regulate the
amount of air forced through the ven-
tilation system in any mode. The
blower speed increases as you move
the control to the right from the “O”
(OFF) position. There are seven blower
speeds.
Temperature Control
Rotate this control to regulate the tem-
perature of the air inside the passenger
compartment. Rotating the dial left
into the blue area of the scale indicates
cooler temperatures, while rotating
right into the red area indicates
warmer temperatures.
Manual Temperature Control
296 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
NOTE: If your air conditioning performance seems
lower than expected, check the front of the A/C con-
denser located in front of the radiator for an accumula-
tion of dirt or insects. Clean with a gentle water spray
from behind the radiator and through the condenser.
Fabric front fascia protectors may reduce airflow to the
condenser, reducing air conditioning performance.
Mode Control (Air Direction)
Rotate this control to choose from sev-
eral patterns of air distribution. You
can select either a primary mode as
identified by the symbols on the con-
trol, or a blend of two of these modes.
The closer the setting is to a particular
symbol, the more air distribution you
receive from that mode.
Panel
Air is directed through the outlets in the instrument
panel. These outlets can be adjusted to direct airflow.
NOTE: The center instrument panel outlets can be
aimed so that they are directed toward the rear seat
passengers for maximum airflow to the rear.
Bi-Level
Air is directed through the panel and floor outlets.
NOTE: For all settings, except full cold or full hot, there
is a difference in temperature between the upper and
lower outlets. The warmer air flows to the floor outlets.
This feature gives improved comfort during sunny but
cool conditions.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 297
Floor
Air is directed through the floor outlets with a
small amount flowing through the defrost and side
window demist outlets.
Mix
Air is directed through the floor, defrost, and side
window demist outlets. This setting works best in
cold or snowy conditions that require extra heat to
the windshield. This setting is good for maintaining
comfort while reducing moisture on the windshield.
Defrost
Air is directed through the windshield and side
window demist outlets. Use this mode with maxi-
mum blower and temperature settings for best wind-
shield and side window defrosting.
NOTE:
•
The air conditioning compressor operates in Mix,
Defrost, or a blend of these modes, even if the Air
Conditioning (A/C) button is not pressed. This dehu-
midifies the air to help dry the windshield. To improve
fuel economy, use these modes only when necessary.
•
For information on operating the Rear Defrost, refer to
“Rear Window Features” in “Understanding The Fea-
tures Of Your Vehicle”.
Recirculation Control
Pressing the Recirculation Control button will
put the system in recirculation mode. This can
be used when outside conditions such as
smoke, odors, dust, or high humidity are pres-
ent. Activating recirculation will cause the LED in the
control button to illuminate. After ten minutes, the sys-
tem will return to normal mode function and the LED
will turn off.
298 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
NOTE:
•
Continuous use of the Recirculation mode may make
the inside air stuffy and window fogging may occur.
Extended use of this mode is not recommended.
•
The use of the Recirculation mode in cold or damp
weather will cause windows to fog on the inside,
because of moisture buildup inside the vehicle. Select
the outside air position for maximum defogging.
•
The A/C will engage automatically to prevent fogging
when the recirculation button is pressed and the mode
control is set to panel or panel / floor.
•
The A/C can be deselected manually without disturb-
ing the mode control selection.
•
When the ignition switch is turned to the LOCK
position, the recirculation feature will be cancelled.
Air Conditioning Control
Press this button to engage the Air
Conditioning. A light will illuminate
when the Air Conditioning system is
engaged. Rotating the dial left into the
blue area of the scale indicates cooler
temperatures, while rotating right into
the red area indicates warmer tem-
peratures.
NOTE: The air conditioning compressor will not engage
until the engine has been running for about 10 seconds.
•
MAX A/C
For maximum cooling use the A/C and recirculation
buttons at the same time.
•
ECONOMY MODE
If economy mode is desired, press the A/C button to turn
OFF the indicator light and the A/C compressor. Then,
move the temperature control to the desired temperature.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 299
Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) —
If Equipped
Automatic Operation
The Automatic Temperature Control system automati-
cally maintains the climate in the cabin of the vehicle at
the comfort levels desired by the driver and passenger.
Operation of the system is quite simple.
1. Turn the Mode Control knob (on the right) and the
Blower Control knob (on the left) to AUTO.
NOTE: The AUTO position performs best for front seat
occupants only.
2. Dial in the temperature you would
like the system to maintain by rotating
the Temperature Control knob. Once
the comfort level is selected, the sys-
tem will maintain that level automati-
cally using the heating system. Should
the desired comfort level require air
conditioning, the system will automatically make the
adjustment.
You will experience the greatest efficiency by simply
allowing the system to function automatically. Selecting
the “O” (OFF) position on the blower control stops the
system completely and closes the outside air intake.
Automatic Temperature Control
300 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
The recommended setting for maximum comfort is 72°F
(22°C) for the average person; however, this may vary.
NOTE:
•
The temperature setting can be adjusted at anytime
without affecting automatic operation.
•
Pressing the Air Conditioning Control button while in
AUTO mode will cause the LED in the control button
to flash three times and then turn off. This indicates
that the system is in AUTO mode and requesting the
air conditioning is not necessary.
•
If your air conditioning performance seems lower than
expected, check the front of the A/C condenser located
in front of the radiator for an accumulation of dirt or
insects. Clean with a gentle water spray from behind
the radiator and through the condenser. Fabric front
fascia protectors may reduce airflow to the condenser,
reducing air conditioning performance.
Blower Control
For full automatic operation or for
automatic blower operation, turn the
knob to the AUTO position. In manual
mode there are six blower speeds that
can be individual selected. In off posi-
tion the blower will shut off.
Manual Operation
This system offers a full complement of manual override
features, which consist of Blower Preferred Automatic,
Mode Preferred Automatic, or Blower and Mode Pre-
ferred Automatic. This means the operator can override
the blower, the mode, or both. There is a manual blower
range for times when the AUTO setting is not desired.
The blower can be set to any fixed blower speed by
rotating the Blower Control knob (on the left).
NOTE: Please read the Automatic Temperature Control
Operation Chart that follows for details.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 301
302 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
The operator can override the AUTO mode setting to
change airflow distribution by rotating the Mode Control
knob (on the right) to one of the following positions.
•
Panel
Air is directed through the outlets in the instrument
panel. These outlets can be adjusted to direct airflow.
NOTE: The center instrument panel outlets can be
aimed so that they are directed toward the rear seat
passengers for maximum airflow to the rear.
•
Bi-Level
Air is directed through the panel and floor outlets.
NOTE: For all settings, except full cold or full hot, there
is a difference in temperature between the upper and
lower outlets. The warmer air flows to the floor outlets.
This feature gives improved comfort during sunny but
cool conditions.
•
Floor
Air is directed through the floor outlets with a
small amount flowing through the defrost and side
window demist outlets.
•
Mix
Air is directed through the floor, defrost, and side
window demist outlets. This setting works best in
cold or snowy conditions that require extra heat to
the windshield. This setting is good for maintaining
comfort while reducing moisture on the windshield.
•
Defrost
Air is directed through the windshield and side
window demist outlets. Use this mode with maxi-
mum blower and temperature settings for best wind-
shield and side window defrosting.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 303
•
Air Conditioner Control
Press this button to turn on the air
conditioning during manual operation
only. When the air conditioning is
turned on, cool dehumidified air will
flow through the outlets selected with
the Mode control dial. Press this but-
ton a second time to turn OFF the air
conditioning. An LED in the button illuminates when
manual compressor operation is selected.
•
Recirculation Control
The system will automatically control recircu-
lation. However, pressing the Recirculation
Control button will temporarily put the system
in recirculation mode (ten minutes). This can
be used when outside conditions such as smoke, odors,
dust, or high humidity are present. Activating recircula-
tion will cause the LED in the control button to illumi-
nate. After ten minutes, the system will return to normal
AUTO mode function and the LED will turn off.
NOTE:
•
When the ignition switch is turned to the LOCK
position, the recirculation feature will be cancelled.
•
In cold weather, use of the Recirculation mode may
lead to excessive window fogging. The Recirculation
mode is not allowed in the floor, defrost, or defrost/
floor mode in order to improve window clearing.
Recirculation will be disabled automatically if these
modes are selected.
•
Extended use of recirculation may cause the windows
to fog. If the interior of the windows begins to fog,
press the Recirculation button to return to outside air.
Some temp/humidity conditions will cause captured
interior air to condense on windows and hamper
visibility. For this reason, the system will not allow
Recirculation to be selected while in floor, defrost, or
defrost/floor mode. Attempting to use the recircula-
tion while in these modes will cause the LED in the
control button to blink and then turn off.
304 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
•
Most of the time, when in Automatic Operation, you
can temporarily put the system into Recirculation
Mode by pressing the Recirculation button. However,
under certain conditions, while in Automatic Mode,
the system is blowing air out the defrost vents. When
these conditions are present, and the Recirculation
button is pressed, the indicator will flash and then turn
off. This tells you that you are unable to go into
Recirculation Mode at this time. If you would like the
system to go into Recirculation Mode, you must first
move the Mode knob to Panel, Panel/Floor and then
press the Recirculation button. This feature reduces the
possibility of window fogging.
Operating Tips
NOTE: Refer to the chart at the end of this section for
suggested control settings for various weather condi-
tions.
Summer Operation
The engine cooling system in air-conditioned vehicles
must be protected with a high-quality antifreeze coolant
to provide proper corrosion protection and to protect
against engine overheating. A solution of 50% ethylene
glycol antifreeze coolant and 50% water is recommended.
Refer to “Maintenance Procedures” in “Maintaining Your
Vehicle” for proper coolant selection.
Winter Operation
Use of the air Recirculation Mode during winter months is
not recommended because it may cause window fogging.
Vacation Storage
Anytime you store your vehicle, or keep it out of service
(i.e., vacation) for two weeks or more, run the air
conditioning system at idle for about five minutes in the
fresh air and high blower settings. This will ensure
adequate system lubrication to minimize the possibility
of compressor damage when the system is started again.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 305
Window Fogging
Interior fogging on the windshield can be quickly re-
moved by turning the mode selector to Defrost. The
Defrost/Floor mode can be used to maintain a clear
windshield and provide sufficient heating. If side win-
dow fogging becomes a problem, increase blower speed.
Vehicle windows tend to fog on the inside in mild but
rainy or humid weather.
NOTE: Recirculate without A/C should not be used for
long periods as fogging may occur.
Side Window Demisters
A side window demister outlet is located at each end of
the instrument panel. These non-adjustable outlets direct
air toward the side windows when the system is in the
FLOOR, MIX, or DEFROST mode. The air is directed at
the area of the windows through which you view the
outside mirrors.
Outside Air Intake
Make sure the air intake, located directly in front of the
windshield, is free of obstructions such as leaves. Leaves
collected in the air intake may reduce airflow, and if they
enter the plenum, they could plug the water drains. In
winter months, make sure the air intake is clear of ice,
slush, and snow.
A/C Air Filter — If Equipped
The A/C Filter prevents most dust and pollen from
entering the cabin. The filter acts on air coming from
outside the vehicle and recirculated air within the pas-
senger compartment. Refer to “Maintenance Procedures”
in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for A/C Air Filter service
information or see your authorized dealer for service.
Refer to “Maintenance Schedules” for filter service
intervals.
306 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Control Setting Suggestions for Various Weather Conditions
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 307
STARTING AND OPERATING
CONTENTS
䡵 Starting Procedures .................... 313
▫ Normal Starting ..................... 313
▫ Extreme Cold Weather
(Below –20°F Or –29°C) ................ 314
▫ If Engine Fails To Start ................ 314
▫ After Starting ....................... 315
䡵 Engine Block Heater — If Equipped ........ 315
䡵 Automatic Transmission ................. 316
▫ Key Ignition Park Interlock ............. 316
▫ Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock System . . 317
▫ Four–Speed Automatic Transmission ....... 317
▫ Gear Ranges ........................ 317
䡵 Four-Wheel Drive Operation ............. 321
▫ Command-Trac II威 Transfer Case –
If Equipped ........................ 321
▫ Selec-Trac威 II Transfer Case – If Equipped . . . 327
䡵 On-Road Driving Tips .................. 333
5
䡵 Off-Road Driving Tips .................. 333
▫ When To Use 4WD Low Range .......... 333
▫ Driving Through Water ................ 334
▫ Driving In Snow, Mud And Sand ......... 335
▫ Hill Climbing ....................... 335
▫ Traction Downhill .................... 336
▫ After Driving Off-Road ................ 336
䡵 Power Steering ....................... 337
▫ Power Steering Fluid Check ............. 339
䡵 Parking Brake ........................ 339
䡵 Anti-Lock Brake System ................. 342
䡵 Electronic Brake Control System ........... 344
▫ Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) ........... 344
▫ Traction Control System (TCS) ........... 345
▫ Brake Assist System (BAS) .............. 346
▫ Electronic Roll Mitigation (ERM) ......... 347
▫ Hill Start Assist (HSA) ................ 347
▫ Hill Descent Control (HDC) – If Equipped . . 350
▫ Electronic Stability Control (ESC) ......... 352
▫ ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light
And ESC Off Indicator Light ............ 356
䡵 Tire Safety Information ................. 357
▫ Tire Markings ....................... 357
▫ Tire Identification Number (TIN) ......... 360
▫ Tire Terminology And Definitions ......... 361
▫ Tire Loading And Tire Pressure .......... 362
310 STARTING AND OPERATING
䡵 Tires — General Information ............. 366
▫ Tire Pressure ....................... 366
▫ Tire Inflation Pressures ................ 367
▫ Tire Pressures For High Speed Operation . . . 369
▫ Radial-Ply Tires ..................... 369
▫ Spare Tire Matching Original Equipped Tire
And Wheel – If Equipped .............. 369
▫ Compact Spare Tire – If Equipped ........ 370
▫ Full Size Spare – If Equipped ............ 371
▫ Limited-Use Spare – If Equipped ......... 371
▫ Tire Spinning ....................... 372
▫ Tread Wear Indicators ................. 372
▫ Life Of Tire ........................ 373
▫ Replacement Tires .................... 374
䡵 Tire Chains .......................... 375
䡵 Tire Rotation Recommendations ........... 377
䡵 Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) ....... 378
▫ Base System ........................ 380
▫ Premium System – If Equipped .......... 383
▫ General Information .................. 388
䡵 Fuel Requirements ..................... 388
▫ Reformulated Gasoline ................ 389
▫ Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends ............. 389
▫ E-85 Usage In Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles ...... 390
▫ MMT In Gasoline .................... 390
▫ Materials Added To Fuel ............... 391
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 311
▫ Fuel System Cautions ................. 391
▫ Carbon Monoxide Warnings ............ 392
䡵 Adding Fuel ......................... 393
▫ Fuel Filler Cap (Gas Cap) .............. 393
▫ Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message ........... 394
䡵 Vehicle Loading ...................... 395
▫ Certification Label ................... 395
䡵 Trailer Towing ........................ 397
▫ Common Towing Definitions ............ 397
▫ Trailer Hitch Classification .............. 402
▫ Trailer Towing Weights
(Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings) ........ 403
▫ Trailer And Tongue Weight ............. 405
▫ Towing Requirements ................. 406
▫ Towing Tips ........................ 411
䡵 Recreational Towing
(Behind Motorhome, Etc.) ................ 413
▫ Towing This Vehicle Behind
Another Vehicle ..................... 413
▫ Recreational Towing — Two-Wheel Drive
Models ........................... 414
▫ Recreational Towing — Four-Wheel Drive
Models ........................... 415
312 STARTING AND OPERATING
STARTING PROCEDURES
Before starting your vehicle, adjust your seat, adjust both
inside and outside mirrors, and fasten your seat belts.
WARNING!
Never leave children alone in a vehicle. Leaving
children in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a
number of reasons. A child or others could be seri-
ously or fatally injured. Do not leave the keys in the
ignition. A child could operate power windows,
other controls, or move the vehicle.
Start the engine with the shift lever in the NEUTRAL or
PARK position. Apply the brake before shifting to any
driving range.
Normal Starting
NOTE: Normal starting of either a cold or a warm
engine is obtained without pumping or pressing the
accelerator pedal.
Turn the ignition switch to the START position and
release when the engine starts. If the engine fails to start
within 10 seconds, turn the ignition switch to the LOCK
position, wait 10 to 15 seconds, then repeat the “Normal
Starting” procedure.
Tip Start Feature
Turn the ignition switch to START position and release it
as soon as the starter engages. The starter motor will
continue to run, but will automatically disengage itself
when the engine is running. If the engine fails to start, the
starter will disengage automatically in 10 seconds. If this
occurs, turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position,
wait 10 to 15 seconds, then repeat the “Normal Starting”
procedure.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 313
Extreme Cold Weather (below –20°F or –29°C)
To ensure reliable starting at these temperatures, use of
an externally powered electric engine block heater (avail-
able from your authorized dealer) is recommended.
If Engine Fails To Start
WARNING!
•
Never pour fuel or other flammable liquids into
the throttle body air inlet opening in an attempt to
start the vehicle. This could result in a flash fire
causing serious personal injury.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
•
Do not attempt to push or tow your vehicle to get
it started. Vehicles equipped with an automatic
transmission cannot be started this way. Unburned
fuel could enter the catalytic converter and once
the engine has started, ignite and damage the
converter and vehicle. If the vehicle has a dis-
charged battery, booster cables may be used to
obtain a start from a booster battery or the battery
in another vehicle. This type of start can be dan-
gerous if done improperly. Refer to “Jump Start-
ing” in “What To Do In Emergencies” for further
information.
314 STARTING AND OPERATING
With Tip Start
If the engine fails to start after you have followed the
“Normal Starting” or “Extreme Cold Weather” proce-
dures, it may be flooded. To clear any excess fuel, press
the accelerator pedal all the way to the floor and hold it.
Then, turn the ignition switch to the START position and
release it as soon as the starter engages. The starter motor
will disengage automatically in 10 seconds. Once this
occurs, release the accelerator pedal, turn the ignition
switch to the LOCK position, wait 10 to 15 seconds, then
repeat the “Normal Starting” procedure.
CAUTION!
To prevent damage to the starter, wait 10 to 15 sec-
onds before trying again.
After Starting
The idle speed will automatically decrease as the engine
warms up.
ENGINE BLOCK HEATER — IF EQUIPPED
The engine block heater warms the engine, and permits
quicker starts in cold weather. Connect the cord to a
standard 110-115 Volt AC electrical outlet with a
grounded three-wire extension cord.
The engine block heater cord is found under the hood
clipped to the heater line on the left side of the engine.
The engine block heater must be plugged in at least one
hour to have an adequate warming effect on the engine.
WARNING!
Remember to disconnect the engine block heater
cord before driving. Damage to the 110-115 Volt AC
electrical cord could cause electrocution.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 315
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
CAUTION!
Damage to the transmission may occur if the follow-
ing precautions are not observed:
•
Shift into PARK only after the vehicle has come to
a complete stop.
•
Shift into or out of REVERSE only after the
vehicle has come to a complete stop and the engine
is at idle speed.
•
Do not shift from REVERSE, PARK, or NEUTRAL
into any forward gear when the engine is above
idle speed.
•
Before shifting into any gear, make sure your foot
is firmly on the brake pedal.
WARNING!
It is dangerous to move the shift lever out of PARK or
NEUTRAL if the engine speed is higher than idle
speed. If your foot is not firmly on the brake pedal,
the vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in
reverse. You could lose control of the vehicle and hit
someone or something. Only shift into gear when the
engine is idling normally and when your foot is
firmly on the brake pedal.
Key Ignition Park Interlock
This vehicle is equipped with a Key Ignition Park Inter-
lock which requires the shift lever to be placed in PARK
prior to rotating the key to the LOCK position. The key
can only be removed from the ignition when the ignition
is in the LOCK position. Once the key is removed, the
shift lever is locked in PARK.
316 STARTING AND OPERATING
Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock System
This vehicle is equipped with a Brake Transmission Shift
Interlock System (BTSI) that holds the shift lever in the
PARK position when the ignition switch is in the LOCK
position. To move the shift lever out of the PARK
position, the ignition switch must be turned to the ON or
START position (engine running or not) and the brake
pedal must be pressed.
Four–Speed Automatic Transmission
NOTE: Under extreme cold temperatures (-6°F (-21°C)
and when in DRIVE, transmission operation may be
briefly limited to only second gear operation. Normal
operation will resume once the transmission temperature
has risen to a suitable level.
Shifting from DRIVE to PARK or REVERSE should be
done only after the accelerator pedal is released and the
vehicle is stopped. Be sure to keep your foot on the brake
when moving the shift lever between these gears.
Gear Ranges
PARK
This range supplements the parking brake by locking the
transmission. The engine can be started in this range.
Never use PARK while the vehicle is in motion. Apply
Shift Lever
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 317
the parking brake when leaving the vehicle in this range.
Always apply the parking brake first, then place the shift
lever in the PARK position.
WARNING!
•
Never use the PARK position as a substitute for
the parking brake. Always apply the parking
brake fully when parked to guard against vehicle
movement and possible injury or damage.
•
It is dangerous to move the shift lever out of PARK
or NEUTRAL if the engine speed is higher than
idle speed. If your foot is not firmly on the brake
pedal, the vehicle could accelerate quickly forward
or in reverse. You could lose control of the vehicle
and hit someone or something. Only shift into
gear when the engine is idling normally and when
your right foot is firmly on the brake pedal.
REVERSE
This range is for moving the vehicle rearward. Use this
range only after the vehicle has come to a complete stop.
NEUTRAL
This range is used when the vehicle is standing for
prolonged periods with the engine running. The engine
may be started in this range. Set the parking brake and
shift the transmission into PARK if you must leave the
vehicle.
NOTE: Towing the vehicle, coasting, or driving for any
other reason with shift lever in NEUTRAL can result in
severe transmission damage. Refer to “Recreational Tow-
ing” in “Starting and Operating” and “Towing a Disabled
Vehicle” in “What To Do In Emergencies” for further
information.
DRIVE
This range is used for most city and highway driving.
318 STARTING AND OPERATING
2 (Second)
This range is used for moderate grades and to assist
braking on dry pavement or in mud and snow. Begins at
a stop in low gear with automatic upshift into second
gear. Will not shift into third gear.
1 (First)
This range is used for hard pulling at low speeds in mud,
sand, snow, or on steep grades. Begins and stays in low
gear with no upshift. Provides engine compression brak-
ing at low speeds.
Overdrive Operation
The overdrive automatic transmission contains an elec-
tronically controlled fourth gear (OVERDRIVE). The
transmission will automatically shift from third gear into
OVERDRIVE if the following conditions are present:
•
the shift lever is in DRIVE
•
vehicle speed is above approximately 30 mph
(48 km/h)
•
the TOW/HAUL button has not been activated
The transmission will downshift from OVERDRIVE to
DRIVE if the accelerator pedal is fully pressed at vehicle
speeds above approximately 35 mph (56 km/h).
When To Use TOW/HAUL Mode
When driving in hilly areas, towing a trailer, carrying a
heavy load, etc., and frequent transmission shifting oc-
curs, press the TOW/HAUL button. This will improve
performance and reduce the potential for transmission
overheating or failure due to excessive shifting. When
operating in TOW/HAUL mode, the transmission will
shift into third gear.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 319
NOTE: TOW/HAUL mode locks out Overdrive.
The “TOW/HAUL Indicator Light” will illuminate in the
instrument cluster to indicate when the switch has been
activated. Pressing the switch a second time restores
normal operation. If the TOW/HAUL mode is desired,
the switch must be pressed each time the engine is started.
Transmission Limp Home Mode
Transmission function is monitored for abnormal condi-
tions. If a condition is detected that could result in
transmission damage, the Transmission Limp Home
Mode will be engaged. In this mode, the transmission
will remain in second gear in any forward driving range.
To reset the transmission, use the following procedure:
1. Stop the vehicle.
2. Move the shift lever into the PARK position.
3. Turn the engine off and turn the key to the LOCK
position.
4. Wait approximately 10 seconds, then restart the en-
gine.
5. Move the shift lever into the desired gear range.
Tow/Haul Button
320 STARTING AND OPERATING
If the problem is no longer detected, the transmission will
return to normal operation. If the problem persists,
PARK, REVERSE, and NEUTRAL will continue to oper-
ate. Only second gear range will operate in the DRIVE
position. Have the transmission checked at your autho-
rized dealer as soon as possible.
Torque Converter Clutch
A feature designed to improve fuel economy has been
added to the automatic transmission of this vehicle. A
clutch within the torque converter engages automatically
at calibrated speeds. This may result in a slightly differ-
ent feeling or response during normal operation in high
gear. When the vehicle speed drops or during accelera-
tion, the clutch automatically and smoothly disengages.
FOUR-WHEEL DRIVE OPERATION
Command-Trac II姞 Transfer Case – If Equipped
Operating Information And Precautions
The Command-Trac II威 transfer case provides four posi-
tions:
•
Two–wheel drive (2WD) high range
•
Four-wheel drive (4WD LOCK) high range
•
Four-wheel drive (4WD LOW) low range
•
Neutral (N)
This transfer case is intended to be driven in the two-
wheel drive position (2WD) for normal street and high-
way conditions such as dry hard-surfaced roads.
When additional traction is required, select the transfer
case 4WD LOCK position or 4WD LOW position. This
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 321
position locks the front driveshaft and rear driveshaft
together and forces the front and rear wheels to rotate at
the same speed.
Use the transfer case NEUTRAL position for recreational
towing only. Refer to “Recreational Towing” in “Starting
and Operating” for further information.
CAUTION!
•
Do not attempt to make a shift while only the front
wheels or rear wheels are spinning. The MP1522
Command-Trac威 transfer case is not equipped
with a synchronizer and therefore the speed of the
front driveshaft and rear driveshaft must be equal
for the shift to take place. Shifting while only the
front wheels or rear wheels are spinning can cause
damage to the transfer case.
(Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued)
•
The 4WD LOCK position and 4WD LOW position
are intended for loose or slippery road surfaces
only. Driving in these positions on dry hard-
surfaced roads may cause increased tire wear and
damage to the driveline components.
•
When operating your vehicle in 4WD LOW, the
engine speed is approximately three times that of
the 2WD position or 4WD LOCK position at a
given road speed. Take care not to over-speed the
engine and do not exceed 25 mph (40 km/h).
•
Proper operation of four-wheel drive vehicles de-
pends on tires of equal size, type, and circumfer-
ence on each wheel. Any difference in tire size can
cause damage to the transfer case. Tire rotation
schedule should be followed to balance tire wear.
322 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
•
You or others could be injured if you leave the
vehicle unattended with the transfer case in the
NEUTRAL position without first fully engaging
the parking brake. The transfer case NEUTRAL
position disengages both the front driveshaft and
rear driveshaft from the powertrain and it will
allow the vehicle to move even if the transmission
is in PARK. The parking brake should always be
applied when the driver is not in the vehicle.
•
Always engage the parking brake when powering
down the vehicle if the “SERV 4WD Warning
Light” is illuminated. Not engaging the parking
brake may allow the vehicle to roll, which may
cause personal injury.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
•
Since four-wheel drive provides improved trac-
tion, there is a tendency to exceed safe turning and
stopping speeds. Do not go faster than road con-
ditions permit. You or others could be injured.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 323
Shift Positions
The transfer case switch is located on the center console
next to the shift lever.
2WD
Rear Wheel Drive High Range - This range is used for
normal street and highway driving on dry hard-surfaced
roads.
4WD Lock
Four-Wheel Drive High Range - This range locks the
front driveshaft and rear driveshaft together forcing the
front and rear wheels to rotate at the same speed.
Additional traction for loose or slippery road surfaces
only.
4WD Low
Four-Wheel Drive Low Range - This range provides low
speed four-wheel drive. Locks the front driveshaft and
rear driveshaft together forcing the front and rear wheels
to rotate at the same speed. Additional traction and
maximum pulling power for loose or slippery road
surfaces only. Do not exceed 25 mph (40 km/h).
Transfer Case Switch
324 STARTING AND OPERATING
N
Neutral - This range disengages both the front driveshaft
and rear driveshaft from the powertrain. To be used for
flat towing behind another vehicle. Refer to “Recreational
Towing” in “Starting and Operating” for further
information.
Transfer Case Position Indicator Lights
The four-wheel drive indicator lights (4WD and 4 LOW)
are located in the instrument cluster. The NEUTRAL
indicator light is located on the transfer case switch. If
there is no indicator light on or flashing, the transfer case
position is two-wheel drive (2WD). If the indicator light
is on, the desired position (4WD LOCK, 4WD LOW, or
NEUTRAL) has been obtained.
If One Or More Shift Requirements Are Not Met:
•
An indicator light will flash.
•
The transfer case will not shift.
NOTE: The “SERV 4WD Warning Light” monitors the
electric shift four-wheel drive system. If this light re-
mains on after engine start up, or it illuminates during
driving, it means that the four-wheel drive system is not
functioning properly and that service is required.
Shifting Procedures
NOTE: If any of the requirements to select a new
transfer case position have not been met, the transfer case
will not shift, the indicator light for the previous position
will remain on, and the newly selected position indicator
light will continue to flash until all the requirements for
the selected position have been met. To retry a shift, move
the transfer case switch back to the original position,
make certain all shift requirements have been met, wait
five seconds, and try the shift again.
2WD To 4WD Lock
Move the transfer case switch to the desired position.
Shifts between 2WD and 4WD LOCK can be done with
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 325
the vehicle stopped or in motion. With the vehicle in
motion, the transfer case will engage/disengage faster if
you momentarily release the accelerator pedal after mov-
ing the transfer case switch. If the vehicle is stopped, the
ignition switch must be in the ON position with the
engine either OFF or RUNNING. This shift cannot be
completed if the ignition switch is in the ACC position.
NOTE: The four-wheel drive system will not allow
shifts between 2WD and 4WD LOCK if the rear wheels
are spinning (no traction). In this situation, the selected
position indicator light will flash and the original posi-
tion indicator light will remain ON. At this time, reduce
speed and stop spinning the wheels to complete the shift.
There may be a delay up to 10 seconds for the shift to
complete after the wheels have stopped spinning.
Delayed shifting out of 4WD LOCK may be experienced
due to uneven tire wear, low tire pressure, or excessive
loading.
4WD Lock To 4WD Low
When shifting into or out of 4WD LOW, some gear noise
may be heard. This noise is normal and is not detrimental
to the vehicle or its occupants.
Shifting can be performed with the vehicle rolling 2 to
3 mph (3 to 5 km/h) using the “Preferred Procedure” or
completely stopped using the “Alternate Procedure.”
Preferred Procedure
1. With the engine RUNNING, slow the vehicle speed to
2 to 3 mph (3 to 5 km/h).
2. Shift the transmission into NEUTRAL.
3. While still rolling, move the transfer case switch to the
desired position.
4. After the desired position indicator light is ON (not
flashing), shift the transmission into gear.
326 STARTING AND OPERATING
Alternate Procedure
1. Bring the vehicle to a complete stop.
2. With the ignition switch in the ON position, and the
engine OFF or RUNNING, shift the transmission into
NEUTRAL.
3. Move the transfer case switch to the desired position.
4. After the desired position indicator light is on (not
flashing), shift the transmission into gear.
NOTE: Steps 1 and 2 in the “Preferred Procedure” and
the “Alternate Procedure” are requirements for shifting
the transfer case. If these requirements are not met prior
to attempting the shift or while the shift attempt is in
process, then the indicator light will flash, and the
current transfer case position will be maintained. To retry
a shift, move the transfer case switch back to the original
position, make certain all shift requirements have been
met, wait five seconds, and try the shift again.
The ignition switch must be in the ON position for a shift
to take place and for the position indicator lights to be
operable. If the ignition switch is not in the ON position,
then the shift will not take place and no position indicator
lights will be on or flashing.
Selec-Trac姞 II Transfer Case – If Equipped
Operating Information And Precautions
The Selec-Trac威 II active on-demand transfer case pro-
vides four positions:
•
Two-wheel drive (2WD) high range
•
Four-wheel drive Auto (4WD AUTO) high range
•
Neutral (N)
•
Four-wheel drive (4WD) low range
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 327
This transfer case is intended to be driven in either the
two-wheel drive position (2WD) or the four-wheel drive
Auto position (4WD AUTO) for normal street and high-
way conditions such as dry hard-surfaced roads.
For added capability when traversing steep grades,
rough terrain, or extremely poor traction surfaces, select
the transfer case 4WD LOW position. This position locks
the front driveshaft and rear driveshaft together and
forces the front and rear wheels to rotate at the same
speed while multiplying engine torque.
Use the transfer case NEUTRAL position for recreational
towing only. Refer to “Recreational Towing” in “Starting
and Operating” for further information.
CAUTION!
•
The 4WD LOW position is intended for loose or
slippery road surfaces only. Driving in this posi-
tion on dry hard-surfaced roads may cause in-
creased tire wear and damage to the driveline
components.
•
When operating your vehicle in 4WD LOW, the
engine speed is approximately three times that of
the 2WD position or 4WD AUTO position at a
given road speed. Take care not to over-speed the
engine and do not exceed 25 mph (40 km/h).
•
Proper operation of four-wheel drive vehicles de-
pends on tires of equal size, type, and circumfer-
ence on each wheel. Any difference in tire size can
cause damage to the transfer case. Tire rotation
schedule should be followed to balance tire wear.
328 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
•
You or others could be injured if you leave the
vehicle unattended with the transfer case in the
NEUTRAL position without first fully engaging
the parking brake. The transfer case NEUTRAL
position disengages both the front driveshaft and
rear driveshaft from the powertrain and it will
allow the vehicle to move despite the transmission
position. The parking brake should always be
applied when the driver is not in the vehicle.
•
Always engage the parking brake when powering
down the vehicle if the “SERV 4WD Warning
Light” is illuminated. Not engaging the parking
brake may allow the vehicle to roll, which may
cause personal injury.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
•
Since four-wheel drive provides improved trac-
tion, there is a tendency to exceed safe turning and
stopping speeds. Do not go faster than road con-
ditions permit. You or others could be injured.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 329
Shift Positions
The transfer case switch is located on the center console
next to the shift lever.
2WD
Rear Wheel Drive High Range - This range is for normal
street and highway driving on dry hard-surfaced roads.
4WD Auto
Four-Wheel Drive Auto High Range – This active on-
demand range makes available optimum traction for a
wide range of conditions, while maximizing driver con-
venience. This position is always in four-wheel drive
mode, with a normal 42% front axle, 58% rear axle torque
split. The system also anticipates and prevents slip by
redirecting torque as necessary, up to 100% to the front or
rear axle, if needed.
4WD Low
Four-Wheel Drive Low Range - This range is for low
speed four-wheel drive. Locks the front driveshaft and
rear driveshaft together forcing the front and rear wheels
to rotate at the same speed. Additional traction and
maximum pulling power for loose or slippery road
surfaces only. Do not exceed 25 mph (40 km/h).
Transfer Case Switch
330 STARTING AND OPERATING
N
Neutral - This range disengages both the front driveshaft
and rear driveshaft from the powertrain. To be used for
flat towing behind another vehicle. Refer to “Recreational
Towing” in “Starting and Operating” for further
information.
Transfer Case Position Indicator Lights
The four-wheel drive indicator lights (4WD, 4 LOW) are
located in the instrument cluster. The NEUTRAL indica-
tor light is located on the transfer case switch. If there is
no indicator light on or flashing, the transfer case posi-
tion is two-wheel drive (2WD). If the indicator light is on,
the desired position (4WD AUTO, 4WD LOW, or NEU-
TRAL) has been obtained.
If One Or More Shift Requirements Are Not Met:
•
An indicator light will flash.
•
The transfer case will not shift.
NOTE: The “SERV 4WD Warning Light” monitors the
electric shift four-wheel drive system. If this light re-
mains on after engine start up, or it illuminates during
driving, it means that the four-wheel drive system is not
functioning properly and that service is required.
Shifting Procedures
NOTE: If any of the requirements to select a new
transfer case position have not been met, the transfer case
will not shift, the indicator light for the previous position
will remain on, and the newly selected position indicator
light will continue to flash until all the requirements for
the selected position have been met. To retry a shift, move
the transfer case switch back to the original position,
make certain all shift requirements have been met, wait
five seconds, and try the shift again.
2WD To 4WD Auto
Move the transfer case switch to the desired position.
Shifts between 2WD and 4WD Auto can be done with the
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 331
vehicle stopped or in motion. If the vehicle is stopped,
the ignition switch must be in the ON position with the
engine either OFF or RUNNING. This shift cannot be
completed if the ignition switch is in the ACC position.
2WD Or 4WD Auto To 4WD Low
When shifting into or out of 4WD LOW, some gear noise
may be heard. This noise is normal and is not detrimental
to the vehicle or its occupants.
Shifting can be performed with the vehicle rolling 2 to
3 mph (3 to 5 km/h) using the “Preferred Procedure” or
completely stopped using the “Alternate Procedure.”
Preferred Procedure
1. With the engine RUNNING, slow the vehicle speed to
2 to 3 mph (3 to 5 km/h).
2. Shift the transmission into NEUTRAL.
3. While still rolling, move the transfer case switch to the
desired position.
4. After the desired position indicator light is on (not
flashing), shift the transmission into gear.
Alternate Procedure
1. Bring the vehicle to a complete stop.
2. With the ignition switch in the ON position and the
engine OFF or RUNNING, shift the transmission into
NEUTRAL.
3. Move the transfer case switch to the desired position.
4. After the desired position indicator light is on (not
flashing), shift the transmission into gear.
NOTE: Steps 1 and 2 in the “Preferred Procedure” and
the “Alternate Procedure” are requirements for shifting
the transfer case. If these requirements are not met prior
to attempting the shift or while the shift attempt is in
332 STARTING AND OPERATING
process, then the indicator light will flash, and the
current transfer case position will be maintained. To retry
a shift, move the transfer case switch back to the original
position, make certain all shift requirements have been
met, wait five seconds, and try the shift again.
The ignition switch must be in the ON position for a shift
to take place and for the position indicator lights to be
operable. If the ignition switch is not in the ON position,
the shift will not take place, and no position indicator
lights will be on or flashing.
ON-ROAD DRIVING TIPS
Utility vehicles have higher ground clearance and a
narrower track to make them capable of performing in a
wide variety of off-road applications. Specific design
characteristics give them a higher center of gravity than
ordinary cars.
An advantage of the higher ground clearance is a better
view of the road, allowing you to anticipate problems.
They are not designed for cornering at the same speeds as
conventional two-wheel drive vehicles any more than
low-slung sports cars are designed to perform satisfacto-
rily in off-road conditions. If at all possible, avoid sharp
turns or abrupt maneuvers. As with other vehicles of this
type, failure to operate this vehicle correctly may result in
loss of control or vehicle rollover.
OFF-ROAD DRIVING TIPS
When To Use 4WD LOW Range
When off-road driving, shift to 4WD LOW for additional
traction and control on slippery or difficult terrain,
ascending or descending steep hills, and to increase
low-speed pulling power. This range should be limited to
extreme situations such as deep snow, mud, or sand
where additional low speed pulling power is needed.
Vehicle speeds in excess of 25 mph (40 km/h) should be
avoided when in 4WD LOW range.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 333
Driving Through Water
Although your vehicle is capable of driving through
water, there are a number of precautions that must be
considered before entering the water:
CAUTION!
When driving through water, do not exceed 5 mph
(8 km/h). Always check water depth before entering
as a precaution, and check all fluids afterward. Driv-
ing through water may cause damage that may not be
covered by the new vehicle limited warranty.
Driving through water more than a few inches/
centimeters deep will require extra caution to ensure
safety and prevent damage to your vehicle. If you must
drive through water, try to determine the depth and the
bottom condition (and location of any obstacles) prior to
entering. Proceed with caution and maintain a steady
controlled speed less than 5 mph (8 km/h) in deep water
to minimize wave effects.
Flowing Water
If the water is swift flowing and rising (as in storm
run-off) avoid crossing until the water level recedes
and/or the flow rate is reduced. If you must cross
flowing-water, avoid depths in excess of 9 in (22 cm). The
flowing water can erode the streambed causing your
vehicle to sink into deeper water. Determine exit point(s)
that are downstream of your entry point to allow for
drifting.
Standing Water
Avoid driving in standing water deeper than 20 in
(51 cm), and reduce speed appropriately to minimize
wave effects. Maximum speed in 20 in (51 cm) of water is
less than 5 mph (8 km/h).
334 STARTING AND OPERATING
Maintenance
After driving through deep water, inspect your vehicle
fluids and lubricants (engine, transmission, axle, transfer
case) to assure they have not been contaminated. Con-
taminated fluids and lubricants (milky, foamy in appear-
ance) should be flushed/changed as soon as possible to
prevent component damage.
Driving In Snow, Mud And Sand
In heavy snow, when pulling a load, or for additional
control at slower speeds, shift the transmission to a low
gear and shift the transfer case to 4WD LOW if necessary.
Refer to “Four-Wheel Drive Operation” in “Starting and
Operating” for further information. Do not shift to a
lower gear than necessary to maintain headway. Over-
revving the engine can spin the wheels and traction will
be lost.
Avoid abrupt downshifts on icy or slippery roads be-
cause engine braking may cause skidding and loss of
control.
Hill Climbing
NOTE: Before attempting to climb a hill, determine the
conditions at the crest and/or on the other side.
Before climbing a steep hill, shift the transmission to a
lower gear and shift the transfer case to 4WD LOW. Use
first gear and 4WD LOW for very steep hills.
If you stall or begin to lose headway while climbing a
steep hill, allow your vehicle to come to a stop and
immediately apply the brakes. Restart the engine and
shift to REVERSE. Back slowly down the hill allowing the
compression braking of the engine to help regulate your
speed. If the brakes are required to control vehicle speed,
apply them lightly and avoid locking or skidding the
tires.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 335
WARNING!
If the engine stalls or you lose headway or cannot
make it to the top of a steep hill or grade, never
attempt to turn around. To do so may result in
tipping and rolling the vehicle. Always back straight
down a hill in REVERSE gear carefully. Never back
down a hill in NEUTRAL using only the brake.
Remember, never drive diagonally across a hill - drive
straight up or down.
If the wheels start to slip as you approach the crest of a
hill, ease off the accelerator and maintain headway by
turning the front wheels slowly left and right. This may
provide a fresh “bite” into the surface and will usually
provide traction to complete the climb.
Traction Downhill
Shift the transmission into a low gear and the transfer
case to 4WD LOW range. Let the vehicle go slowly down
the hill with all four wheels turning against engine
compression drag. This will permit you to control the
vehicle speed and direction.
When descending mountains or hills, repeated braking
can cause brake fade with loss of braking control. Avoid
repeated heavy braking by downshifting the transmis-
sion whenever possible.
After Driving Off-Road
Off-road operation puts more stress on your vehicle than
does most on-road driving. After going off-road, it is
always a good idea to check for damage. That way you
can get any problems taken care of right away and have
your vehicle ready when you need it.
336 STARTING AND OPERATING
•
Completely inspect the underbody of your vehicle.
Check tires, body structure, steering, suspension, and
exhaust system for damage.
•
Inspect the radiator for mud and debris and clean as
required.
•
Check threaded fasteners for looseness, particularly on
the chassis, drivetrain components, steering, and sus-
pension. Retighten them, if required, and torque to the
values specified in the Service Manual.
•
Check for accumulations of plants or brush. These
things could be a fire hazard. They might hide damage
to fuel lines, brake hoses, axle pinion seals, and
propeller shafts.
•
After extended operation in mud, sand, water, or
similar dirty conditions, have the radiator, fan, brake
rotors, wheels, brake linings, and axle yokes inspected
and cleaned as soon as possible.
WARNING!
Abrasive material in any part of the brakes may cause
excessive wear or unpredictable braking. You might
not have full braking power when you need it to
prevent a collision. If you have been operating your
vehicle in dirty conditions, get your brakes checked
and cleaned as necessary.
•
If you experience unusual vibration after driving in
mud, slush or similar conditions, check the wheels for
impacted material. Impacted material can cause a
wheel imbalance and freeing the wheels of it will
correct the situation.
POWER STEERING
The standard power steering system will give you good
vehicle response and increased ease of maneuverability
in tight spaces. The system will provide mechanical
steering capability if power assist is lost.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 337
If for some reason the power assist is interrupted, it will
still be possible to steer your vehicle. Under these condi-
tions, you will observe a substantial increase in steering
effort, especially at very low vehicle speeds and during
parking maneuvers.
NOTE:
•
Increased noise levels at the end of the steering wheel
travel are considered normal and do not indicate that
there is a problem with the power steering system.
•
Upon initial start-up in cold weather, the power steer-
ing pump may make noise for a short amount of time.
This is due to the cold, thick fluid in the steering
system. This noise should be considered normal, and it
does not in any way damage the steering system.
WARNING!
Continued operation with reduced power steering
assist could pose a safety risk to yourself and others.
Service should be obtained as soon as possible.
CAUTION!
Prolonged operation of the steering system at the end
of the steering wheel travel will increase the steering
fluid temperature and it should be avoided when
possible. Damage to the power steering pump may
occur.
338 STARTING AND OPERATING
Power Steering Fluid Check
Checking the power steering fluid level at a defined
service interval is not required. The fluid should only be
checked if a leak is suspected, abnormal noises are
apparent, and/or the system is not functioning as antici-
pated. Coordinate inspection efforts through an autho-
rized dealer.
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your power steering
system as the chemicals can damage your power
steering components. Such damage is not covered by
the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
WARNING!
Fluid level should be checked on a level surface and
with the engine off to prevent injury from moving
parts and to ensure accurate fluid level reading. Do
not overfill. Use only manufacturer’s recommended
power steering fluid.
If necessary, add fluid to restore to the proper indicated
level. With a clean cloth, wipe any spilled fluid from all
surfaces. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine
Parts” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further
information.
PARKING BRAKE
Before leaving the vehicle, make sure that the parking
brake is fully applied. Also, be certain to leave the
transmission in PARK.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 339
The parking brake lever is located in the center console.
To apply the parking brake, pull the lever up as firmly as
possible. To release the parking brake, pull the lever up
slightly, press the center button, then lower the lever
completely.
When the parking brake is applied with the ignition
switch ON, the “Brake Warning Light” in the instrument
cluster will illuminate.
NOTE:
•
When the parking brake is applied and the transmis-
sion is placed in gear, the “Brake Warning Light” will
flash. If vehicle speed is detected, a chime will sound
to alert the driver. Fully release the parking brake
before attempting to move the vehicle.
•
This light only shows that the parking brake is ap-
plied. It does not show the degree of brake application.
When parking on a hill, it is important to turn the front
wheels toward the curb on a downhill grade and away
from the curb on an uphill grade. Apply the parking
brake before placing the shift lever in PARK, otherwise
the load on the transmission locking mechanism may
Parking Brake
340 STARTING AND OPERATING
make it difficult to move the shift lever out of PARK. The
parking brake should always be applied whenever the
driver is not in the vehicle.
WARNING!
•
Never use the PARK position as a substitute for
the parking brake. Always apply the parking
brake fully when parked to guard against vehicle
movement and possible injury or damage.
•
Never leave children alone in a vehicle. Leaving
unattended children in a vehicle is dangerous for a
number of reasons. A child or others could be
seriously or fatally injured.
•
Do not leave the key in the ignition. A child could
operate power windows, other controls, or move
the vehicle.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
•
Be sure the parking brake is fully disengaged
before driving; failure to do so can lead to brake
failure and a collision.
•
Always fully apply the parking brake when leav-
ing your vehicle or it may roll and cause damage or
injury. Also, be certain to leave the transmission in
PARK. Failure to do so may cause the vehicle to
roll and cause damage or injury.
CAUTION!
If the “Brake Warning Light” remains on with the
parking brake released, a brake system malfunction
is indicated. Have the brake system serviced by an
authorized dealer immediately.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 341
ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM
The Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) is designed to aid the
driver in maintaining vehicle control under adverse
braking conditions. The system operates with a separate
computer to modulate hydraulic pressure, to prevent
wheel lock-up and help avoid skidding on slippery
surfaces.
All vehicle wheels and tires must be the same size and
type, and tires must be properly inflated, to produce
accurate signals for the computer.
WARNING!
Significant over or under-inflation of tires or mixing
sizes of tires or wheels on the vehicle can lead to loss
of braking effectiveness.
The ABS conducts a low-speed self-test at about 12 mph
(20 km/h). If you have your foot lightly on the brake
while this test is occurring, you may feel slight pedal
movement. The movement can be more apparent on ice
and snow. This is normal.
The ABS pump motor runs during the self-test at 12 mph
(20 km/h) and during an ABS stop. The pump motor
makes a low humming noise during operation, which is
normal.
WARNING!
•
Pumping of the Anti-Lock Brakes will diminish
their effectiveness and may lead to a collision.
Pumping makes the stopping distance longer. Just
press firmly on your brake pedal when you need
to slow down or stop.
(Continued)
342 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING! (Continued)
•
The ABS cannot prevent the natural laws of phys-
ics from acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase
braking or steering efficiency beyond that af-
forded by the condition of the vehicle brakes and
tires or the traction afforded.
•
The ABS cannot prevent collisions, including
those resulting from excessive speed in turns,
following another vehicle too closely, or hydro-
planing.
•
The capabilities of an ABS equipped vehicle must
never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous
manner, which could jeopardize the user’s safety
or the safety of others.
CAUTION!
The ABS is subject to possible detrimental effects of
electronic interference caused by improperly in-
stalled aftermarket radios or telephones.
NOTE: During severe braking conditions, a pulsing
sensation may occur and a clicking noise will be heard.
This is normal, indicating that the ABS is functioning.
•
Do not “ride” the brakes by resting your foot on the
pedal. This could overheat the brakes and result in
unpredictable braking action, longer stopping dis-
tances, or brake damage.
•
When descending mountains or hills, repeated brak-
ing can cause brake fade with loss of braking control.
Avoid repeated heavy braking by downshifting the
transmission or locking out overdrive whenever pos-
sible.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 343
•
Engines may idle at higher speeds during warm-up,
which could cause rear wheels to spin and result in
loss of vehicle control. Be especially careful while
driving on slippery roads, in close-quarter maneuver-
ing, parking, or stopping.
•
Do not drive too fast for road conditions, especially
when roads are wet or slushy. A wedge of water can
build up between the tire tread and the road. This
hydroplaning action can cause loss of traction, braking
ability, and control.
•
After going through deep water or a car wash, brakes
may become wet, resulting in decreased performance
and unpredictable braking action. Dry the brakes by
gentle, intermittent pedal action while driving at very
slow speeds.
ELECTRONIC BRAKE CONTROL SYSTEM
Your vehicle is equipped with an advanced electronic
brake control system commonly referred to as ESC. This
system includes Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS), Traction
Control System (TCS), Brake Assist System (BAS), Hill
Start Assist (HSA), Electronic Roll Mitigation (ERM), and
Electronic Stability Control (ESC). These systems work
together to enhance both vehicle stability and control in
various driving conditions.
Two additional electronic brake control system options
are Hill Descent Control (HDC) and Trailer Sway Control
(TSC). Your vehicle may be equipped with one or both of
these options.
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS)
This system aids the driver in maintaining vehicle control
under adverse braking conditions. The system controls
hydraulic brake pressure to prevent wheel lock-up to
344 STARTING AND OPERATING
help avoid skidding on slippery surfaces during braking.
Refer to “Anti-Lock Brake System” in “Starting and
Operating” for further information.
WARNING!
The Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) cannot prevent
the natural laws of physics from acting on the ve-
hicle, nor can it increase the traction afforded by
prevailing road conditions. ABS cannot prevent col-
lisions, including those resulting from excessive
speed in turns, driving on very slippery surfaces, or
hydroplaning. The capabilities of an ABS-equipped
vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or
dangerous manner, which could jeopardize the user’s
safety or the safety of others.
Traction Control System (TCS)
This system monitors the amount of wheel spin of each of
the driven wheels. If wheel spin is detected, brake
pressure is applied to the slipping wheel(s) and engine
power is reduced to provide enhanced acceleration and
stability. A feature of the TCS system functions similar to
a limited slip differential and controls the wheel spin
across a driven axle. If one wheel on a driven axle is
spinning faster than the other, the system will apply the
brake of the spinning wheel. This will allow more engine
torque to be applied to the wheel that is not spinning.
This feature remains active even if TCS and ESC are in
the “Partial Off” mode or the “Full Off” mode. Refer to
“Electronic Stability Control (ESC)” in this section for
further information.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 345
Brake Assist System (BAS)
The BAS is designed to optimize the vehicle’s braking
capability during emergency braking maneuvers. The
system detects an emergency braking situation by sens-
ing the rate and amount of brake application and then
applies optimum pressure to the brakes. This can help
reduce braking distances. The BAS complements the
anti-lock brake system (ABS). Applying the brakes very
quickly results in the best BAS assistance. To receive the
benefit of the system, you must apply continuous brak-
ing pressure during the stopping sequence, (do not
“pump” the brakes). Do not reduce brake pedal pressure
unless braking is no longer desired. Once the brake pedal
is released, the BAS is deactivated.
WARNING!
The Brake Assist System (BAS) cannot prevent the
natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle,
nor can it increase the traction afforded by prevailing
road conditions. BAS cannot prevent collisions, in-
cluding those resulting from excessive speed in
turns, driving on very slippery surfaces, or hydro-
planing. The capabilities of a BAS-equipped vehicle
must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous
manner, which could jeopardize the user’s safety or
the safety of others.
346 STARTING AND OPERATING
Electronic Roll Mitigation (ERM)
This system anticipates the potential for wheel lift by
monitoring the driver’s steering wheel input and the
speed of the vehicle. When ERM determines that the rate
of change of the steering wheel angle and vehicle’s speed
are sufficient to potentially cause wheel lift, it then
applies the appropriate brake and may also reduce
engine power to lessen the chance that wheel lift will
occur. ERM will only intervene during very severe or
evasive driving maneuvers. ERM can only reduce the
chance of wheel lift occurring during severe or evasive
driving maneuvers. It cannot prevent wheel lift due to
other factors, such as road conditions, leaving the road-
way, or striking objects or other vehicles.
NOTE: ERM is disabled anytime the ESC is in “Full Off”
mode. Refer to Electronic Stability Control (ESC) for a
complete explanation of the available ESC modes.
WARNING!
Many factors, such as vehicle loading, road condi-
tions, and driving conditions, influence the chance
that wheel lift or rollover may occur. Electronic Roll
Mitigation (ERM) cannot prevent all wheel lift or
rollovers, especially those that involve leaving the
roadway or striking objects or other vehicles. The
capabilities of an ERM-equipped vehicle must never
be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner,
which could jeopardize the user’s safety or the safety
of others.
Hill Start Assist (HSA)
The HSA system is designed to help the driver accelerate
the vehicle from a complete stop while on an incline. If
the driver releases the brake while stopped on an incline,
HSA will continue to hold the brake pressure for a short
period. If the driver does not apply the throttle before this
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 347
time expires, the system will release brake pressure and
the vehicle will roll down the hill as normal. The system
will release brake pressure in proportion to amount of
throttle applied.
The following conditions must be met in order for HSA to
activate:
•
The vehicle must be stopped.
•
The vehicle must be on a 7% or greater incline.
•
The gear selection must match vehicle uphill direction
(i.e., vehicle facing uphill is in forward gear; vehicle
backing uphill is in REVERSE gear).
•
For vehicles equipped with an automatic transmission,
the HSA will work in REVERSE gear and all forward
gears. The system will not activate if the transmission
is in PARK.
WARNING!
There may be situations where the Hill Start Assist
(HSA) will not activate and slight rolling may occur,
such as on minor hills (i.e., less than 7%), or with a
loaded vehicle, or while pulling a trailer. HSA is not
a substitute for active driving involvement. It is
always the driver’s responsibility to be attentive to
distance to other vehicles, people, and objects, and
most importantly brake operation to ensure safe
operation of the vehicle under all road conditions.
Your complete attention is always required while
driving to maintain safe control of your vehicle.
Failure to follow these warnings can result in a
collision or serious personal injury.
Towing With HSA
HSA will provide assistance during acceleration on an
incline while towing a trailer.
348 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
•
If you use a trailer brake controller with your
trailer, the trailer brakes may be activated and
deactivated with the brake switch. If so, there may
not be enough brake pressure to hold both the
vehicle and the trailer on a hill when the brake
pedal is released. In order to avoid rolling down
an incline while resuming acceleration, manually
activate the trailer brake or apply more vehicle
brake pressure prior to releasing the brake pedal.
•
HSA is not a parking brake. Always apply the
parking brake fully when leaving your vehicle.
Also, be certain to leave the transmission in PARK.
•
Failure to follow these warnings can result in a
collision or serious personal injury.
Disabling And Enabling HSA
This feature can be turned on or turned off. To change the
current setting, proceed as follows:
For vehicles equipped with the Electronic Vehicle Infor-
mation Center (EVIC), refer to “Hill Start Assist,” under
⬙Personal Settings (Customer Programmable Features),”
under “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)” in
“Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further in-
formation.
For vehicles not equipped with the EVIC, perform the
following steps:
NOTE: You must complete Steps 1 through 8 within
90 seconds.
1. Center the steering wheel (front wheels pointing
straight forward).
2. Shift the transmission into PARK.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 349
3. Apply the parking brake.
4. Start the engine.
5. Rotate the steering wheel one-half turn to the left.
6. Press the “ESC Off” button located in the lower switch
bank below the climate control four times within twenty
seconds. The “ESC Off Indicator Light” should turn on
and turn off two times.
7. Rotate the steering wheel back to center and then an
additional one-half turn to the right.
8. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position and then
back to the ON position. If the sequence was completed
properly, the “ESC Off Indicator Light” will blink several
times to confirm HSA is disabled.
9. Repeat these steps if you want to return this feature to
its previous setting.
Hill Descent Control (HDC) – If Equipped
HDC is only intended for low speed off-road driving.
HDC maintains vehicle speed while descending hills in
off-road driving conditions by applying the brakes when
necessary.
When enabled, HDC senses the terrain and activates
when the vehicle is descending a hill. HDC speed may be
adjusted by the driver to suit the driving conditions. The
speed corresponds to the transmission gear selected.
Gear Approximate HDC Set Speed
1st 1 mph (1.5 km/h)
2nd 3 mph (4.5 km/h)
DRIVE 7.5 mph (12 km/h)
REVERSE 1 mph (1.5 km/h)
NEUTRAL 3 mph (4.5 km/h)
However, the driver can override HDC operation by
applying the brake to slow the vehicle down below the
HDC control speed. If more speed is desired during HDC
350 STARTING AND OPERATING
control, the accelerator pedal will increase vehicle speed
in the usual manner. When either the brake or the
accelerator is released, HDC will control the vehicle at the
original set speed.
NOTE: HDC is available on vehicles equipped with the
MP1522 transfer case.
•
The transfer case must be in 4WD LOW range to
enable HDC.
•
HDC is enabled only when the “Hill Descent Control
Indicator Light” in the instrument cluster is on solid.
•
HDC will NOT activate when the automatic transmis-
sion is in PARK.
•
HDC will NOT activate on level ground.
•
HDC will NOT activate at vehicle speeds above
30 mph (50 km/h).
The “Hill Descent” button is located in the lower switch
bank below the climate control.
Enabling HDC
1. Shift the transfer case into 4WD LOW range. Refer to
“Four-Wheel Drive Operation” in “Starting and Operat-
ing” for further information.
Hill Descent Button
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 351
2. Press the “Hill Descent” button. The “Hill Descent
Control Indicator Light” in the instrument cluster will
turn on solid.
NOTE: If the transfer case is not in 4WD LOW range,
the “Hill Descent Control Indicator Light” will flash for
five seconds and HDC will not be enabled.
Disabling HDC
1. Press the “Hill Descent” button or shift the transfer
case out of 4WD LOW range. The “Hill Descent Control
Indicator” light in the instrument cluster will turn off.
Electronic Stability Control (ESC)
This system enhances directional control and stability of
the vehicle under various driving conditions. ESC cor-
rects for oversteering or understeering of the vehicle by
applying the brake of the appropriate wheel to assist in
counteracting the oversteer or understeer condition. En-
gine power may also be reduced to help the vehicle
maintain the desired path.
ESC uses sensors in the vehicle to determine the vehicle
path intended by the driver and compares it to the actual
path of the vehicle. When the actual path does not match
the intended path, ESC applies the brake of the appro-
priate wheel to assist in counteracting the oversteer or
understeer condition.
•
Oversteer - when the vehicle is turning more than
appropriate for the steering wheel position.
•
Understeer - when the vehicle is turning less than
appropriate for the steering wheel position.
The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” lo-
cated in the instrument cluster will start to flash as soon
as the tires lose traction and the ESC system becomes
active. The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator
352 STARTING AND OPERATING
Light” also flashes when the TCS is active. If the “ESC
Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” begins to flash
during acceleration, ease up on the accelerator and apply
as little throttle as possible. Be sure to adapt your speed
and driving to the prevailing road conditions.
WARNING!
The Electronic Stability Control (ESC) cannot pre-
vent the natural laws of physics from acting on the
vehicle, nor can it increase the traction afforded by
prevailing road conditions. ESC cannot prevent col-
lisions, including those resulting from excessive
speed in turns, driving on very slippery surfaces, or
hydroplaning. The capabilities of an ESC equipped
vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or
dangerous manner which could jeopardize the user’s
safety or the safety of others.
ESC Operating Modes
Depending upon model and mode of operation, the ESC
system has up to three operating modes: “ESC On”
“Partial Off,” and “Full Off.”
ESC On – Two-Wheel Drive Vehicles And Four-Wheel
Drive Vehicles In 2WD And 4WD High Range
This is the normal operating mode for ESC when oper-
ating a two-wheel drive vehicle. It is also the normal
mode for operating a four-wheel drive vehicle in 2WD or
4WD HIGH range. The ESC system will be in “ESC On”
mode whenever the vehicle is started or the transfer case
(if equipped) is shifted out of 4WD LOW range. This
mode should be used for most driving situations. ESC
should only be turned to “Partial Off” or “Full Off” for
specific reasons as noted. Refer to “Partial Off” and to
“Full Off” for additional information.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 353
Partial Off – Two-Wheel Drive Vehicles And
Four-Wheel Drive Vehicles In 2WD And 4WD High
Range
The “Partial Off” mode is intended for driving in deep
snow, sand, or gravel. This mode raises the threshold for
TCS and ESC activation, which allows for more wheel
spin than what ESC normally allows.
The “ESC Off” button is located in the lower switch bank
below the climate control. To enter the “Partial Off”
mode, momentarily press the “ESC Off” button and the
⬙ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” will illu-
minate. To turn the ESC on again, momentarily press the
⬙ESC Off⬙ button and the ⬙ESC Activation/Malfunction
Indicator Light” will turn off. This will restore the normal
“ESC On” mode of operation.
NOTE: To improve the vehicle’s traction when driving
with snow chains, or when starting off in deep snow,
sand, or gravel, it may be desirable to switch to the
“Partial Off” mode by momentarily pressing the “ESC
Off” button. Once the situation requiring “Partial Off”
mode is overcome, turn ESC back on by momentarily
pressing the “ESC Off” button. This may be done while
the vehicle is in motion.
Full Off – Four-Wheel Drive Vehicles In 4WD High
And 4WD Low Range
The “Full Off” mode is intended for off-highway and
off-road use when ESC stability features could inhibit
vehicle maneuverability due to trail conditions.
The “ESC Off” button is located in the lower switch bank
below the climate control panel. To enter “Full Off”
mode, press and hold the “ESC Off” button for five
seconds while the vehicle is stopped with the engine
running. After five seconds, the “ESC Activation/
354 STARTING AND OPERATING
Malfunction Indicator Light” will illuminate and an “ESC
OFF” message will appear in the odometer. Press and
release the trip odometer button located on the instru-
ment cluster to turn off this message.
In this mode, ESC and TCS are turned off (except for the
“limited slip” feature described in the TCS section) until
the vehicle reaches a speed of 40 mph (64 km/k). At
speeds over 40 mph (64 km/k), the system automatically
switches to “Partial Off” mode, described above. When
the vehicle speed returns to less than 35 mph (56 km/h),
the ESC system will return to “Full Off” mode. The “ESC
Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” is always illu-
minated when ESC is off. To turn ESC on again, momen-
tarily press the “ESC Off” button. This will restore the
normal “ESC On” mode of operation.
NOTE:
•
“Full Off” is the only operating mode for ESC in 4WD
LOW range. The ESC system will be in this mode
whenever the vehicle is started in 4WD LOW range or
the transfer case is shifted into 4WD LOW range.
•
The “ESC OFF” message will display and a chime will
sound when the shift lever is moved from any position
to the PARK position and then moved out of the PARK
position. This will occur even if the message was
cleared previously.
WARNING!
With the ESC switched off, the enhanced vehicle
stability offered by ESC is unavailable. In an emer-
gency evasive maneuver, the ESC system will not
engage to assist in maintaining stability. “Full Off”
mode is only intended for off-highway or off-road
use.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 355
ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light And
ESC OFF Indicator Light
The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator
Light” in the instrument cluster will come on
when the ignition switch is turned to the ON
position. It should go out with the engine
running. If the “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator
Light” comes on continuously with the engine running, a
malfunction has been detected in the ESC system. If this
light remains on after several ignition cycles, and the
vehicle has been driven several miles (kilometers) at
speeds greater than 30 mph (48 km/h), see your autho-
rized dealer as soon as possible to have the problem
diagnosed and corrected.
The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” (lo-
cated in the instrument cluster) starts to flash as soon as
the tires lose traction and the ESC system becomes active.
The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” also
flashes when TCS is active. If the “ESC Activation/
Malfunction Indicator Light” begins to flash during ac-
celeration, ease up on the accelerator and apply as little
throttle as possible. Be sure to adapt your speed and
driving to the prevailing road conditions.
NOTE:
•
The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light”
and the “ESC OFF Indicator Light” come on momen-
tarily each time the ignition switch is turned ON.
•
Each time the ignition is turned ON, the ESC system
will be ON even if it was turned off previously.
•
The ESC system will make buzzing or clicking sounds
when it is active. This is normal; the sounds will stop
when ESC becomes inactive following the maneuver
that caused the ESC activation.
The “ESC OFF Indicator Light” indicates the
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) is off.
356 STARTING AND OPERATING
TIRE SAFETY INFORMATION
Tire Markings
NOTE:
•
P (Passenger) - Metric tire sizing is based on U.S.
design standards. P-Metric tires have the letter “P”
molded into the sidewall preceding the size designa-
tion. Example: P215/65R15 95H.
•
European-Metric tire sizing is based on European
design standards. Tires designed to this standard have
the tire size molded into the sidewall beginning with
the section width. The letter ⬙P⬙ is absent from this tire
size designation. Example: 215/65R15 96H.
•
LT (Light Truck) - Metric tire sizing is based on U.S.
design standards. The size designation for LT-Metric
tires is the same as for P-Metric tires except for the
letters “LT” that are molded into the sidewall preced-
ing the size designation. Example: LT235/85R16.
•
Temporary spare tires are high-pressure compact
spares designed for temporary emergency use only.
1 — U.S. DOT Safety
Standards Code (TIN)
4 — Maximum Load
2 — Size Designation 5 — Maximum Pressure
3 — Service Description 6 — Treadwear, Traction and
Temperature Grades
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 357
Tires designed to this standard have the letter “T”
molded into the sidewall preceding the size designa-
tion. Example: T145/80D18 103M.
•
High flotation tire sizing is based on U.S. design
standards and it begins with the tire diameter molded
into the sidewall. Example: 31x10.5 R15 LT.
Tire Sizing Chart
EXAMPLE:
Size Designation:
P = Passenger car tire size based on U.S. design standards
ⴖ....blank....ⴖ = Passenger car tire based on European design standards
LT = Light truck tire based on U.S. design standards
T = Temporary spare tire
31 = Overall diameter in inches (in)
215 = Section width in millimeters (mm)
65 = Aspect ratio in percent (%)
— Ratio of section height to section width of tire
10.5 = Section width in inches (in)
R = Construction code
— ⬙R⬙ means radial construction
—⬙D⬙ means diagonal or bias construction
15 = Rim diameter in inches (in)
358 STARTING AND OPERATING
EXAMPLE:
Service Description:
95 = Load Index
— A numerical code associated with the maximum load a tire can carry
H = Speed Symbol
— A symbol indicating the range of speeds at which a tire can carry a load corresponding
to its load index under certain operating conditions
— The maximum speed corresponding to the speed symbol should only be achieved under
specified operating conditions (i.e., tire pressure, vehicle loading, road conditions, and
posted speed limits)
Load Identification:
ⴖ....blank....ⴖ = Absence of any text on the sidewall of the tire indicates a Standard Load (SL) tire
Extra Load (XL) = Extra load (or reinforced) tire
Light Load = Light load tire
C, D, E = Load range associated with the maximum load a tire can carry at a specified pressure
Maximum Load — Maximum load indicates the maximum load this tire is designed to carry
Maximum Pressure — Maximum pressure indicates the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for
this tire
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 359
Tire Identification Number (TIN)
The TIN may be found on one or both sides of the tire,
however, the date code may only be on one side. Tires
with white sidewalls will have the full TIN, including the
date code, located on the white sidewall side of the tire.
Look for the TIN on the outboard side of black sidewall
tires as mounted on the vehicle. If the TIN is not found on
the outboard side, then you will find it on the inboard
side of the tire.
EXAMPLE:
DOT MA L9 ABCD 0301
DOT = Department of Transportation
— This symbol certifies that the tire is in compliance with the U.S. Department of Transportation tire
safety standards and is approved for highway use
MA = Code representing the tire manufacturing location (two digits)
L9 = Code representing the tire size (two digits)
ABCD = Code used by the tire manufacturer (one to four digits)
03 = Number representing the week in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)
—03 means the 3rd week.
01 = Number representing the year in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)
—01 means the year 2001
— Prior to July 2000, tire manufacturers were only required to have one number to represent the
year in which the tire was manufactured. Example: 031 could represent the 3rd week of 1981 or 1991
360 STARTING AND OPERATING
Tire Terminology And Definitions
Term Definition
B-Pillar The vehicle B-Pillar is a structural member of the body located
between the front and rear door (of a four-door vehicle) running
from the sill to the roof.
Cold Tire Pressure Cold tire inflation pressure is defined as the tire pressure after the
vehicle has not been driven for at least 3 hours, or driven less
than 1 mile (1.6 km) after sitting for a three hour period. Inflation
pressure is measured in units of PSI (pounds per square inch) or
KPa (kilopascals).
Maximum Inflation Pressure The maximum inflation pressure is the maximum permissible cold
tire inflation pressure for this tire. The max inflation pressure is
molded into the sidewall.
Recommended Inflation Pressure Vehicle manufacturer’s recommended tire inflation pressure as
shown on the tire placard.
Tire Placard A paper label permanently attached to the vehicle showing the
vehicle’s loading capacity, the original equipment tire size and the
recommended inflation pressure.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 361
Tire Loading And Tire Pressure
Tire Placard Location
NOTE: The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed
on the driver’s side B-Pillar.
Tire And Loading Information Placard
Tire Placard Location
Tire and Loading Information Placard
362 STARTING AND OPERATING
This placard tells you important information about
the:
1) number of people that can be carried in the vehicle
2) total weight your vehicle can carry
3) tire size designed for your vehicle
4) cold tire inflation pressures for the front, rear, and
spare tires.
Loading
The vehicle maximum load on the tire must not exceed
the load carrying capacity of the tire on your vehicle. You
will not exceed the tire’s load carrying capacity if you
adhere to the loading conditions, tire size, and cold tire
inflation pressures specified on the Tire and Loading
Information placard and in the “Vehicle Loading” section
of this manual.
NOTE: Under a maximum loaded vehicle condition,
gross axle weight ratings (GAWRs) for the front and rear
axles must not be exceeded. For further information on
GAWRs, vehicle loading, and trailer towing, refer to
“Vehicle Loading” in this section.
To determine the maximum loading conditions of your
vehicle, locate the statement “The combined weight of
occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX lbs or
XXX kg” on the Tire and Loading Information placard.
The combined weight of occupants, cargo/luggage and
trailer tongue weight (if applicable) should never exceed
the weight referenced here.
Steps For Determining Correct Load Limit
1. Locate the statement “The combined weight of occu-
pants and cargo should never exceed XXX lbs or XXX kg”
on your vehicle’s placard.
2. Determine the combined weight of the driver and
passengers that will be riding in your vehicle.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 363
3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver and pas-
sengers from XXX lbs or XXX kg.
4. The resulting figure equals the available amount of
cargo and luggage load capacity. For example, if “XXX”
amount equals 1,400 lbs (635 kg) and there will be five
150 lb (68 kg) passengers in your vehicle, the amount of
available cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs
(295 kg) (since 5 x 150 = 750, and 1400 – 750 = 650 lbs
[295 kg]).
5. Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo
being loaded on the vehicle. That weight may not safely
exceed the available cargo and luggage load capacity
calculated in Step 4.
6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your
trailer will be transferred to your vehicle. Consult this
manual to determine how this reduces the available
cargo and luggage load capacity of your vehicle.
NOTE:
•
The following table shows examples on how to calcu-
late total load, cargo/luggage, and towing capacities
of your vehicle with varying seating configurations
and number and size of occupants. This table is for
illustration purposes only and may not be accurate for
the seating and load carry capacity of your vehicle.
•
For the following example, the combined weight of
occupants and cargo should never exceed 865 lbs
(392 kg).
364 STARTING AND OPERATING
STARTING AND OPERATING 365
WARNING!
Overloading of your tires is dangerous. Overloading
can cause tire failure, affect vehicle handling, and
increase your stopping distance. Use tires of the
recommended load capacity for your vehicle. Never
overload them.
TIRES — GENERAL INFORMATION
Tire Pressure
Proper tire inflation pressure is essential to the safe and
satisfactory operation of your vehicle. Three primary
areas are affected by improper tire pressure:
Safety
WARNING!
•
Improperly inflated tires are dangerous and can
cause collisions.
•
Under-inflation increases tire flexing and can re-
sult in over-heating and tire failure.
•
Over-inflation reduces a tire’s ability to cushion
shock. Objects on the road and chuckholes can
cause damage that result in tire failure.
•
Over-inflated or under-inflated tires can affect
vehicle handling and can fail suddenly, resulting
in loss of vehicle control.
•
Unequal tire pressures can cause steering prob-
lems. You could lose control of your vehicle.
(Continued)
366 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING! (Continued)
•
Unequal tire pressures from one side of the ve-
hicle to the other can cause the vehicle to drift to
the right or left.
•
Always drive with each tire inflated to the recom-
mended cold tire inflation pressure.
Economy
Improper inflation pressures can cause uneven wear
patterns to develop across the tire tread. These abnormal
wear patterns will reduce tread life resulting in a need for
earlier tire replacement. Under-inflation also increases
tire rolling resistance resulting in higher fuel
consumption.
Ride Comfort And Vehicle Stability
Proper tire inflation contributes to a comfortable ride.
Over-inflation produces a jarring and uncomfortable
ride. Both under-inflation and over-inflation affect the
stability of the vehicle and can produce a feeling of
sluggish response or over responsiveness in the steering.
Unequal tire pressures can cause erratic and unpredict-
able steering response.
Unequal tire pressure from side to side may cause the
vehicle to drift left or right.
Tire Inflation Pressures
The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on the
driver’s side “B” Pillar or rear edge of the driver’s side
door.
The pressure should be checked and adjusted, as well as
inspected for signs of tire wear or visible damage, at least
once a month. Use a good quality pocket-type gauge to
check tire pressure. Do not make a visual judgement
when determining proper inflation. Radial tires may look
properly inflated even when they are under-inflated.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 367
CAUTION!
After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure, al-
ways reinstall the valve stem cap. This will prevent
moisture and dirt from entering the valve stem,
which could damage it.
Inflation pressures specified on the placard are always
cold tire inflation pressure. Cold tire inflation pressure is
defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not been
driven for at least three hours, or driven less than 1 mile
(1.6 km) after a three-hour period. The cold tire inflation
pressure must not exceed the maximum inflation pres-
sure molded into the tire sidewall.
Check tire pressures more often if subject to a wide range
of outdoor temperatures, as tire pressures vary with
temperature changes.
Tire pressures change by approximately 1 psi (7 kPa) per
12°F (7°C) of air temperature change. Keep this in mind
when checking tire pressure inside a garage, especially in
the winter.
Example: If garage temperature = 68°F (20°C) and the
outside temperature = 32°F (0°C) then the cold tire
inflation pressure should be increased by 3 psi (21 kPa),
which equals 1 psi (7 kPa) for every 12°F (7°C) for this
outside temperature condition.
Tire pressure may increase from 2 to 6 psi (13 to 40 kPa)
during operation. DO NOT reduce this normal pressure
build-up, or your tire pressure will be too low.
368 STARTING AND OPERATING
Tire Pressures For High Speed Operation
The manufacturer advocates driving at safe speeds
within posted speed limits. Where speed limits or condi-
tions are such that the vehicle can be driven at high
speeds, maintaining correct tire inflation pressure is very
important. Increased tire pressure and reduced vehicle
loading may be required for high-speed vehicle opera-
tion. Refer to original equipment or an authorized tire
dealer for recommended safe operating speeds, loading
and cold tire inflation pressures.
WARNING!
High speed driving with your vehicle at or above
maximum load is dangerous. The added strain on
your tires could cause them to fail. You could have a
serious collision. Do not drive a vehicle loaded to the
maximum capacity at continuous speeds above
75 mph (120 km/h).
Radial-Ply Tires
WARNING!
Combining radial ply tires with other types of tires
on your vehicle will cause your vehicle to handle
poorly. The instability could cause a collision. Al-
ways use radial tires in sets of four. Never combine
them with other types of tires.
Cuts and punctures in radial tires are repairable only in
the tread area because of sidewall flexing. Consult your
authorized dealer for radial tire repairs.
Spare Tire Matching Original Equipped Tire And
Wheel – If Equipped
Your vehicle may be equivalent with a spare tire and
wheel in look and function as the original equipment tire
and wheel found on the front or rear axle of your vehicle.
This spare tire may be used in the tire rotation for your
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 369
vehicle. If your vehicle has this option refer to an
authorized tire dealer for the recommended tire rotation
pattern.
If your vehicle is not equipped with an original equip-
ment tire and wheel as a spare, a non-matching tempo-
rary emergency use spare may be equipped with your
vehicle. Temporary use spares are engineered to be used
only with your vehicle. Your vehicle may be equipped
with one of the following types of non-matching tempo-
rary use spares; compact, full size, or limited-use. Do not
install more than one non-matching temporary use spare
tire/wheel on the vehicle at any given time.
CAUTION!
Because of the reduced ground clearance, do not take
your vehicle through an automatic car wash with a
compact, full size or limited-use temporary spare
installed. Damage to the vehicle may result.
Compact Spare Tire – If Equipped
The compact spare is for temporary emergency use only.
You can identify if your vehicle is equipped with a
compact spare by looking at the spare tire description on
the Tire and Loading Information Placard located on the
driver’s side door opening or on the sidewall of the tire.
Compact spare tire descriptions begin with the letter “T”
or “S” preceding the size designation. Example: T145/
80D18 103M.
T, S = Temporary Spare Tire
Since this tire has limited tread life the original equip-
ment tire should be repaired (or replaced) and reinstalled
on your vehicle at the first opportunity.
Do not install a wheel cover or attempt to mount a
conventional tire on the compact spare wheel, since the
wheel is designed specifically for the compact spare tire.
Do not install more than one compact spare tire and
wheel on the vehicle at any given time.
370 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
Compact spares are for temporary emergency use
only. With these spares, do not drive more than
50 mph (80 km/h). Temporary use spares have limited
tread life. When the tread is worn to the tread wear
indicators, the temporary use spare tire needs to be
replaced. Be sure to follow the warnings, which
apply to your spare. Failure to do so could result in
spare tire failure and loss of vehicle control.
Full Size Spare – If Equipped
The full size spare is for temporary emergency use only.
This tire may look like the original equipped tire on the
front or rear axle of your vehicle, but it is not. This spare
tire may have limited tread life. When the tread is worn
to the tread wear indicators, the temporary use full size
spare tire needs to be replaced. Since it is not the same as
your original equipment tire, replace (or repair) the
original equipment tire and reinstall on the vehicle at the
first opportunity.
Limited-Use Spare – If Equipped
The limited-use spare tire is for temporary emergency
use only. This tire is identified by a label located on the
limited-use spare wheel. This label contains the driving
limitations for this spare. This tire may look like the
original equipped tire on the front or rear axle of your
vehicle, but it is not. Installation of this limited-use spare
tire affects vehicle handling. Since it is not the same as
your original equipment tire, replace (or repair) the
original equipment tire and reinstall on the vehicle at the
first opportunity.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 371
WARNING!
Limited-use spares are for emergency use only. In-
stallation of this limited-use spare tire affects vehicle
handling. With this tire, do not drive more than the
speed listed on the limit-use spare wheel. Keep
inflated to the cold tire inflation pressure listed on
your Tire and Loading Information Placard located
on the driver’s side door opening. Replace (or repair)
the original equipment tire at the first opportunity
and reinstall it on your vehicle. Failure to do so could
result in loss of vehicle control.
Tire Spinning
When stuck in mud, sand, snow, or ice conditions, do not
spin your vehicle’s wheels above 30 mph (48 km/h).
WARNING!
Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces gener-
ated by excessive wheel speeds may cause tire dam-
age or failure. A tire could explode and injure some-
one. Do not spin your vehicle’s wheels faster than
30 mph (48 km/h) when you are stuck, and do not let
anyone near a spinning wheel no matter what the
speed.
Tread Wear Indicators
Tread wear indicators are in the original equipment tires
to help you in determining when your tires should be
replaced.
372 STARTING AND OPERATING
These indicators are molded into the bottom of the tread
grooves. They will appear as bands when the tread depth
becomes 1/16 in (2 mm). When the tread is worn to the
tread wear indicators, the tire should be replaced.
CAUTION!
Proper operation of four-wheel drive vehicles de-
pends on tires of equal size, type and circumference
on each wheel. Any difference in tire size can cause
damage to the transfer case. Tire rotation schedule
should be followed to balance tire wear.
Life Of Tire
The service life of a tire is dependent upon various
factors including but not limited to:
•
Driving style
•
Tire pressure
•
Distance driven
1—WornTire
2—NewTire
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 373
WARNING!
Tires and the spare tire should be replaced after six
years, regardless of the remaining tread. Failure to
follow this warning can result in sudden tire failure.
You could lose control and have a collision resulting
in serious injury or death.
Keep dismounted tires in a cool, dry place with as little
exposure to light as possible. Protect tires from contact
with oil, grease, and gasoline.
Replacement Tires
The tires on your new vehicle provide a balance of many
characteristics. They should be inspected regularly for
wear and correct cold tire inflation pressure. The manu-
facturer strongly recommends that you use tires equiva-
lent to the originals in size, quality and performance
when replacement is needed. (Refer to the paragraph on
“Tread Wear Indicators”). Refer to the “Tire and Loading
Information” placard for the size designation of your tire.
The Load Index and Speed Symbol for your tire will be
found on the original equipment tire sidewall. See the
Tire Sizing Chart example found in the Tire Safety
Information section of this manual for more information
relating to the Load Index and Speed Symbol of a tire.
It is recommended to replace the two front tires or two
rear tires as a pair. Replacing just one tire can seriously
affect your vehicle’s handling. If you ever replace a
wheel, make sure that the wheel’s specifications match
those of the original wheels.
It is recommended you contact your original equipment
or an authorized tire dealer with any questions you may
have on tire specifications or capability. Failure to use
equivalent replacement tires may adversely affect the
safety, handling, and ride of your vehicle.
374 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
•
Do not use a tire, wheel size or rating other than
that specified for your vehicle. Some combinations
of unapproved tires and wheels may change sus-
pension dimensions and performance characteris-
tics, resulting in changes to steering, handling, and
braking of your vehicle. This can cause unpredict-
able handling and stress to steering and suspen-
sion components. You could lose control and have
a collision resulting in serious injury or death. Use
only the tire and wheel sizes with load ratings
approved for your vehicle.
•
Never use a tire with a smaller load index or
capacity than what was originally equipped on
your vehicle. Using a tire with a smaller load index
could result in tire overloading and failure. You
could lose control and have a collision.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
•
Failure to equip your vehicle with tires having
adequate speed capability can result in sudden tire
failure and loss of vehicle control.
CAUTION!
Replacing original tires with tires of a different size
may result in false speedometer and odometer read-
ings.
TIRE CHAINS
Use only compact chains, or other traction aids that meet
SAE type “Class S” specifications. Chains must be the
proper size for the vehicle, as recommended by the chain
manufacturer. In addition, only install tire chains on
P225/75R16 or smaller tires.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 375
CAUTION!
To avoid damage to your vehicle, tires, or chains,
observe the following precautions:
•
Do not use tire chains on vehicles equipped with
tires other than P225/75R16 or smaller tires. There
may not be adequate clearance for the chains and
you are risking structural or body damage to your
vehicle.
•
Because of limited chain clearance between tires
and other suspension components, it is important
that only chains in good condition are used. Bro-
ken chains can cause serious vehicle damage. Stop
the vehicle immediately if noise occurs that could
suggest chain breakage. Remove the damaged
parts of the chain before further use.
(Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued)
•
Install chains on the rear wheels as tightly as
possible and then retighten after driving about
1
⁄
2
mile (0.8 km).
•
Do not exceed 45 mph (72 km/h).
•
Drive cautiously and avoid severe turns and large
bumps, especially with a loaded vehicle.
•
Use on Rear Wheels only.
•
Do not drive for a prolonged period on dry pave-
ment.
•
Observe the tire chain manufacturer’s instructions
on method of installation, operating speed, and
conditions for use. Always use the lower sug-
gested operating speed of the chain manufacturer
if different from the speed recommended by the
manufacturer.
376 STARTING AND OPERATING
These cautions apply to all chain traction devices, includ-
ing link and cable (radial) chains.
TIRE ROTATION RECOMMENDATIONS
The tires on the front and rear of your vehicle operate at
different loads and perform different steering, handling,
and braking functions. For these reasons, they wear at
unequal rates.
These effects can be reduced by timely rotation of tires.
The benefits of rotation are especially worthwhile with
aggressive tread designs such as those on On/Off Road
type tires. Rotation will increase tread life, help to main-
tain mud, snow, and wet traction levels, and contribute to
a smooth, quiet ride.
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper
maintenance intervals. The reasons for any rapid or
unusual wear should be corrected prior to rotation being
performed.
The suggested rotation method is the “forward-cross”
shown in the following diagram. This rotation pattern
does not apply to some directional tires that must not be
reversed.
Tire Rotation
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 377
CAUTION!
Proper operation of four-wheel drive vehicles de-
pends on tires of equal size, type and circumference
on each wheel. Any difference in tire size can cause
damage to the transfer case. Tire rotation schedule
should be followed to balance tire wear.
TIRE PRESSURE MONITOR SYSTEM (TPMS)
The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) will warn the
driver of a low tire pressure based on the vehicle recom-
mended cold placard pressure.
The tire pressure will vary with temperature by about
1 psi (6.9 kPa) for every 12°F (6.5°C). This means that
when the outside temperature decreases, the tire pressure
will decrease. Tire pressure should always be set based
on cold inflation tire pressure. This is defined as the tire
pressure after the vehicle has not been driven for at least
three hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km) after a
three hour period. The cold tire inflation pressure must
not exceed the maximum inflation pressure molded into
the tire sidewall. Refer to “Tires – General Information”
in “Starting and Operating” for information on how to
properly inflate the vehicle’s tires. The tire pressure will
also increase as the vehicle is driven. This is normal and
there should be no adjustment for this increased pres-
sure.
The TPMS will warn the driver of a low tire pressure if
the tire pressure falls below the low-pressure warning
limit for any reason, including low temperature effects
and natural pressure loss through the tire.
The TPMS will continue to warn the driver of low tire
pressure as long as the condition exists, and will not turn
off until the tire pressure is at or above the recommended
cold placard pressure. Once the low tire pressure warn-
ing (Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light) illuminates,
you must increase the tire pressure to the recommended
378 STARTING AND OPERATING
cold placard pressure in order for the “Tire Pressure
Monitoring Telltale Light” to turn off. The system will
automatically update and the “Tire Pressure Monitoring
Telltale Light” will turn off once the system receives the
updated tire pressures. The vehicle may need to be
driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h) in
order for the TPMS to receive this information.
For example, your vehicle may have a recommended
cold (parked for more than three hours) placard pressure
of 33 psi (227 kPa). If the ambient temperature is 68°F
(20°C) and the measured tire pressure is 28 psi (193 kPa),
a temperature drop to 20°F (-7°C) will decrease the tire
pressure to approximately 24 psi (165 kPa). This tire
pressure is low enough to turn ON the “Tire Pressure
Monitoring Telltale Light.” Driving the vehicle may cause
the tire pressure to rise to approximately 28 psi (193 kPa),
but the “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will still
be on. In this situation, the “Tire Pressure Monitoring
Telltale Light” will turn off only after the tires are inflated
to the vehicle’s recommended cold placard pressure
value.
CAUTION!
•
The TPMS has been optimized for the original
equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures and
warning have been established for the tire size
equipped on your vehicle. Undesirable system
operation or sensor damage may result when us-
ing replacement equipment that is not of the same
size, type, and/or style. Aftermarket wheels can
cause sensor damage. Do not use aftermarket tire
sealants or balance beads if your vehicle is
equipped with a TPMS, as damage to the sensors
may result.
(Continued)
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 379
CAUTION! (Continued)
•
After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure,
always reinstall the valve stem cap. This will
prevent moisture and dirt from entering the valve
stem, which could damage the Tire Pressure Moni-
toring Sensor.
NOTE:
•
The TPMS is not intended to replace normal tire care
and maintenance, or to provide warning of a tire
failure or condition.
•
The TPMS should not be used as a tire pressure gauge
while adjusting your tire pressure.
•
Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire causes
the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure.
Under-inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire
tread life, and may affect the vehicle’s handling and
stopping ability.
•
The TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire mainte-
nance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to maintain
correct tire pressure using an accurate tire pressure
gauge, even if under-inflation has not reached the
level to trigger illumination of the “Tire Pressure
Monitoring Telltale Light.”
•
Seasonal temperature changes will affect tire pressure,
and the TPMS will monitor the actual tire pressure in
the tire.
Base System
The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) uses wireless
technology with wheel rim mounted electronic sensors to
monitor tire pressure levels. Sensors, mounted to each
wheel as part of the valve stem, transmit tire pressure
readings to the receiver module.
NOTE: It is particularly important for you to check the
tire pressure in all of the tires on your vehicle monthly
and to maintain the proper pressure.
380 STARTING AND OPERATING
The TPMS consists of the following components:
•
Receiver Module
•
Four Tire Pressure Monitoring Sensors
•
Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light
The matching full-size spare wheel and tire assembly (if
equipped) has a tire pressure monitoring sensor. The
matching full-size spare can be used in place of any of the
four road tires. The TPMS will only monitor the pressure
in the full-size spare when it is used in place of a road
tire. Otherwise, a spare with a pressure below the low-
pressure limit will not cause the “Tire Pressure Monitor-
ing Telltale Light” to illuminate or the chime to sound.
Tire Pressure Monitoring Low Pressure Warnings
The “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will
illuminate in the instrument cluster and a chime
will sound when tire pressure is low in one or
more of the four active road tires. Should this occur, you
should stop as soon as possible, check the inflation
pressure of each tire on your vehicle, and inflate each tire
to the vehicle’s recommended cold placard pressure
value. Once the system receives the updated tire pres-
sures, the system will automatically update and the “Tire
Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will turn off. The
vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above
15 mph (24 km/h) in order for the TPMS to receive this
information.
Check TPMS Warning
When a system fault is detected, the “Tire Pressure
Monitoring Telltale Light” will flash on and off for
75 seconds and then remain on solid. The system fault
will also sound a chime. If the ignition key is cycled, this
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 381
sequence will repeat, providing the system fault still
exists. The “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will
turn off when the fault condition no longer exists. A
system fault can occur due to any of the following:
1. Jamming due to electronic devices or driving next to
facilities emitting the same radio frequencies as the TPMS
sensors.
2. Installing some form of aftermarket window tinting
that affects radio wave signals.
3. Lots of snow or ice around the wheels or wheel
housings.
4. Using tire chains on the vehicle.
5. Using wheels/tires not equipped with TPMS sensors.
Vehicles With Full-Size Spare
1. The matching full-size spare wheel and tire assembly
has a tire pressure monitoring sensor that can be moni-
tored by the TPMS.
2. If you install the full-size spare in place of a road tire
that has a pressure below the low-pressure warning limit,
a chime will sound and the “TPMS Telltale Light” will
turn on upon the next ignition key cycle.
3. Driving the vehicle for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph
(24 km/h) will turn off the “TPMS Telltale Light,” as long
as no tire pressure is below the low-pressure warning
limit in any of the four active road tires.
Vehicles With Compact Spare
1. The compact spare tire does not have a tire pressure
monitoring sensor. Therefore, the TPMS will not monitor
the pressure in the compact spare tire.
382 STARTING AND OPERATING
2. If you install the compact spare tire in place of a road
tire that has a pressure below the low-pressure warning
limit, a chime will sound and the “TPMS Telltale Light”
will turn on upon the next ignition key cycle.
3. After driving the vehicle for up to 20 minutes above
15 mph (24 km/h), the “TPMS Telltale Light” will flash
on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid.
4. For each subsequent ignition key cycle, a chime will
sound and the “TPMS Telltale Light” will flash on and off
for 75 seconds and then remain on solid.
5. Once you repair or replace the original road tire and
reinstall it on the vehicle in place of the compact spare,
the TPMS will update automatically and the “TPMS
Telltale Light” will turn off, as long as no tire pressure is
below the low-pressure warning limit in any of the four
active road tires. The vehicle may need to be driven for
up to 20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h) in order for the
TPMS to receive this information.
Premium System – If Equipped
The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) uses wireless
technology with wheel rim mounted electronic sensors to
monitor tire pressure levels. Sensors, mounted to each
wheel as part of the valve stem, transmit tire pressure
readings to the receiver module.
NOTE: It is particularly important for you to check the
tire pressure in all of the tires on your vehicle monthly
and to maintain the proper pressure.
The TPMS consists of the following components:
•
Receiver Module
•
Four Tire Pressure Monitoring Sensors
•
Three Trigger Modules (mounted in three of the four
wheel-wells)
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 383
•
Various Tire Pressure Monitoring System messages,
which display in the Electronic Vehicle Information
Center (EVIC)
•
Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light
The matching full size spare wheel and tire assembly (if
equipped) has a tire pressure monitoring sensor. The full
size spare can be used in place of any of the four road
tires. A spare with a pressure below the low-pressure
limit will not cause the “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale
Light” to illuminate or the chime to sound. However, it
will cause a “SPARE LOW PRESSURE” message to
display in the EVIC.
Tire Pressure Monitoring Low Pressure Warnings
The “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will
illuminate in the instrument cluster and a chime
will sound when tire pressure is low in one or
more of the four active road tires. In addition, the
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) will display
a graphic showing the pressure values of each tire with
the low tire pressure values flashing.
384 STARTING AND OPERATING
Should this occur, you should stop as soon as possible
and inflate the tires with low pressure (those flashing in
the EVIC graphic) to the vehicle’s recommended cold
placard pressure value. Once the system receives the
updated tire pressures, the system will automatically
update, the graphic display in the EVIC will stop flash-
ing, and the “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light”
will turn off. The vehicle may need to be driven for up to
20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h) in order for the
TPMS to receive this information.
Check TPMS Warning
When a system fault is detected, the “Tire Pressure
Monitoring Telltale Light” will flash on and off for
75 seconds and then remain on solid. The system fault
will also sound a chime. In addition, the EVIC will
display a ⬙CHECK TPM SYSTEM⬙ message for three
seconds and then display dashes (- -) in place of the
pressure value to indicate which sensor is not being
received.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 385
If the ignition key is cycled, this sequence will repeat,
providing the system fault still exists. If the system fault
no longer exists, the “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale
Light” will no longer flash, and the ⬙CHECK TPM
SYSTEM⬙ message will no longer display, and a pressure
value will display in place of the dashes. A system fault
can occur due to any of the following:
1. Jamming due to electronic devices or driving next to
facilities emitting the same radio frequencies as the TPMS
sensors.
2. Installing some form of aftermarket window tinting
that affects radio wave signals.
3. Lots of snow or ice around the wheels or wheel
housings.
4. Using tire chains on the vehicle.
5. Using wheels/tires not equipped with TPMS sensors.
Vehicles With Full-Size Spare
1. The matching full size spare wheel and tire assembly
has a tire pressure monitoring sensor that can be moni-
tored by the TPMS.
2. If you install the full size spare in place of a road tire
that has a pressure below the low-pressure warning limit,
a chime will sound and the “TPMS Telltale Light” will
turn on upon the next ignition key cycle. In addition, the
EVIC will display a Low Pressure message and a graphic
showing the low tire pressure value flashing.
3. After driving the vehicle for up to 20 minutes above
15 mph (24 km/h) the “TPMS Telltale Light” will turn
OFF, as long as no tire pressure is below the low-pressure
warning limit in any of the four active road tires.
4. The EVIC will display a graphic showing the tire
pressure value in place of the flashing low tire pressure
386 STARTING AND OPERATING
value. The EVIC will also display a “SPARE LOW
PRESSURE” message to remind you to service the flat
tire.
Vehicles With Compact Spare
1. The compact spare tire does not have a tire pressure
monitoring sensor. Therefore, the TPMS will not monitor
the pressure in the compact spare tire.
2. If you install the compact spare tire in place of a road
tire that has a pressure below the low-pressure warning
limit, upon the next ignition key cycle, the “TPMS Telltale
Light” will remain on and a chime will sound. In
addition, the graphic in the EVIC will still display a
flashing pressure value.
3. After driving the vehicle for up to 20 minutes above
15 mph (24 km/h), the “TPMS Telltale Light” will flash
on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid. In
addition, the EVIC will display a ⬙CHECK TPM SYS-
TEM⬙ message for three seconds and then display dashes
(- -) in place of the pressure value.
4. For each subsequent ignition key cycle, a chime will
sound, the “TPMS Telltale Light” will flash on and off for
75 seconds and then remain on solid, and the EVIC will
display a ⬙CHECK TPM SYSTEM⬙ message for three
seconds and then display dashes (- -) in place of the
pressure value.
5. Once you repair or replace the original road tire and
reinstall it on the vehicle in place of the compact spare,
the TPMS will update automatically. In addition, the
“TPMS Telltale Light” will turn off and the graphic in the
EVIC will display a new pressure value instead of dashes
(- -), as long as no tire pressure is below the low-pressure
warning limit in any of the four active road tires. The
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 387
vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above
15 mph (24 km/h) in order for the TPMS to receive this
information.
General Information
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules and
RSS 210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the
following conditions:
•
This device may not cause harmful interference.
•
This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation.
The tire pressure sensors are covered under one of the
following licenses:
United States ..................... KR5S120123
Canada ........................ 2671-S120123
FUEL REQUIREMENTS
All engines are designed to meet all emis-
sions regulations and provide excellent
fuel economy and performance when us-
ing high quality unleaded “regular” gaso-
line having an octane rating of 87. The use
of premium gasoline is not recommended,
as it will not provide any benefit over regular gasoline in
these engines.
Light spark knock at low engine speeds is not harmful to
your engine. However, continued heavy spark knock at
high speeds can cause damage and immediate service is
required. Poor quality gasoline can cause problems such
as hard starting, stalling, and hesitations. If you experi-
ence these symptoms, try another brand of gasoline
before considering service for the vehicle.
388 STARTING AND OPERATING
Over 40 auto manufacturers worldwide have issued and
endorsed consistent gasoline specifications (the World-
wide Fuel Charter, WWFC) which define fuel properties
necessary to deliver enhanced emissions, performance,
and durability for your vehicle. The manufacturer recom-
mends the use of gasoline that meets the WWFC speci-
fications if they are available.
Reformulated Gasoline
Many areas of the country require the use of cleaner
burning gasoline referred to as “Reformulated Gasoline.”
Reformulated gasolines contain oxygenates, and are spe-
cifically blended to reduce vehicle emissions and im-
prove air quality.
The manufacturer supports the use of reformulated gaso-
lines. Properly blended reformulated gasolines will pro-
vide excellent performance and durability of engine and
fuel system components.
Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends
Some fuel suppliers blend unleaded gasoline with oxy-
genates such as Ethanol. Fuels blended with oxygenates
may be used in your vehicle.
CAUTION!
DO NOT use gasoline containing Methanol or gaso-
line containing more than 10% Ethanol. Use of these
blends may result in starting and driveability prob-
lems, damage critical fuel system components, cause
emissions to exceed the applicable standard, and/or
cause the “Malfunction Indicator Light” to illumi-
nate. Pump labels should clearly communicate if a
fuel contains greater than 10% Ethanol.
Problems that result from using gasoline containing
Methanol or gasoline containing more than 10% Ethanol
are not the responsibility of the manufacturer and may
not be covered under warranty.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 389
E-85 Usage In Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles
Non-FFV vehicles are compatible with gasoline contain-
ing 10% ethanol (E10). Gasoline with higher ethanol
content may void the vehicle’s warranty.
If a Non-FFV vehicle is inadvertently fueled with E-85
fuel, the engine will have some or all of these symptoms:
•
operate in a lean mode
•
OBD II “Malfunction Indicator Light” on
•
poor engine performance
•
poor cold start and cold drivability
•
increased risk for fuel system component corrosion
To fix a Non-FFV vehicle inadvertently fueled once with
E-85 perform the following:
•
drain the fuel tank (see your authorized dealer)
•
change the engine oil and oil filter
•
disconnect and reconnect the battery to reset the
engine controller memory
More extensive repairs will be required for prolonged
exposure to E-85 fuel.
MMT In Gasoline
MMT is a manganese containing metallic additive that is
blended into some gasoline to increase octane. Gasoline
blended with MMT provides no performance advantage
beyond gasoline of the same octane number without
MMT. Gasoline blended with MMT reduces spark plug
life and reduces emission system performance in some
vehicles. The manufacturer recommends that gasoline
without MMT be used in your vehicle. The MMT content
of gasoline may not be indicated on the gasoline pump;
therefore, you should ask your gasoline retailer whether
the gasoline contains MMT. It is even more important to
look for gasolines without MMT in Canada, because
390 STARTING AND OPERATING
MMT can be used at levels higher than those allowed in
the United States. MMT is prohibited in Federal and
California reformulated gasoline.
Materials Added To Fuel
All gasoline sold in the United States is required to
contain effective detergent additives. Use of additional
detergents or other additives is not needed under normal
conditions and they would result in additional cost.
Therefore, you should not have to add anything to the
fuel.
Fuel System Cautions
CAUTION!
Use the following guidelines to maintain your vehi-
cle’s performance:
(Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued)
•
The use of leaded gas is prohibited by Federal law.
Using leaded gasoline can impair engine perfor-
mance, and damage the emission control system.
•
An out-of-tune engine, or certain fuel or ignition
malfunctions, can cause the catalytic converter to
overheat. If you notice a pungent burning odor or
some light smoke, your engine may be out of tune
or malfunctioning and may require immediate
service. Contact your authorized dealer for service
assistance.
•
The use of fuel additives, which are now being
sold as octane enhancers, is not recommended.
Most of these products contain high concentra-
tions of methanol. Fuel system damage or vehicle
performance problems resulting from the use of
such fuels or additives is not the responsibility of
the manufacturer.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 391
NOTE: Intentional tampering with emissions control
systems can result in civil penalties being assessed
against you.
Carbon Monoxide Warnings
WARNING!
Carbon monoxide (CO) in exhaust gases is deadly.
Follow the precautions below to prevent carbon
monoxide poisoning.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
•
Do not inhale exhaust gases. They contain carbon
monoxide, a colorless and odorless gas, which can
kill. Never run the engine in a closed area, such as
a garage, and never sit in a parked vehicle with the
engine running for an extended period. If the
vehicle is stopped in an open area with the engine
running for more than a short period, adjust the
ventilation system to force fresh, outside air into
the vehicle.
•
Guard against carbon monoxide with proper
maintenance. Have the exhaust system inspected
every time the vehicle is raised. Have any abnor-
mal conditions repaired promptly. Until repaired,
drive with all side windows fully open.
•
Keep the liftgate closed when driving your vehicle
to prevent carbon monoxide and other poisonous
exhaust gases from entering the vehicle.
392 STARTING AND OPERATING
ADDING FUEL
Fuel Filler Cap (Gas Cap)
The gas cap is located behind the fuel filler door, on the
driver’s side of the vehicle. If the gas cap is lost or
damaged, be sure the replacement cap has been designed
for use with this vehicle.
CAUTION!
•
Damage to the fuel system or emission control
system could result from using an improper fuel
cap (gas cap). A poorly fitting cap could let impu-
rities into the fuel system. Also, a poorly fitting
aftermarket cap can cause the “Malfunction Indi-
cator Light (MIL)” to illuminate, due to fuel vapors
escaping from the system.
•
A poorly fitting gas cap may cause the MIL to turn
on.
•
To avoid fuel spillage and overfilling, do not “top
off” the fuel tank after filling.
Fuel Filler Cap
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 393
WARNING!
•
Never have any smoking materials lit in or near
the vehicle when the gas cap is removed or the
tank is being filled.
•
Never add fuel when the engine is running. This is
in violation of most state and federal fire regula-
tions and may cause the MIL to turn on.
•
A fire may result if gasoline is pumped into a
portable container that is inside of a vehicle. You
could be burned. Always place gas containers on
the ground while filling.
NOTE:
•
When the fuel nozzle “clicks” or shuts off, the fuel
tank is full.
•
Tighten the gas cap about one quarter turn until you
hear one click. This is an indication that the cap is
properly tightened.
•
If the gas cap is not tightened properly, the MIL will
come on. Be sure the gas cap is tightened every time
the vehicle is refueled.
Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message
If the vehicle diagnostic system determines that the fuel
filler cap is loose, improperly installed, or damaged, a
gASCAP” message will display in the odometer or a
“CHECK GASCAP” message will be displayed in the
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC). Refer to
“Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)” in “Un-
derstanding Your Instrument Panel” for further review.
Tighten the fuel filler cap until a “clicking” sound is
heard. This is an indication that the fuel filler cap is
properly tightened. Refer to “Onboard Diagnostic Sys-
tem” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further
information.
394 STARTING AND OPERATING
VEHICLE LOADING
Certification Label
As required by National Highway Traffic Safety Admin-
istration regulations, your vehicle has a certification label
affixed to the driver’s side door or B-Pillar.
This label contains the month and year of manufacture,
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR), Gross Axle Weight
Rating (GAWR) front and rear, and Vehicle Identification
Number (VIN). A Month-Day-Hour (MDH) number is
included on this label and indicates the month, day, and
hour of manufacture. The bar code that appears on the
bottom of the label is your VIN.
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
The GVWR is the total permissible weight of your vehicle
including driver, passengers, vehicle, options, trailer
tongue weight, and cargo. The label also specifies maxi-
mum capacities of front and rear axle systems (GAWR).
Total load must be limited, so GVWR, and front and rear
GAWR are not exceeded.
Payload
The payload of a vehicle is defined as the allowable load
weight a truck or any given vehicle can carry, including
the weight of the driver, all passengers, options and
cargo.
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)
The GAWR is the maximum permissible load on the front
and rear axles. The load must be distributed in the cargo
area so that the GAWR of each axle is not exceeded.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 395
Each axle’s GAWR is determined by the components in
the system with the lowest load carrying capacity (axle,
springs, tires, or wheels). Heavier axles or suspension
components, sometimes specified by purchasers for in-
creased durability, does not necessarily increase the ve-
hicle’s GVWR.
Tire Size
The tire size on the label represents the actual tire size on
your vehicle. Replacement tires must be equal to the load
capacity of this tire size.
Rim Size
This is the rim size that is appropriate for the tire size
listed.
Inflation Pressure
This is the cold tire inflation pressure for your vehicle for
all loading conditions up to full GAWR.
Curb Weight
The curb weight of a vehicle is defined as the total weight
of the vehicle with all fluids, including vehicle fuel, at full
capacity conditions, and with no occupants or cargo
loaded into the vehicle. The front and rear curb weight
values are determined by weighing your vehicle on a
commercial scale before any occupants or cargo are
added.
Loading
The actual total weight and the weight of the front and
rear of your vehicle at the ground can best be determined
by weighing it when it is loaded and ready for operation.
The entire vehicle should first be weighed on a commer-
cial scale to ensure that the GVWR has not been ex-
ceeded. The weight on the front and rear of the vehicle
should then be determined separately to be sure that the
load is properly distributed over front and rear axle.
Weighing the vehicle may show that the GAWR of either
396 STARTING AND OPERATING
the front or rear axles has been exceeded, but the total
load is within the specified GVWR. If so, weight must be
shifted from front to rear, or rear to front, as appropriate
until the specified weight limitations are met. Store the
heavier items down low and be sure that the weight is
distributed equally. Stow all loose items securely before
driving.
Improper weight distributions can have an adverse affect
on the way your vehicle steers and handles, and the way
the brakes operate.
CAUTION!
Do not load your vehicle any heavier than the GVWR
or the maximum front and rear GAWR. If you do,
parts on your vehicle can break, or it can change the
way your vehicle handles. This could cause you to
lose control. Also, overloading can shorten the life of
your vehicle.
TRAILER TOWING
In this section, you will find safety tips and information
on limits to the type of towing you can reasonably do
with your vehicle. Before towing a trailer, carefully
review this information to tow your load as efficiently
and safely as possible.
To maintain warranty coverage, follow the requirements
and recommendations in this manual concerning ve-
hicles used for trailer towing.
Common Towing Definitions
The following trailer towing related definitions will assist
you in understanding the following information:
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
The GVWR is the total allowable weight of your vehicle.
This includes driver, passengers, cargo, and tongue
weight. The total load must be limited so that you do not
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 397
exceed the GVWR. Refer to “Vehicle Loading/Vehicle
Certification Label” in “Starting and Operating” for
further information.
Gross Trailer Weight (GTW)
The GTW is the weight of the trailer plus the weight of all
cargo, consumables, and equipment (permanent or tem-
porary) loaded in or on the trailer in its ⬙loaded and
ready for operation⬙ condition.
The recommended way to measure GTW is to put your
fully loaded trailer on a vehicle scale. The entire weight
of the trailer must be supported by the scale.
WARNING!
If the Gross Trailer Weight (GTW) is 3,500 lbs (1 587 kg)
or more, it is mandatory to use a weight-distributing
hitch to ensure stable handling of your vehicle. If you
use a standard weight- carrying hitch, you could lose
control of your vehicle and cause a collision.
Gross Combination Weight Rating (GCWR)
The GCWR is the total permissible weight of your vehicle
and trailer when weighed in combination.
NOTE: The GCWR rating includes a 150 lbs (68 kg)
allowance for the presence of a driver.
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)
The GAWR is the maximum capacity of the front and rear
axles. Distribute the load over the front and rear axles
evenly. Make sure that you do not exceed either front or
rear GAWR. Refer to “Vehicle Loading/Vehicle Certifica-
tion Label” in “Starting and Operating” for further
information.
WARNING!
It is important that you do not exceed the maximum
front or rear GAWR. A dangerous driving condition
can result if either rating is exceeded. You could lose
control of the vehicle and have a collision.
398 STARTING AND OPERATING
Tongue Weight (TW)
The tongue weight is the downward force exerted on the
hitch ball by the trailer. In most cases, it should not be less
than 10% or more than 15% of the trailer load. You must
consider this as part of the load on your vehicle.
Frontal Area
The frontal area is the maximum height multiplied by the
maximum width of the front of a trailer.
Trailer Sway Control – Mechanical
The trailer sway control is a telescoping link that can be
installed between the hitch receiver and the trailer tongue
that typically provides adjustable friction associated with
the telescoping motion to dampen any unwanted trailer
swaying motions while traveling.
Weight-Carrying Hitch
A weight-carrying hitch supports the trailer tongue
weight, just as if it were luggage located at a hitch ball or
some other connecting point of the vehicle. These kinds
of hitches are the most popular on the market today and
they are commonly used to tow small- and medium-
sized trailers.
Weight-Distributing Hitch
A weight-distributing system works by applying lever-
age through spring (load) bars. They are typically used
for heavier loads, to distribute trailer tongue weight to
the tow vehicle’s front axle and the trailer axle(s). When
used in accordance with the manufacturers’ directions, it
provides for a more level ride, offering more consistent
steering and brake control thereby enhancing towing
safety. The addition of a friction/hydraulic sway control
also dampens sway caused by traffic and crosswinds and
contributes positively to tow vehicle and trailer stability.
Trailer sway control and a weight distributing (load
equalizing) hitch are recommended for heavier Tongue
Weights (TW) and may be required depending on Vehicle
and Trailer configuration/loading to comply with Gross
Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) requirements.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 399
WARNING!
•
An improperly adjusted Weight Distributing
Hitch system may reduce handling, stability, brak-
ing performance, and could result in a collision.
•
Weight Distributing Systems may not be compat-
ible with Surge Brake Couplers. Consult with your
hitch and trailer manufacturer or a reputable Rec-
reational Vehicle dealer for additional
information.
Without Weight Distributing Hitch (Incorrect)
400 STARTING AND OPERATING
With Weight Distributing Hitch (Correct)
Improper Adjustment of Weight-Distributing Hitch
(Incorrect)
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 401
Trailer Hitch Classification
Your vehicle is capable of towing trailers up to 2,000 lbs
(907 kg) without added equipment or alterations to the
standard equipment. Your vehicle may be factory
equipped for safe towing of trailers weighing over
2,000 lbs (907 kg) with the optional Trailer Tow Prep
Package. See your authorized dealer for package content.
The following chart provides the industry standard for
the maximum trailer weight a given trailer hitch class can
tow. This should be used to assist you in selecting the
correct trailer hitch for your intended towing condition.
Refer to the “Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer
Weight Ratings)” chart for the Max. GTW towable for
your given drivetrain.
Trailer Hitch Classification Definitions
Class Max. Trailer Hitch Industry
Standards
Class I - Light Duty 2,000 lbs (907 kg)
Class II - Medium
Duty
3,500 lbs (1 587 kg)
Class III - Heavy Duty 5,000 lbs (2 268 kg)
Class IV - Extra
Heavy Duty
10,000 lbs (4 540 kg)
Refer to the “Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum
Trailer Weight Ratings)” chart for the Maximum
Gross Trailer Weight (GTW) towable for your given
drivetrain.
All trailer hitches should be professionally installed on
your vehicle.
402 STARTING AND OPERATING
Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings)
The following chart provides the maximum trailer weight ratings towable for your given drivetrain.
Engine/
Transmission
Model Frontal Area Max. GTW (Gross Trailer
Wt.)
Max. Tongue Wt. (See
Note)
3.7L/Automatic 4x2 32 sq ft (2.97 sq m) 2,000 lbs (907 kg) 200 lbs (91 kg)
3.7L/Automatic 4x4 32 sq ft (2.97 sq m) 2,000 lbs (907 kg) 200 lbs (91 kg)
Refer to local laws for maximum trailer towing speeds.
NOTE: The trailer tongue weight must be considered as part of the combined weight of occupants and cargo
(ie. the GVWR), and the GVWR should never exceed the weight referenced on the Tire and Loading Infor-
mation placard. Refer to “Tire Safety Information” in “Starting and Operating” for further information.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 403
When Towing Trailers With Gross Trailer Weight (GTW) Between 3,500 Lbs (1 588 kg) And 5,000 Lbs
(2 268 kg)
The following chart provides maximum trailer weight ratings towable for the following engine/transmission
combinations, ONLY if using a weight distributing hitch.
Engine/
Transmission
Model Frontal Area Max. GTW
(Gross Trailer Wt.)
Max. Tongue Wt.
(See Note)
3.7L/Automatic
w/Trailer Tow
Package
4x2 64 sq ft (5.94 sq m) 5,000 lbs (2 268 kg) 500 lbs (227 kg)
3.7L/Automatic
w/Trailer Tow
package
4x4 64 sq ft (5.94 sq m) 5,000 lbs (2 268 kg) 500 lbs (227 kg)
Refer to local laws for maximum trailer towing speeds.
NOTE: The trailer tongue weight must be considered as part of the combined weight of occupants and cargo
(ie. the GVWR), and the GVWR should never exceed the weight referenced on the Tire and Loading Infor-
mation placard. Refer to “Tire Safety Information” in “Starting and Operating” for further information.
404 STARTING AND OPERATING
Trailer And Tongue Weight
Always load a trailer with 60% to 65% of the weight in
the front of the trailer. This places 10% to 15% of the
Gross Trailer Weight (GTW) on the tow hitch of your
vehicle. Loads balanced over the wheels or heavier in the
rear can cause the trailer to sway severely side to side
which will cause loss of control of vehicle and trailer.
Failure to load trailers heavier in front is the cause of
many trailer collisions.
Consider the following items when computing the
weight on the rear axle of the vehicle:
•
The tongue weight of the trailer.
•
The weight of any other type of cargo or equipment
put in or on your vehicle.
•
The weight of the driver and all passengers.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 405
NOTE: Remember that everything put into or on the
trailer adds to the load on your vehicle. Also, additional
factory-installed options, or authorized dealer-installed
options, must be considered as part of the total load on
your vehicle. Refer to the “Tire and Loading Information”
placard for the maximum combined weight of occupants
and cargo for your vehicle.
Towing Requirements
To promote proper break-in of your new vehicle drive-
train components, the following guidelines are recom-
mended:
CAUTION!
•
Do not tow a trailer at all during the first 500 miles
(805 km) the new vehicle is driven. The engine,
axle or other parts could be damaged.
(Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued)
•
Then, during the first 500 miles (805 km) that a
trailer is towed, do not drive over 50 mph
(80 km/h) and do not make starts at full throttle.
This helps the engine and other parts of the
vehicle wear in at the heavier loads.
WARNING!
Improper towing can lead to a collision. Follow these
guidelines to make your trailer towing as safe as
possible:
(Continued)
406 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING! (Continued)
•
Make certain that the load is secured in the trailer
and that is will not shift during travel. When
trailering cargo that is not fully secured, dynamic
load shifts can occur that may be difficult for the
driver to control. You could lose control of your
vehicle and have a collision.
•
When hauling cargo, or towing a trailer, do not
overload your vehicle or trailer. Overloading can
cause a loss of control, poor performance, or dam-
age to brakes, axle, engine, transmission, steering,
suspension, chassis structure, or tires.
•
Safety chains must always be used between your
vehicle and trailer. Always connect the chains to
the frame or hook retainers of the vehicle hitch.
Cross the chains under the trailer tongue and
allow enough slack for turning corners.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
•
Vehicles with trailers should not be parked on a
grade. When parking, apply the parking brake on
the tow vehicle. Put the tow vehicle transmission
in PARK. Always, block or ⴖchockⴖ the trailer
wheels.
•
GCWR must not be exceeded.
•
Total weight must be distributed between the tow
vehicle and the trailer such that the following four
ratings are not exceeded:
1. GVWR
2. GTW
3. GAWR
4. Tongue weight rating for the trailer hitch uti-
lized (This requirement may limit the ability to
always achieve the 10% to 15% range of tongue
weight as a percentage of total trailer weight).
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 407
Towing Requirements – Tires
−
Do not attempt to tow a trailer while using a compact
spare tire.
−
Proper tire inflation pressures are essential to the safe
and satisfactory operation of your vehicle. Refer to
“Tires – General Information” in “Starting and Oper-
ating” for information on tire pressures and for proper
tire inflation procedures.
−
Check the trailer tires for proper tire inflation pres-
sures before trailer usage.
−
Check for signs of tire wear or visible tire damage
before towing a trailer. Refer to “Tires – General
Information” in “Starting and Operating” for informa-
tion on tread wear indicators and for the proper
inspection procedure.
−
When replacing tires, refer to “Tires – General Infor-
mation” in “Starting and Operating” for information
on replacement tires and for the proper tire replace-
ment procedures. Replacing tires with a higher load
carrying capacity will not increase the vehicle’s GVWR
and GAWR limits.
Towing Requirements – Trailer Brakes
−
Do not interconnect the hydraulic brake system or
vacuum system of your vehicle with that of the trailer.
This could cause inadequate braking and possible
personal injury.
−
An electronically actuated trailer brake controller is
required when towing a trailer with electronically
actuated brakes. When towing a trailer equipped with
a hydraulic surge actuated brake system, an electronic
brake controller is not required.
−
Trailer brakes are recommended for trailers over
1,000 lbs (454 kg) and required for trailers in excess of
2,000 lbs (907 kg).
408 STARTING AND OPERATING
CAUTION!
If the trailer weighs more than 1,000 lbs (454 kg)
loaded, it should have its own brakes, and they
should be of adequate capacity. Failure to do this
could lead to accelerated brake lining wear, higher
brake pedal effort, and longer stopping distances.
WARNING!
•
Do not connect trailer brakes to your vehicle’s
hydraulic brake lines. It can overload your brake
system and cause it to fail. You might not have
brakes when you need them and could have a
collision.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
•
Towing any trailer will increase your stopping
distance. When towing you should allow for addi-
tional space between your vehicle and the vehicle
in front of you. Failure to do so could result in a
collision.
Towing Requirements – Trailer Lights And Wiring
Whenever you pull a trailer, regardless of the trailer size,
stoplights and turn signals on the trailer are required for
motoring safety.
The Trailer Tow Package may include a four and seven-
pin wiring harness. Use a factory approved trailer har-
ness and connector.
NOTE: Do not cut or splice wiring into the vehicles
wiring harness.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 409
The electrical connections are all complete to the vehicle
but you must mate the harness to a trailer connector.
Refer to the following illustrations.
Four-Pin Connector
1 — Female Pins 4 — Park
2 — Male Pin 5 — Left Stop/Turn
3 — Ground 6 — Right Stop/Turn
Seven-Pin Connector
1 — Battery 5 — Ground
2 — Backup Lamps 6 — Left Stop/Turn
3 — Right Stop/Turn 7 — Running Lamps
4 — Electric Brakes
410 STARTING AND OPERATING
Towing Tips
Before setting out on a trip, practice turning, stopping,
and backing the trailer in an area located away from
heavy traffic.
Automatic Transmission
The “D” range can be selected when towing. However, if
frequent shifting occurs while in this range, you will
want to activate the TOW/HAUL feature. Refer to “Au-
tomatic Transmission” in “Starting and Operating” for
further information.
NOTE: Using the TOW/HAUL feature while operating
the vehicle under heavy operating conditions will im-
prove performance and extend transmission life by re-
ducing excessive shifting and heat build up. This action
will also provide better engine braking.
If you REGULARLY tow a trailer for more than 45 min-
utes of continuous operation, then change the automatic
transmission fluid and filter according to the interval
specified for “police, taxi, fleet, or frequent trailer tow-
ing.” Refer to “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper
maintenance intervals.
TOW/HAUL
To reduce potential for automatic transmission overheat-
ing, press the TOW HAUL button when driving in hilly
areas or shift the transmission to Drive position “2” on
more severe grades. Refer to “Automatic Transmission”
in “Starting and Operating” for further information.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 411
Electronic Speed Control – If Equipped
−
Do not use in hilly terrain or with heavy loads.
−
When using the speed control, if you experience speed
drops greater than 10 mph (16 km/h), disengage until
you can get back to cruising speed.
−
Use speed control in flat terrain and with light loads to
maximize fuel efficiency.
Cooling System
To reduce potential for engine and transmission over-
heating, take the following actions:
−
City Driving
When stopped for short periods of time, shift the trans-
mission into NEUTRAL and increase engine idle speed.
−
Highway Driving
Reduce speed.
−
Air Conditioning
Turn off temporarily.
412 STARTING AND OPERATING
RECREATIONAL TOWING (BEHIND MOTORHOME, ETC.)
Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle
Towing Condition Wheel OFF the
Ground
Two-Wheel Drive
Models
Four-Wheel Drive Models
Flat Tow NONE NOT ALLOWED
See Instructions
•
Transmission in PARK
•
Transfer case in NEUTRAL (N)
•
Tow in forward direction
Dolly Tow
Front NOT ALLOWED NOT ALLOWED
Rear OK NOT ALLOWED
On Trailer ALL OK OK
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 413
Recreational Towing — Two-Wheel Drive Models
Recreational towing is allowed if the rear wheels are OFF
the ground. This may be accomplished using a tow dolly
or vehicle trailer. If using a tow dolly, follow this proce-
dure:
1. Properly secure the dolly to the tow vehicle, following
the dolly manufacturer’s instructions.
2. Drive the rear wheels onto the tow dolly.
3. Firmly set the parking brake. Place the transmission in
PARK.
4. Properly secure the rear wheels to the dolly, following
the dolly manufacturer’s instructions.
5. Turn the ignition switch to the unlocked OFF position.
6. Install a suitable clamping device, designed for tow-
ing, to secure the front wheels in the straight position.
7. Disconnect the negative battery cable and secure it
away from the battery post.
Flat towing (with all four wheels on the ground) is
allowed ONLY if the driveshaft is removed. Towing
with the rear wheels on the ground while the driveshaft
is connected will result in severe transmission damage.
WARNING!
If the driveshaft is removed, the vehicle can roll even
if the transmission is in PARK, which could cause
serious injury or death.
The parking brake must be firmly engaged and the
wheels chocked during driveshaft removal and installa-
tion. The parking brake must remain engaged unless the
vehicle is securely and properly connected to the tow
vehicle, or the driveshaft is completely reinstalled. See
your authorized dealer for proper driveshaft removal
414 STARTING AND OPERATING
and reinstallation procedures, including flange orienta-
tion/alignment, use of thread-locking compound, proper
bolt torque specifications, etc.
CAUTION!
Towing with the rear wheels on the ground (while
the driveshaft is connected) will cause severe trans-
mission damage. Damage from improper towing is
not covered under the New Vehicle Limited War-
ranty.
Recreational Towing — Four-Wheel Drive Models
The transfer case must be shifted into NEUTRAL (N) and
the transmission must be placed in PARK for recreational
towing. The NEUTRAL (N) selection button is adjacent to
the transfer case selector switch. Shifts into and out of
transfer case NEUTRAL (N) can take place with the
selector switch in any mode position.
CAUTION!
•
Front or rear wheel lifts should not be used.
Internal damage to the transmission or transfer
case will occur if a front or rear wheel lift is used
when recreational towing.
•
Tow only in a forward direction. Towing this
vehicle backwards can cause severe damage to the
transfer case.
•
The transmission must be placed in PARK for
recreational towing.
•
Before recreational towing, perform the procedure
outlined under “Shifting into NEUTRAL (N)” to
be certain that the transfer case is fully in NEU-
TRAL (N). Otherwise, internal damage will result.
•
Failure to follow these procedures can cause se-
vere transmission and/or transfer case damage.
•
Do not use a bumper-mounted clamp-on tow bar on
your vehicle. The bumper face bar will be damaged.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 415
Shifting Into NEUTRAL (N)
WARNING!
You or others could be injured if you leave the
vehicle unattended with the transfer case in the
NEUTRAL (N) position without first fully engaging
the parking brake. The transfer case NEUTRAL (N)
position disengages both the front and rear drive-
shafts from the powertrain and will allow the vehicle
to move, even if the transmission is in PARK. The
parking brake should always be applied when the
driver is not in the vehicle.
Use the following procedure to prepare your vehicle for
recreational towing.
CAUTION!
It is necessary to follow these steps to be certain that
the transfer case is fully in NEUTRAL (N) before
recreational towing to prevent damage to internal
parts.
1. Bring the vehicle to a complete stop and shift the
transmission to PARK.
2. Turn OFF the ignition.
3. Turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position, but
do not start the engine.
4. Press and hold the brake pedal.
5. Shift the transmission into NEUTRAL.
6. Using the point of a ballpoint pen or similar object,
press and hold the recessed transfer case N (Neutral)
416 STARTING AND OPERATING
button (located above the selector switch) for four sec-
onds, until the light behind the N symbol starts to blink,
indicating shift in progress. The light will stop blinking
(stay on solid) when the shift to N (Neutral) is complete.
7. After the shift is completed and the NEUTRAL light
comes on, release the NEUTRAL button.
8. Start the engine.
9. Shift the transmission into REVERSE.
10. Release the brake pedal for five seconds and ensure
that there is no vehicle movement.
11. Turn OFF the engine and leave the ignition switch in
the unlocked OFF position.
12. Firmly apply the parking brake.
13. Shift the transmission into PARK.
CAUTION!
Damage to the transmission may occur if the trans-
mission is shifted into PARK with the transfer case in
NEUTRAL (N) and the engine running. With the
transfer case in NEUTRAL (N) ensure that the engine
is off prior to shifting the transmission into PARK.
Neutral Switch
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 417
14. Attach the vehicle to the tow vehicle using a suitable
tow bar.
15. Release the parking brake.
16. Disconnect the negative battery cable, and secure it
away from the negative battery post.
NOTE:
•
Steps 1 through 5 are requirements that must be met
prior to pressing the NEUTRAL (N) button, and must
continue to be met until the four seconds elapse and
the shift has been completed. If any of these require-
ments are not met prior to pressing the NEUTRAL (N)
button or are no longer met during the four second
timer, then the NEUTRAL (N) indicator light will flash
continuously until all requirements are met or until the
NEUTRAL (N) button is released.
•
The ignition switch must be in the ON/RUN position
for a shift to take place and for the position indicator
lights to be operable. If the ignition switch is not in the
ON/RUN position, the shift will not take place and no
position indicator lights will be on or flashing.
•
A flashing NEUTRAL (N) position indicator light
indicates that shift requirements have not been met.
Shifting Out Of NEUTRAL (N)
Use the following procedure to prepare your vehicle for
normal usage.
1. Bring the vehicle to a complete stop, leaving it con-
nected to the tow vehicle.
2. Firmly apply the parking brake.
3. Reconnect the negative battery cable.
4. Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK/OFF position (if
it has been moved or the engine has been started).
5. Turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position, but
do not start the engine.
418 STARTING AND OPERATING
6. Press and hold the brake pedal.
7. Shift the transmission into NEUTRAL.
8. Using the point of a ballpoint pen or similar object,
press and hold the recessed transfer case N (Neutral)
button (located above the selector switch) for one second.
9. After the N (Neutral) indicator light turns off, release
the N (Neutral) button.
10. After the N (Neutral) button has been released, the
transfer case will shift to the position indicated by the
selector switch.
NOTE: When shifting out of transfer case N (Neutral),
turning the engine OFF may be required to avoid gear
clash.
11. Shift the transmission into PARK.
12. Release the brake pedal.
13. Disconnect vehicle from the tow vehicle.
14. Start the engine.
15. Press and hold the brake pedal.
16. Release the parking brake.
Neutral Switch
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 419
17. Shift the transmission into DRIVE, release the brake
pedal, and check that the vehicle operates normally.
NOTE:
•
Steps 1 through 7 are requirements that must be met
prior to pressing the NEUTRAL (Neutral) button, and
must continue to be met until the shift has been
completed. If any of these requirements are not met
prior to pressing the NEUTRAL (N) button or are no
longer met during the shift, the NEUTRAL (N) indi-
cator light will flash continuously until all require-
ments are met or until the NEUTRAL (N) button is
released.
•
The ignition switch must be in the ON/RUN position
for a shift to take place and for the position indicator
lights to be operable. If the ignition switch is not in the
ON/RUN position, the shift will not take place and no
position indicator lights will be on or flashing.
•
A flashing NEUTRAL (N) position indicator light
indicates that shift requirements have not been met.
420 STARTING AND OPERATING
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
CONTENTS
䡵 Hazard Warning Flashers ................ 422
䡵 If Your Engine Overheats ................ 422
䡵 Jacking And Tire Changing ............... 423
▫ Jack Location ....................... 424
▫ Spare Tire Stowage ................... 424
▫ Spare Tire Removal ................... 425
▫ Preparations For Jacking ............... 426
▫ Jacking Instructions ................... 426
䡵 Jump-Starting Procedures ................ 430
▫ Preparations For Jump-Start ............. 430
▫ Jump-Starting Procedure ............... 432
䡵 Freeing A Stuck Vehicle ................. 434
䡵 Shift Lever Override ................... 435
䡵 Towing A Disabled Vehicle ............... 436
▫ Towing Without The Ignition Key FOB ..... 438
▫ Two-Wheel Drive Models .............. 438
▫ Four-Wheel Drive Models .............. 440
6
HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS
The Hazard Warning flasher switch is located in the
switch bank below the climate controls.
Press the switch to turn on the Hazard Warning
flasher. When the switch is activated, all directional
turn signals will flash on and off to warn oncoming
traffic of an emergency. Press the switch a second time to
turn off the Hazard Warning flashers.
This is an emergency warning system and it should not
be used when the vehicle is in motion. Use it when your
vehicle is disabled and it is creating a safety hazard for
other motorists.
When you must leave the vehicle to seek assistance, the
Hazard Warning flashers will continue to operate even
though the ignition is placed in the OFF position.
NOTE: With extended use the Hazard Warning flashers
may wear down your battery.
IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS
In any of the following situations, you can reduce the
potential for overheating your engine by taking the
appropriate action.
•
On the highways — slow down.
•
In city traffic — while stopped, put transmission in
NEUTRAL, but do not increase engine idle speed.
CAUTION!
Driving with a hot cooling system could damage
your vehicle. If the temperature gauge reads “H,”
pull over and stop the vehicle. Idle the vehicle with
the air conditioner turned off until the pointer drops
back into the normal range. If the pointer remains on
the “H” and you hear continuous chimes, turn the
engine off immediately and call for service.
422 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
NOTE: There are steps that you can take to slow down
an impending overheat condition:
•
If your air conditioner (A/C) is on, turn it off. The A/C
system adds heat to the engine cooling system and
turning the A/C off can help remove this heat.
•
You can also turn the temperature control to maximum
heat, the mode control to floor and the blower control
to high. This allows the heater core to act as a
supplement to the radiator and aids in removing heat
from the engine cooling system.
WARNING!
You or others can be badly burned by hot engine
coolant (antifreeze) or steam from your radiator. If
you see or hear steam coming from under the hood,
do not open the hood until the radiator has had time
to cool. Never try to open a cooling system pressure
cap when the radiator or coolant bottle is hot.
JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING
WARNING!
•
Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the
vehicle close to moving traffic. Pull far enough off
the road to avoid the danger of being hit when
operating the jack or changing the wheel.
•
Being under a jacked-up vehicle is dangerous. The
vehicle could slip off the jack and fall on you. You
could be crushed. Never put any part of your body
under a vehicle that is on a jack.
•
Never start or run the engine while the vehicle is
on a jack. If you need to get under a raised vehicle,
take it to a service center where it can be raised on
a lift.
(Continued)
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 423
WARNING! (Continued)
•
The jack is designed to be used as a tool for
changing tires only. The jack should not be used to
lift the vehicle for service purposes. The vehicle
should be jacked on a firm level surface only.
Avoid ice or slippery areas.
Jack Location
The scissor-type jack and tire changing tools are located
in the cargo compartment behind a trim cover on the left
rear trim panel. The latch is located at the bottom of the
trim cover.
Spare Tire Stowage
The spare tire is stowed underneath the rear of the
vehicle and is held in place by a cable winch mechanism.
Jack Storage Location
424 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
Spare Tire Removal
Fit the jack handle extension over the drive nut located in
the rear cargo area inside the vehicle. Use the lug wrench
to rotate the nut counterclockwise until the spare is on
the ground with enough slack in the cable to allow you to
pull the tire out from under the vehicle.
CAUTION!
The winch mechanism is designed for use with the
jack extension tube only. Use of an air wrench or
other power tools is not recommended and they can
damage the winch.
When the spare is clear, tilt the retainer at the end of the
cable, and pull it through the center of the wheel.
NOTE: Refer to “Compact Spare Tire” under “Tires-
General Information” in “Starting And Operating” for
information about the compact spare tire, its use, and
operation.
Lowering/Raising Spare Tire
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 425
Preparations For Jacking
1. Park the vehicle on a firm level surface as far from the
edge of the roadway as possible. Avoid icy or slippery
areas.
WARNING!
Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the
vehicle close to moving traffic, pull far enough off
the road to avoid being hit when operating the jack
or changing the wheel.
2. Turn on the Hazard Warning flasher.
3. Set the parking brake.
4. Place the shift lever into PARK (automatic transmis-
sion) or REVERSE (manual transmission).
5. Turn the ignition to the LOCK position.
6. Block both the front and rear of the
wheel diagonally opposite of the jack-
ing position. For example, if changing
the right front tire, block the left rear
wheel.
NOTE: Passengers should not remain in the vehicle
when the vehicle is being jacked.
Jacking Instructions
WARNING!
Carefully follow these tire changing warnings to help
prevent personal injury or damage to your vehicle:
•
Always park on a firm, level surface as far from
the edge of the roadway as possible before raising
the vehicle.
(Continued)
426 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
WARNING! (Continued)
•
Turn on the Hazard Warning flasher.
•
Block the wheel diagonally opposite the wheel to
be raised.
•
Set the parking brake firmly and set an automatic
transmission in PARK; a manual transmission in
REVERSE.
•
Never start or run the engine with the vehicle on a
jack.
•
Do not let anyone sit in the vehicle when it is on a
jack.
•
Do not get under the vehicle when it is on a jack.
•
Only use the jack in the positions indicated and
for lifting this vehicle during a tire change.
•
If working on or near a roadway, be extremely
careful of motor traffic.
CAUTION!
Do not attempt to raise the vehicle by jacking on
locations other than those indicated in the Jacking
Instructions for this vehicle.
1. Remove spare tire.
2. Remove jack and tools from mounting bracket. As-
semble the tools by connecting the driver to the exten-
sion, and then to the lug wrench.
Jack Warning Label
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 427
3. Loosen (but do not remove) the wheel lug nuts by
turning them to the left one turn while the wheel is still
on the ground.
4. Locate the jack as shown. For the front tires, place it
(rearward) of the notch on the body weld seam behind
wheel to be changed.
For the rear tires, place it under the axle by the wheel to
be changed.
Position the jack handle on the jack. Do not raise the
vehicle until you are sure the jack is fully engaged.
5. Raise the vehicle by turning the jack screw to the right.
Raise the vehicle only until the tire just clears the surface
Front Jacking Location
Rear Jacking Location
428 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
and enough clearance is obtained to install the spare tire.
Minimum tire lift provides maximum stability.
WARNING!
Raising the vehicle higher than necessary can make
the vehicle less stable and cause a collision. It could
slip off the jack and hurt someone near it. Raise the
vehicle only enough to remove the tire.
6. Remove the lug nuts and wheel.
7. Position the spare wheel/tire on the vehicle and install
lug nuts with the cone-shaped end toward the wheel.
Lightly tighten the nuts.
WARNING!
To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack,
do not tighten the wheel nuts fully until the vehicle
has been lowered.
8. Lower the vehicle by turning the jack screw to the left,
and remove the jack.
9. Finish tightening the lug nuts. Push down on the
wrench while tightening for increased leverage. Alternate
nuts until each nut has been tightened twice. The correct
wheel nut tightness is 95 ft lb (130 N·m). If in doubt about
the correct tightness, have them checked with a torque
wrench by your authorized dealer or at a service station.
10. Lower the jack to it’s fully closed position.
11. Secure the tire, jack, and tools in their proper loca-
tions.
WARNING!
A loose tire or jack, thrown forward in a collision or
hard stop, could endanger the occupants of the ve-
hicle. Always stow the jack parts and the spare tire in
the places provided.
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 429
12. Remove blocks from wheels.
JUMP-STARTING PROCEDURES
If your vehicle has a discharged battery it can be jump-
started using a set of jumper cables and a battery in
another vehicle or by using a portable battery booster
pack. Jump-starting can be dangerous if done improperly
so please follow the procedures in this section carefully.
NOTE: When using a portable battery booster pack
follow the manufacturer’s operating instructions and
precautions.
CAUTION!
Do not use a portable battery booster pack or any
other booster source with a system voltage greater
than 12 Volts or damage to the battery, starter motor,
alternator or electrical system may occur.
WARNING!
Do not attempt jump-starting if the battery is frozen.
It could rupture or explode and cause personal injury.
Preparations For Jump-Start
The battery in your vehicle is located in the front of the
engine compartment, behind the left headlight assembly.
NOTE: The positive battery post is covered with a
protective cap. Lift up on the cap to gain access to the
positive battery post.
430 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
WARNING!
•
Take care to avoid the radiator cooling fan when-
ever the hood is raised. It can start anytime the
ignition switch is on. You can be injured by
moving fan blades.
•
Remove any metal jewelry such as watch bands or
bracelets that might make an inadvertent electrical
contact. You could be seriously injured.
•
Batteries contain sulfuric acid that can burn your
skin or eyes and generate hydrogen gas which is
flammable and explosive. Keep open flames or
sparks away from the battery.
1. Set the parking brake, shift the automatic transmission
into PARK and turn the ignition to LOCK.
2. Turn off the heater, radio, and all unnecessary electri-
cal accessories.
Positive Battery Post
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 431
3. If using another vehicle to jump-start the battery, park
the vehicle within the jumper cables reach, set the
parking brake and make sure the ignition is OFF.
WARNING!
Do not allow vehicles to touch each other as this
could establish a ground connection and personal
injury could result.
Jump-Starting Procedure
WARNING!
Failure to follow this procedure could result in per-
sonal injury or property damage due to battery ex-
plosion.
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these procedures could result in
damage to the charging system of the booster vehicle
or the discharged vehicle.
1. Connect the positive (+) end of the jumper cable to the
positive (+) post of the discharged vehicle.
2. Connect the opposite end of the positive (+) jumper
cable to the positive (+) post of the booster battery.
3. Connect the negative end (-) of the jumper cable to the
negative (-) post of the booster battery.
4. Connect the opposite end of the negative (-) jumper
cable to a good engine ground (exposed metal part of the
discharged vehicle’s engine) away from the battery and
the fuel injection system.
432 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
WARNING!
Do not connect the cable to the negative post (-) of the
discharged battery. The resulting electrical spark
could cause the battery to explode and could result in
personal injury.
5. Start the engine in the vehicle that has the booster
battery, let the engine idle a few minutes, and then start
the engine in the vehicle with the discharged battery.
Once the engine is started, remove the jumper cables in
the reverse sequence:
6. Disconnect the negative (-) jumper cable from the
engine ground of the vehicle with the discharged battery.
7. Disconnect the negative end (-) of the jumper cable
from the negative (-) post of the booster battery.
8. Disconnect the opposite end of the positive (+) jumper
cable from the positive (+) post of the booster battery.
9. Disconnect the positive (+) end of the jumper cable
from the positive (+) post of the discharged vehicle.
If frequent jump-starting is required to start your vehicle
you should have the battery and charging system in-
spected at your authorized dealer.
CAUTION!
Accessories that can be plugged into the vehicle
power outlets draw power from the vehicle’s battery,
even when not in use (i.e., cellular phones, etc.).
Eventually, if plugged in long enough, the vehicle’s
battery will discharge sufficiently to degrade battery
life and/or prevent the engine from starting.
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 433
FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE
If your vehicle becomes stuck in mud, sand or snow, it
can often be moved by a rocking motion. Turn your
steering wheel right and left to clear the area around the
front wheels. Then shift back and forth between DRIVE
and REVERSE. Using minimal accelerator pedal pressure
to maintain the rocking motion, without spinning the
wheels, is most effective.
CAUTION!
Racing the engine or spinning the wheels may lead to
transmission overheating and failure. Allow the en-
gine to idle with the shift lever in NEUTRAL for at
least one minute after every five rocking-motion
cycles. This will minimize overheating and reduce
the risk of transmission failure during prolonged
efforts to free a stuck vehicle.
NOTE: If your vehicle is equipped with Traction Con-
trol or Electronic Stability Control (ESC), turn the system
OFF before attempting to “rock” the vehicle.
CAUTION!
•
When “rocking” a stuck vehicle by moving be-
tween DRIVE and REVERSE, do not spin the
wheels faster than 15 mph (24 km/h), or drivetrain
damage may result.
•
Revving the engine or spinning the wheels too fast
may lead to transmission overheating and failure.
It can also damage the tires. Do not spin the
wheels above 30 mph (48 km/h) while in gear (no
transmission shifting occurring).
434 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
WARNING!
Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces gener-
ated by excessive wheel speeds may cause damage, or
even failure, of the axle and tires. A tire could
explode and injure someone. Do not spin your vehi-
cle’s wheels faster than 30 mph (48 km/h) or for
longer than 30 seconds continuously without stop-
ping when you are stuck and do not let anyone near
a spinning wheel, no matter what the speed.
SHIFT LEVER OVERRIDE
If a malfunction occurs and the shift lever cannot be
moved out of the PARK position, you can use the
following procedure to temporarily move the shift lever:
1. Firmly set the parking brake.
2. Using a screwdriver or similar tool, carefully remove
the shift lever override access cover, located on the
PRNDL bezel.
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 435
3. Turn the ignition to the ON/RUN position without
starting the engine.
4. Press and maintain firm pressure on the brake pedal.
5. Using a screwdriver, reach into the opening and press
and hold the shift override lever down.
6. Move the shift lever into the NEUTRAL position.
7. The vehicle may then be started in NEUTRAL.
8. Reinstall the shift lever override access cover.
TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE
This section describes procedures for towing a disabled
vehicle using a commercial wrecker service. If the trans-
mission and drivetrain are operable, disabled vehicles
may also be towed as described under “Recreational
Towing” in the “Starting And Operating” section.
Shift Lever Override Access
436 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
Towing Condition Wheels OFF
the Ground
2WD Models 4WD Models
Flat Tow NONE
If transmission is operable:
•
Transmission in NEUTRAL
•
30 mph max speed(48 km/h)
•
15 miles (24 km) max distance
See instructions in “Recreational Tow-
ing” under “Starting and Operating”
•
Transmission in PARK
•
Transfer Case in NEUTRAL
•
Tow in forward direction
Wheel Lift or Dolly
Tow
Front NOT ALLOWED
Rear OK NOT ALLOWED
Flatbed ALL BEST METHOD BEST METHOD
Proper towing or lifting equipment is required to prevent
damage to your vehicle. Use only tow bars and other
equipment designed for the purpose, following equip-
ment manufacturer’s instructions. Use of safety chains is
mandatory. Attach a tow bar or other towing device to
main structural members of the vehicle, not to bumpers
or associated brackets. State and local laws applying to
vehicles under tow must be observed.
If you must use the accessories (wipers, defrosters, etc.)
while being towed, the ignition must be in the ON/RUN
position, not the ACC position.
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 437
If the vehicle’s battery is discharged, refer to “Shift Lever
Override” in “What To Do In Emergencies” for instruc-
tions on shifting the automatic transmission out of the
PARK position for towing.
CAUTION!
•
Do not attempt to use sling type equipment when
towing. When securing the vehicle to a flat bed
truck, do not attach to front or rear suspension
components. Damage to your vehicle may result
from improper towing.
•
If the vehicle being towed requires steering, the
ignition must be in the ON/RUN or ACC position,
not in the LOCK position.
Towing Without The Ignition Key Fob
Special care must be taken when the vehicle is towed
with the ignition in the LOCK/OFF position. The only
approved method of towing without the ignition key is
with a flatbed truck. Proper towing equipment is neces-
sary to prevent damage to the vehicle.
Two-Wheel Drive Models
The manufacturer recommends towing your vehicle with
all four wheels OFF the ground using a flatbed.
If flatbed equipment is not available, and the transmis-
sion is operable, the vehicle may be towed (with rear
wheels on the ground) with the transmission in NEU-
TRAL. Speed must not exceed 30 mph (48 km/h) and the
distance must not exceed 15 miles (24 km).
438 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
CAUTION!
Towing faster than 30 mph (48 km/h) or farther than
15 miles (24 km) with rear wheels on the ground can
cause severe damage to the transmission. Such dam-
age is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited
Warranty.
If the transmission is not operable, or the vehicle must be
towed faster than 30 mph (48 km/h) or farther than
15 miles (24 km), tow with the rear wheels OFF the
ground (on a flatbed, or with the rear wheels raised using
a wheel lift or towing dolly), or remove the driveshaft.
WARNING!
If the driveshaft is removed, the vehicle can roll even
if the transmission is in PARK, which could cause
serious injury or death.
The parking brake must be firmly engaged and the
wheels chocked during driveshaft removal and installa-
tion. The parking brake must remain engaged unless the
vehicle is securely and properly connected to the tow
vehicle, or the driveshaft is completely reinstalled. See
your authorized dealer for proper driveshaft removal
and reinstallation procedures, including flange
orientation/alignment, use of thread-locking compound,
proper bolt torque specifications, etc.
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 439
Four-Wheel Drive Models
The manufacturer recommends towing with all wheels
OFF the ground. Acceptable methods are to tow the
vehicle on a flatbed or with one end of vehicle raised and
the opposite end on a towing dolly.
If flatbed equipment is not available, and the transfer
case is operable, the vehicle may be towed (in the
forward direction, with ALL wheels on the ground), IF
the transfer case is in NEUTRAL and the transmission is
in PARK. Refer to “Recreational Towing” in “Starting
And Operating” for detailed instructions.
CAUTION!
•
Front or rear wheel lifts should not be used.
Internal damage to the transmission or transfer
case will occur if a front or rear wheel lift is used
when towing.
•
Failure to follow these towing methods can cause
severe damage to the transmission and/or transfer
case. Such damage is not covered by the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty.
440 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
CONTENTS
䡵 Engine Compartment — 3.7L ............. 443
䡵 Onboard Diagnostic System — OBD II ...... 444
▫ Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message ........... 444
䡵 Emissions Inspection And Maintenance
Programs ............................ 445
䡵 Replacement Parts ..................... 446
䡵 Dealer Service ........................ 447
䡵 Maintenance Procedures ................. 447
▫ Engine Oil ......................... 448
▫ Engine Oil Filter ..................... 450
▫ Engine Air Cleaner Filter ............... 450
▫ Maintenance-Free Battery .............. 451
▫ Air Conditioner Maintenance ............ 453
▫ A/C Air Filter – If Equipped ............ 454
▫ Body Lubrication .................... 454
▫ Windshield Wiper Blades ............... 455
▫ Adding Washer Fluid ................. 455
▫ Exhaust System ..................... 456
7
▫ Cooling System ..................... 458
▫ Brake System ....................... 464
▫ Automatic Transmission ............... 466
▫ Transfer Case ....................... 468
▫ Front/Rear Axle Fluid ................. 469
▫ Sky Slider™ Top Care ................. 470
▫ Appearance Care And Protection From
Corrosion .......................... 472
䡵 Fuses .............................. 478
▫ Totally Integrated Power Module ......... 478
䡵 Replacement Bulbs .................... 484
䡵 Bulb Replacement ..................... 484
▫ Headlamp ......................... 484
▫ Front Turn Signal And Front Side Marker
Lamp ............................. 485
▫ Front Fog Lamp ..................... 485
▫ Rear Tail/Stop, Turn Signal, And Back-Up
Lamp ............................. 486
䡵 Fluid Capacities ...................... 487
䡵 Fluids, Lubricants, And Genuine Parts ....... 488
▫ Engine ............................ 488
▫ Chassis ........................... 489
442 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
ENGINE COMPARTMENT — 3.7L
1 — Air Cleaner Filter 6 — Washer Fluid Reservoir
2 — Engine Oil Dipstick 7 — Engine Coolant Reservoir
3 — Brake Fluid Reservoir 8 — Engine Oil Fill
4 — Integrated Power Module (Fuses) 9 — Coolant Pressure Cap
5 — Battery
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 443
ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM — OBD II
Your vehicle is equipped with a sophisticated onboard
diagnostic system called OBD II. This system monitors
the performance of the emissions, engine, and automatic
transmission control systems. When these systems are
operating properly, your vehicle will provide excellent
performance and fuel economy, as well as engine emis-
sions well within current government regulations.
If any of these systems require service, the OBD II system
will turn on the “Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL).” It
will also store diagnostic codes and other information to
assist your service technician in making repairs. Al-
though your vehicle will usually be drivable and not
need towing, see your authorized dealer for service as
soon as possible.
CAUTION!
•
Prolonged driving with the MIL on could cause
further damage to the emission control system. It
could also affect fuel economy and drivability. The
vehicle must be serviced before any emissions
tests can be performed.
•
If the MIL is flashing while the engine is running,
severe catalytic converter damage and power loss
will soon occur. Immediate service is required.
Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message
If the vehicle diagnostic system determines that the fuel
filler cap is loose, improperly installed, or damaged, a
“gASCAP” message will display in the odometer or a
“CHECK gASCAP” message will be displayed in the
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC). Refer to
444 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
“Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)” in “Un-
derstanding Your Instrument Panel” for further informa-
tion. Tighten the gas cap until a ⬙clicking⬙ sound is heard.
This is an indication that the gas cap is properly tight-
ened.
Press the odometer reset button to turn the message off.
If the problem persists, the message will appear the next
time the vehicle is started. This might indicate a damaged
cap. If the problem is detected twice in a row, the system
will turn on the MIL. Resolving the problem will turn the
MIL light off.
EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE
PROGRAMS
In some localities, it may be a legal requirement to pass
an inspection of your vehicle’s emissions control system.
Failure to pass could prevent vehicle registration.
For states that require an Inspection and Mainte-
nance (I/M), this check verifies the “Malfunction
Indicator Light (MIL)” is functioning and is not
on when the engine is running, and that the OBD II
system is ready for testing.
Normally, the OBD II system will be ready. The OBD II
system may not be ready if your vehicle was recently
serviced, recently had a dead battery or a battery replace-
ment. If the OBD II system should be determined not
ready for the I/M test, your vehicle may fail the test.
Your vehicle has a simple ignition key-actuated test,
which you can use prior to going to the test station. To
check if your vehicle’s OBD II system is ready, you must
do the following:
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position, but do not
crank or start the engine.
2. If you crank or start the engine, you will have to start
this test over.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 445
3. As soon as you turn the ignition switch to the ON
position, you will see the MIL symbol come on as part of
a normal bulb check.
4. Approximately 15 seconds later, one of two things will
happen:
a. The MIL will flash for about 10 seconds and then
return to being fully illuminated until you turn OFF
the ignition or start the engine. This means that your
vehicle’s OBD II system is not ready and you should
not proceed to the I/M station.
b. The MIL will not flash at all and will remain fully
illuminated until you turn OFF the ignition or start the
engine. This means that your vehicle’s OBD II system
is ready and you can proceed to the I/M station.
If your OBD II system is not ready, you should see your
authorized dealer or repair facility. If your vehicle was
recently serviced or had a battery failure or replacement,
you may need to do nothing more than drive your
vehicle as you normally would in order for your OBD II
system to update. A recheck with the above test routine
may then indicate that the system is now ready.
Regardless of whether your vehicle’s OBD II system is
ready or not, if the MIL is illuminated during normal
vehicle operation you should have your vehicle serviced
before going to the I/M station. The I/M station can fail
your vehicle because the MIL is on with the engine
running.
REPLACEMENT PARTS
Use of genuine MOPAR威 parts for normal/scheduled
maintenance and repairs is highly recommended to en-
sure the designed performance. Damage or failures
caused by the use of non-MOPAR威 parts for maintenance
and repairs will not be covered by the manufacturer’s
warranty.
446 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
DEALER SERVICE
Your authorized dealer has the qualified service person-
nel, special tools, and equipment to perform all service
operations in an expert manner. Service Manuals are
available which include detailed service information for
your vehicle. Refer to these Service Manuals before
attempting any procedure yourself.
NOTE: Intentional tampering with emissions control
systems may void your warranty and could result in civil
penalties being assessed against you.
WARNING!
You can be badly injured working on or around a
motor vehicle. Only do service work for which you
have the knowledge and the proper equipment. If
you have any doubt about your ability to perform a
service job, take your vehicle to a competent me-
chanic.
MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES
The pages that follow contain the required maintenance
services determined by the engineers who designed your
vehicle.
Besides those maintenance items specified in the fixed
maintenance schedule, there are other components which
may require servicing or replacement in the future.
CAUTION!
•
Failure to properly maintain your vehicle or per-
form repairs and service when necessary could
result in more costly repairs, damage to other
components or negatively impact vehicle perfor-
mance. Immediately have potential malfunctions
examined by an authorized Chrysler Group LLC
dealership or qualified repair center.
(Continued)
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 447
CAUTION! (Continued)
•
Your vehicle has been built with improved fluids
that protect the performance and durability of
your vehicle and also allow extended maintenance
intervals. Do not use chemical flushes in these
components as the chemicals can damage your
engine, transmission, power steering or air condi-
tioning. Such damage is not covered by the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty. If a flush is needed
because of component malfunction, use only the
specified fluid for the flushing procedure.
Engine Oil
Checking Oil Level
To assure proper engine lubrication, the engine oil must
be maintained at the correct level. Check the oil level at
regular intervals, such as every fuel stop. The best time to
check the engine oil level is about five minutes after a
fully warmed up engine is shut off.
Checking the oil while the vehicle is on level ground will
improve the accuracy of the oil level readings. Always
maintain the oil level within the SAFE zone on the
dipstick. Adding 1 quart (0.9 L) of oil when the reading is
at the bottom of the SAFE zone will result in a reading at
the top of the safe zone on these engines.
CAUTION!
Overfilling or underfilling the crankcase will cause
aeration or loss of oil pressure. This could damage
your engine.
Change Engine Oil
The oil change indicator system will remind you that it is
time to take your vehicle in for scheduled maintenance.
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for further informa-
tion.
448 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: Under no circumstances should oil change
intervals exceed 8,000 miles (13 000 km) or six months,
whichever occurs first.
Engine Oil Selection
For best performance and maximum protection under all
types of operating conditions, the manufacturer recom-
mends engine oils that are API Certified and meet the
requirements of Chrysler Material Standard MS-6395.
American Petroleum Institute (API) Engine Oil
Identification Symbol
This symbol means that the oil has
been certified by the American
Petroleum Institute (API). The
manufacturer only recommends
API Certified engine oils.
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your engine oil as the
chemicals can damage your engine. Such damage is
not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Engine Oil Viscosity
SAE 5W-20 engine oil is recommended for all operating
temperatures. This engine oil improves low temperature
starting and vehicle fuel economy. The engine oil filler
cap also shows the recommended engine oil viscosity for
your engine. For information on engine oil filler cap
location, refer to “Engine Compartment” in “Maintaining
Your Vehicle” for further information.
Lubricants which do not have both the engine oil certi-
fication mark and the correct SAE viscosity grade num-
ber should not be used.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 449
Synthetic Engine Oils
You may use synthetic engine oils provided the recom-
mended oil quality requirements are met, and the recom-
mended maintenance intervals for oil and filter changes
are followed.
Materials Added To Engine Oil
Do not add any supplemental additives, other than leak
detection dyes, to your engine oil. Engine oil is an
engineered product and its performance may be im-
paired by supplemental additives.
Disposing Of Used Engine Oil And Oil Filters
Care should be taken in disposing of used engine oil and
oil filters from your vehicle. Used oil and oil filters,
indiscriminately discarded, can present a problem to the
environment. Contact your authorized dealer, service
station, or governmental agency for advice on how and
where used oil and oil filters can be safely discarded in
your area.
Engine Oil Filter
The engine oil filter should be replaced with a new filter
at every engine oil change.
NOTE: For best access to the oil filter, a drive on hoist
should be used instead of a chassis hoist (3.7L Only).
Engine Oil Filter Selection
All of this manufacturer’s engines have a full-flow type
disposable oil filter. Use a filter of this type for replace-
ment. The quality of replacement filters varies consider-
ably. Only high-quality filters should be used to assure
most efficient service. MOPAR威 engine oil filters are
high-quality oil filters and are recommended.
Engine Air Cleaner Filter
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper
maintenance intervals.
NOTE: Be sure to follow the “dusty or off-road condi-
tions” maintenance interval if applicable.
450 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
The air induction system (air cleaner, hoses, etc.) can
provide a measure of protection in the case of engine
backfire. Do not remove the air induction system (air
cleaner, hoses, etc.) unless such removal is necessary
for repair or maintenance. Make sure that no one is
near the engine compartment before starting the
vehicle with the air induction system (air cleaner,
hoses, etc.) removed. Failure to do so can result in
serious personal injury.
Engine Air Cleaner Filter Selection
The quality of replacement engine air cleaner filters
varies considerably. Only high quality filters should be
used to assure most efficient service. MOPAR威 engine air
cleaner filters are a high quality filter and are
recommended.
Maintenance-Free Battery
Your vehicle is equipped with a maintenance-free battery.
You will never have to add water, nor is periodic main-
tenance required.
WARNING!
•
Battery fluid is a corrosive acid solution and can
burn or even blind you. Do not allow battery fluid
to contact your eyes, skin, or clothing. Do not lean
over a battery when attaching clamps. If acid
splashes in eyes or on skin, flush the area imme-
diately with large amounts of water. Refer to
“Jump-Starting Procedures” in “What To Do In
Emergencies” for further information.
(Continued)
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 451
WARNING! (Continued)
•
Battery gas is flammable and explosive. Keep
flame or sparks away from the battery. Do not use
a booster battery or any other booster source with
an output greater than 12 Volts. Do not allow cable
clamps to touch each other.
•
Battery posts, terminals, and related accessories
contain lead and lead compounds. Wash hands
after handling.
CAUTION!
•
It is essential when replacing the cables on the
battery that the positive cable is attached to the
positive post and the negative cable is attached to
the negative post. Battery posts are marked posi-
tive (+) and negative (-) and are identified on the
battery case. Cable clamps should be tight on the
terminal posts and free of corrosion.
•
If a “fast charger” is used while the battery is in
the vehicle, disconnect both vehicle battery cables
before connecting the charger to the battery. Do
not use a “fast charger” to provide starting voltage.
452 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Air Conditioner Maintenance
For best possible performance, your air conditioner
should be checked and serviced by an authorized dealer
at the start of each warm season. This service should
include cleaning of the condenser fins and a performance
test. Drive belt tension should also be checked at this
time.
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your air conditioning
system as the chemicals can damage your air condi-
tioning components. Such damage is not covered by
the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
WARNING!
•
Use only refrigerants and compressor lubricants
approved by the manufacturer for your air condi-
tioning system. Some unapproved refrigerants are
flammable and can explode, injuring you. Other
unapproved refrigerants or lubricants can cause
the system to fail, requiring costly repairs. Refer to
Warranty Information Book, located on the DVD,
for further warranty information.
•
The air conditioning system contains refrigerant
under high pressure. To avoid risk of personal
injury or damage to the system, adding refrigerant
or any repair requiring lines to be disconnected
should be done by an experienced technician.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 453
Refrigerant Recovery And Recycling
R-134a air conditioning refrigerant is a hydrofluoro-
carbon (HFC) that is endorsed by the Environmental
Protection Agency and is an ozone-saving product. How-
ever, the manufacturer recommends that air conditioning
service be performed by an authorized dealer or other
service facilities using recovery and recycling equipment.
NOTE: Use only manufacturer approved A/C System
Sealers, Stop Leak Products, Seal Conditioners, Compres-
sor Oil, and Refrigerants.
A/C Air Filter – If Equipped
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper
maintenance intervals.
WARNING!
Do not remove the A/C Air Filter while the blower is
operating or personal injury may result.
Body Lubrication
Locks and all body pivot points, including such items as
seat tracks, door hinge pivot points and rollers, liftgate,
tailgate, sliding doors and hood hinges, should be lubri-
cated periodically with a lithium based grease, such as
MOPAR威 Spray White Lube or equivalent, to assure
quiet, easy operation and to protect against rust and
wear. Prior to the application of any lubricant, the parts
concerned should be wiped clean to remove dust and
grit; after lubricating excess oil and grease should be
removed. Particular attention should also be given to
hood latching components to ensure proper function.
When performing other underhood services, the hood
latch, release mechanism and safety catch should be
cleaned and lubricated.
The external lock cylinders should be lubricated twice a
year, preferably in the Fall and Spring. Apply a small
454 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
amount of a high quality lubricant, such as MOPAR威
Lock Cylinder Lubricant or equivalent, directly into the
lock cylinder.
Windshield Wiper Blades
Clean the rubber edges of the wiper blades and the
windshield periodically with a sponge or soft cloth and a
mild non-abrasive cleaner or use the washer solvent. This
will remove accumulations of salt or road film.
Operation of the wipers on dry glass for long periods
may cause deterioration of the wiper blades. Always use
washer fluid when using the wipers to remove salt or dirt
from a dry windshield.
Avoid using the wiper blades to remove frost or ice from
the windshield. Keep the blade rubber out of contact with
petroleum products such as engine oil, gasoline, etc.
NOTE: Life expectancy of wiper blades varies depend-
ing on geographical area and frequency of use. Poor
performance of blades may be present with chattering,
marks, water lines or wet spots. If any of these conditions
are present, clean the wiper blades or replace as
necessary.
Adding Washer Fluid
The windshield and rear window washers share the same
fluid reservoir. The fluid reservoir is located in the front
of the engine compartment. Be sure to check the fluid
level in the reservoir at regular intervals. Fill the reservoir
with windshield washer solvent (not radiator antifreeze)
and operate the system for a few seconds to flush out the
residual water.
When refilling the washer fluid reservoir, take some
washer fluid and apply it to a cloth or towel and wipe
clean the wiper blades, this will help blade performance.
To prevent freeze-up of your windshield washer system
in cold weather, select a solution or mixture that meets or
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 455
exceeds the temperature range of your climate. This
rating information can be found on most washer fluid
containers.
WARNING!
Commercially available windshield washer solvents
are flammable. They could ignite and burn you. Care
must be exercised when filling or working around
the washer solution.
Exhaust System
The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into
the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust
system.
If you notice a change in the sound of the exhaust system;
or if the exhaust fumes can be detected inside the vehicle;
or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is damaged;
have an authorized technician inspect the complete ex-
haust system and adjacent body areas for broken, dam-
aged, deteriorated, or mispositioned parts. Open seams
or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes to seep
into the passenger compartment. In addition, inspect the
exhaust system each time the vehicle is raised for lubri-
cation or oil change. Replace as required.
WARNING!
•
Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain
carbon monoxide (CO), which is colorless and
odorless. Breathing it can make you unconscious
and can eventually poison you. To avoid breathing
CO, refer to “Safety Tips/Exhaust Gas” in “Things
To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle” for further
information.
(Continued)
456 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
•
A hot exhaust system can start a fire if you park
over materials that can burn. Such materials might
be grass or leaves coming into contact with your
exhaust system. Do not park or operate your ve-
hicle in areas where your exhaust system can
contact anything that can burn.
CAUTION!
•
The catalytic converter requires the use of un-
leaded fuel only. Leaded gasoline will destroy the
effectiveness of the catalyst as an emissions con-
trol device and may seriously reduce engine per-
formance and cause serious damage to the engine.
(Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued)
•
Damage to the catalytic converter can result if your
vehicle is not kept in proper operating condition.
In the event of engine malfunction, particularly
involving engine misfire or other apparent loss of
performance, have your vehicle serviced promptly.
Continued operation of your vehicle with a severe
malfunction could cause the converter to overheat,
resulting in possible damage to the converter and
vehicle.
Under normal operating conditions, the catalytic con-
verter will not require maintenance. However, it is im-
portant to keep the engine properly tuned to assure
proper catalyst operation and prevent possible catalyst
damage.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 457
NOTE: Intentional tampering with emissions control
systems can result in civil penalties being assessed
against you.
In unusual situations involving grossly malfunctioning
engine operation, a scorching odor may suggest severe
and abnormal catalyst overheating. If this occurs, stop
the vehicle, turn off the engine and allow it to cool.
Service, including a tune-up to manufacturer’s specifica-
tions, should be obtained immediately.
To minimize the possibility of catalytic converter dam-
age:
•
Do not shut off the engine or interrupt the ignition,
when the transmission is in gear and the vehicle is in
motion.
•
Do not try to start the engine by pushing or towing the
vehicle.
•
Do not idle the engine with any spark plug wires
disconnected or removed, such as when diagnostic
testing, or for prolonged periods during very rough
idle or malfunctioning operating conditions.
Cooling System
WARNING!
•
You or others can be badly burned by hot coolant
or steam from your radiator. If you see or hear
steam coming from under the hood, do not open
the hood until the radiator has had time to cool.
Never try to open a cooling system pressure cap
when the radiator is hot.
Engine Coolant Checks
Check the engine coolant (antifreeze) protection every
12 months (before the onset of freezing weather, where
applicable). If the engine coolant (antifreeze) is dirty or
458 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
rusty in appearance, the system should be drained,
flushed, and refilled with fresh coolant. Check the front
of the A/C condenser (if equipped) or radiator for any
accumulation of bugs, leaves, etc. If dirty, clean by gently
spraying water from a garden hose vertically down the
face of the A/C condenser (if equipped) or the back of the
radiator core.
Check the engine cooling system hoses for brittle rubber,
cracking, tears, cuts, and tightness of the connection at
the coolant recovery bottle and radiator. Inspect the
entire system for leaks.
With the engine at normal operating temperature (but
not running), check the cooling system pressure cap for
proper vacuum sealing by draining a small amount of
engine coolant (antifreeze) from the radiator drain cock.
If the cap is sealing properly, the engine coolant (anti-
freeze) will begin to drain from the coolant recovery
bottle. DO NOT REMOVE THE COOLANT PRESSURE
CAP WHEN THE COOLING SYSTEM IS HOT.
Cooling System – Drain, Flush, And Refill
If the engine coolant (antifreeze) is dirty or contains a
considerable amount of sediment, clean and flush with a
reliable cooling system cleaner. Follow with a thorough
rinsing to remove all deposits and chemicals. Properly
dispose of the old engine coolant (antifreeze).
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper
maintenance intervals.
Selection Of Engine Coolant
Use only the manufacturer’s recommended engine cool-
ant (antifreeze). Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genu-
ine Parts” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further
information.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 459
CAUTION!
•
Mixing of engine coolant (antifreeze) other than
specified HOAT engine coolant (antifreeze), may
result in engine damage and may decrease corro-
sion protection. If a non-HOAT engine coolant
(antifreeze) is introduced into the cooling system
in an emergency, it should be replaced with the
specified engine coolant (antifreeze) as soon as
possible.
•
Do not use water alone or alcohol-based engine
coolant (antifreeze) products. Do not use addi-
tional rust inhibitors or antirust products, as they
may not be compatible with the radiator engine
coolant and may plug the radiator.
•
This vehicle has not been designed for use with
Propylene Glycol based engine coolant (anti-
freeze). Use of Propylene Glycol based engine
coolant (antifreeze) is not recommended.
Adding Engine Coolant
Your vehicle has been built with an improved engine
coolant (antifreeze) that allows extended maintenance
intervals. This engine coolant (antifreeze) can be used up
to five years or 104,000 miles (169 000 km) before
replacement. To prevent reducing this extended mainte-
nance period, it is important that you use the same
engine coolant (antifreeze) throughout the life of your
vehicle.
Please review these recommendations for using Hybrid
Organic Additive Technology (HOAT) engine coolant
(antifreeze). When adding engine coolant (antifreeze):
•
The manufacturer recommends using MOPAR威
Antifreeze/Coolant 5 Year/100,000 Mile Formula
HOAT (Hybrid Organic Additive Technology) or
equivalent.
460 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
•
Mix a minimum solution of 50% HOAT engine coolant
and distilled water. Use higher concentrations (not to
exceed 70%) if temperatures below ⫺34°F (⫺37°C) are
anticipated.
•
Use only high purity water such as distilled or deion-
ized water when mixing the water/engine coolant
(antifreeze) solution. The use of lower quality water
will reduce the amount of corrosion protection in the
engine cooling system.
Please note that it is the owner’s responsibility to main-
tain the proper level of protection against freezing ac-
cording to the temperatures occurring in the area where
the vehicle is operated.
NOTE: Mixing engine coolant (antifreeze) types will
decrease the life of the engine coolant (antifreeze) and
will require more frequent coolant changes.
Cooling System Pressure Cap
The cap must be fully tightened to prevent loss of
coolant, and to ensure that coolant will return to the
radiator from the coolant recovery bottle.
The cap should be inspected and cleaned if there is any
accumulation of foreign material on the sealing surfaces.
WARNING!
•
The warning words “DO NOT OPEN HOT” on
the cooling system pressure cap are a safety pre-
caution. Never add engine coolant (antifreeze)
when the engine is overheated. Do not loosen or
remove the cap to cool an overheated engine. Heat
causes pressure to build up in the cooling system.
To prevent scalding or injury, do not remove the
pressure cap while the system is hot or under
pressure.
(Continued)
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 461
WARNING! (Continued)
•
Do not use a pressure cap other than the one
specified for your vehicle. Personal injury or en-
gine damage may result.
Disposal Of Used Engine Coolant
Used ethylene glycol based engine coolant (antifreeze) is
a regulated substance requiring proper disposal. Check
with your local authorities to determine the disposal
rules for your community. To prevent ingestion by ani-
mals or children, do not store ethylene glycol based
engine coolant (antifreeze) in open containers or allow it
to remain in puddles on the ground. If ingested by a child
or pet, seek emergency assistance immediately. Clean up
any ground spills immediately.
Engine Coolant Level
The coolant bottle provides a quick visual method for
determining that the coolant level is adequate. With the
engine idling, and warm to normal operating tempera-
ture, the level of the engine coolant (antifreeze) in the
bottle should be between the ranges indicated on the
bottle.
The radiator normally remains completely full, so there is
no need to remove the radiator cap unless checking for
coolant freeze point or replacing engine coolant (anti-
freeze). Advise your service attendant of this. As long as
the engine operating temperature is satisfactory, the
coolant bottle need only be checked once a month.
When additional engine coolant (antifreeze) is needed to
maintain the proper level, it should be added to the
coolant bottle. Do not overfill.
462 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Points To Remember
NOTE: When the vehicle is stopped after a few miles/
kilometers of operation, you may observe vapor coming
from the front of the engine compartment. This is nor-
mally a result of moisture from rain, snow, or high
humidity accumulating on the radiator and being vapor-
ized when the thermostat opens, allowing hot engine
coolant (antifreeze) to enter the radiator.
If an examination of your engine compartment shows no
evidence of radiator or hose leaks, the vehicle may be
safely driven. The vapor will soon dissipate.
•
Do not overfill the coolant bottle.
•
Check coolant freeze point in the radiator and in the
coolant recovery bottle. If engine coolant (antifreeze)
needs to be added, contents of coolant recovery bottle
must also be protected against freezing.
•
If frequent engine coolant (antifreeze) additions are
required, or if the level in the coolant recovery bottle
does not drop when the engine cools, the cooling
system should be pressure tested for leaks.
•
Maintain engine coolant (antifreeze) concentration at
50% HOAT engine coolant (antifreeze) (minimum)
and distilled water for proper corrosion protection of
your engine, which contains aluminum components.
•
Make sure that the radiator and coolant recovery
bottle hoses are not kinked or obstructed.
•
Keep the front of the radiator clean. If your vehicle is
equipped with air conditioning, keep the front of the
condenser clean.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 463
•
Do not change the thermostat for Summer or Winter
operation. If replacement is ever necessary, install
ONLY the correct type thermostat. Other designs may
result in unsatisfactory cooling performance, poor gas
mileage, and increased emissions.
Brake System
In order to assure brake system performance, all brake
system components should be inspected periodically.
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper
maintenance intervals.
WARNING!
Riding the brakes can lead to brake failure and
possibly a collision. Driving with your foot resting or
riding on the brake pedal can result in abnormally
high brake temperatures, excessive lining wear, and
possible brake damage. You would not have your full
braking capacity in an emergency.
Brake Master Cylinder
The fluid in the master cylinder should be checked when
performing under hood services or immediately if the
“Brake Warning Light” is illuminated.
Be sure to clean the top of the master cylinder area before
removing the cap. If necessary, add fluid to bring the
fluid level up to the requirements described on the brake
fluid reservoir. With disc brakes, fluid level can be
expected to fall as the brake pads wear. Brake fluid level
should be checked when pads are replaced. However,
low fluid level may be caused by a leak and a checkup
may be needed.
Use only manufacturer’s recommended brake fluid. Re-
fer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in “Main-
taining Your Vehicle” for further information.
464 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
•
Use only manufacturer’s recommended brake
fluid. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine
Parts” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further
information. Using the wrong type of brake fluid
can severely damage your brake system and/or
impair its performance. The proper type of brake
fluid for your vehicle is also identified on the
original factory installed hydraulic master cylin-
der reservoir.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
•
To avoid contamination from foreign matter or
moisture, use only new brake fluid or fluid that
has been in a tightly closed container. Keep the
master cylinder reservoir cap secured at all times.
Brake fluid in a open container absorbs moisture
from the air resulting in a lower boiling point.
This may cause it to boil unexpectedly during hard
or prolonged braking, resulting in sudden brake
failure. This could result in a collision.
•
Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir can result in
spilling brake fluid on hot engine parts, causing
the brake fluid to catch fire. Brake fluid can also
damage painted and vinyl surfaces, care should be
taken to avoid its contact with these surfaces.
(Continued)
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 465
WARNING! (Continued)
•
Do not allow petroleum based fluid to contami-
nate the brake fluid. Brake seal components could
be damaged, causing partial or complete brake
failure. This could result in a collision.
Automatic Transmission
Selection Of Lubricant
It is important that the proper lubricant is used in the
transmission to assure optimum transmission perfor-
mance. Use only manufacturer’s recommended transmis-
sion fluid. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine
Parts” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further informa-
tion. It is important that the transmission fluid be main-
tained at the prescribed level using the recommended
fluid.
CAUTION!
Using a transmission fluid other than the manufac-
turer’s recommended fluid may cause deterioration
in transmission shift quality and/or torque converter
shudder. Using a transmission fluid other than the
manufacturer’s recommended fluid will result in
more frequent fluid and filter changes. Refer to
“Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in “Main-
taining Your Vehicle” for further information.
Special Additives
The manufacturer strongly recommends against the ad-
dition of any additives to the transmission. The only
exception to this policy is the use of special dyes to aid in
detecting fluid leaks. The use of transmission sealers
should be avoided as they may adversely affect seals.
466 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your transmission as
the chemicals can damage your transmission compo-
nents. Such damage is not covered by the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Fluid Level Check
Your vehicle is equipped with a capped transmission oil
fill tube that is sealed and it should not be tampered with.
Your authorized dealer has the proper tools to ensure that
the fluid level is set properly.
CAUTION!
Using a transmission fluid other than the manufac-
turer’s recommended fluid may cause deterioration
in transmission shift quality and/or torque converter
shudder. Using a transmission fluid other than that
recommended by the manufacturer will result in
more frequent fluid and filter changes. Refer to
“Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in “Main-
taining Your Vehicle” for further information.
Fluid And Filter Changes
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper
maintenance intervals.
In addition, change the fluid and filter if the transmission
is disassembled for any reason.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 467
Transfer Case
Fluid Level Check
The fluid level should be to the bottom edge of the fill
hole (1) when the vehicle is in a level position.
Adding Fluid
Fluid should be added only to fill hole until fluid begins
to run out of the hole.
Draining Fluid
First remove the fill plug (1), then the drain plug (2).
Recommended tightening torque for the drain and fill
plugs is 15–25 ft lbs (20–34 N·m).
CAUTION!
Do not over-tighten the plugs. You could damage
them and cause a leak.
Lubricant Selection
Use only manufacturer’s recommended fluid. Refer to
“Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in “Maintaining
Your Vehicle” for further information.
1 — Fill Plug
2 — Drain Plug
468 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Frequency Of Fluid Change
Under normal operating conditions, the fluid installed at
the factory will give satisfactory lubrication for the life of
the vehicle. Fluid changes are not necessary unless the
fluid becomes contaminated with water. Change the fluid
immediately if contaminated with water.
Front/Rear Axle Fluid
For normal service, periodic fluid level checks are not
required. When the vehicle is serviced for other reasons
the exterior surfaces of the axle assembly should be
inspected. If gear oil leakage is suspected inspect the
fluid level. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine
Parts” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further informa-
tion.
Fluid Level Check
•
Front axle lubricant should be at the bottom edge of
the oil fill hole when the vehicle is in a level position.
•
Rear axle lubricant should be 0.5 in (11 mm) below the
bottom edge of the oil fill hole when the vehicle is in a
level position.
Adding Fluid
Add lubricant only at the fill hole and only to the level
specified above.
Lubricant Selection
Use only manufacturer’s recommended lubricant. Refer
to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in “Maintain-
ing Your Vehicle” for further information.
Frequency Of Fluid Change
Under normal operating conditions, the lubricant in-
stalled at the factory will give satisfactory lubrication for
the life of the vehicle. Lubricant changes are not neces-
sary unless the lubricant becomes contaminated with
water. Change the lubricant immediately if contaminated
with water.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 469
Sky Slider™ Top Care
Immediate removal of any contaminant is recommended.
Regular washing of the top will enhance its life and
appearance, and make successive cleaning easier. Do not
subject the top to excessive heat. Frequently vacuum the
top and tracks. Periodically wipe dust and dirt from the
top and inside of the tracks by hand with an alcohol
dampened cloth.
Washing
Hand washing or an automatic car wash with a soft cloth
system is preferred.
CAUTION!
Avoid pointing a high-pressure hand held spray
wand directly at the sides of the top, as this can
damage the seal and force water past the weather
strips.
General Cleaning
Careful vacuuming of the top before washing is helpful
in removing dust and other foreign particles.
If Hand Washing:
•
Wash in partial shade instead of direct sun.
•
Wet the entire vehicle before washing the top.
•
Wash the top with a soft, natural bristle scrub brush,
and a mild soap solution such as liquid dish washing
soap. Do not use detergent.
•
Scrub in all directions, covering an area of about two
square feet at a time. Avoid heavy scrubbing.
•
Rinse the entire vehicle with water to remove all soap
and dirt from the top fabric and to prevent streaking
on painted and chrome surfaces.
470 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
•
Allow the top to dry before opening. Vacuuming the
top with a wet/dry shop vacuum will decrease the
tops drying time, ensure removal of all dirt, and delete
streaks in the material.
•
Multiple cleanings may be necessary to remove stub-
born stains. If stains persist, contact your local autho-
rized dealership for further suggestions.
CAUTION!
Never use an abrasive type cleaner or bleaches.
Cleaners should not contain silicones, organic sol-
vents, petroleum distillates, or plasticizers. Always
wait until the top is thoroughly dry before opening
it.
Additional Cleaning Procedure
For additional cleaning assistance in removing stubborn
stains, apply MOPAR威 Convertible Cloth Top Cleaner or
equivalent to the complete stain, extending 2 in (50 mm)
beyond the stain. With a soft bristle brush, scrub in all
directions over the stain. Avoid heavy scrubbing. Rinse
the area with warm water. If the stain is still apparent,
repeat the cleaning procedure. When the stain is no
longer showing, rinse the complete top with warm water.
Let the top dry before opening it.
Protection
For appearance purposes, you may wish to protect the
acrylic (cloth) top periodically. A fabric protectant such as
Scotchguard威 is suggested. The top should be clean and
dry before application of the protectant.
CAUTION!
Avoid getting Scotchguard威 on the surrounding
weather strips, moldings, paint, or glass. Damage to
these items might occur.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 471
Weather Strip Care
Lubricate the weather strips periodically with MOPAR威
Weather Strip Lubricant or equivalent, to keep them soft
and pliable.
Appearance Care And Protection From Corrosion
Protection Of Body And Paint From Corrosion
Vehicle body care requirements vary according to geo-
graphic locations and usage. Chemicals that make roads
passable in snow and ice and those that are sprayed on
trees and road surfaces during other seasons are highly
corrosive to the metal in your vehicle. Outside parking,
which exposes your vehicle to airborne contaminants,
road surfaces on which the vehicle is operated, extreme
hot or cold weather and other extreme conditions will
have an adverse effect on paint, metal trim, and under-
body protection.
The following maintenance recommendations will enable
you to obtain maximum benefit from the corrosion
resistance built into your vehicle.
What Causes Corrosion?
Corrosion is the result of deterioration or removal of
paint and protective coatings from your vehicle.
The most common causes are:
•
Road salt, dirt, and moisture accumulation.
•
Stone and gravel impact.
•
Insects, tree sap, and tar.
•
Salt in the air near seacoast localities.
•
Atmospheric fallout/industrial pollutants.
472 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Washing
•
Wash your vehicle regularly. Always wash your ve-
hicle in the shade using MOPAR威 Car Wash or equiva-
lent, or a mild car wash soap, and rinse the panels
completely with clear water.
•
If insects, tar, or other similar deposits have accumu-
lated on your vehicle, use MOPAR威 Super Kleen Bug
and Tar Remover or equivalent to remove.
•
Use a high quality cleaner wax, such as MOPAR威
Cleaner Wax or equivalent, to remove road film, stains,
and to protect your paint finish. Take care never to
scratch the paint.
•
Avoid using abrasive compounds and power buffing
that may diminish the gloss or thin out the paint
finish.
CAUTION!
•
Do not use abrasive or strong cleaning materials
such as steel wool or scouring powder, which will
scratch metal and painted surfaces.
•
Use of power washers exceeding 1,200 psi
(8 274 kPa) can result in damage or removal of
paint and decals.
Special Care
•
If you drive on salted or dusty roads or if you drive
near the ocean, hose off the undercarriage at least once
a month.
•
It is important that the drain holes in the lower edges
of the doors, rocker panels, and tailgate must be kept
clear and open.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 473
•
If you detect any stone chips or scratches in the paint,
touch them up immediately. The cost of such repairs is
considered the responsibility of the owner.
•
If your vehicle is damaged due to a collision or similar
cause, which destroys the paint and protective coating,
have your vehicle repaired as soon as possible. The
cost of such repairs is considered the responsibility of
the owner.
•
If you carry special cargo such as chemicals, fertilizers,
de-icer salt, etc., assure that such materials are well
packaged and sealed.
•
If a lot of driving is done on gravel roads, consider
mud or stone shields behind each wheel.
•
Use MOPAR威 Touch Up Paint or equivalent on
scratches or chips as soon as possible. Your authorized
dealer has touch up paint to match the color of your
vehicle.
Wheel And Wheel Trim Care
All wheels and wheel trim, especially aluminum and
chrome-plated wheels should be cleaned regularly with
mild soap and water to prevent corrosion. To remove heavy
soil and/or excessive brake dust, use MOPAR威 Wheel
Cleaner or equivalent, or select a nonabrasive, non-acidic
cleaner. Do not use scouring pads, steel wool, a bristle
brush, or metal polishes. Only MOPAR威 cleaners or equiva-
lent are recommended. Do not use oven cleaner. Avoid
automatic car washes that use acidic solutions or harsh
brushes that may damage the wheels’ protective finish.
Stain Repel Fabric Cleaning Procedure – If
Equipped
Stain Repel seats may be cleaned in the following man-
ner:
•
Remove as much of the stain as possible by blotting
with a clean, dry towel.
•
Blot any remaining stain with a clean, damp towel.
474 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
•
For tough stains, apply MOPAR威 Total Clean or
equivalent, or a mild soap solution to a clean, damp
cloth and remove the stain. Use a fresh, damp towel to
remove soap residue.
•
For grease stains, apply MOPAR威 Multi-Purpose
Cleaner or equivalent to a clean, damp cloth and
remove the stain. Use a fresh, damp towel to remove
soap residue.
•
Do not use any harsh solvents or any other form of
protectants on Stain Repel products.
Interior Care
Instrument Panel Cover
The instrument panel cover has a low glare surface,
which minimizes reflections in the windshield. Do not
use protectants or other products, which may cause
undesirable reflections. Use soap and warm water to
restore the low glare surface.
Cleaning Interior Trim
Clean interior trim with a damp cloth and MOPAR威 Total
Clean or equivalent, and if necessary, follow with
MOPAR威 Spot & Stain Remover or equivalent. Do not
use harsh cleaners or Armor All威. Use MOPAR威 Total
Clean or equivalent to clean vinyl upholstery.
Cleaning Leather Upholstery
MOPAR威 Total Clean or equivalent is specifically recom-
mended for leather upholstery.
Your leather upholstery can be best preserved by regular
cleaning with a damp soft cloth. Small particles of dirt
can act as an abrasive and damage the leather upholstery
and should be removed promptly with a damp cloth.
Stubborn soils can be removed easily with a soft cloth
and MOPAR威 Total Clean or equivalent. Care should be
taken to avoid soaking leather upholstery with any
liquid. Please do not use polishes, oils, cleaning fluids,
solvents, detergents, or ammonia-based cleaners to clean
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 475
leather upholstery. Application of a leather conditioner is
not required to maintain the original condition.
WARNING!
Do not use volatile solvents for cleaning purposes.
Many are potentially flammable, and if used in
closed areas they may cause respiratory harm.
Cleaning Headlights
Your vehicle has plastic headlights that are lighter and
less susceptible to stone breakage than glass headlights.
Plastic is not as scratch resistant as glass and therefore
different lens cleaning procedures must be followed.
To minimize the possibility of scratching the lenses and
reducing light output, avoid wiping with a dry cloth. To
remove road dirt, wash with a mild soap solution fol-
lowed by rinsing.
Do not use abrasive cleaning components, solvents, steel
wool or other aggressive material to clean the lenses.
Glass Surfaces
All glass surfaces should be cleaned on a regular basis
with MOPAR威 Glass Cleaner or any commercial
household-type glass cleaner. Never use an abrasive type
cleaner. Use caution when cleaning the inside rear win-
dow equipped with electric defrosters or the right rear
quarter window equipped with the radio antenna. Do
not use scrapers or other sharp instruments, which may
scratch the elements.
476 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
When cleaning the rear view mirror, spray cleaner on the
towel or rag that you are using. Do not spray cleaner
directly on the mirror.
Cleaning Plastic Instrument Cluster Lenses
The lenses in front of the instruments in this vehicle are
molded in clear plastic. When cleaning the lenses, care
must be taken to avoid scratching the plastic.
1. Clean with a wet soft rag. A mild soap solution may be
used, but do not use high alcohol content or abrasive
cleaners. If soap is used, wipe clean with a clean damp
rag.
2. Dry with a soft cloth.
Seat Belt Maintenance
Do not bleach, dye, or clean the seat belts with chemical
solvents or abrasive cleaners. This will weaken the fabric.
Sun damage can also weaken the fabric.
If the seat belts need cleaning, use a mild soap solution or
lukewarm water. Dry with a soft cloth. Do not remove the
seat belts from the car to wash them. Dry with a soft
cloth.
Replace the seat belts if they appear frayed or worn or if
the buckles do not work properly.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 477
FUSES
Totally Integrated Power Module
The Totally Integrated Power Module is located in the
engine compartment near the battery. This center contains
cartridge fuses, mini-fuses and relays. A label that identi-
fies each component is printed on the inside of the cover.
Cavity Cartridge
Fuse
Mini-
Fuse
Description
J1 — — —
J2 30 Amp
Pink
— Transfer Case Module
– If Equipped
J3 — — —
J4 25 Amp
Natural
— Driver Door Node
J5 25 Amp
Natural
— Passenger Door Node
J6 40 Amp
Green
— Antilock Brakes
Pump/Stability Control
System – If Equipped
J7 30 Amp
Pink
— Antilock Brakes Valve/
Stability Control Sys-
tem – If Equipped
Totally Integrated Power Module
478 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Cavity Cartridge
Fuse
Mini-
Fuse
Description
J8 40 Amp
Green
— Power Seats – If
Equipped
J9 — — —
J10 — — —
J11 30 Amp
Pink
— Thatchm Lock/Unlock
– If Equipped
J13 60 Amp
Yellow
— Ignition Off Draw
J14 40 Amp
Green
— Rear Defroster – If
Equipped
J15 40 Amp
Green
— Front Blower
J17 40 Amp
Green
— Starter Solenoid
J18 20 Amp
Blue
— Powertrain Control
Module
Cavity Cartridge
Fuse
Mini-
Fuse
Description
J19 60 Amp
Yellow
— Radiator Fan
J20 30 Amp
Pink
— Front Wiper
J21 20 Amp
Blue
— Front Washer/Rear
Washer – If Equipped
J22 25 Amp
Natural
— Sunroof Module – If
Equipped
M1 — 15 Amp
Blue
Stop Light Switch Feed
— Rear Center Brake
Lamp
M2 — 20 Amp
Yellow
Trailer Lighting – If
Equipped
M3 — 20 Amp
Yellow
Frt/Rr Axle Lockers –
If Equipped
M4 — 10 Amp
Red
Trailer Tow – If
Equipped
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 479
Cavity Cartridge
Fuse
Mini-
Fuse
Description
M5 — 25 Amp
Natural
Power Inverter – If
Equipped
M6 — 20 Amp
Yellow
Rain Sensor – If
Equipped
M7 — 20 Amp
Yellow
Cigar Lighter
M8 — 20 Amp
Yellow
Front Heated Seats – If
Equipped
M9 — — —
M10 — 15 Amp
Blue
Ignition Off Draw -
Vehicle Entertainment
System, Satellite Digital
Receiver, DVD, Hands
Free Module, Radio,
Antenna,Universal Ga-
rage Door Opener – If
Equipped/Vanity Light
Cavity Cartridge
Fuse
Mini-
Fuse
Description
M11 — 10 Amp
Red
Climate Control Sys-
tem – If Equipped
M12 — 30 Amp
Green
Radio/Amplifier – If
Equipped
M13 — 20 Amp
Yellow
Instrument Cluster/
Wireless Control
Module/Multifunction
Control Switch, Siren –
If Equipped
M14 — 20 Amp
Yellow
Trailer Tow (Export
Only) – If Equipped
M15 — 20 Amp
Yellow
Instrument Cluster/
Rear View Mirror/Tire
Pressure Monitor/
Transfer Case Module
– If Equipped/Glow
Plugs – If Equipped
480 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Cavity Cartridge
Fuse
Mini-
Fuse
Description
M16 — 10 Amp
Red
Airbag Module
M17 — 15 Amp
Blue
Exterior Lighting – Left
Front Park and Side
Marker, Left Tail and
Running, License
Lights
M18 — 15 Amp
Blue
Exterior Lighting –
Right Front Park and
Side Marker, Right Tail
and Running Lights
M19 — 25 Amp
Natural
Automatic Shutdown
#1 and #2
Cavity Cartridge
Fuse
Mini-
Fuse
Description
M20 — 15 Amp
Blue
Interior Lighting/
Steering Wheel
Switches – If
Equipped/Switch
Bank/Steering Column
Module – If Equipped
M21 — 20 Amp
Yellow
Automatic Shutdown
#3
M22 — 10 Amp
Red
Right Horn (Hi/Low)
M23 — 10 Amp
Red
Left Horn (Hi/Low)
M24 — 25 Amp
Natural
Rear Wiper – If
Equipped
M25 — 20 Amp
Yellow
Fuel Pump, Diesel Lift
Pump – If Equipped
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 481
Cavity Cartridge
Fuse
Mini-
Fuse
Description
M26 — 10 Amp
Red
Power Mirror Switch/
Driver Window Switch
M27 — 10 Amp
Red
Ignition Switch/
Wireless Control
Module/Steering Col-
umn Lock – If
Equipped
M28 — 10 Amp
Red
Powertrain Control
Module
M29 — 10 Amp
Red
Occupant Classification
Module
M30 — 15 Amp
Blue
Rear Wiper Module –
If Equipped/Power
Folding Mirror – If
Equipped/Diagnostic
Link
Cavity Cartridge
Fuse
Mini-
Fuse
Description
M31 — 20 Amp
Yellow
Back-Up Lights
M32 — 10 Amp
Red
Airbag Module
M33 — 10 Amp
Red
Powertrain Control
Module
M34 — 10 Amp
Red
Park Assist Module – If
Equipped/Climate
Control System Mod-
ule – If Equipped/
Compass Module – If
Equipped/Cabin
Heater – If Equipped/
Diesel Rad Fan – If
Equipped
M35 — 10 Amp
Red
Heated Mirrors – If
Equipped
482 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Cavity Cartridge
Fuse
Mini-
Fuse
Description
M36 — — —
M37 — 10 Amp
Red
Antilock Brakes/
Stability Control Sys-
tem Module/Stop
Light Switch/Fuel
Pump Relay
M38 — 25 Amp
Natural
Door and Liftgate
Lock/Unlock Motors
CAUTION!
•
When installing the Integrated Power Module
cover, it is important to ensure the cover is prop-
erly positioned and fully latched. Failure to do so
may allow water to get into the Integrated Power
Module, and possibly result in an electrical system
failure.
•
When replacing a blown fuse, it is important to
use only a fuse having the correct amperage rating.
The use of a fuse with a rating other than indicated
may result in a dangerous electrical system over-
load. If a properly rated fuse continues to blow, it
indicates a problem in the circuit that must be
corrected.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 483
REPLACEMENT BULBS
LIGHT BULBS – Interior Bulb No.
Cargo Lamp.........................TL212–2
Overhead Console Lamp .............PLW214–2A
Reading Lamp ......................WL212–2
LIGHT BULBS – Exterior Bulb No.
Headlamp .........................9008 H13
Front Park/Turn Signal Lamp............. 3757AK
Front Side Marker Lamp ................... 168
Back-Up Lamp ........................3157K
Center High Mounted Stop Lamp (CHMSL) .....LED
(serviced at an authorized dealer)
Fog Lamp..........................H109145
License Plate Lamp .......................168
Rear Tail/Stop.........................3157K
Rear Turn Signal Lamp ................. 3757AK
BULB REPLACEMENT
Headlamp
1. Open the hood.
2. Reach behind the headlamp housing to access the
headlamp bulb lock ring.
3. Firmly grasp the lock ring and rotate it counterclock-
wise to unlock it.
4. Remove the bulb and connector assembly from the
headlamp housing.
5. Disconnect the bulb from the electrical connector and
then connect the replacement bulb.
484 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION!
Do not touch the new bulb with your fingers. Oil
contamination will severely shorten bulb life. If the
bulb comes in contact with any oily surface, clean the
bulb with rubbing alcohol.
6. Install the bulb and connector assembly into the
headlamp housing and rotate the lock ring clockwise to
lock it in place.
7. Close the hood.
Front Turn Signal And Front Side Marker Lamp
1. Turn the steering wheel all the way to the right to
access the left front turn signal or side marker. Turn the
steering wheel all the way to the left to access the right
front turn signal or side marker.
2. Remove three push-pins from the wheel-well liner.
3. Gently flex the wheel-well liner forward to access the
bulb.
4. Rotate the bulb’s socket counterclockwise, and remove
the bulb and socket assembly from the housing.
5. Pull the bulb out of the socket and insert the replace-
ment bulb.
6. Install the bulb and socket assembly into the housing,
and rotate the socket clockwise to lock it in place.
7. Reposition the wheel-well liner and install the
push-pins.
Front Fog Lamp
1. Open the hood.
2. Reach behind the headlamp housing to access the
bulb.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 485
3. Rotate the bulb’s socket counterclockwise, and remove
the bulb and socket assembly from the fog lamp housing.
4. Pull the bulb out of the socket and insert the replace-
ment bulb.
CAUTION!
Do not touch the new bulb with your fingers. Oil
contamination will severely shorten bulb life. If the
bulb comes in contact with any oily surface, clean the
bulb with rubbing alcohol.
5. Install the bulb and socket assembly into the into the
fog lamp housing, and rotate the connector clockwise to
lock it in place.
6. Close the hood.
Rear Tail/Stop, Turn Signal, And Back-Up Lamp
1. Open the liftgate.
2. Remove the screws that fasten the taillamp housing to
the vehicle.
3. Pull the taillamp housing straight back to separate it
from the vehicle.
4. Disconnect the electrical connector.
5. Remove the two screws that fasten the back plate to
the taillamp housing.
6. Separate the back plate from the taillamp housing.
7. Pull the appropriate bulb(s) out of the back plate and
insert the replacement bulb(s).
8. Install the back plate and screws into the taillamp
housing.
9. Connect the electrical connector.
10. Install the taillamp housing and screws.
11. Close the liftgate.
486 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
FLUID CAPACITIES
U.S. Metric
Fuel (Approximate) 19.5 Gallons 73.8 Liters
Engine Oil with Filter
3.7 Liter Engine (SAE 5W-20, API Certified) 5 Quarts 4.7 Liters
Cooling System *
3.7 Liter Engine (MOPAR威 Antifreeze/Engine Coolant 5
Year/100,000 Mile Formula or equivalent)
14 Quarts 13.3 Liters
* Includes heater and coolant recovery bottle filled to MAX level.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 487
FLUIDS, LUBRICANTS, AND GENUINE PARTS
Engine
Component Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
Engine Coolant MOPAR威 Antifreeze/Coolant 5 Year/100,000 Mile Formula HOAT (Hy-
brid Organic Additive Technology) or equivalent.
Engine Oil Use API Certified SAE 5W-20 Engine Oil, meeting the requirements of
Chrysler Material Standard MS-6395. Refer to your engine oil filler cap for
correct SAE grade.
Engine Oil Filter MOPAR威 Engine Oil Filter or equivalent.
Spark Plugs ZFR6F-11G (Gap 0.043 in [1.1 mm])
Fuel Selection 87 Octane
488 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Chassis
Component Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
Automatic Transmission MOPAR威 ATF+4威 Automatic Transmission Fluid or equivalent licensed
ATF+4威 product.
Transfer Case MOPAR威 ATF+4威 Automatic Transmission Fluid or equivalent licensed
ATF+4威 product.
Front Axle SAE 80W-90 Multi-Purpose Type, GL-5 Gear Lubricant or equivalent.
Rear Axle SAE 75W-90 Gear Lubricant or equivalent.
Brake Master Cylinder MOPAR威 DOT 3 Brake Fluid, SAE J1703 should be used. If DOT 3, SAE
J1703 brake fluid is not available, then DOT 4 is acceptable. Use only rec-
ommended brake fluids.
Power Steering Reservoir MOPAR威 Power Steering Fluid +4, MOPAR威 ATF+4威 Automatic Trans-
mission Fluid or equivalent licensed ATF+4威 product.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 489
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE
The Scheduled Maintenance services listed in this
manual must be done at the times or mileages specified
to protect your vehicle warranty and ensure the best
vehicle performance and reliability. More frequent main-
tenance may be needed for vehicles in severe operating
conditions, such as dusty areas and very short trip
driving. Inspection and service should also be done
anytime a malfunction is suspected.
The oil change indicator system will remind you that it is
time to take your vehicle in for scheduled maintenance.
On Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)
equipped vehicles “Oil Change Required” will be dis-
played in the EVIC and a single chime will sound,
indicating that an oil change is necessary.
On Non-EVIC equipped vehicles “Change Oil” will flash
in the instrument cluster odometer and a single chime
will sound, indicating that an oil change is necessary.
Based on engine operation conditions the oil change
indicator message will illuminate, this means that service
is required for your vehicle. Have your vehicle serviced
as soon as possible, within the next 500 miles (805 km).
8
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
492 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
NOTE:
•
The oil change indicator message will not monitor the
time since the last oil change. Change your vehicles oil
if it has been six months since your last oil change even
if the oil change indicator message is NOT illumi-
nated.
•
Change your engine oil more often if you drive your
vehicle off-road for an extended period of time.
•
Under no circumstances should oil change intervals
exceed 8,000 miles (13 000 km) or six months, which-
ever comes first.
Your authorized dealer will reset the oil change indicator
message after completing the scheduled oil change. If a
scheduled oil change is performed by someone other
than your authorized dealer, the message can be reset by
referring to the steps described under “Electronic Vehicle
Information Center (EVIC)/Oil Change Required” in
“Understanding Your Instrument Panel” or under “In-
strument Cluster Description/Odometer/Trip Odom-
eter” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for
further information.
At Each Stop For Fuel
•
Check the engine oil level about five minutes after a
fully warmed engine is shut off. Checking the oil level
while the vehicle is on level ground will improve the
accuracy of the oil level reading. Add oil only when
the level is at or below the ADD or MIN mark.
•
Check the windshield washer solvent and add if
required.
8
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 493
Once A Month
•
Check tire pressure and look for unusual wear or
damage.
•
Inspect the battery and clean and tighten the terminals
as required.
•
Check the fluid levels of the coolant reservoir and the
brake master cylinder, add as needed.
•
Check all lights and other electrical items for correct
operation.
At Each Oil Change
•
Change the engine oil filter.
•
Inspect the brake hoses and lines.
CAUTION!
•
Failure to perform the required maintenance items
may result in damage to the vehicle.
•
Proper operation of four-wheel drive vehicles de-
pends on tires of equal size, type and circumfer-
ence on each wheel. Any difference in tire size can
cause damage to the transfer case. Tire rotation
schedule should be followed to balance tire wear.
Required Maintenance Intervals
Refer to the Maintenance Schedules on the following
pages for the required maintenance intervals.
8
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
494 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
8,000 Miles (13,000 km) or
6 Months Maintenance Service
Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil
filter.
❏ Rotate the tires, rotate at the first sign of
irregular wear, even if it occurs before
8,000 miles (13 000 km).
Odometer Reading Date
Repair Order # Dealer Code
Signature, Authorized Service Center
16,000 Miles (26,000 km) or 12 Months Maintenance Service
Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.
❏ Rotate the tires, rotate at the first sign of irregular wear, even if it occurs before
16,000 miles (26 000 km).
❏ Replace the air conditioning filter.
❏ If using your vehicle for any of the following: Dusty or off-road conditions. Inspect the
engine air cleaner filter; replace if necessary.
❏ Inspect the brake linings, replace if necessary.
❏ Inspect exhaust system. Perform the first inspection at 16,000 miles (26 000 km) or
12 months.
❏ Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for
damage, wear, improper looseness or end play; replace if necessary.
Odometer Reading Date
Repair Order # Dealer Code
Signature, Authorized Service Center
8
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 495
24,000 Miles (39,000 km) or
18 Months Maintenance
Service Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil
filter.
❏ Rotate the tires, rotate at the first sign of
irregular wear, even if it occurs before
24,000 miles (39 000 km).
❏ Inspect the CV joints.
❏ Inspect exhaust system.
❏ Inspect the front and rear axle fluid,
change if using your vehicle for police,
taxi, fleet, off-road or frequent trailer
towing.
Odometer Reading Date
Repair Order # Dealer Code
Signature, Authorized Service Center
32,000 Miles (52,000 km) or 24 Months Maintenance Service
Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.
❏ Rotate the tires, rotate at the first sign of irregular wear, even if it occurs before
32,000 miles (52 000 km).
❏ Replace the air conditioning filter.
❏ Replace the engine air cleaner filter.
❏ Replace the spark plugs (3.7L Engine).
❏ Adjust parking brake on vehicles equipped with four-wheel disc brakes.
❏ Inspect the transfer case fluid.
❏ Inspect the brake linings, replace if necessary.
❏ Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for
damage, wear, improper looseness or end play; replace if necessary.
Odometer Reading Date
Repair Order # Dealer Code
Signature, Authorized Service Center
8
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
496 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
40,000 Miles (65,000 km) or
30 Months Maintenance
Service Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil
filter.
❏ Rotate the tires, rotate at the first sign of
irregular wear, even if it occurs before
40,000 miles (65 000 km).
Odometer Reading Date
Repair Order # Dealer Code
Signature, Authorized Service Center
48,000 Miles (78,000 km) or 36 Months Maintenance Service
Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.
❏ Rotate the tires, rotate at the first sign of irregular wear, even if it occurs before
48,000 miles (78 000 km).
❏ Replace the air conditioning filter.
❏ If using your vehicle for any of the following: Dusty or off-road conditions. Inspect the
engine air cleaner filter; replace if necessary.
❏ Inspect the brake linings, replace if necessary.
❏ Inspect the CV joints.
❏ Inspect exhaust system.
❏ Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for
damage, wear, improper looseness or end play; replace if necessary.
❏ Inspect the front and rear axle fluid, change if using your vehicle for police, taxi, fleet,
off-road or frequent trailer towing.
Odometer Reading Date
Repair Order # Dealer Code
Signature, Authorized Service Center
8
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 497
56,000 Miles (91,000 km) or
42 Months Maintenance
Service Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil
filter.
❏ Rotate the tires, rotate at the first sign of
irregular wear, even if it occurs before
56,000 miles (91 000 km).
Odometer Reading Date
Repair Order # Dealer Code
Signature, Authorized Service Center
64,000 Miles (104,000 km) or 48 Months Maintenance Service
Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.
❏ Rotate the tires, rotate at the first sign of irregular wear, even if it occurs before
64,000 miles (104 000 km).
❏ Replace the air conditioning filter.
❏ Replace the engine air cleaner filter.
❏ Replace the ignition cables (3.7L Engine).
❏ Replace the spark plugs (3.7L Engine).
❏ Adjust parking brake on vehicles equipped with four-wheel disc brakes.
❏ Inspect the brake linings; replace if necessary.
❏ Change the automatic transmission fluid and filter(s) if using your vehicle for any of the
following: police, taxi, fleet, or frequent trailer towing.
❏ Change the transfer case fluid if using your vehicle for any of the following: police, taxi,
fleet, or frequent trailer towing.
❏ Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for
damage, wear, improper looseness or end play; replace if necessary.
Odometer Reading Date
Repair Order # Dealer Code
Signature, Authorized Service Center
8
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
498 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
72,000 Miles (117,000 km) or
54 Months Maintenance
Service Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil
filter.
❏ Rotate the tires, rotate at the first sign of
irregular wear, even if it occurs before
72,000 miles (117 000 km).
❏ Inspect the CV joints.
❏ Inspect exhaust system.
❏ Inspect the front and rear axle fluid,
change if using your vehicle for police,
taxi, fleet, off-road or frequent trailer
towing.
Odometer Reading Date
Repair Order # Dealer Code
Signature, Authorized Service Center
80,000 Miles (130,000 km) or 60 Months Maintenance Service
Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.
❏ Rotate the tires, rotate at the first sign of irregular wear, even if it occurs before
80,000 miles (130 000 km).
❏ Replace the air conditioning filter.
❏ If using your vehicle for any of the following: Dusty or off-road conditions. Inspect the
engine air cleaner filter; replace if necessary.
❏ Flush and replace the engine coolant at 60 months or 104,000 miles (169 000 km)
whichever comes first.
❏ Inspect the brake linings, replace if necessary.
❏ Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for
damage, wear, improper looseness or end play; replace if necessary.
Odometer Reading Date
Repair Order # Dealer Code
Signature, Authorized Service Center
8
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 499
88,000 Miles (143,000 km) or
66 Months Maintenance
Service Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil
filter.
❏ Rotate the tires, rotate at the first sign of
irregular wear, even if it occurs before
88,000 miles (143 000 km).
Odometer Reading Date
Repair Order # Dealer Code
Signature, Authorized Service Center
8
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
500 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
96,000 Miles (156,000 km) or 72 Months Maintenance Service Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.
❏ Rotate the tires, rotate at the first sign of irregular wear, even if it occurs before 96,000 miles (156 000 km).
❏ Replace the air conditioning filter.
❏ Replace the engine air cleaner filter.
❏ Replace the spark plugs (3.7L Engine).
❏ Inspect and replace PCV valve if necessary.†
❏ Adjust parking brake on vehicles equipped with four-wheel disc brakes.
❏ Inspect the transfer case fluid.
❏ Inspect the brake linings, replace if necessary.
❏ Inspect the CV joints.
❏ Inspect exhaust system.
❏ Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for damage, wear, improper looseness or end play;
replace if necessary.
❏ Inspect the front and rear axle fluid, change if using your vehicle for police, taxi, fleet, off-road or frequent trailer towing.
Odometer Reading Date
Repair Order # Dealer Code
Signature, Authorized Service Center
8
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 501
104,000 Miles (169,000 km) or
78 Months Maintenance
Service Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil
filter.
❏ Rotate the tires, rotate at the first sign of
irregular wear, even if it occurs before
104,000 miles (169 000 km).
❏ Flush and replace the engine coolant at
104,000 miles (169 000 km) or 60 months
whichever comes first.
Odometer Reading Date
Repair Order # Dealer Code
Signature, Authorized Service Center
112,000 Miles (182,000 km) or 84 Months Maintenance Service
Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.
❏ Rotate the tires, rotate at the first sign of irregular wear, even if it occurs before
112,000 miles (182 000 km).
❏ Replace the air conditioning filter.
❏ If using your vehicle for any of the following: Dusty or off-road conditions. Inspect the
engine air cleaner filter; replace if necessary.
❏ Inspect the brake linings, replace if necessary.
❏ Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for
damage, wear, improper looseness or end play; replace if necessary.
Odometer Reading Date
Repair Order # Dealer Code
Signature, Authorized Service Center
8
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
502 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
120,000 Miles (195,000 km) or 90 Months Maintenance Service
Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.
❏ Rotate the tires, rotate at the first sign of irregular wear, even if it occurs before
120,000 miles (195 000 km).
❏ Inspect the CV joints.
❏ Inspect exhaust system.
❏ Inspect the front and rear axle fluid, change if using your vehicle for police, taxi, fleet,
off-road or frequent trailer towing.
❏ Change the automatic transmission fluid and filter(s).
❏ Replace the accessory drive belt(s).
Odometer Reading Date
Repair Order # Dealer Code
Signature, Authorized Service Center
8
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 503
128,000 Miles (208,000 km) or 96 Months Maintenance Service
Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.
❏ Rotate the tires, rotate at the first sign of irregular wear, even if it occurs before
128,000 miles (208 000 km).
❏ Replace the air conditioning filter.
❏ Replace the engine air cleaner filter.
❏ Replace the ignition cables (3.7L Engine).
❏ Replace the spark plugs (3.7L Engine).
❏ Adjust parking brake on vehicles equipped with four-wheel disc brakes.
❏ Change the transfer case fluid if using your vehicle for any of the following: police, taxi,
fleet, or frequent trailer towing.
❏ Inspect the brake linings, replace if necessary.
❏ Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for
damage, wear, improper looseness or end play; replace if necessary.
Odometer Reading Date
Repair Order # Dealer Code
Signature, Authorized Service Center
136,000 Miles (221,000 km) or
102 Months Maintenance
Service Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil
filter.
❏ Rotate the tires, rotate at the first sign of
irregular wear, even if it occurs before
136,000 miles (221 000 km).
Odometer Reading Date
Repair Order # Dealer Code
Signature, Authorized Service Center
8
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
504 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
144,000 Miles (234,000 km) or 108 Months Maintenance Service
Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.
❏ Rotate the tires, rotate at the first sign of irregular wear, even if it occurs before
144,000 miles (234 000 km).
❏ Replace the air conditioning filter.
❏ If using your vehicle for any of the following: Dusty or off-road conditions. Inspect the
engine air cleaner filter; replace if necessary.
❏ Inspect the brake linings, replace if necessary.
❏ Inspect the CV joints.
❏ Inspect exhaust system.
❏ Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for
damage, wear, improper looseness or end play; replace if necessary.
❏ Inspect the front and rear axle fluid, change if using your vehicle for police, taxi, fleet,
off-road or frequent trailer towing.
Odometer Reading Date
Repair Order # Dealer Code
Signature, Authorized Service Center
152,000 Miles (247,000 km) or
114 Months Maintenance
Service Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil
filter.
❏ Rotate the tires, rotate at the first sign of
irregular wear, even if it occurs before
152,000 miles (247 000 km).
Odometer Reading Date
Repair Order # Dealer Code
Signature, Authorized Service Center
8
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 505
† This maintenance is recommended by the manufacturer
to the owner, but is not required to maintain emissions
warranty.
WARNING!
•
You can be badly injured working on or around a
motor vehicle. Do only service work for which you
have the knowledge and the right equipment. If
you have any doubt about your ability to perform
a service job, take your vehicle to a competent
mechanic.
•
Failure to properly inspect and maintain your
vehicle could result in a component malfunction
and effect vehicle handling and performance. This
could cause an accident.
8
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
506 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
CONTENTS
䡵 Suggestions For Obtaining Service For Your
Vehicle.............................. 509
▫ Prepare For The Appointment ........... 509
▫ Prepare A List ...................... 509
▫ Be Reasonable With Requests ............ 509
䡵 If You Need Assistance ................. 509
▫ Chrysler Group LLC Customer Center ..... 510
▫ Chrysler Canada Inc. Customer Center ..... 510
▫ In Mexico Contact .................... 510
▫ Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or
Speech Impaired (TDD/TTY) ............ 511
▫ Service Contract ..................... 511
䡵 Warranty Information .................. 512
䡵 MOPAR威 Parts ....................... 512
䡵 Reporting Safety Defects ................ 512
▫ In The 50 United States And Washington,
D.C. .............................. 512
▫ In Canada ......................... 513
䡵 Publication Order Forms ................ 513
9
SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE FOR
YOUR VEHICLE
Prepare For The Appointment
If you’re having warranty work done, be sure to have the
right papers with you. Take your warranty folder. All
work to be performed may not be covered by the
warranty. Discuss additional charges with the service
manager. Keep a maintenance log of your vehicle’s
service history. This can often provide a clue to the
current problem.
Prepare A List
Make a written list of your vehicle’s problems or the
specific work you want done. If you’ve had an accident
or work done that is not on your maintenance log, let the
service advisor know.
Be Reasonable With Requests
If you list a number of items and you must have your
vehicle by the end of the day, discuss the situation with
the service advisor and list the items in order of priority.
At many authorized dealers, you may obtain a rental
vehicle at a minimal daily charge. If you need a rental, it
is advisable to make these arrangements when you call
for an appointment.
IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE
The manufacturer and its authorized dealers are vitally
interested in your satisfaction. We want you to be happy
with our products and services.
Warranty service must be done by an authorized dealer.
We strongly recommend that you take the vehicle to an
authorized dealer. They know your vehicle the best, and
are most concerned that you get prompt and high quality
service. The manufacturer’s authorized dealers have the
facilities, factory-trained technicians, special tools, and
the latest information to ensure the vehicle is fixed
correctly and in a timely manner.
9
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 509
This is why you should always talk to an authorized
dealer’s service manager first. Most matters can be re-
solved with this process.
•
If for some reason you are still not satisfied, talk to the
general manager or owner of the authorized dealer-
ship. They want to know if you need assistance.
•
If an authorized dealership is unable to resolve the
concern, you may contact the manufacturer’s customer
center.
Any communication to the manufacturer’s customer cen-
ter should include the following information:
•
Owner’s name and address
•
Owner’s telephone number (home and office)
•
Authorized dealership name
•
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
•
Vehicle delivery date and mileage
Chrysler Group LLC Customer Center
P.O. Box 21–8004
Auburn Hills, MI 48321–8004
Phone: (877) 426–5337
Chrysler Canada Inc. Customer Center
P.O. Box 1621
Windsor, Ontario N9A 4H6
Phone: (800) 465–2001 English / (800) 387–9983 French
In Mexico contact:
Av. Prolongacion Paseo de la Reforma, 1240
Sante Fe C.P. 05109
Mexico, D. F.
In Mexico City: 5081-7568
Outside Mexico City: 1-800-505-1300
510 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or Speech
Impaired (TDD/TTY)
To assist customers who have hearing difficulties, the
manufacturer has installed special TDD (Telecommuni-
cation Devices for the Deaf) equipment at its customer
center. Any hearing or speech impaired customer, who
has access to a TDD or a conventional teletypewriter
(TTY) in the United States, can communicate with the
manufacturer by dialing 1–800–380–CHRY.
Canadian residents with hearing difficulties that require
assistance can use the special needs relay service offered
by Bell Canada. For TTY teletypewriter users, dial 711
and for Voice callers, dial 1 800 855-0511 to connect with
a Bell Relay Service operator.
Service Contract
You may have purchased a service contract for a vehicle
to help protect you from the high cost of unexpected
repairs after the manufacturer’s New Vehicle Limited
Warranty expires. The manufacturer stands behind only
the manufacturer’s service contracts. If you purchased a
manufacturer’s service contract, you will receive Plan
Provisions and an Owner Identification Card in the mail
within three weeks of the vehicle delivery date. If you
have any questions about the service contract, call the
manufacturer’s Service Contract National Customer
Hotline at 1-800-521-9922 (Canadian residents, call (800)
465–2001 English / (800) 387–9983 French).
The manufacturer will not stand behind any service
contract that is not the manufacturer’s service contract. It
is not responsible for any service contract other than the
manufacturer’s service contract. If you purchased a ser-
vice contract that is not a manufacturer’s service contract,
and you require service after the manufacturer’s New
Vehicle Limited Warranty expires, please refer to the
contract documents, and contact the person listed in
those documents.
9
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 511
We appreciate that you have made a major investment
when you purchased the vehicle. An authorized dealer
has also made a major investment in facilities, tools, and
training to assure that you are absolutely delighted with
the ownership experience. You’ll be pleased with their
sincere efforts to resolve any warranty issues or related
concerns.
WARNING!
Engine exhaust, some of its constituents, and certain
vehicle components contain, or emit, chemicals
known to the State of California to cause cancer and
birth defects, or other reproductive harm. In addi-
tion, certain fluids contained in vehicles and certain
products of component wear contain, or emit, chemi-
cals known to the State of California to cause cancer
and birth defects, or other reproductive harm.
WARRANTY INFORMATION
See the Warranty Information Booklet, located on the
DVD, for the terms and provisions of Chrysler Group
LLC warranties applicable to this vehicle and market.
MOPAR姞 PARTS
MOPAR威 fluids, lubricants, parts, and accessories are
available from an authorized dealer. They are recom-
mended for your vehicle in order to help keep the vehicle
operating at its best.
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS
In the 50 United States and Washington, D.C.
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect that could
cause a crash or cause injury or death, you should
immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration (NHTSA) in addition to notifying the
manufacturer.
512 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an
investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in
a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy
campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in
individual problems between you, your authorized
dealer, and the manufacturer.
To contact NHTSA, you may either call the Auto Safety
Hotline toll free at 1–888–327–4236 (TTY: 1–800–424–
9153), or go to http://www.safercar.gov; or write to:
Administrator, NHTSA, 1200 New Jersey Avenue, SE.,
West Building, Washington, D.C. 20590. You can also
obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from
http://www.safercar.gov.
In Canada
If you believe that your vehicle has a safety defect, you
should contact the Customer Service Department imme-
diately. Canadian customers who wish to report a safety
defect to the Canadian government should contact Trans-
port Canada, Motor Vehicle Defect Investigations and
Recalls at 1-800-333-0510 or go to
http://www.tc.gc.ca/roadsafety/
PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS
To order the following manuals, you may use either the
website or the phone numbers listed below. Visa, Mas-
tercard, American Express, and Discover orders are ac-
cepted. If you prefer mailing your payment, please call
for an order form.
NOTE: A street address is required when ordering
manuals (no P.O. Boxes).
9
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 513
•
Service Manuals
These comprehensive Service Manuals provide the
information that students and professional technicians
need in diagnosing/troubleshooting, problem solving,
maintaining, servicing, and repairing Chrysler Group
LLC vehicles. A complete working knowledge of the
vehicle, system, and/or components is written in
straightforward language with illustrations, diagrams,
and charts.
•
Diagnostic Procedure Manuals
Diagnostic Procedure Manuals are filled with dia-
grams, charts and detailed illustrations. These practi-
cal manuals make it easy for students and technicians
to find and fix problems on computer-controlled ve-
hicle systems and features. They show exactly how to
find and correct problems the first time, using step-by-
step troubleshooting and drivability procedures,
proven diagnostic tests and a complete list of all tools
and equipment.
•
Owner’s Manuals
These Owner’s Manuals have been prepared with the
assistance of service and engineering specialists to
acquaint you with specific Chrysler Group LLC ve-
hicles. Included are starting, operating, emergency
and maintenance procedures as well as specifications,
capabilities and safety tips.
Call toll free at:
•
1–800–890–4038 (U.S.)
•
1–800–387–1143 (Canada)
Or
Visit us on the Worldwide Web at:
•
www.techauthority.com
514 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION UNIFORM
TIRE QUALITY GRADES
The following tire grading categories were established by
the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration. The
specific grade rating assigned by the tire’s manufacturer
in each category is shown on the sidewall of the tires on
your vehicle.
All passenger car tires must conform to Federal safety
requirements in addition to these grades.
Treadwear
The Treadwear grade is a comparative rating, based on
the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled
conditions on a specified government test course. For
example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and one-half
times as well on the government course as a tire graded
100. The relative performance of tires depends upon the
actual conditions of their use, however, and may depart
significantly from the norm due to variations in driving
habits, service practices, and differences in road charac-
teristics and climate.
Traction Grades
The Traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A, B,
and C. These grades represent the tire’s ability to stop on
wet pavement, as measured under controlled conditions
on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and
concrete. A tire marked C may have poor traction perfor-
mance.
WARNING!
The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on
straight-ahead braking traction tests, and does not
include acceleration, cornering, hydroplaning, or
peak traction characteristics.
9
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 515
Temperature Grades
The temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C,
representing the tire’s resistance to the generation of heat
and its ability to dissipate heat, when tested under
controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory
test wheel. Sustained high temperature can cause the
material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and
excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure. The
grade C corresponds to a level of performance, which all
passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor
Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B and A repre-
sent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test
wheel, than the minimum required by law.
WARNING!
The temperature grade for this tire is established for
a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded.
Excessive speed, under-inflation, or excessive load-
ing, either separately or in combination, can cause
heat buildup and possible tire failure.
516 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
INDEX
10
About Your Brakes .......................339
ABS (Anti-Lock Brake System) ............ 342,344
Adding Engine Coolant (Antifreeze) ..........460
Adding Fuel ........................... 393
Additives, Fuel .........................391
Air Cleaner, Engine (Engine Air Cleaner Filter) . . . 450
Air Conditioner Maintenance ...............453
Air Conditioning ........................ 296
Air Conditioning Controls ................. 296
Air Conditioning Filter ................. 306,454
Air Conditioning Refrigerant ............. 453,454
Air Conditioning System .............296,300,453
Air Conditioning, Operating Tips ............307
Air Filter .............................. 450
Air Pressure, Tires .......................367
Airbag ................................59
Airbag Deployment .......................73
Airbag Light .....................66,75,89,235
Airbag Maintenance ....................... 74
Airbag, Window (Side Curtain) ...............63
Alarm (Security Alarm) .................18,234
Alarm System (Security Alarm) ............... 18
Alarm, Panic ............................ 24
Alterations/Modifications, Vehicle .............8
Antenna, Satellite Radio ................265,290
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) ............ 342,344
Anti-Lock Warning Light ..................225
Anti-Theft Security Alarm (Theft Alarm) ........ 18
Anti-Theft System ....................... 234
Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) .............. 459,487
Disposal ...........................462
Appearance Care ........................ 472
Arming Theft System (Security Alarm) .........18
Assist, Hill Start ........................347
Assistance Towing .......................117
Auto Down Power Windows ................ 35
Auto Unlock, Doors ....................... 32
Automatic Dimming Mirror ................100
518 INDEX
Automatic Door Locks ................... 31,32
Automatic Headlights ....................159
Automatic Oil Change Indicator .......... 232,239
Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) ......... 300
Automatic Transaxle ......................316
Special Additives ..................... 466
Automatic Transmission .............317,466,467
Adding Fluid .................... 467,489
Fluid and Filter Changes ............466,467
Fluid Change .......................467
Fluid Level Check .................... 467
Fluid Type ...................... 466,489
Gear Ranges ........................317
Special Additives ..................... 466
Torque Converter ....................321
Auxiliary Electrical Outlet (Power Outlet) ......198
Auxiliary Power Outlet ...................198
Axle Fluid .............................489
Axle Lubrication (Axle Fluid) ............... 489
B-Pillar Location ........................ 362
Battery ............................... 451
Keyless Transmitter Replacement (RKE) ..... 25
Belts, Seat ............................44,89
Body Mechanism Lubrication ............... 454
Brake Assist System ......................346
Brake Control System, Electronic ............. 344
Brake Fluid ............................ 489
Brake System ........................... 464
Anti-Lock (ABS) .................. 342,344
Fluid Check ..................... 464,489
Master Cylinder .....................464
Parking ........................... 339
Warning Light .......................233
Brake, Parking .......................... 339
Brake/Transmission Interlock ............... 317
Brakes ............................... 464
Break-In Recommendations, New Vehicle ........ 87
Bulb Replacement ....................... 484
10
INDEX 519
Bulbs, Light ..........................91,484
Calibration, Compass .....................242
Capacities, Fluid ........................487
Caps, Filler
Fuel ..............................393
Oil (Engine) ........................449
Power Steering ...................... 339
Radiator (Coolant Pressure) .............461
Car Washes ............................ 473
Carbon Monoxide Warning ............... 88,392
Cargo (Vehicle Loading) ...................395
Cargo Area Cover .......................208
Cargo Area Features ......................204
Cargo Compartment ...................... 204
Light .............................164
Cargo Light ............................164
Cargo Load Floor ........................204
Cargo Tie-Downs ........................206
Cellular Phone ....................... 103,295
Certification Label .......................395
Changing A Flat Tire ..................... 423
Chart, Tire Sizing ........................ 358
Check Engine Light
(Malfunction Indicator Light) .............222,445
Checking Your Vehicle For Safety ............. 87
Checks, Safety ...........................87
Child Restraint .................... 77,78,82,84
Child Restraint Tether Anchors ............. 81,82
Child Safety Locks ........................ 33
Clean Air Gasoline .......................389
Cleaning
Windshield Wiper Blades ............... 455
Climate Control .........................295
Clock ...........................250,269,279
Coin Holder ...........................203
Cold Weather Operation ................... 314
Command-Trac Operation .................. 321
520 INDEX
Compact Disc (CD) Maintenance .............295
Compact Spare Tire ......................370
Compass .............................. 241
Compass Calibration .....................242
Compass Variance ....................... 243
Computer, Trip/Travel .................... 240
Console .............................. 203
Console, Floor ..........................203
Contract, Service ........................ 511
Coolant Pressure Cap (Radiator Cap) .......... 461
Cooling System .........................458
Adding Coolant (Antifreeze) ............. 460
Coolant Capacity ..................... 487
Coolant Level .................... 458,462
Disposal of Used Coolant ...............462
Drain, Flush, and Refill ................459
Inspection .......................... 462
Points to Remember ..................463
Pressure Cap ........................461
Selection of Coolant (Antifreeze) ....459,487,488
Corrosion Protection .....................472
Cruise Light ........................... 232
Cupholders ............................201
Customer Assistance ..................... 509
Data Recorder, Event ...................... 76
Daytime Running Lights ...................161
Dealer Service .......................... 447
Defroster, Rear Window ................... 211
Defroster, Windshield ................ 90,298,303
Delay (Intermittent) Wipers .................166
Diagnostic System, Onboard ................ 444
Dimmer Switch, Headlight ................. 162
Dipsticks
Oil (Engine) ........................448
Power Steering ...................... 339
Disabled Vehicle Towing ................... 436
10
INDEX 521
Disposal
Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) ............. 462
Engine Oil ......................... 450
Door Locks .............................29
Door Locks, Automatic .................... 31
Door Opener, Garage .....................183
Driving ............................... 333
Off-Pavement .......................333
Off-Road .......................... 333
On Hills ........................... 333
Through Flowing, Rising, or Shallow
Standing Water ......................333
When to Use Low Range ...............333
Electric Remote Mirrors ................... 101
Electrical Outlet, Auxiliary (Power Outlet) ......198
Electrical Power Outlets ...................198
Electronic Brake Control System .............344
Anti-Lock Brake System ................ 344
Brake Assist System ................... 346
Electronic Roll Mitigation ............... 347
Traction Control System ................345
Electronic Roll Mitigation (ERM) .............347
Electronic Speed Control (Cruise Control) ...... 171
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) ............. 352
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) .... 235
Emergency, In Case of
Hazard Warning Flasher ...............422
Jacking ............................423
Jump Starting ....................... 430
Overheating ........................ 422
Emission Control System Maintenance .........445
Engine ...............................443
Air Cleaner ......................... 450
Block Heater ........................ 315
Break-In Recommendations ..............87
Checking Oil Level ...................448
Compartment .......................443
522 INDEX
Coolant (Antifreeze) ................458,488
Cooling ........................... 458
Exhaust Gas Caution ................88,392
Fails to Start ........................314
Flooded, Starting ..................... 314
Fuel Requirements .................... 388
Jump Starting ....................... 430
Oil ......................... 448,487,488
Oil Change Interval .............232,239,448
Oil Filler Cap .......................449
Oil Filter ........................... 450
Oil Filter Disposal .................... 450
Oil Selection .....................449,487
Oil Synthetic ........................450
Overheating ........................ 422
Starting ...........................313
Temperature Gauge ................... 227
Engine Oil Viscosity ...................... 449
Engine Oil Viscosity Chart ................. 449
Enhanced Accident Response Feature .......... 73
Entry System, Illuminated .................. 20
Ethanol ............................... 389
Event Data Recorder ......................76
Exhaust Gas Caution ...................88,392
Exhaust System .......................88,456
Exterior Finish Care ...................... 473
Exterior Lights ..........................91
Fabric Care ............................475
Filters
Air Cleaner ......................... 450
Air Conditioning .................. 306,454
Engine Oil .......................450,488
Engine Oil Disposal ................... 450
Finish Care ............................ 473
Flash-To-Pass ........................... 162
10
INDEX 523
Flashers
Hazard Warning ..................... 422
Turn Signal ..............91,162,223,485,486
Flipper Glass, Liftgate .....................40
Flooded Engine Starting ................... 314
Floor Console ..........................203
Fluid Capacities ......................... 487
Fluid Leaks .............................91
Fluid Level Checks ....................468,469
Automatic Transmission ................466
Brake ............................. 464
Cooling System ......................458
Engine Oil ......................... 448
Power Steering ...................... 339
Fluid, Brake ...........................489
Fluids, Lubricants and Genuine Parts ..........488
Fog Light Service ........................ 485
Fog Lights ....................158,161,223,485
Folding Rear Seat ........................149
Four Wheel Drive
Shifting ...................321,324,327,330
Systems ........................321,327
Four Wheel Drive Operation ................321
Freeing A Stuck Vehicle ...................434
Front Axle (Differential) ...................469
Fuel ................................. 388
Additives .......................... 391
Clean Air .......................... 389
Ethanol ........................... 389
Filler Cap (Gas Cap) ..................393
Gasoline ...........................388
Gauge ............................220
Materials Added ..................... 391
Methanol ..........................389
Octane Rating ....................388,488
Requirements ....................... 388
Specifications ....................... 488
Tank Capacity .......................487
524 INDEX
Fuses ................................ 478
Garage Door Opener (HomeLink®) ...........183
Gas Cap (Fuel Filler Cap) ............ 393,394,444
Gas Gauge (Fuel Gauge) ...................220
Gasoline (Fuel) .........................388
Gasoline, Clean Air ...................... 389
Gasoline, Reformulated ...................389
Gauges
Coolant Temperature .................. 227
Fuel ..............................220
Odometer ..........................230
Speedometer ........................ 223
Tachometer .........................225
Gear Ranges ...........................317
Gear Select Lever Override .................435
General Information ...............17,26,133,388
General Maintenance ..................... 447
Glass Cleaning .......................... 476
Gross Axle Weight Rating ............... 395,398
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating ............. 395,397
GVWR ...............................395
Hands-Free Phone (Uconnect™) ............. 103
Hazard
Driving Through Flowing, Rising, or Shallow
Standing Water ......................333
Hazard Warning Flasher ................... 422
Head Restraints ......................... 145
Head Rests ............................ 145
Headlights ............................158
Automatic ......................... 159
Bulb Replacement ....................484
Cleaning ...........................476
Delay ............................. 160
High Beam/Low Beam Select Switch ......162
Lights On Reminder ..................161
On With Wipers ................... 160,170
10
INDEX 525
Passing ............................ 162
Replacing .......................... 484
Switch ............................ 158
Time Delay .........................160
Heated Mirrors ......................... 102
Heated Seats ...........................140
Heater ............................... 296
Heater, Engine Block ..................... 315
High Beam Indicator ..................... 223
High Beam/Low Beam Select (Dimmer) Switch . . 162
Hill Descent Control ..................... 350
Hill Descent Control Indicator ............226,350
Hill Start Assist .........................347
Hitches
Trailer Towing ....................... 402
Holder, Coin ........................... 203
Holder, Cup ........................... 201
HomeLink® (Garage Door Opener) Transmitter . . 183
Hood Release .......................... 156
Ignition ............................... 12
Key ...............................12
Ignition Key Removal .....................12
Illuminated Entry ........................ 20
Immobilizer (Sentry Key) ................... 14
Infant Restraint ........................77,78
Inflation Pressure Tires ....................367
Information Center, Vehicle .................235
Inside Rearview Mirror ....................99
Instrument Cluster .................... 219,220
Instrument Panel and Controls ..............218
Instrument Panel Cover ...................475
Instrument Panel Lens Cleaning ............. 477
Integrated Power Module (Fuses) ............478
Interior Appearance Care .................. 475
Interior Lighting ........................158
Intermittent Wipers (Delay Wipers) ...........166
Introduction ............................. 4
526 INDEX
Jack Location ...........................424
Jack Operation .......................423,426
Jacking Instructions ...................... 426
Jump Starting ..........................430
Key-In Reminder .........................14
Key, Programming ........................16
Key, Replacement ........................16
Key, Sentry (Immobilizer) ................... 14
Keyless Entry System ......................20
Keys ................................. 12
Lane Change and Turn Signals .............. 162
Lane Change Assist ...................... 162
Lap/Shoulder Belts .......................44
LATCH
(Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren) .....81,82
Latches ................................91
Hood ............................. 156
Lead Free Gasoline ...................... 388
Leaks, Fluid ............................ 91
Life of Tires ............................373
Liftgate ................................ 39
Liftgate Flipper Glass ......................40
Light Bulbs .......................... 91,484
Lights ..............................91,158
Airbag ...................... 66,75,89,235
Anti-Lock .......................... 225
Automatic Headlights .................159
Back-Up ...........................486
Battery Saver .......................164
Brake Assist Warning ..................356
Brake Warning ......................233
Bulb Replacement ....................484
Cargo ............................. 164
Cruise ............................232
Daytime Running .................... 161
Dimmer Switch, Headlight ........... 158,162
10
INDEX 527
Electronic Stability Program (ESP) Indicator . . 356
Engine Temperature Warning ............227
Exterior ............................ 91
Fog ......................... 161,223,485
Four-Wheel Drive Indicator . . 226,227,230,325,331
Hazard Warning Flasher ...............422
Headlight Switch ..................... 158
Headlights ...................... 158,484
Headlights On Reminder ............... 161
Headlights On With Wipers ..........160,170
High Beam ...................... 162,223
High Beam Indicator .................. 223
High Beam/Low Beam Select ............162
Hill Descent Control Indicator .........226,350
Illuminated Entry .....................20
Instrument Cluster ................. 158,220
Lights On Reminder ..................161
Low Fuel ..........................220
Malfunction Indicator (Check Engine) ......222
Oil Pressure ........................225
Park ..............................158
Passing ............................ 162
Rear Servicing ....................... 486
Rear Tail ........................... 486
Seat Belt Reminder ................... 232
Service ............................ 484
Service Engine Soon
(Malfunction Indicator) ................222
Side Marker ........................485
Tire Pressure Monitoring (TPMS) ....... 220,378
Tow/Haul Indicator .................. 226
Traction Control ..................... 356
Transfer Case .....................325,331
Turn Signal ..............91,158,162,485,486
Vanity Mirror ....................... 102
Voltage ............................224
Warning (Instrument Cluster Description) . . . 220
Load Floor, Cargo .......................204
528 INDEX
Loading Vehicle .........................395
Tires.............................. 362
Locks .................................29
Auto Unlock ......................... 32
Automatic Door ...................... 31
Child Protection ......................33
Door ..............................29
Power Door ......................... 30
Low Tire Pressure System ..................378
Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren
(LATCH) ............................ 81,82
Lubrication, Body .......................454
Luggage Carrier ......................... 212
Lumbar Support ........................144
Maintenance Free Battery ..................451
Maintenance Procedures ................... 447
Maintenance Schedule .................... 492
Maintenance, General .....................447
Maintenance, Sunroof ..................... 192
Malfunction Indicator Light (Check Engine) . . 222,445
Manual Transmission
Lubricant Selection ................... 489
Manual, Service .........................513
Marker Lights, Side ......................485
Master Cylinder (Brakes) .................. 464
Memory Feature (Memory Seat) ............. 151
Memory Seat ...........................151
Memory Seats and Radio .................. 151
Methanol .............................389
Mini-Trip Computer ......................240
Mirrors ................................99
Automatic Dimming ..................100
Electric Powered ..................... 101
Electric Remote ...................... 101
Heated ............................ 102
Outside ........................... 101
Rearview ...........................99
10
INDEX 529
Vanity ............................ 102
Modifications/Alterations, Vehicle .............8
Monitor, Tire Pressure System ...............378
Mopar Parts .........................446,512
MTBE/ETBE ........................... 389
Multi-Function Control Lever ............... 158
New Vehicle Break-In Period ................87
Occupant Restraints .......................41
Occupant Restraints (Sedan) ................. 63
Octane Rating, Gasoline (Fuel) ............388,488
Odometer
Trip .............................. 229
Off-Pavement Driving (Off-Road) ............333
Off-Road Driving (Off-Pavement) ............333
Oil Change Indicator ..................232,239
Oil Change Indicator, Reset .............. 232,239
Oil Filter, Change ........................450
Oil, Engine ......................... 448,488
Capacity ........................... 487
Change Interval ................ 232,239,448
Checking ..........................448
Dipstick ...........................448
Disposal ...........................450
Filter ..........................450,488
Filter Disposal .......................450
Identification Logo ................... 449
Materials Added to ................... 450
Recommendation ..................449,487
Synthetic .......................... 450
Viscosity ........................449,487
Onboard Diagnostic System .............. 444,445
Opener, Garage Door (HomeLink®) ........... 183
Operating Precautions ....................444
Operator Manual (Owner’s Manual) ............ 5
Outside Rearview Mirrors ..................101
Overdrive ..........................232,319
530 INDEX
Overdrive OFF Switch ....................319
Overheating, Engine ................... 228,422
Owner’s Manual (Operator Manual) .........5,513
Paint Care ............................. 472
Paint Damage ..........................472
Panic Alarm ............................ 24
Park Sense System, Rear ................... 175
Parking Brake ..........................339
Parking On Hill ......................... 339
Passing Light ...........................162
Personal Settings ........................ 244
Pets ..................................86
Pets, Transporting ........................ 86
Phone, Cellular .........................103
Phone, Hands-Free (Uconnect™) .............103
Placard, Tire and Loading Information ......... 362
Polishing and Waxing ..................... 473
Power
Door Locks ......................... 30
Mirrors ............................ 101
Seats ............................. 139
Steering ........................ 337,339
Sunroof ...........................190
Sunroof (Sky Slider) ................ 193,470
Windows ...........................35
Power Steering Fluid ..................... 489
Pregnant Women and Seat Belts ..............58
Preparation for Jacking .................... 426
Pretensioners
Seat Belts ........................... 50
Programmable Electronic Features ............ 244
Programming Transmitters
(Remote Keyless Entry) .................... 20
Radial Ply Tires .........................369
Radiator Cap (Coolant Pressure Cap) .......... 461
10
INDEX 531
Radio Operation ........................ 295
Rain Sensitive Wiper System ................168
Rear Axle (Differential) ....................469
Rear Park Sense System ................... 175
Rear Seat, Folding .......................149
Rear Window Defroster ................... 211
Rear Window Features ....................210
Rear Wiper/Washer ...................... 210
Rearview Mirrors ........................ 99
Reclining Front Seats ..................... 143
Recorder, Event Data ...................... 76
Recreational Towing ...................... 413
Shifting into Transfer Case Neutral (N) ..... 416
Shifting out of Transfer Case Neutral (N) ....418
Reformulated Gasoline ....................389
Refrigerant ............................454
Release, Hood ..........................156
Reminder, Lights On .....................161
Reminder, Seat Belt .......................56
Remote Control
Starting System .......................27
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) ................. 20
Remote Sound System (Radio) Controls ........293
Remote Starting System .................... 27
Replacement Bulbs .......................484
Replacement Keys ........................ 16
Replacement Parts .......................446
Replacement Tires ....................... 374
Reporting Safety Defects ...................512
Resetting Oil Change Indicator ........... 232,239
Restraint, Head ......................... 145
Restraints, Child ......................... 77
Restraints, Occupant ......................41
Retractable Cargo Area Cover ............... 208
Roll Over Warning ........................4
Roof
Sky Slider Power .................. 193,470
Roof Type Carrier ....................... 212
532 INDEX
Rotation, Tires .......................... 377
Safety Checks Inside Vehicle ................. 89
Safety Checks Outside Vehicle ...............91
Safety Defects, Reporting ..................512
Safety Information, Tire ................... 357
Safety Tips ............................. 87
Safety, Exhaust Gas ....................... 88
Satellite Radio Antenna ................. 265,290
Schedule, Maintenance .................... 492
Seat Belt Maintenance .................... 477
Seat Belt Reminder ....................... 56
Seat Belts ............................44,89
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Anchorage ...... 49
And Pregnant Women .................. 58
Child Restraint ..................... 77,84
Extender ...........................58
Front Seat ..........................44
Inspection .......................... 89
Pretensioners ........................50
Reminder .......................... 232
Shoulder Belt Anchorage ................49
Untwisting Procedure .................. 50
Seats .................................138
Adjustment ......................... 138
Easy Entry ......................... 154
Head Restraints ...................... 145
Heated ............................ 140
Height Adjustment ................... 139
Lumbar Support ..................... 144
Memory ........................... 151
Power ............................ 139
Rear Folding ........................149
Reclining .......................... 143
Seatback Release ..................... 149
Tilting ............................139
Security Alarm (Theft Alarm) .............18,234
Selec-Trac Operation ...................... 327
10
INDEX 533
Selection of Coolant (Antifreeze) ..........459,488
Selection of Oil .........................449
Sentry Key (Immobilizer) ................... 14
Sentry Key Programming ................... 16
Sentry Key Replacement ...................16
Service Assistance .......................509
Service Contract .........................511
Service Engine Soon Light
(Malfunction Indicator) ....................222
Service Manuals ........................ 513
Setting the Clock ..................250,269,279
Settings, Personal ........................244
Shift Lever Override ...................... 435
Shifting
Automatic Transmission ................317
Transfer Case ............... 321,324,327,330
Shoulder Belts ...........................44
Side View Mirror Adjustment ...............101
Side Window Demisters (Defrosters) .......... 306
Signals, Turn .................91,162,223,485,486
Sky Slider Power Roof .................193,470
Snow Chains (Tire Chains) ................. 375
Spare Tire ....................... 370,371,424
Spark Plugs ............................488
Specifications
Fuel (Gasoline) ......................488
Oil ............................ 449,488
Speed Control (Cruise Control) .............. 171
Speedometer ........................... 223
Starting .............................27,313
Cold Weather ....................... 314
Engine Block Heater .................. 315
Engine Fails to Start .................. 314
Remote ............................ 27
Starting and Operating .................... 313
Starting Procedures ...................... 313
534 INDEX
Steering
Power .......................... 337,339
Tilt Column ........................170
Wheel, Tilt .........................170
Steering Wheel Audio Controls ..............293
Steering Wheel Mounted Sound
System Controls .........................293
Storage ............................... 202
Storage Bin ............................ 202
Storage, Vehicle ......................... 305
Stuck, Freeing .......................... 434
Sun Roof .............................. 190
Sun Roof (Sky Slider Power) ............. 193,470
Sun Visor Extension ...................... 103
Sunroof Maintenance ..................... 192
Supplemental Restraint System - Airbag ........ 59
Synthetic Engine Oil ...................... 450
System, Remote Starting .................... 27
Tachometer ............................225
Temperature Control, Automatic (ATC) ........ 300
Temperature Gauge, Engine Coolant .......... 227
Tether Anchor, Child Restraint ...............81
Theft Alarm (Security Alarm) ................18
Theft System (Security Alarm) ...............18
Tie Down Hooks, Cargo ................... 206
Tilt Steering Column ..................... 170
Time Delay, Headlight .................... 160
Tip Start ..............................313
Tire and Loading Information Placard ......... 362
Tire Identification Number (TIN) ............. 360
Tire Markings ..........................357
Tire Safety Information ....................357
Tires ............................91,366,515
Air Pressure ........................367
Chains ............................ 375
Changing .......................... 423
Compact Spare ...................... 370
10
INDEX 535
General Information ..................366
High Speed .........................369
Inflation Pressures ....................367
Jacking ............................423
Life of Tires ........................373
Load Capacity .................... 362,363
Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) .........378
Pressure Warning Light ................220
Quality Grading ..................... 515
Radial ............................369
Replacement ........................ 374
Rotation ...........................377
Safety ............................. 357
Sizes ............................. 358
Spare Tire ..........................424
Spinning ...........................372
Tread Wear Indicators .................372
To Open Hood .......................... 156
Tongue Weight/Trailer Weight ..............405
Torque Converter Clutch ..................321
Tow/Haul Indicator Light ................. 226
Towing ............................ 397,436
24-Hour Towing Assistance ............. 117
Disabled Vehicle .....................436
Guide .............................403
Recreational ........................413
Weight ............................ 403
Towing Assistance ....................... 117
Traction Control ......................... 345
Trailer Towing .......................... 397
Cooling System Tips ..................412
Hitches ............................402
Minimum Requirements ................406
Trailer and Tongue Weight ..............405
Wiring ............................ 409
Trailer Towing Guide ..................... 403
Trailer Weight .......................... 403
536 INDEX
Transaxle ............................. 316
Automatic ......................... 316
Operation ..........................316
Transfer Case ........................... 468
Fluid ..........................468,489
Four-Wheel-Drive Operation ............321
Maintenance ........................468
Transmission ........................... 317
Automatic ......................... 317
Fluid .............................489
Maintenance ........................466
Transmitter Battery Service
(Remote Keyless Entry) .................... 25
Transmitter Programming
(Remote Keyless Entry) .................... 20
Transmitter, Garage Door Opener (HomeLink®) . . 183
Transmitter, Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) ........ 20
Tread Wear Indicators ....................372
Trip Odometer ..........................230
Trip Odometer Reset Button ................ 229
Turn Signals ................158,162,223,485,486
Uconnect™ (Hands-Free Phone) ............. 103
Uniform Tire Quality Grades ................ 515
Universal Transmitter .....................183
Unleaded Gasoline .......................388
Untwisting Procedure, Seat Belt ..............50
Upholstery Care ........................475
Vanity Mirrors .......................... 102
Variance, Compass ....................... 243
Vehicle Certification Label ................. 395
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) ............7
Vehicle Loading ......................363,395
Vehicle Modifications/Alterations .............. 8
Vehicle Storage ......................... 305
Vehicle Theft Alarm (Security Alarm) .......... 18
Viscosity, Engine Oil ...................... 449
10
INDEX 537
Voice Recognition System (VR) .............. 133
Warning Flasher, Hazard ..................422
Warning Lights
(Instrument Cluster Description) ............. 220
Warning, Roll Over ........................4
Warnings and Cautions ..................... 7
Warranty Information ..................... 512
Washers, Windshield ................ 164,167,455
Water
Driving Through .....................333
Waxing and Polishing ..................... 473
Wheel and Wheel Trim ....................474
Wheel and Wheel Trim Care ................ 474
Wind Buffeting .....................39,192,197
Window Fogging ........................ 306
Windows ..............................35
Power .............................35
Windshield Defroster ................ 90,298,303
Windshield Washers ................164,167,455
Fluid .............................455
Windshield Wiper Blades .................. 455
Windshield Wipers .......................164
Wiper Blade Replacement ..................455
Wiper, Delay ........................... 166
Wiper, Rear ............................ 210
Wipers, Intermittent ...................... 166
Wipers, Rain Sensitive .................... 168
538 INDEX
291680.ps 11JK72-126-AA Chrysler 1" gutter 05/14/2010 06:18:00
VEHICLES SOLD IN CANADA
With respect to any Vehicles Sold in Canada, the name
Chrysler Group LLC shall be deemed to be deleted and
the name Chrysler Canada Inc. used in substitution
therefore.
DRIVING AND ALCOHOL
Drunken driving is one of the most frequent causes of
accidents.
Your driving ability can be seriously impaired with blood
alcohol levels far below the legal minimum. If you are
drinking, don’t drive. Ride with a designated non-drinking
driver, call a cab, a friend, or use public transportation.
WARNING!
Driving after drinking can lead to an accident. Your
perceptions are less sharp, your reflexes are slower,
and your judgment is impaired when you have been
drinking. Never drink and then drive.
This manual illustrates and describes the operation of
features and equipment that are either standard or op-
tional on this vehicle. This manual may also include a
description of features and equipment that are no longer
available or were not ordered on this vehicle. Please
disregard any features and equipment described in this
manual that are not on this vehicle.
Chrysler Group LLC reserves the right to make changes
in design and specifications, and/or make additions to or
improvements to its products without imposing any
obligation upon itself to install them on products previ-
ously manufactured.
Copyright © 2010 Chrysler Group LLC
VEHICLES SOLD IN CANADA
With respect to any Vehicles Sold in Canada, the name
Chrysler Group LLC shall be deemed to be deleted and
the name Chrysler Canada Inc. used in substitution
therefore.
DRIVING AND ALCOHOL
Drunken driving is one of the most frequent causes of
accidents.
Your driving ability can be seriously impaired with blood
alcohol levels far below the legal minimum. If you are
drinking, don’t drive. Ride with a designated non-drinking
driver, call a cab, a friend, or use public transportation.
WARNING!
Driving after drinking can lead to an accident. Your
perceptions are less sharp, your reflexes are slower,
and your judgment is impaired when you have been
drinking. Never drink and then drive.
This manual illustrates and describes the operation of
features and equipment that are either standard or op-
tional on this vehicle. This manual may also include a
description of features and equipment that are no longer
available or were not ordered on this vehicle. Please
disregard any features and equipment described in this
manual that are not on this vehicle.
Chrysler Group LLC reserves the right to make changes
in design and specifications, and/or make additions to or
improvements to its products without imposing any
obligation upon itself to install them on products previ-
ously manufactured.
Copyright © 2010 Chrysler Group LLC
INSTALLATION OF RADIO TRANSMITTING
EQUIPMENT
Special design considerations are incorporated into this
vehicle’s electronic system to provide immunity to radio
frequency signals. Mobile two-way radios and telephone
equipment must be installed properly by trained person-
nel. The following must be observed during installation.
The positive power connection should be made directly
to the battery and fused as close to the battery as possible.
The negative power connection should be made to body
sheet metal adjacent to the negative battery connection.
This connection should not be fused.
Antennas for two-way radios should be mounted on the
roof or the rear area of the vehicle. Care should be used
in mounting antennas with magnet bases. Magnets may
affect the accuracy or operation of the compass on
vehicles so equipped.
The antenna cable should be as short as practical and
routed away from the vehicle wiring when possible. Use
only fully shielded coaxial cable.
Carefully match the antenna and cable to the radio to
ensure a low Standing Wave Ratio (SWR).
Mobile radio equipment with output power greater than
normal may require special precautions.
All installations should be checked for possible interfer-
ence between the communications equipment and the
vehicle’s electronic systems.
INSTALLATION OF RADIO TRANSMITTING
EQUIPMENT
Special design considerations are incorporated into this
vehicle’s electronic system to provide immunity to radio
frequency signals. Mobile two-way radios and telephone
equipment must be installed properly by trained person-
nel. The following must be observed during installation.
The positive power connection should be made directly
to the battery and fused as close to the battery as possible.
The negative power connection should be made to body
sheet metal adjacent to the negative battery connection.
This connection should not be fused.
Antennas for two-way radios should be mounted on the
roof or the rear area of the vehicle. Care should be used
in mounting antennas with magnet bases. Magnets may
affect the accuracy or operation of the compass on
vehicles so equipped.
The antenna cable should be as short as practical and
routed away from the vehicle wiring when possible. Use
only fully shielded coaxial cable.
Carefully match the antenna and cable to the radio to
ensure a low Standing Wave Ratio (SWR).
Mobile radio equipment with output power greater than
normal may require special precautions.
All installations should be checked for possible interfer-
ence between the communications equipment and the
vehicle’s electronic systems.
Chrysler Group LLC
11KK74-126-AG
Seventh Edition Printing in U.S.A.
11KK74-126-AH
Eighth Edition
